PROCEEDINGS

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

PHILADELPHIA

18 8 3.

committeie of publication:

Joseph Leidt, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.

Edward J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

John H. Redfield.

Editor : EDWARD J. NOLAN, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:

ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

S. W. Corner Nineteenth and Race Streets,

1884.

Academy of Natural Sciences op Philadelphia,

February 28, 1884.

I hereby'certify that printed copies of the Proceedings for 1883 have been
presented at the meetings of the Academy, as follows : —

Pages

9
25

41
57
73
89
105
121
137
153
169
185
201
238
265
281
297
318

24
40
5G

72

to
to
to
to
to 88
to 104
to 120
to 186
to 152
to 168
to 184
to 200
to 282
to 264
to 280
to 296
to 812
to 328

February

20,

1888.

March

18,

1883.

March

27,

1883.

April

10,

1888.

May

22,

1883.

June

5.

1883.

June

26,

1883.

July

24,

1888.

August

-7,

1888.

. August

14,

1888.

, September

18,

1883.

November

18,

1883.

December

11,

1883.

Janviary

8,

1884.

. January

15,

1884.

January

22,

1884.

January

29,

1884.

. February

12,

1884.

EDWAED J

r. NOLAN,

Recording Secretary

PHILADELPHIA:

W. P. KiLDARE. Printer.

LIST OP CONTRIBUTORS.

With reference to the several (irtieles contributed by each.

For Verbal Communications see General Index.

■Cope, E. D. Notes on the Geographical Distribution of Batrachia and

ReiJtilia in Western North America 10

On a new Extinct Genus of Sirenia from South Carolina 52

On the Mutual Relations of the Bunotherian Mammalia 77

On the Characters of the Skull in the Hadrosauridae 97

On some Vertebrata from the Permian of Illinois 108

On the Fishes of the Recent and Pliocene Lakes of the Western

Part of the Great Basin, and of the Idaho Pliocene Lake 134

Cresson, H. T. Aztec Music 86

Evermanu, B. W., and Seth E. Meek. A Review of the Species of

Genes found in American Waters 116

Heilprin, Angelo. Note on a Collection of Fossils from the Hamilton

( Devonian) Group of Pike Co., Pa 213

On the Value of the " Nearctic " as one of the Primary Zoological

Regions. Replies to Ci'iticisms by Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace

and Prof. Theodore Gill 266

Hoopes, Josiah. Pinus Koraiensis Sieb. and Zucc 114

Jordan, David S. Notes on American Fishes preserved in the

Museums at Berlin, London, Paris and Copenhagen 281

Leidy, Jos. Manayunkia speciosa 204

Lewis, Graceanna. On the Genus Hyliota 128

McCook, Rev, Henry C. The Occident Ant in Dakota 294

Martiudale, Isaac C. Obituary Notice of Charles F. Parker 260

Mitchell, Chas, L. Staining with Hsematoxylon 297

Mohr, Charles. On Quercus Duraudii Buckley 37

Osborn, Henry F. Preliminary Observations upon the Brain of

Amphiuma 177

Parker, Andrew J. Reproduction in Ami^hileptus fasciola 313

Rand, Theo. D. Note on the Geology of Chester Valley and Vicinity. 241
Randolph, N. A. A Study of the Distribution of Gluten within the

Wheat Grain 308

Sharp, Benj. On the Anatomy of Ancylus fluviatilis O. F. Miiller and

Ancylus lacustris Geoifroy 214

Stearns, R. E. C. Description of a new Hydrobiinoid Gasteropod from

the Mountain Lake of the Sierra Nevada, with Remarks on

Allied Species aud the Physiographical Features of said Region. 171
Townsend, Charles H. Notes on the Birds of Westmoreland County,

Penna 59

Willcox, Jos. Notes on Glacial Action in Northern New York and

Canada 257

IV^ right, Berlin H. A new Unio from Florida 58

/ ^ ^ -7- vf

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ACADEMYOF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF

PHILADELPHIA.

1883.

January 2, 1883.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty persons present.

The deaths of J.T. Reinhardt, of Copenhagen, a correspondent,
and of Edmund Draper, a member, were announced.

January 9.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-nine persons present.

A paper, entitled "Notes on the Geographical Distribution of
Batrachia and Reptilia of Western North America," by Edw. D.
Cope, was presented for publication.

January 16.

Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.

Twenty-one persons present.

A paper, entitled "On Quercus Durandii," by S. B. Buckley,
was presented for publication.

The following was ordered to be printed :—

3

10 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

NOTES ON THE GEOGRAPHICAL DISTRIBUTION OF BATRACHIA AND
REFTILIA IN WESTERN NORTH AMERICA.

BY E. D. COPE.

The following notes are based on collections made by myself
and my assistants at various points in the Rocky Mountain and
Pacific regions during the last ten years. They describe the range
of various species of our terrestrial cold-blooded vertebrata, and
contribute to the final definition of the zoological provinces and
districts of the continent.

1. Lake Valley, New Mexico.

This locality is at the western border of Dofiana County, twenty
miles N. E. of Fort Cummings. It is in the foot-hills of the
Mimbres or Negretta range. The region is rather arid, springs
not being numerous ; but during July and August there are frequent
rains. Yegetation is abundant in the form of grass and herbaceous
plants and shrubs.

Scaphiopus sp. Young.
Rana halecina Kalm.
Phrynosoma cornutum Harl.
Full of eggs in June.

Phrynosoma modestum Gird.

Yery abundant in August ; not seen during two days' visit in
June.

Ctotaphytus collaris Say. Abundant.
TIta schotti Baird.

There is but one median smaller row of dorsal scales, so that
the single specimen approaches the U. nigricauda. Specimens of
this genus are abundant.

Sceloporus

A large species seen.

Sceloporus.

A small species seen.

Holbrookia maoulata B. and G. Aljundanf,

Yar. Jiavilenta, differs from the typical form in having larger
prenasal scales separated by only two flat scales in front instead of
four tubercular ones, and in having only four flat scales between the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 11

nostrils above instead of six tubercular ones, and in having the
scales of the front flatter. The spots are obscure or entirely
wanting ; when present they are more numerous than in the var.
maculata^ there being eight between axilla and groin instead of
six. The sides and dorso-lateral regions are thickly marked with
small yellow spots. Two specimens.

Cnemidophorus sexlineatus L.
Very abundant.

Stenostoma dulce Bd. and (Jird.
One specimen.

Bascanium testaceum Say.

Eutaenia cyrtopsis Kena.

Eutaenia ornata B. and 6.

Crotalus soutulatus Kenn. Not rare.

Cro talus confiuentus Say, var. pulverulentus Cope.

I propose this name for a well-marked variety of rattlesnake,
which is abundant in the region of Lake Valley, especially on the
grassy plains. In order to determine its relations to the species
to which I refer it, I instituted a comparison with the allied forms
represented in my collection. These are : Two specimens from
Fort Benton, Montana ; two from Central Oregon ; two from
Eastern California ; one from Socorro, New Mexico ; one fi'om
Fort Wingate, New Mexico ; two from Lake Valley, New Mexico,
and one from Haskell County, Texas. These represent a wide
range in latitude, and are likely to give the greatest range of
variation. The comparison indicates three varieties, defined as
follows : —

Cephalic scales larger ; four rows between superciliary plates ;
four rows below orbit; dorsal spots and cephalic bands light-
edged ; few posterior cross-bands ; confiuentus.

Cephalic scales intermediate ; six rows between superciliaries ;
three rows below orbit (probably sometimes four) ; dorsal spots
square, with the head-bands, not light-edged; posterior cross-bands
more numerous ; colors dotted with brown specks; pulverulentus^

Cephalic scales smallest; eight rows between superciliaries; four
rows below orbit ; dorsal spots and head-bands light-edged or not ;
numerous posterior cross-bands ; lucifer.

The var. pulverulentus^ at first sight, resembles the Ci'otalus
mitchilli, having much the same coloration, but the head-scales and

12 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

plates are quite different. It gives out a powerful musky odor
when excited, which I have not noticed in the typical form of the
species. It is quite probable that it is to this variet}^ that
the specimens from Arizona should be referred, which I have
heretofore placed under C. lucifer} Not having access to the
specimens at this time, I cannot determine this point positively.
Of those above enumerated, the specimens from Fort Benton, Fort
Wingate, from Socorro, and from Texas, belong to the typical
G. confluenkis. The others are the C c. lucifer.
Crotalus molossus B. and IJ.

I killed a fine specimen of this species, which I discovered in
the act of springing through a bush. When I struck it, it was
suspended over a branch, looking at me. It was heavy in its
movements, except at the moment of leaping.

2. Socorro, New Mexico.

The collection from this region was made by Prof. Frank Snow,
of the University of Kansas, at Lawrence. I here express my
indebtedness to Prof. Snow for the opportunity of studying it.
Phrynosoma modestum Uirard.
Phrynosoma cornutum Harl.
Phrynosoma douglassi Bell.
Crotaphytus collaris Say.
Holbrookia texan* Troscb.
Holbrookia maculata B. and G.
Sceloporus poinsettii B. and G.
Uta stansburiana B. and G.
Cnemidopborus sexlineatus L.
Diadophis regalia Bd. and GirJ.

The first time this rare species has been found within the limits
of the United States. The single specimen obtained differs from
the typical one in having eight superior labials, with the eye
above the fourth and fifth. As the preorbital labials are very
short, variation to seven in all may be anticipated, as is found in
the type. This specimen is smaller than the one from Sononi
originally described.
Basoanium constrictor L.
Eutaenia marciana B. and (i.

The common species of the Rio Grande valley.

* Proceedings Philada. Academy, 1866, 307.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 13

Crotalus confluentus Say.

Typical variety from near tlie southern end of the Socorro
Mountain, five miles from Socorro.
Crotalus lepidus Kennicott.

Prof. Snow was fortunate enough to obtain the first entire
specimen of this species, it having been described by Kennicott
from two heads. We are thus made acquainted with the most
peculiar of the North American rattlesnakes. I proposed for it
the genus Haploaspis on account of the undivided nasal plates of
the typical specimens. In the present specimen, that plate is
divided below the nostril. It is therefore probable that this
generic name should be abandoned.

Mr. Kennicott has well described the scutellation of the head.
It may be summarized here by saying that the top of the muzzle
is covered by eight smooth scuta ; that the rostral plate is rather
low, and is in contact with the prenasal ; that there are two pre-
oculars and two loreals ; and that but two scales separate the
orbit from the superior labial scuta. Of the latter there are
twelve. Occipital scales smooth. Scales of bod}^ in twenty-three
rows, the two external on each side smooth. Urosteges, 153;
gastrosteges, 2t. The rattle consists of seven segments and a
button, and narrows gradually towards the extremity.

The color above is a greenish gv&^y, which is crossed by nine-
teen jet-black rings on the bod}', which do not extend on the
abdomen. These rings are two and a half scales wide on the
middle line, and narrow downwards on each side so as to cover
but one scale in width. The scales which border the annuli are
half black and half green, the effect of which is to give the edge
of the ring a turreted outline. The edges of the ground-color
are paler than any other part of the scales, thus throwing the
black into greater relief. A large black spot, shaped like two
hearts side by side, with the apices posterior, marks the nape;
and^ there is an irregular small black spot on each side of the
occiput. Some black specks between the orbits. No other marks
on the head. Near the middle of the gray spaces of the body,
some of the scales of many of the rows have black tips. The
tail is light brown above, and has a basal broad black, and two
other narrow brown annuli. Below dirty white, with closely
placed shades of brown.

14 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.

Total length, m. '555 ; to constriction of neck, '02*7 ; length of
tail, -074 ; do. without rattle, -026.

This is one of the smallest species of Crotalus, a,nd is one of the
most handsomely colored. Its coloration is entirely unique in the
genus. The scutellation of the muzzle places it between the two
sections of the genus, typified respectively by C. horridus and
G. durissus.

The specimen was captured on the summit of the Magdalena
Mountains, which are northwest from Socorro twenty miles.

3. St. Thomas, Nevada.

This locality is on the Virgen River, in southeastern Nevada,
nearly in the latitude of the southern boundary of Utah. The
collection now referred to was made by Dr. Edward Palmer and
sent by him to the Smithsonian Institution. Through Professor
Baird, the distinguished Secretary, it was referred to me for
identification.

Bafo lentiginosus frontosus Cope.

This is the toad of the Great Basin, representing the B. colum-
biensis of more northern regions.
Crotaphytus wislizeni B. and G.
Cnemidophorus tessellatus Say.
Ophibolus getulus boyli B. and G.

The most northern locality for this species in the Great Basin.
It has been previously obtained by Palmer and Coues, near
Prescott, Arizona.

Phimothyra grahamiae B. and G.

A variety with the dorsal bands nearly obsolete, and separated
by three rows of dorsal scales on all parts of the body. Two
preoculars on one side and three en the other. The most northern
locality for this species.

4. Santa Fe, New Mexico.

Amblystoma mavortium Baird.
Not uncommon.

Spea hammondii Baird.

Abundant in July and August, when it deposits its eggs in the
pools of rain-water. It is very nois}' at such times, and the open
lots in the city of Santa F^ resound with its cries. They are much
like those of the Scaphiopus holbrookii.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 15

The range of this species is extensive. It was originallj' obtained
near Redding in Northern California. My friend, James S. Lip-
pincott, has sent it to me from the extreme south of California,
San Diego. The Smithsonian Institution has a slightly differen-
tiated variety from Chihuahua ; and a specimen from my friend
Dr. Duges, from Guanajuato, Mexico, though rather young, is
apparently the same. I suspect that the Scaphiopus dugesi Brocchi
from that locality is the same species.

This species is much like the Scaphiopus intermontanus described
further on. It is always smaller, and the middle pair of light dorsal
bands is nearly always wanting. It is still more different from the
S. varius, which has the vomerine teeth entirely posterior to the
nares, banded upper lip and marbled back.

5. San Francisco Mountains, Utah.

Lizards are very abundant in this region, especially in the Wah
Wall Valley, on the west side of the range,

Phrynosoma platyrMnum Gird.
Very abundant.

Crotaphytus wislizeni Bd. and (Jird.
Very abundant.

Crotaphytus collaris Say.
Very common.

Uta stansburiana Bd. and Gird,
Abundant.

Secloporus smaragdinus Cope,
Not rare.

Scelopocus consobrinus B. and G,
Cnemidopborus sp.

Many seen but not caught.

.J 6. Provo and Salt Lake City, Utah.

Bufo lentiginosus frontosus Cope.
Abundant near Salt Lake City.

Scapbiopus intermontanus sp. nov.

I took a specimen of this species within the limits of Salt Lake
City, and subsequently obtained three or four specimens from
Pyramid Lake, Nevada. It resembles the Spea hammondi more
than it does any other species. The frontoparietal bones, though

16 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

ossified, are not roughened as in the other species of Scaphiopiis.
It is nearest the S. varius (from near San Antonio, Texas). In
that species the vomerine teeth are entirely posterior to the internal
nares ; in this one 'they are between the posterior borders of the
same. The lips are not cross-barred as in the S. varius ; and the
superior region has two pale lines on each side. In S. varius these
lines are replaced by a coarse marbling. As compared with Spea
hammondi, this frog differs in its larger size, lighter colors, and
the presence of the superior pair of light lines.

It represents the S. hammondi in more noi'thern regions, and
the complete cranial ossification and larger size mark it as a more
fully developed form.

Rana halecina Kalm. From Provo.
Eana pretiosa B. & G.

A variety without a trace of dorso-lateral folds, and of a uniform
dusky color above and on the sides. Lip not striped. The pos-
terior part of the abdomen and the inferior face of the thighs are
salmon-red. Skin smooth ; diameter of membranum tympani
three-fifths that of the eye. Salt Lake City. This is the most
southern locality of this species known.

Sceloporus consobrinus B. & G. Provo.

7. Atlanta, Idaho.

Atlanta is a small town situated on the headwaters of the
South Boise River, on the southern drainage of the Sawtooth
Mountain Range. The valley is quite elevated, and is shut in by
granitic mountains ; water and vegetation are abundant ; and the
snow lies on the ground late in the spring. During a short visit
there in 1882, 1 obtained the following species :

Amblystoma epixanthum sp. nov.

Nearly related to Amblystoma mac7'odactylum Baird,and to be
placed next to that species in an}' synopsis of the genus.^ Costal
folds twelve. No canthus rostralis. Upper jaw overlapping
lower. Tail strongl}^ compressed, as long as head and body to
groin. Head wide-oval ; its greatest width one-fourth its total
length to the groin. Digits all rather short; four phalanges in

1 Proc. Acad. Phila., 1867, p. 171.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. IT

fourth posterior digit. Internal nares as widely separated as
the external. Eye-fissure one-half width between the anterior
canthus. Median dental series presenting an angle forwards.
Tongue large, deeplj^ plicate. Length, m. -083 ; length to axilla,
•017; to groin, -040; length of anterior limb, '012; of anterior
foot, '004 ; of hind limb, '014 ; of posterior foot, -0065.

Sides of bod}^ and tail, and superior surfaces of limbs, shining
black. Dorsal region to end of tail and muzzle, gamboge yellow.
The yellow expands on the head, and forms two cross-bands on
the upper surfoces of each of the limbs. The black of the sides
is occasionally interrupted by the yellow spots irregularly placed.
Below, dilute black, dusted with minute white speckles. The
structural differences between this and the A. macrodactylwni
are not many, but are well marked. They are : 1. The greater
width of the head, which enters the length (without the tail) five
times in the latter, and four times in the A. epixanthum ; and
is also seen in the greater interorbital width. 2. In the short
toes, which are very much longer in the A. macrodactylum. In
color, this species is the more brilliant ; the coast species being
described as brown, with graj' dorsal stripes, instead of black,
with yellow dorsal stripes. In it the limbs are not banded, and
the belly is uniformly pale, contrary to what holds in the present
species, which is the most handsome of the genus. I obtained
four specimens of this salamander, under logs, in a swamp near
the head of the South Boise River, on the south side of the
Sawtooth Mountain Range, Idaho.

Bufo columbiensis Bd. and Gird.

Abundant. I also obtained it at Bellevue on the Wood River,
about one hundred miles southeast of Atlanta.

Bascanium vetustum Bd. and Gird.
Eutaenia sirtalis Linn.

Tiiese 'are all, except the last, species characteristic of the
northern fauna of Washington Territory. The Biifo columbiensis
ranges to the headwaters of the Missouri.

8. Mouth of Brtjneau River, Idaho.

This locality is on Snake River, which cuts through the great
lava outflow of southern Idaho and Oregon. The reptiles are

18 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

different from those of Atlanta, and are those of the great basin

of Utah, I am indebted to Mr. J. L.Wortman for these specimens.

Fhrynosoma platyrhinum Gird.

Crotaphytus collaris Say.

Crotaphytus wislizeni B. and 6.

Uta stansburiana B. and G.

Sceloporus smaragdinus Cope.

Pityophis catenifer Blainv.

Bascanium vetustain B. and G.

The head is a little longer than in a specimen from central
Oregon, and the muzzle is less, conical. The fifth superior labial
just reaches the inferior postorbital.

9. From Reno to Pyramid Lake, Nevada.

The road from Reno to the southern extremity of Surprise
Valley, California, passes through an arid and forbidding country.
The rocks are entirely basaltic, and frequently present a rugged
foundation for the road. The vegetation consists of Artemisia,
and where alkali abounds, of Sarcobatus. North of Pyramid
Lake, the dry alkaline flats once covered by the Alkali Lake, have
a wide extent. During the hot weather of July, 1882, the region
swarmed with lizards, and rattlesnakes were numerous. The
greatest number of both was met with from Pyramid Lake north-
wards for twenty miles.

Bafo columbiensis Bd. and Gird. Pyramid Lake.
Scaphiopus intermoutanus Cope.

With the preceding species in a pond near the shore of Pyramid
Lake. Like other allied species, it was very noisy, almost obscu-
ring the voice of the less vociferous Bufo.
Fhrynosoma platyrhinum Gird.

Very abundant.
Crotaphytus collaris Say.
Crotaphytus wislizeni B. and G. ^

More abundant than the G. collaris.
Holbrookia sp.

A fine species was seen north of Pyramid Lake, but it was so
swift that I did not succeed in catching a specimen. It resembles
the H. texana, and may be an undescribed species.
Sceloporus smaragdinus Cope.

A variety with one additional row of small supraorbital scales,
makino; six rows in all.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 19

Cnemidophorus tessellatus Say. Abundant.

Bascanium pp. Young.

Crotalus confluentus lucifer B. .and G. Cope emend, supra, p. 11.

Two specimens from Buffalo Canyon, north of Pyramid Lake.
In one of the specimens the dorsal spots are first darker, then
lighter-bordered, and there are twenty-three rows of scales on the
body. In the other there are twenty-five rows of scales, and the
spots have neithfr dark nor pale borders, but have pale scales
scattered through them, and they have a more transverse form.

10. The Lakes of South and West Central Oregon.

This region possesses mucli zoological intei^est from the position
which it occupies as the border-land between the faunae of the
Pacific slope and that of the great interior basin. It is here that
we find the transition between the sage-brush (Artemisia) desert
and the forest-covered Sierra Nevada Mountains and valleys.
Here also we have the transition between the almost fresh lakes
near the mountains, to the intensely alkaline ones east of them.
An especial interest attaches to the lake faunae ; since we find in
them the means of determining the characters of the fossils found
in the remains of pliocene and post-pliocene lakes of the Oregon
desert. This part of the subject will be more fully considered in
an essay on the fishes of these lakes, now in course of preparation.

The routes on which the species of the list below given, were
collected, ,are as follows : Along the east shore of the Great
Klamath Lake to its northern extremity. From the eastern side
of the lake northeastward to Silver Lake. This was part of my
expedition of 1879. In 1882, I passed along the three southern
Warner^Lakes, and then crossed southwest to Goose Lake. Thence
I traveled north to Summer Lake, crossing the Chewaucan River,
which flows into Abert's Lake. Then north to Silver Lake, con-
necting with my route of 1879, After that, south to Goose Lake,
passing along its entire eastern shore.

Bufo columbiensis Bd. and Gird.

Abundant throughout the entire region. It is especially numer-
ous at Klamath Lake, where it covers the basaltic blocks which
lie partially in the water, concealed by the Typhse, which grow
from the bottom. They accumulate there in large piles, sometimes
as large as a bushel-measure, and afford abundant food for the
UiUaenise, which are scarcely less abundant. One specimen of

20 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

this toad was as large as the average Bufo marinus of Brazil,
and a specimen seen at Warner's Lake was but little smaller.

Hyla regilla B. and G.

Abundant at Silver Lake, at Warner's Lake, Goose Lake and
at Fort Bidwell, twenty miles east of Goose Lake, in California,
I found numbers of what I suppose to be a variety of this species.
It is little over half as large in linear dimensions, and the skin is
more distinctly tubercular above. Some of those from Goose
Lake are more spotted ; those from Fort Bidwell are nearly
uniform golden-yellow and green. This species lives in swamps
and on the edge of water, representing in this region the Acris
and Ghorojyhilus of the east.

Kana pretiosa Bd. and Gird.

This is the characteristic Rana of the northwestern interior,
being accompanied hy Bufo columbiensis and Bascanium vetustum.
In life the posterior part of the abdomen, with the inferior faces of
the thighs, are of a bright salmon-red. I obtained it the entire
length of the valley of the Warner Lakes, but not at Fort Bidwell.
I have found it to range as far as the eastern foot of the Rocky
Mountains in Montana ;^ and the specimens assigned by me- to
Rana septentrionalis, from the Yellowstone Basin, may be the
variety described above from Salt Lake City. I do not now have
them before me for decision. Specimens of this species are in
the National Museum, from Puget's Sound (Dr. Kennerly. No.
5915 a) and from " Camp Moryie " (Dr. Kennerly, No. 5973). The
first-named specimens are accompanied by the R. temporaria
aurora. It habits are aquatic.

Phrynosoma douglassi Bell. Yar.

On the elevated land which represents the Sierra Nevada Range,
between Warner's Lake and Goose Lake, in the basaltic region,
near the former, I found a peculiar variety of this species. The
horns are even more rudimental than in the usual form, but are
all represented. The prominent scales of the back are smaller
and less prominent. In some of the specirpens the head is shorter
relatively to the body, The color is an ironi'ust-brown, with
darker lateral spots, each with a small posterior yellow border.

' American Naturalist, 1879, p. 485.

^ Annual Report U, S. Geol, Sqrvey Terrs., 1871, p. 469,

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21

Individuals are abundant ; some of tliose taken are full of eggs.
All are much smaller than the true P. douglassi.

Uta stansburiana B. and G.

Abundant on the crags of basalt on the sides of Warner's
Yalley. It is also common at Summer Lake, which is the most
northern locality for the species and genus.

Sceloporas graciosus B. and G.

This very pretty species extends as far north as Summer Lake,
and is quite abundant.

Sceloporas smaragdinus Cope.

Common as far north as Summer Lake, A specimen taken
there has large torquoise-blue spots behind each brown cross-bar,
on each side of the dorsal region.

Charina plumbea Bd. and Gird.

I found a single specimen of this curious snake in the road
along the west side of Summer Lake. Although living, its
muscles were alternatel}' contracted in such a way as to give it the
appearance of a knotted root. It was very tame, allowing itself
to be handled without offering resistance. In life the inferior
surfaces are of a rich yellow.

Pityophis mexicanus bellona B. and G.
From Summer Lake.

Bascanium vetustum \i. and G.

Common in Warner's Valley, at Summer Lake and at Klamath
Lake.
Eutaenia pickeringii B. and G.

Yery common everywhere near water, in all parts of the Lake
countr3\

Eutsenia sirtalis sirtalis Linn.

This species accompanies the preceding at Warner's third Lake,
at Summer Lake and at Goose Lake, and retains its distinctive
features. The specimens seen at Goose Lake have the bands
brighter yellow than usual, and are verj' pugnacious. They
preferred fighting to escaping, and bit furiously.

Eutsenia sirtalis elegans B. and G.

Abundant. In young specimens the dorsal spots are distinct.

Eu taenia biscutata sp. nov.

This is one of the best defined species of the genus. I have
onl}^ two specimens, which agree in the following characters.

22 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

They differ in the number of rows of scales, however, one having
twenty4hree and the other twenty-two. All the rows of scales
keeled, the median ones very strongly. Labials eight, the eye
i-esting on the fourth and fifth. Two preoculars ; three post-
oculars. The muzzle is rather short, the frontal plate exceeding
in length the region anterior to it, and equaling the common
suture of the parietal scuta. Nasals rather short ; loreal as long
as high ; inferior preocular nearly square ; superior preocular not
reaching frontal. Superior labials all truncate above and none of
them elevated, the sixth touching the inferior postorbital. Tem-
l)orals, 1 • 2 • 3 ; the anterior are rather large. Pairs of geneials
subequal. Gastrosteges, 156 ; urosteges, 19.

Color everj'^where black, except on the chin and throat, and on
the inferior side of the tail. The former was reddish in life.
There are very faint traces of stripes on the third and fourth, and
on the median dorsal rows of scales. No traces of spots on the
parietal scuta.

Total length, m. 0-265; length to canthus of mouth (axial),
•012; length of tail, -062.

This species is one of the best characterized of the genus. Its
leading peculiarities are : first, the two preocular scuta; second,
its twenty-three rows of scales. In both respects it is unique in
the genus. Its color is characteristic. Its place is nearest the
E. radix B. and G., with which it agrees in its rather robust
proportions, and the position of the lateral stripe.

This species is not uncommon in the swamp vegetation on the
borders of the lake. The specimens I took displayed little
activity.

Crotalus confluentus lucifer B. and G.

This species is abundant at Warner's second Lake, and I took
one at Silver Lake. The specimens are identical with those from
near Pyramid Lake, Nevada.

11. The WiLLAMET Valley, Oregon.

The fauna of this valley is that of western Oregon, and may
be expected to differ from that of central and eastern Oregon.
The climate of the Willamet Valley is very wet, and the soil is
densely covered with forests. This is a state of things almost
exactly the reverse of what obtains in central Oregon. Appro-
priately we have numerous species of salamanders and fewer

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 23

lizards than in the latter region. This collection was made by
my friend, Professor O. B. Johnson, at that time residing at Salem.
The specimens were obtained at various points between that cit}'
and Portland, north of it.

Amblystoma tenebrosum Bd.

Amblystoma maorodactylum Bd.

Plethodon intermedias Bd.

Cynops torosus Esch.

Bufo halophilus B. and G.

Hyla regilla B. and Q.

Eumeces skiltonianus Bd.

Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Blv.

Sceloporus undulatus thayeri B. and G.

Fhrynosoma douglassi Bell.

Charina plumbea B. and G.

Diadophis punctatus pulchellus B. and G.

Bascanium vetustum B. and G.

Eutaenia leptocephala B. and G.

Of three specimens, two exhibit only seventeen rows of scales.
These probably represent the supposed species E, cooperi^ which
is therefore not distinct.

Euteenia coucinna Hallow.

I took a specimen of this beautiful snake at Eugene City, south
of Salem. Not only the lateral vertical bars, but the muzzle, lips
and gular region are a brilliant red,

12. Northern California.

The species referred to in this list were found near the United
States feh-hatching establishment on the McCloud River, in
Shasta County. I desire here to expi'ess my indebtedness to
Mr. Livingston Stone, superintendent of the hatching station, for
the hospitality which he extended to me at the time of my visit
there.^

Amblystoma (?) tenebrosum B. and G.

A large siredon from a small tributary of the McCloud is probably
this species. It has peculiarities of the branchial structure, and
I describe it by comparison with those found in other genera of
American salamanders. These are mostly derived from specimens
placed in my hands by the Smithsonian Institution, to which my
acknowledgments are due. The coloration which appears in the

24 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

larger larvae of the present collection , approaches nearest that of
the Aniblystoma tenebroswni. These animals were abundant in the
small stream I examined, and swam with great rapidity, darting
about and hiding themselves among the fallen leaves that covered
the bottom.

I. Processes with two rows of rami :
Rami with many thread-like fimbriae ; Siren.

II. Processes with one — an outer — row of rami ;
processes horizontal.
A rudimental inner row of rami ; fimbriae thread-like ; Proteus.
III. No principal rami ;
A. Processes compressed ; fimbriae dependent from
lower edge ;
Fimbriae thread-like, extending on both outer and inner face of
process ; Necturua.

Fimbriae flat, long, chiefly confined to the lower margin of process ;
Larvae of Spelerpes ruber; S. Mlineatus, and Gyrinophilus
porphyriticus.
Fimbriae few, subclavate ; Plethodon cinereus.

A A. Processes long, narrow ; bearing fimbriae only
on the side next the body ;
Fimbriae simple, fiat, sub-equal ; Amblystoma.

AAA. No processes nor rami ; fimbriae on the vertical
septa.
Fimbriae in numerous rows on the edge of the septa; slender,
unbranched ; Larva of Amblystoma tenebrosum.

AAAA. Processes vertical septa, with rami on the
anterior edge ;
Rami bearing flat, thread-like fimbriae, which arise from the pro-
cesses posteriori}' and are often divided. Larva from Simiah-
moo, Washington Terr.

Plethodon ieoanus sp. nov.

This salamander resembles the Plethodon glulinosvs in various
respects, especially in coloration. It has, however, a compi'essed
tail like the P. intermedius, and short series of vomerine teeth.

The vomerine series are straight, and do not quite meet on the
middle line. They are entirely behind the nares, and do not extend
exterior to them. The parasphenoid patches are united into one,
and are well separated from the vomerines.

Form rather stout, and the tail short, equaling (from vent) the

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

25

length of the body (with vent) to the gular fold. Costal folds 13.
Head a longitudinal oval, with rather narrowed, and not truncate
muzzle ; its length (to occiput) contained three and two-third
times in length from muzzle to groin.

Limbs short ; when pressed along the side they are separated
by three intercostal spaces. The digits are short, and the internal
ones are rudimental.

The color is black everywhere, and the superior surfaces are
dusted Qver with minute light specks.

Measurements.

Total length,

Length from muzzle to axilla,
Length from muzzle to groin.
Width of head at canthus oris,
Length of anterior limb,
Length of anterior foot,
Length of posterior limb.
Length of posterior foot.

M.

•053

•0105

•02T5

•006

•006

•002

•0015

•0032

This species is to be compared with the Plethodon intermedius
of western Oregon. It is shorter and more robust in form, having
only thirteen costal plicae instead of fifteen.' The color is verj'-
different.

This species is named from the aboriginal name leka, of the
grand peak of northern California, Mount Shasta. From the
same name the town of Yreka derives its name. So I am informed
by Judge Roseborough of that place, to whom I am under great
obligations for many facilities and much information.

Cynops torosus Esch. Diemi/ct.i/ln'i tDi-nxus Cope, Cheek List, Batr. Rejit., N. Amer.

Bufo halophilus Bd. and (4iid.

Hyla ^egilla B. and G.
The tj^pical form.

Rana pachyderma sp. nov.

Represented by five specimens of different ages and sizes from

' On page 99, Proc. Phila. Academy, 1869, in my monograph of the Ple-
thodontidm the number of plicae is given at 13. This is a misprint for 15.
On p. 209, Proceedings for 1867, the number is correctly given as 15.

.3

26 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

the McCloud River, and by two specimens from Ashland at the
northern base of the Siskiyou Mountains, Oregon.

This species belongs to the Rana temporaria group, and must
oe compared with Bana temporaria aurora B. and G., and B.
preliosa B, and G. The vomerine teeth are opposite the posterior
border of the choanee, and form two short, transverse series.
The toes are webbed to the base of the terminal phalange of the
fourth digit. The hind-leg extended reaches the extremity of
the muzzle with the heel. There are two plantar tubercles. The
internal is narrow, rather prominent and with obtuse extremit}' ;
the other is at the base of the fourth metatarsal bone, and is
rounded.

The muzzle is obtuse and the head rather wide. Its greatest
width at the position of the membranum tympani, equals the
length from the end of the muzzle to the line connecting the
axillfe in some specimens ; in others to that connecting tlie middle
of the humeri. The skin is on all the superior surfaces thick and
glandular. This condition is especially marked in the dorso-
lateral fold of each side, which is so thickened in front as to
resemble a parotoid gland. This becomes less visible in alcohol.
The tympanic membrane is either entirely concealed, or is repre-
sented by a depression only. The skin covering it is roughened.
A groove extends downwards and backwards from it. Between
this and the canthus oris is a glandular thickening, and behind it
are two others, one above the other. Posterior to these on the
sides is a succession of rounded, roughened warts, similar to those
of the toads. Similar warts, but less prominent, are scattered
over the dorsal region, and are numerous near the extremity
of the coccyx. The skin of the superior surfaces of the head,
body and limbs is minutely but very distinctly roughened b}^ small
warts, each of whicli gives exit to a pore. Inferior surfaces smooth.
Length of fingers beginning with the shortest, 2 • 1 * 4 • 3.

The color is dai-lv brown or nearly black, with indistinct darker
spots on the back; sides brown. Axilla and groin yellow, marbled
with black. Thighs above light or dark brown, with three darker
crossbars. Tibise similar, with three crossbars. Thighs behind,
black, coarsely vermiculated with yellow, or yellow closely spotted
with black. Below light yellow, spotted with brown on the gular
region and on front of femora.

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

27

M.

066

030

054

043

019

in

•033

•038

•018

Measurements.
Length of head and body to vent,
Length from muzzle to axiHa (axial), .
Length from muzzle to groin (axial), .
Length of anterior leg,
Length of raanus, ....

Length of posterior leg,
Length of femur, .....
Length of tibia, .....
Length of tarsus, ....

Tlie specimens from Ashland agree with those from the Mc-
Cloud, except tliat thev are nearly black above and do not exhibit
the dorsal spots.

I compare this species with the Bana temporai'ia aurora from
the Russian River near the coast of California. That species has
but one palmar tubercle, the internal, which is of similar propor-
tions to that of the R. pachy derma. The skin is not thickened,
and is much less glandular everywhere. The membranum tympani
is entirely distinct. The posterior face of the femur is not ver-
miculated with yellow, but is covered with large black masses.
The whole of the under surfaces are brown-spotted. There are
four brown crossbars on the tibia : traces of the fourth sometimes
appear in the R. pachyde7"nia. From Rana pretiosa it differs in
all these characters; besides those that belong to the latter, t. e.,
the posteriorly-placed vomerine teeth and the short hind-legs.

Eumeces skiltonianus B. and G.
Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Blv.

The movements of this species are not nearly so active as are
those of the Iguanidse and especially of the Lacertidse.

Scdoporus undulatus thayeri B. and G.
DiadopMs puuctatus pulohellus B. and G.

Diff'erent from the tj-pical form of the subspecies in having no
spots on the inferior surfaces.' I did not admit this form as dis-
tinct in my check list, but it had best be retained. It differs
from the subspecies amabilis in having the inferior two rows of
scales unicolor with the abdomen. In life this is a brilliant
orange.^

• At this locality I found, under bark of logs, numerous specimens of
Brachycybe lecontei Wood. This beautiful myilapod was originally described

28 proceedings of the academy of [1883.

13. Mouth of Russian River, California.

This locality is one hundred miles north of San Francisco.
The collection was made by myself, in and on the border of the
great redwood forest which there covers the hills and mountains
of the coast range.
Batrachoseps attenuatus Esch. Abundant.
Plethodon oregonensis Gird.

Abundant, and especially pleasing from its liquid, prominent
e^^es. Always under the redwoods.

Cynops torosus Esch.

Abundant. This species is entirely aquatic.

Rana temporaria aurora B. and G. Rana draytoni B. and G. /{ana longipes Hallow.

Not distinguishable as a species, in my opinion, from the Bana
temporaria of the palaearctic realm.
Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Blv.
Eutaenia sirtalis elegans B. and G.

14. Los Angeles, California.

Two collections from this locality are before me. One of these
was made by Mr. DeCorse, Hospital Steward, at Drum Barracks,
and was sent to the Smithsonian Institution. Prof. Baird sub-
mitted it to me for determination. The second collection was
given me by Mr. Horatio N. Rust, the archaeologist, who made
it at Passadena, a short distance from the city.

Cjrnops torosus Bscb. Rust.
Batraohoseps attenuatus Esch. Rust.
Phrynosoma blainvillii Gray. DeCorse.
Soeloporus undulatus thayeri B. and G. Rust.
Uta stanaburiana B. and G.

as fi'om California, where it was supposed to have been collected by Dr. J. L.
Leconte. I, however, subsequently obtained it from East Tennessee, and
as Dr. Leconte had collected it in Georgia, it was supposed by Dr. Wood
that the locality California was an error. Its rediscovery on the McCloud
River shows that this species is found on the Pacific coast, as originally
stated by Wood, and that it ranges over the width of the continent. In
like manner a myriapod which I sent Mr. Ryder from the Russian River,
is stated by him to be much like Andrognathus Cope, a genus heretofore
known from the Alleghenies of Virginia.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 29

Specimens remarkably large, and with the postinguinal black
spot unusually large and distinct. DeCorse.

Gerrhonotus multicariaatus Blv. Rust.
Eumeces skiltonianus Bd. Rust, DeCorse.
Ophibolu3 getulus boylii B. and G. Rust.
Fityophis catenifer Blv. Rust, DeCorse.
Bascanium testaceum Say. Rust, DeCorse.
Eutsenia hammondi Kenn. DeCorse.

Note on a Species of Xantusia.
The species described below was found by Dr. J. Gr. Cooper,
Zoologist of the State Geological Survey of California, and was
placed in the collections of the University of California, where I
saw it. It was kindly lent me for examination by the authorities
of the University. The locality from which the specimen was
derived is unknown, beyond that it is Californian.

Xantusia riversiana Cope. American Naturalist, 1879, p. 801.

The position of this genus in the system has been discussed
by M. Bocourt ^ and myself.^ I associated it with the genera Lepi-
dophyma Dum., and Cricosaura Peters, and stated that 1 was not
able to distinguish them from the family Lacertidae. M, Bocourt
places these genera in the family " Trachydermi," which also
includes Heloderma Wiegm. This family is divided by M. Bocourt
into two subfamilies, the Glyphodonti for Heloderma, and the Agly-
phodonti for the three genera named, together with Xenosaurus
Pet. Previously to this ^ I had examined and compared the
osteology of Heloderma and Xenosaurus. On account of the
differences in the form of the mesosternum, and in some other
points, I regarded Xenosaurus as the type of a peculiar family to
be placed with the Helodermideein the tribe Diploglossa. Xantusia,
Lepidophyma and Cricosaura are, on the other hand, not Diplo-
glossa, but are Leptoglossa. They are allied to the Lacertidae, and
especially to the Asiatic Ophiops, which is, like them, without eye-
lids. The character of the tongue is like that of the Ecpleopidse,
uniformly squamous, and has no resemblance to that of the
Diploglossa, The characters of the scapular arch are those of the
Leptoglossa. The clavicle is loop-shaped proximally, and the

1 Misiou Scientifique de Mexique, Herpetology, p. 303, 1878.
'^ Proceedings of the Academy of Philadelphia, 1864, p. 229.
3Loc. cit. 1866, p. 322.

30 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

mesosternum is cruciform in Lepidophyma and Xantusia. I have
not been able to examine Griconaura as to these points. In my
paper first mentioned, I stated that these genera have distinct
parietal bones. I think that they should, on this account, be
distinguished from the Lacertidse^ where they are coossified.
Whether they are distinct or united in the Ecpleopidse, I do not
know, but the absence of e^-elids will separate the group from
that family. I use for it the name first given by Baird,^ Xantu-
sidse^ and characterize the three genera as follows : —

I. A large interfrontonasal plate ; frontoparietals

meeting on the middle line.

Superciliar^'^ scales none ; pupil round ; Lejndophyma.

Superciliary scales present ; pupil vertical ; Xantusia.

II. Two interfrontonasals ; frontoparietals separated

by interparietal.

Superciliary scales; Cincosaura.

All of these genera have femoral pores, and an exposed mem-
branum tympani.

The species which has given occasion for the above discussion
is the second one of the genus. It is several times as large as
the type X. vigilis Baird, and has a different coloration. The
digits are shorter.

The scales of the dorsal and lateral regions are rather coarsely
and nniforml}^ granular. The abdominal scales are quadrate, and
are in sixteen longitudinal and thirt3''-two transverse rows. The
preanal scales ai'e in three transverse rows, the anterior two of
four scales, with the median pair in both much enlarged, and the
posterior row of six scales. Scales of the gular region flat and
hexagonal, one row on the gular fold a little larger, and equal to
the anterior gulars. Scales of the anterior aspects of the fore-leg
and femur larger than the others ; those of the tibia small, and
those of the posterior face of the femur still smaller. Scales
of the tail in whorls of equal width. The scales of equal size,
and all convex in cross-section but not keeled. None of the
scales of the body or limbs keeled.

The nostril is situated in a small scute at the junction of the
sutures which separate the internasal, rostral, first labial, and first

^ Proceedings Academy Philadelphia, 1858, December.

1883] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 31

loreal scuta. Throe loreals, increasing in size posteriorly. A
circle of scales surrounds the eye, of which the superior or super-
ciliary are the largest. The latter are separated by one row of
scales from the parietal, supraorbital and frontal on each side. The
interfrontonasal is nearly square. The frontonasals are consider-
ably in contact. The frontal is hexagonal, and is broader than
long. The interparietal is as large as each parietal. It is longer
than wide, and notches the contact of the frontoparietals. The
occipitals are large and quadrate. A single large temporal bounds
the parietals and occipital, and it is followed by two small scuta
which are in contact with the occipital. There are eight scales on
the upper lip. Of these the fifth is the largest, and is part of an
annulus which begins with two small scales at the posterior
loreal, and terminates at the seventh scale, opposite the middle
of the pupil posteriorly. The posterior labials are small, and are
separated by nine rows of still smaller scales from the large
temporal. No large auricular scales. The eye is rather large
and its diameter is contained in the length of muzzle in front of it
l't5 times. The vertical diameter of the auricular meatus is a
little less.

The first digits of both extremities are very short. The second
of the pes is very little longer than the fifth. All the ungues are
acute and are moderately curved. The hind-legs are remarkably
short, not exceeding the fore-legs. Extended forwards the ex-
tremity of the fourth digit reaches the elbow of the appressed
fore-leg. Femoral pores twelve on each side ; no anal pores. The
tail is not long, and its form is compressed with a flat inferior
surface. The section is a triangle, higher than wide, with the
apex narrowly truncate.

The color is light brown, with dark umber-brown spots on the
superior surface. These spots foi»m, in general, one median and
two lateral rows, but as their forms are verj- irregular this order
is obscure. The median dorsal are the largest, and they send
branches laterally and anteroposteriorly, so that the result is rather
confused. Dark brown bands cross the muzzle on the frontonasal
plates and on the frontal, and form a wide U from the fronto-
parietals passing around the posterior edge of the occipitals.
Sides of head with rather large brown spots. Inferior surfaces
with minute brown spots which are least numerous on the middle
line. Tail with irregular pale spots.

32

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

Measuremen

ts.

M.

Total length, -118

Length to posterior edge of occipital plates,

•0162

Length to axilla, .

•029

Length to groin, .

•055

Length to vent, .

•060

Width between orbits above.

•007

Width at temples,

,

•0115

Length of fore-limb,

•on

Length of manus.

•008

Length of hind-limb, .

•023

Length of pes.

•Oil

Length of tibia, .

•007

15. San Diego, California.
My friend, James S. Lippincott, made a collection of reptiles
and batrachians at this locality, which throws considerable light
on some points of geographical distribution. A catalogue of the
species is here given : —

Bufo columbiensis Bd. and Gird.

A single specimen with smoother skin than the more northern
forms. Gland on the surface of the tibia very distinct.
Spea hammondi B. and (i.

See antea, page 14. Four specimens.
Eumeoes skiltonianus Baird.

A specimen with the scales of the dark bands pale centered,
and with a very thick tail.
Verticaria hyperythra Cope.
Cnemidophorus tessellatus tigris B. and G.
Aniella pulohra Gray.
Gerrhonotus multicarinatus Blv.
Uta stansburiana B. and G.
Crotaphytus wislizeni Bd. and Gird.
Phrynosoma blainvillei Gray.
BhinocMlus lecontei I^ and G.
Hypsiglena ocbrorhynchus Cope.
Basoanium testaceum Say.

General Observations.
The results to zoological geography obtained by the preceding
identifications are as follows : — Collection No 1. The extension

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 33

northwards of the ranges of Crotalas molossus and Stenostoma
dulce. No. 2. The extension northwards of the ranges of Diado-
phis regalis, Grotalus lepidus and Eolhrookia texana. No. 4. The
extension to the Rocky Mountains of the range of Spea hdmmondi.
No. 6. The discovery of a new Scaphiopus in the Great Basin
district ; and of the southern extension of Eana pretiosa into the
same. No. T. The discovery that the Northern Pacific fauna
extends east to the Rocliy Mountains. This fauna is especially
represented by Bascanium vetustum, Bana preMosa and Bufo
columbiensis. No. 8. The fact that the Great Basin district of the
Sonoran fauna extends north to the southern slope of the Rockj'^
Mountains in Idaho, where are found several of its species. These
are Bhrynosoma platyrhinum, Grotaphytus wislizeni, and Uta
stansburiana. No. 9. The discovery that the same fauna extends
north along the eastern slope of the Sierra Nevada to the begin-
ning of Surprise Valley, California. No. 10. The determination
that the Northern Pacific fauna extends from Surprise Valley,
eastern California, northwards as ftir as my explorations have
extended, viz., to Silver Lake and Klamath Lakes. No. 15. The
determination of a wide southern range for Spea hammondi and
Bufo columbiensis, and northern range for Verticaria hyperythra.

These results indicate that the Pacific region has a much greater
extension eastward than it has been supposed to have, but which
was foreshadowed in my paper on the Zoology of Montana,
published in 1879.^ They also indicate that it must be divided
into three districts. These I call the Idaho, the Willamet, and
the South Californian districts. The first is characterized by the
absence of Gerrhonotus and Gynops and of certain species of
Amblystoma. The South Californian is characterized by the
presence of Hypsiglena and Bhinochihis, and absence of Amblys-
toma. It is allied to the Sonoran region, to whicli it is adjacent.

As regards the relation which the Sonoran region as a whole
bears^to the Nearctic and Neotropical realms, some remarl<s may
be in place here. It is a question with some naturalists to which
of the two it should be referred, and some would exclude it from
the Nearctic without fully determining its relations to the Neo-
tropical realm.

There can, however, be no doubt that it lacks all the peculiar

^ American- Naturalist, p. 435.

34

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

features of the Neotropical realm, and if it lacks some of those
of the Nearctic also, its types are mostly representative of the
latter rather of the former. I content myself here with confirming
this general principle by reference to the principal families and
genera of cold-blooded vertebrata.

R. Nearctica.

Salmonidae.
Cyprinidjfi.
Oatostomidse.

Eanidae.
Scaphiopidje.

Amblystomidte.

Sceloporus.
Eumeces.

Bascanium.

Tropidonotus.

Eutsenia.

Pityophis.

Diadophis.

Ophibolus.

R. Sonoriana.

Pisces.
Salmonidee.
Cyprinidae.
Catostomidffi.

Batrachia.
Ranidse.
Scaphiopidae.

Amblystomidfle.

Reptilia.

Lacertilia.
Sceloporus.
Eumeces.

Ophidia.

Bascanium.

Tropidonotus.

Eutaenia.

Pityophis.

Diadophis.

Ophibolus.

R. Neotropicalia.

Characinidge.

Stenostoma.

Cvstignathidffi.

Liocephalus.
Mabuia.

Bothrops.

Drymobius.

Helicops.

Rhadin«a.

Coniophanes.

E ry throlamprus.

Pliocercus.

Oxyrrhopus.

Sibon.

Leptognathus.

Boa.

Xiphosoma.

Stenostoma.

There are a good many genera which are found in the Sonoran
district, which do not occur in other parts of the Nearctic realm.
These genera are frequently confined to it, but when they are not,

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

35

they are to be looked for in the Mexican region of the Neotropical
realm, I give a list of these genei-a, with a corresponding one
of the Mexican region, to illustrate the extent of the similarity
between the two regions.

B. Sonoriana.

Plagopterinae,

Heloderraa.

Crotaphytus.

Uta.

Uma.

Callisaurus.

Gyalopinm.
Phimothyra.
Trimorphodon.
Hj^psiglena.

Pisces.

Reptilia.

Lacertilia .

R. Mexicana.

Heloderma.

Ophidia,

Ficimia.
Phimothyra.
Trimorphodon.
Hypsiglena.

It seems then that the Neotropical relationships of the Sonoran
region are not great. In this consideration I have omitted the
genera which are common to the Mexican region and the Nearctic
realm in general. Such are Eanidse^ Gnemidophorus, Sceloporus,
Bascanium, Tropidonotus, Eutsenia, Pityophis, Spilotes, Ophiholus
and Elaps. These forms serve to indicate the affinity between
the Nearctic realm and the Mexican region. The line between
the two is, however, not 3'^et exactly drawn. The former extends
on the west coast at least as far south as Guaymas, and on the
plateau 'as far as Guanajuato. On the east coast the Neotropical
fauna reaches near to the Rio Grande. See On the Zoological
Position of Texas, by the writer, in Bulletin U. S. National Museum,
No, ^20, August, 1880; and Eleventh Contribution to the Her-
petology of Tropical America, by E. D. Cope, Proceedings Amer,
Philosoph, Society, 18t9, p. 267,

36 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [ISSo.

January 23.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-six persons present.

Ovipositing of Argynnis cyhele. — Mr. H. Skinner remarked
that he had noticed a female of Argynnis cybele acting as though
it were ovipositing, and seeing that it behaved in a peculiar
manner, he was led to watch its proceedings carefull}^ Instead of
attaching or cementing its eggs to the plant on which the young
or larvae are destined to feed, which is the usual habit of butterflies
and moths, it hovered about a foot in height over a bed of violets,
and at intervals would remain stationary and drop an egg from
this distance to the food plant below. This seemed a remarkable
procedure, inasmuch as it differed from the method which has
been found to be so constant in this order, It remains to be seen
whether this species always drops it eggs from a height, or only
behaves in the peculiar manner occasionally while ovipositing.
Also whether the other species of the genus Argynnis lay their
eggs in a like manner. He thought it quite likely that A. myrina
and A. hellona do so occasionally, as they differ from the other
butterflies in the readiness with which the^y lay their eggs. He
had known them to oviposit in chip boxes or other receptacles in
which the}"^ were confined. He knew of no other species which
behave thus. It had been stated that the species of the genus
feed only on violets, which was probably not the case.

The following, received through the Botanical Section, was
ordered to be printed : —

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHTLADELPIIIA. 3t

ON QUEKCUS DURANDII Buckley.
BY CHARLES MOHR.

The rediscovery of this fine tree in Alabama adds now definitely
another one to the number of oaks known to inhabit the forests
east of the Mississippi River. First discovered by Prof. Buckley
in 1841 in Wilcox County, Alabama, it was described from spec-
imens collected near Austin, Texas, twenty years afterwards. I
had occasion to study the tree in several localities in its western
home during my investigations of the forest growth of south-
western Texas, in December, 1880; subsequentl}^ I directed mj''
attention to its rediscovery in the eastern Gulf region, and par-
ticulai'ly in Alabama. After a fruitless search through three
seasons, I was finallv rewarded at the close of the one just passed,
in finding this oak in the woods covei'ing the limestone ridges
bordering the Little Cahabe River in Bibb County, Alabnma.

The largest of the trees observed measured 2 feet in diameter
by an estimated height of about 70 feet. The trunk divides at a
height from 30 to 35 feet above the ground ; the heavy ])rimary
limbs are erect, tall, and the head of the tree is of an oblong
shape ; it resembles in the habit of growth greatly the white oak ;
the bark is close, more so than in the Texan tree, where it is found
inclined to be somewhat flaky, of a bright, almost pure white
color, b}' which it is at once distinguished from the latter. There
is scarcely a tree which shows greater variation in the size and
shape of its leaves, which were at the date of its rediscovery, lltli
November, for the greatest part shed. Only on some late, vig-
orous slujots, was the foliage 3'et fresh and green found to pei'sist.
The leaves are short petioled, from 2 to 3i inches in length, and
from ^ to 2i inches at their greatest width, always attenuated at
the base. They are either rcnindish, ovate or obovate towards
the apex, largely dilated, irregularly and obtusely, more or less
deeply three-lobed, or narrowed to lanceolate with shallow, distant
lobes, a mere wavy or entire margin. Of a firm texture, tlie leaves
are pubescent along the veins beneath when older, with a fine,
close, pale tomentum.

The fruit is of annual maturation and (at least during this
season) produced in abundance, short peduncled to sessile, single,
in jiairs or in clusters of three and four ; small, from three-eighths

38 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

to five-eighths of an inch long. The nut is perfectly smooth,
shining, of a light tan-color, ovate, somewhat narrowed towards
the base, with the apex slightly compressed and umhonate to
about one-third of its length, immersed in a shallow cup with
closely appressed, slight, knobby and smootliish scales. The nnt
is sweet and regarded as the best of mast. The acorns seem to
germinate in situations more or less exposed to light ; the large
trees are in more open situations found surrounded by their
numerous oftspring in- all stages of growth.

From the limited knowledge we possess, but little can be said
of the distribution of this oak. So far as known, it is confined to
a calcareous soil, be it on the rocky uplands or in the bottom lands,
the soil of w^hich in western Texas consists of a fine calcareous silt.
It seems not to occur west of the basin of the Colorado River; it
was not found near New Braunfels or around San Antonio ; on
the dry, rocky hills near Austin, it scarcely reaches the dimensions
of a middle-sized tree ; in the rich bottom of the lower Guadeloupe
it attains the proportion of the larger trees of the forest; there a
number of trees were measured and found from 2 to fully 3 feet
in diameter. One felled to the ground measured 37 inches through
and 86 feet in length, being perfectly sound. In such localities
most favorable to its development, it is esteemed as the most
valuable of the timber trees ; in its quality equal to the best of
white oak timber, it enters into all the manifold uses to which the
latter is applied, and which render the white oak of such great
importance.

As far as known, the tree has not been found in eastern Texas,
Louisiana, Mississippi, and the northern part of Alaliama. In the
latter State it seems in its northern extension confined to the
southern edge of the silurian limestone formation at the 33° of
latitude, at an eleA^•^tion not exceeding 250 or 300 feet above the
Gulf of Mexico. In repl}" to several inquiries made since, in regard
to its occurrence in the central and lower part of the State, where
the tree is called " Bastard Oak," it has become evident tliat it is not
rare southward throughout the cretaceous belt on the roci<y banks
lining the water courses, to the tertiary limestone hills below. Its
absence in the extensive territory between the latter and the calca-
reous hills on the Colorado River, nearly 700 miles to tlie westward,
can be accounted for by the prevailing sandy or argillaceous soils
quite destitute of lime, whose presence seems to be a necessary
recpiiremcnt for its growth.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 39

January 30.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

" TJrnatella gracilis," by Joseph Leidy, M. D.

" On the Extinct Peccaries of North America," by Joseph
Leidy, M. D.

" The Terrestrial Mollusca inhabiting the Societ}'^ Islands," by
Andrew Garrett.

The death of John Wister, a member, was announced.

Hybrid Birds. — Chas. Townsend referred to the rare occurrence
of hybridit}^ among N. Am. Passeres^ and stated that two species
of native warblers had recently been found to be hybrids, between
species of the genus Helminthophaga. He exhibited a bird taken
by Mr. W. L. Baily in Dec, 1882, near Haverford College, Pa.,
which proved to be a hybrid between the Snowbird and the
White-throated Sparrow, birds of different genera, which was
more remarkable.

After referring to the marks of hybrid origin borne by some
doubtful species, handed down by the earlier ornithologists, he
remarked that hybridity would doubtless be found a sufficient
explanation for many obscure species that are standing puzzles
to the ornithologists of to-day.

Mr. Chas. Morris was elected a member of the Council, to fill the
vacancy caused by the election of Dr. Ruschenberger as Curator.

The following were elected members : —

F. A. Genth, Jr., Clarence R. Claghorn, G. Howard Parker,
John B. Deaver, M. D., Wm. L. Springs, H. T. Cresson, Jacob L.
Wortman and Emily G. Hunt.

February 6.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twent3'-three persons present.

A paper entitled "A new Extinct Genus of Sirenia," by Edw.
D. Cope, was presented for publication.

40 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [188H.

On a supposed Human Implement from the Gravel at Phila-
delphia.— Professor H. Carvill Lewis stated that through the
kindness of Mr. John Sartain, the well-known engraver of this
citj', a supposed stone implement had come into his hands, which,
from the circumstances in which it was found, becomes of great
interest. In digging a pit below the cellar of the house No. 728
Sanson! Street, Philadelphia, after passing through regularly
stratified layers of gravel and sand, a loose, clean "water gravel"
was reached at a depth of 24 feet from the surface of the street.
The grade of the street is hei'e about 35 feet above the mean level
of the Delaware River, and the depth of the drift deposits, as
shown by an artesian-well boring at the Continental Hotel, a few
hundred feet distant, is 45 feet, gneiss rock being reached at that
depth. The drift deposits consist of the usual alternations of
sand and gravel with occasional streaks of clay, the whole being
horizontally stratified.

The specimen was found at a de})th of 24 feet in a loose gravel,
whei'e water flowed freely, and lay beneath a series of horizontally
stratified layers of gravel and clay, which were entirely undis-
turbed, and were as originally deposited. Mr. Sartain saw the
specimen taken out and testifies as to the accuracy of the above
statement.

The supposed implement is an oblong rectangle in shape, IQ^
inches in length, nearly 4 inches in width, and in thickness varying
fi'om ^ inch at the edge to 1^ inches at the centre. It is ground
to a smooth cutting-edge at the two extremities. It is rectangular
in section, the sides forming right-angles with the faces. The
sides are parallel with each other, but the faces are undulating
surfaces, on one of which is a prominent longitudinal ridge, an
inch and a half in width.

Each end of the implement appears to have been smoothly
ground to form a square, even cutting-edge, an equal amount
of grinding having been done on either side. Both extremities
are similar. The implement is as unusual in shape as it is in size.
It is double the length of ordinary celts, and was possibly a
lapstone of some kind.

The late Professor Haldeman, who examined the specimen,
expressed great interest in it, and pronounced it undoubtedly of
human workmanship.^

' Mr. E. A. Barber, a well-known archaeologist, reports, after a close
examination of the implement, as follows : —"The peculiar marking
or pecJcing ahows it to he undoubtedly artificial. This pecking is chai-ac-
teristic of many pestles and other heavy stone implements found in
this part of the country. There are certain snvill surfaces (the sides and
part of the face) which have not been worked, but tlie greater part of the
implement has been artificially pecked, and the ends have been ground
down by abrasion, as may distinctly be seen. The character and use of the
implement are not indicated by its shape, but there is no doubt at all as to
its artificial workmanship."

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 41

Professor Lewis was not prepared to express such a positive
opinion as to its artificial origin. Tiie straight, parallel sides of
the specimen, resemble the form of natural cleavage fragments of
some sandstones and flagstones. Such cleavage fragments are
frequently harder in the centre than along the edges, this being
the result of a concretionary force, and if the specimen has been
shaped by subsequent w^ater action, the harder central portion
would resist action and form the ridge already described.* The
regular bevelling at each extremity would, however, be a very
unusual form to be produced hj natural ei-osive forces.

The implement, if such it be, would be the first that has been
discovered in the Philadelphia gravel, and would become of great
interest in its bearing upon the antiquity of man on the Delaware.
The implements found by Dr. Abbott in the gravel at Trenton are
of a much more rude type, being closely allied in shape with the
palaeolithic implements of the river drift of several European
localities. They are never ground down to an edge like the speci-
men now described, but are rudely chi[)ped. The Trenton imple-
ments, moreover, are made from Triassic argillite, while this one
is made from a compact yellowish-brown sandstone.

As the speaker had endeavored to show* in a former communi-
cation,^ the Trenton gravel is a post-glacial deposit made at the time
of the final disapi)earance of glaciers from the headwaters of the
Delaware, while the Philadelphia red gravel is somewhat older,
having been formed during the glacial epoch at a time wdien this
region was depressed 150-180 feet lower than its present level.
Both gravels are true river gravels.

Prom the geographical position of the locality where the imple-
ment was found, it is probable that it belongs to the older of the
two gravels. As, however. Professor Lewis had not seen the gravel
at this place, judgment was reserved upon this point.

It would, indeed, be a curious fact if it were proved that an
implement of neolithic type belonged to a gravel older than that
which contained only pahi^olithic implements.

Sliould the specimen under consideration really belong to the
gravel, and be proved to be artificial, it will carry back the antiquity
of man to glacial times — an antiquity already assigned by numerous
discoveries elsewhere. Unlike as this is to the paheolithic imple-
ments of Trenton, it is by no means the first neolithic implement
repented from a river gravel.

Mr. John Ford" has discovered a polished stone axe in the
gravel forming the outer bluff" of the Mississippi River, near
Alton, 111., which is of great interest. This axe, now in the
archaeological collection of the Academy, was taken b}^ Mr. Ford
from a per()endicular face of gravel freshly cut and exposed by a
road cutting ; and, accompanied by a number of fossil land and

» Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. (Min. and Geol. Section), Nov. 24, 1879.
^ Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc. Phila., 1877, p. 305.
4

42 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

fresh- water shells of Quaternary age, a bone of Canis, and a
specimen of lignite, lay at a depth of twenty feet in the gravel,
and at an elevation of 50 feet above the river. Mi*. Ford states
that " the wall referred to presented in every part a solid front,
without tissure or crevice, everywhere hard and impenetrable
except by pick or crowbar, and yet twenty feet under the surface,
within this strong matrix deposited by water thousands of years
ao^o, laid the evidence of the presence of the man of the period, a
stone axe artistically made, and doubtless used for the purposes
of battle." The implement thus found by Mr. Ford is more finely
finished than that from the Philadelphia gravel. It is made of
hard syenite.

The implements said to occur in the auriferous gravels of Cali-
fornia, described by Professor Whitney and others, and those
from the loess of the Missouri Valley in Nebraska, discovered by
Professor Aughe^^. are also of neolithic type, the California
implements being as perfect as anything now made.

It may be, therefore, that in America rudeness of workman-
shi}) is not necessarily associated with great antiquity.

Opportunity is here taken to refer to a recent paper by Professor
H W. Haynes,^ entitled " Some indications of an early race of
men in New England," in which the author describes some rough
fraoments of granite and quartzite found in various localities in
Massachusetts, Vermont, and Ncav Hampsliire, which he considers
to be rude forms of implements, more primitive than those of the
Delaware gravels, and which are therefore to be regarded as relics
of primeval man.

These objects are of various shapes, sometimes pointed, some-
times with sharp edges all around, and frequently sharp on one
side and irregular on the other. These latter were regarded as
implements adapted for being held in the hand for use in chop-
pino- or cutting. All these forms are of ruder type and coarser
fabric than the implements of the Trenton gravel. They were
found at localities where none of the ordinary traces of Indian
occupation could be discovered, and the author infers from them
the former existence in New England of a race of men different
from and less advanced than the Indians.

With characteristic courtesy. Professor Haynes invited the
speaker to make a personal examination of his full collection of
these interesting objects.

A careful study of each specimen convinced Professor Lewis
that tlie angularitiy of these rock fragments, while often resembling
that of artificial forms, is in reality due to natural causes rather
than to any human workmanship. Cleavage and frost-fracture
an-l weathering planes appear to have been the sole agents in the
producti'in of the greater part of these forms. Upon most of the
specimens examined, Professor Lewis was able to detect traces of

1 Proc. Bost. Soc. Nat. Hist., xxi, p. 383, Feb. 1, 1883.

1883. J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 43

the original cleavage or weathering planes parallel to certain sides
of the fragment, which clearl}- indicated their mode of formation.
Similar fragments occur in almost every portion of the country,
their shape var3'ing with the material of which tlie}^ are formed.
Professor Haynes himself states in the paper referred to,
" Wherever it has been in ni}^ power to make the long and labor-
ious search that is required, I have succeeded in finding them,"
etc. It is readil}' understood how a skilled archa-ologist, accus-
tomed to find a use for every rude imi)lement, would naturally
find design also in the close imitations made by Nature.

Among these objects of natural origin there were also a very
few whicli boix' traces of human handiwork, some of these beino-
apparently " skin-scrapers." These latteroften occur witlj the most
highly finished Indian arrow-heads, and ofter, therefore, no evi-
dence of high antiquity. The cases where the same Indian tribe
has manufactured implements of the finest Avorkmanship at the
same time with those of rudest make, each being intended for
diflferent uses, are so numerous as to need onlj- to be mentioned. ^

Returning finally to the supposed implement from the Phila-
delphia gravel, now brouglit before the attention of the Academy,
Professor Lewis stated that he did not desire to urge any one
interpretation of it, but merely to offer some particulars which
might not otherwise see the light, and to show their meaning if
verified hereafter. Whatever value might be attached to the cir-
cumstances of the discovery of this specimen or to its apparent
artificial origin, it would at least serve to stimulate a further
search for evidences of man in the gravels underlying the city.

An implement found in a thickly populated district, more
especially as it occurred in a shifting water gravel, would always
be open to suspicion, and at all events a single specimen is not
sufficient upon which to base the broad conclusions which Avould
otherwise be warranted.

Note on a Drilled 3Iall in the Haldeman Collection of
Antiquities. — Mr. H. T. Cresson called attention to a large drilled
mall or hammer-head of stone, from the Haldeman collection of
antiquities. It was found at Peach Bottom, Lancaster County,
Penns3'lvania, in 1866, and weighs eight and three-quarter pounds.
Most^pre-historic hammer-heads or stone malls, consist of oval
pebbles, small boulders of quartzite, granite, or other hard mate-
rials, which show modification by the hand of man, and have
generally undergone more or less of pecking and polishing to bring
them into a required shape. The mall exhibited did not possess
any groove, but had a drilled hole for the insertion of a haft, which

' At a ixeetlng of the Academy held a week ago, Mr. Aubrey H. Smith
presented two Indian implements picked up by himself on the shores of
the Loyalsock Cieek, Lycoming Co., Pa., where they lay side by side. One
was a rudely chipped implement like those of the Trenton gravel, while
the other was a delicately formed arrow-point.

44 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

is of rare occurrence in any form of axes or hammers belonging
to our American Indians, except in the case of ceremonial weapons.
The length of the haft-hole in this mall is four and a half inches;
but its width of one inch, which in the drilling from either end
toward the centre, narrows to half an inch, does not seem to be
sufficient in comparison with its size to warrant the insertion of
a handle ; for this reason the speaker was inclined to believe that
it was in an unfinished condition. Malls have been found in the
ancient copper mines at Keeweenaw Point and Isle Roj^il in Lake
Superior without grooves for hafting, and occasionally with double
grooves. There are malls in use at present among the Sioux
Indians for breaking bones and pounding pemmican, but these are
firmly encased in raw hide, except that portion of the head used
in striking. The occurrence of this kind of haft-hole, excepting
as before stated in the ceremonial weapons, is not often seen,
resembling in this respect some of the neolithic malls and hammers
of the eastern continent.

February 13. ,

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-three persons present.

The following papers were presented for publication : —

"A new Unio from Florida," by Berlin H. Wright.

" Notes on the Birds of Westmoreland Co., Penna.," by Chas.
H. Townsend.

The Publication Committee reported in favor of publishing the
following papers in the Journal of the Academy : —

" Urnatella gracilis," by Jos. Leidy, M. D.

" On the Extinct Peccaries of North America," by Jos. Leidy,
M. I).

" The Terrestrial Mollusca inhabiting the Society Islands," by
Andrew Garrett.

Change of Color in a Katydid. — Professor Lewis recorded a
curious instance of modification in color in the case of a kat3'did,
where the normal light green tint had been rei)laced by a bright
scarlet, the complementary color. The insect, which was found at
Point Pleasant, N. J., difiters in no way from the common katydid,
Cyrlophylluni concavum Sa}', except in the unusual color.

On the Reproduction and Parasites of Anodonta Jiuviatilis. —
Prof. Leidy directed attention to a basketful of living fresh-water
mussels, Anodonta jiuviatilis, which were obtained for him through
the kindness of Rev. Jesse Y. Burke, and are now placed at the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 45

disposal of members who wish to have them. Tliey are fine robust
specimens, the larger ones measuring 6 inches in length by 3 inches
in height and almost 2^ inches in thickness. They were obtained
from a little pond occupying an old marl pit, near Clai'ksboro,
Gloucester Co., N. J.

These mussels appear to be exceedingly prolific. The pregnant
females have the branchial uteri, as they have been appropriately
named by Dr. Isaac Lea, enormously distended with perfected
embryos. These appear with a cinnamon-brown shell, having a
conspicuous spinous tooth or hook to each valve, and are furnished
with long byssal threads. Wishing to ascertain the proportionate
amount of embryos, the followiug plan was adopted : — In an indi-
vidual 6 inches long the soft parts were weighed and found to be
135*44 grammes. The branchial uteri weighed 64 grammes and
the inner gills 7'34 grammes. Supposing the latter to be of the
same weight as the outer gills, free from embryos, this weight
subtracted would leave 56"66 grammes as that of the embryos, and
7 8' 7 8 grammes as the weight of the rest of the animal. In another
specimen in which the weight of the soft parts was 113'75 grammes,
the branchial uteri weighed 45*5 grammes, and the inner gills 5*2
grammes. Subtracting the weight of these would leave 40*3
grammes as the weight of the embryos, and 73'45 grammes for the
rest of the animal. In another specimen by weight, and counting,
the embryos in a milligramme were estimated to be 1,280,000.

The mussels are infested with many water mites creeping about
among the gills. The young of the same, in various stages, were
observed imbedded in the mantle. The mite appears to be iden-
tical with the species Atax ypsiloijhot'ua, yfh'ich is a parasite of the
common mussel, Anodonta cygnea, of Europe. It was discovered
and described just 100 years ago, under the name Acarus ypsilo-
pho7-uH, by Dr. Christophori Gottlieb Bonz (Nova Acta Phys. Med.
Acad. C. L. C. Nat. Cur., Nuremberg, 1783, 52, Tab. I, figs. 1-4).
It is described and figured by Pfeiffer, with the name of Limno-
chai'es Anodontse (Naturg. deutscher land und siiss-wasser Mol-
lusken,. 1821, Taf. I, fig. 12) ; by Dr. Karl Ernst v. Baer, under
the name of Hi/drachne concharuin (Nova Acta, Bonn, 1826, 590,
Taf. XXIX, fig. 19) ; by P. J. van Beneden (Mem. de I'Acad. R.
des Sciences de Belgique, XXIV, 1850), and by Ed. Claparede
(Zeits. f. wiss. Zoologie, 1808, 445).

Dl". Bonz's description, referring chiefly to the form, color and
marking of the mite, applies to ours ; and further he thought the
description of the details, of Claparede, applies sufficiently Avell
to the same.

The characters of our mite are briefl}^ as follows :— ^

Bod}^ ovoid, black, with a sulphur-yellow median line, often
more or less interrupted, foi'ked in front, and ending in an angular
spot behind. The yellow marking divides the black into a pair
of lateral reniform spots and an anterior irregular lozenge spot.
Sides brown, from the eggs shining through. Head gray, with

46 . PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

dumb-bell eye-spots. Limbs gray, translucent, with the chitinous
investment bluish black, hirsute, ending in pairs of double falcate
ungues. Terminal joint of the palps ending in three minute
uncinate denticles. Anal plates of the females usually with about
18 to 22 acetabula to each. Length of body 1-375 fo 1-75 ram.,
breadth 1-125 to 1-5 mm. Inhabits the branchiae and mantle of
Anodonta Jiuviatilis.

The colors depend mainly on the contents shining through the
transparent chitinous investment, which under reflected light
exhibits a bluish-black tint. Commonly the black color is intense ;
and in alcoholic specimens the whole body is black. In several
individuals the black passed into a chocolate hue. Dr. Bonz
describes the European mite as black, with the median dorsal
mark pale yellow ; Pfeiffer as red-brown with a citron-yellow
mark, and Beneden says it shows a Y in white, from which it was
named.

The number of acetabula to the anal plates is variable ; in one
mite he found 23 to each plate, in a second 22 to each, in a third
22 to one and 17 to the other, and in a fourth 18 to one and 17 to
the other. Claparede gives from 15 to 20 as the number to each
plate in the European mite.

The variations of our mite, from the characters given of the
European mite, ai-e such as occur among individuals of either, and
he therefore saw nothing distinguishing ours as a diflerent species.
Claparede describes another mite which infests the European
Unios, which he distinguishes under the name of Atax Bonzi. The
speaker had also observed a different mite, infesting the common
mussel, Unio complanatus,, of the Delaw-are River; of this mite he
exhibited a drawing made in November, 1854. He suspected it
to be the Atax Bonzi; but the question can only be more positively
answered after the examination of certain details, which he hoped
soon to have the opportunity of making.

If our two parasitic mites are identical with those of European
mussels, it not only makes it appear probable that they are of
common origin, but renders it the more probable that this is like-
wise the case with their hosts, even if these are not I'egarded of
the same species.

Professor Leidy also exhibited a collection of bod3'-lice,
Pediculus vestimenti, from Jews of Odessa, Russia, presented by
Dr. A. G. Stratton. They range in size from 1-25 to 3-875 mm. in
length, and appear in no respect to differ fi'om those found on
natives of our own country.

The Ice of the Glacial Period. — Professor Heilprin, referring
to the subject of glaciation, stated that in his opinion the vast
sheet of ice Avhich is generally supposed to have covered during
the great ice age a considerable portion of the northern regions of
the European and North American continents, could not have had
its origin, as is maintained by most geologists, in a polar " ice-cap,"

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 47

since it may reasonably be doubted whether there could ever have
been formed in the extreme North an accumulation of snow and
ice of a magnitude sutlicient to propel southward a glacier, with
an estimated thickness of several thousands of feet, to a distance
of hundreds of miles, and up mountain slopes to heights equaling
five or six thousand feet. The magnitude (as to height) to whii-h
such a snow accumulation may attain, will be dependent upon two
conditions — (I), the quantity of aqueous (snow ) precipitation, and
(2), the upper limit in the atmosphere reached by clouds. It is
well known that clouds, as a rule, rise highest in the regions of
highest temperature — the equntorial — where the vapor absorption
by the atmosphere is greatest, and where the planes of acpieous
condensation are most distantly removed from the earth's sur ace ;
and, likewise, they rise higher in summer than in winter. The
minimum rise will necessarily be in the extieme Noith (or South),
and during the period of grentest cold, or winter. High (discharge)
clouds are a rarit}' in the polar regions, and consequently piecipi-
tation will be mainly restricted to a comparatively low atmospheric
zone. Above this zone, which will mark the upper limit of the
" ice-cap," there can be but little snow accumulation. As a matter
of fact, the officers of various Arctic expeditions have repeatedly
noted that the high mountain-crests and elevations in the far North
were frequently devoid of a snow covering, and that there was but
very little precipitation, even over the low lands, during the winter,
heavy precipitations setting in only with the S[)ring months. The
highest snow-clad elevation in the region of greatest cold (the West),
in Greenland, appears to be Washington Land, with an estimated
height of six thousand feet, which gives rise to the great Humboldt
Grlacier, Although this peak is completely buried under a mantle
of snow (of undetermined thickness, however), it may j-et safely
be doubted whether snow of any great thickness (unless under a
much loarmer climate)^ could accumulate on a summit of much
greater elevation. If not, this elevation, in the opinion of the
speaker, was entirel}'^ inadequate to account for the southward
propulsion of a glacier to the extent required by geologists.

Professor Lewis remarked that notwithstanding the difficulties
in a theoretical explanation, the fact of a great continuous glacier
at the time of maximum glaciation seemed clearly indicated, at
least in America, b}^ the numerous observations recently made.
He "described the extent of the glacier in America, as indicated
by its terminal moraine, and stated that the close similarity of its
phenomena at distaiit portions of its southern edge indicated a
continuous ice-sheet. The continuous motion of its upper portion
is shown by the uniform direction of glacial stria? upon elevated
points. Thus the S. W. direction of the stria; upon the mountain
tops of N. E. Penna., was identical with that upon the Overlook
Mountain of the Catskills, and of that upon the summits of the
Laurentians of Canada. The striae at lower elevations conformed
more or less to the valleys, and did «ot indicate the general move-

48 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

ment of the ice. The thickness of the glacier increased nortliward,
the rate of increase diminishing as its source is approaclaed. This
latter point has not heretofore been appreciated, although observed
some time ago b}^ Dr. Hayes in the case of the Greenland glacier.

Recent observations by the speaker in Pennsylvania had shown
the glacier to be 800 feet thick at a point five miles north of its
extreme southern edge, and 2000 feet thick at a point eight miles
from its edge, while it was only about .3100 feet thick one hundred
miles farther northeast, and about 5000 feet thick three hundred
miles back from its edge. The amount of erosion caused by it upon
rock surfaces was in some degree a measure of its thickness, being-
far greater in Canada, even upon the hard Laurentian granites of
that region, than in Pennsylvania, where even soft and friable
rocks were but slightly eroded.

The present thickness of the glacier in central Greenland was
considered, and the magnitude of certain icebergs detaclied from
it was given. A friend of the speaker had, witiiin a few months,
seen a floating iceberg near the coast of Newfoundland, which
stood 800 feet above the water by measurement, and may have
been therefore nearly a mile in deptli. Dr. Hayes saw an iceberg-
aground in water nearly half a mile deep.

That the great glacier flowed up steep inclines was abundantly
proven by recent observations of the speaker in Pennsylvania. He
instanced the strife covering the north flank of the Kittatinny
Mountain, and a boulder of limestone perched on the summit
which, within a distance of tliree miles, had been carried up 800
feet vertically.

Referring to a paper recently published by Mr. W. J. McGee,
who found difficulties similar to those of Professor Heilprin in
the assumption of a polar ice-cap of great thickness, and who
imaoiued the glacier to increase by additions to its outer rim, the
speaker held that the single fact of the transportation by the glacier
of far-traveled boulders to its teiminal moraine, was a fatal objec-
tion to any sucli hypothesis.

Nor did he believe that the liypothesis adopted l)y Professor
Dana and others, of a great elevation of land in the North, was a
probable one The facts now in the possession of geologists do
not indicate such a great and local upheaval as required by that
hypothesis.

An explanation, therefore, must still be sought for the southward
flow of a continuous ice-sheet - a flow in some regions up-hill. The
action of gravity was certainly not sufficient. Even in the case
of the downward flow of the steeply inclined Swiss glaciers, it had
been shown that gravity was more than counterbalanced by friction
of the sides and bottom, and that these glaciers moved by reason
of an inherent moving power of the molecules of the ice. It was
probable tliat similar action occurred in the great continental
glacier.

He suggested, therefore, a hypothesis which, while i)reserving

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 49

the unity of the glacier, as indicated by observed facts, neither
assumed an unreasonable land elevation in polar regions, nor
required a thickness of ice so great as to be open to the objections
of the last speaker.

He suggested that the ice-cap flowed south simpl}' because it
flowed toward a source of heat. Such flow does not depend upon
gravity, but would occur in a nearly flat field of ice, and lie thought
that the ice need not to liave been more than a few times its
present thickness in Greenland to account for all existing phe-
nomena upon the hypothesis now suggested.

Professor Heii.prin maintained that we M'ere unacquainted with
any laws of glacial action which would account for the indis-
criminate progression of an ice-sheet toward a source of heat.
The molecular-expansion theory as applied to the glacial phe-
nomena of the Alps, took no cognizance of the position of the heat
power, l)ut merely of that of least resistance (the direction of
slope). As to tlie magnitude of icebergs, the height above water
gave no positive indication as to the development (in depth)
beneath the surface, since this would largely depend upon the
form assumed by the berg. As a matter of fact, however, the
highest bergs observed by Hayes and Nares in the northern
regions, rose only about 300 ft. out of the water, a height some-
what exceeding the highest Antarctic bergs encountered b}- the
" Challenger." We had, therefore, no indications of any extra-
ordinary development of ice in Greenland.

Chalcedony coniaiinng Li(^iiid. — Professor H. Carvill Lewis
called attention to a geode of chalcedony from the Salto River,
Uraguay, presented by Mr. S. R Colbroun, of the United States
Navy. The specimen contained an unusual quantity of liquid —
from two to three drachms ; it was derived from an extensive
basaltic formation of amygdaloid and black melaphyr, and was
coated with a substance resembling asbestos. He described the
method of formation of such hollow masses of mammillary chalce-
dony as- being endogenous and referred to an interesting paper
recently published by I. Anson and Parkhurst upon the artificial
manufactuie of chalcedony.

Ojt fJie FlowrrirKi of Uie Sfapelia. — At the meeting of the
Botanical Section, February 12th, Mr. Thomas Meehan exhibited
specimens of Staijclia hufonia in various stages of growth, inflor-
escence and fruit, and pointed out that though there were axillary
buds of more oi' less prominence at the base of what we had to
call leaves, yet the flower.s rarely proceeded from these, but from
lateral accessory buds. When the axillary buds developed, they
produced branches and not flowers. The lateral accessory buds
usually developed into minute abortive flowers, with a membranous
scale or bract in the place of the primary leaf. These observations
were made on plants which had been planted in the open gi-ound

50 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

durjng the summer and were repotted in the fall and replaced in
a warm greenhouse. The branches commented on had grown
since that time, and might be termed the second growth of the
same season. When the plants were being potted, having more
than were needed, one was thrown carelessly under the greenhouse
stage, where it shriveled considerably, but retained some vital
power, enough in fact to Scud down a few fibrous roots into the
earth. It had shriveled so as to be reduced to about half its
normal weight. Its behavior under these conditions had not
been observed till a few da^'s since this date, when an examination
showed that the greater portion of the axillary buds iiad developed
into minute flowers, as in the case of the accessor3' buds under
the normal condition. Some of these, judging by their dry remains,
had grown to nearl y one-fourth the usual size of the normal flowers,
though most of them were much smallei'. In tliese cases no
lateral accessory buds had been produced. A perfect flower from
a health}^ pot-plant was exhibited, but not more than two-thirds
the size of those produced in the growth of the flrst pait of the
season when the plant was in the open air. Numbers had been
produced during the winter from the accessory buds at the base
of the secondarj^ growths. One of these had borne a fine seed-
vessel, which was also exhibited. No seed-vessels had followed
the numerous stronger flowers produced b^'^the plants in the open
air during the summer.

In commenting on these facts, Mr. Meehan pointed out their
harmony with others bearing on the relation between nutrition
and the various phases of the vegetative and reproductive con-
ditions of vegetation. Morphologically every development from
the bud to the fi'uit is primarily the same. We imagine all these
developments to be founded on a primary leaf or leaves. Just
when and how the various stages of development are brought
about it is for physiology to determine. The student of fruit and
forest trees knows that a I'apid-growing young tree does not flower,
and often when it commenced to flower, no fruit followed. Its
vegetative vigor had to be somewhat checked before the repro-
ductive forces induced flowers. The gardener brings about this
condition by root-pruning or ringing, that is, taking off" a portion
of the bark of the vigorous tree. Transplanting often makes a
barren tree fruitful. What would have been leaves, become petals
and parts of fructification in the transplanted tree. He had him-
self placed on record many illustrations of this. The Wista^'ia
and othei- climbing plants might flower, Init rarely produce fruit
when growing vigorously over trees or trellises, but as soon as
branches were thrown otf which could not attach themseh^es to
supports, these lost their vigor, and the flowers produced seeds.
But even wlieu seeds resulted from the flowers of the Wistar-ia,
they were rarel^^ from the most vigorous at the commencement
of the I'aceme, but only after the weaker flowers had been reached
By a careful count, in many hundred cases he had found that in

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 51

racemes of the Wistaria which had produced seed-vessels, some
forty or fifty flowers, on the average, faded before one produced
seed.

These observations on Stapelia were of a similar chai'acter.
The axillary buds, in the normal condition of the plant, resulted
in branches only, the flowers proceeding only from the weaker
lateral accessory ones. But when the vegetative powers of the
plant are weakened, the axillary buds become flowering ones.
The rarity with which seed-vessels are produced by the Stapelia
under cultivation, he thought, might possibly be traced to some
cause relating to nutrition, rather than to matters connected with
pollination.

The observations were made solely on these wintei'-growing
plants, as illustrated by the specimens exhibited ; how far they
might be paralleled by open air growth during the summer, the
speaker could not say.

The following paper was ordered to be printed : —

52 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

ON A NEW EXTINCT GENUS OF SIRENIA, FROM SOUTH CAROLINA.
BY E. D. COPE.

Mr. Gabriel Manigault, the accomplished director of tlie Museum
of the University of South Carolina, at Charleston, has placed in
m}^ hands for determination an interesting fossil of that region.
It is the greater part of the right premaxillary bone of a large
sirenian mammal, containing the large incisor tooth or tusk char-
acteristic of the genus Halitherium. It, however, exhibits the
peculiarity of possessing, exterior to this tusk, a second large
tooth, which is probably also an incisor. This character distin-
guishes the form generically from other members of the order.
In Prorastomus Owen, tliere are an inferior incisor and a canine
not of sirenian type, but probably no superior incisors, or if
present, they are minute and conic. I propose that tlie genus be
named Dioplothei^ium. The only form with which it is necessary
to compare it is Hemicaulodon Cope,' the number of whose incisor
teeth is unknown. The one from which the genus is known, has
a dense external sheath of cementum, which is wanting from the
present genus.

The color of the specimen indicates that it belongs to tlie blue-
gra}' marl of the Carolinian (Heilprin) miocene of our Atlantic
region. It has, however, been exposed to the action of the water
of a later sea, as it carries the bases of several Balani.

The premaxillary bone differs from that of the Halitherium
minor Cuv. {H. xerreM Gerv.) and H. capgrandi Lart,, in the
much shorter sympliysis. The nareal border is also shorter,
judging from the position of the maxillar}^ suture, which is
further anterior than in the species named. The nareal border is
rounded and thickened, so as to overhang its lateral face at the
maxillary suture. The alveolus of the second incisor is large, and
is in close proximity to that of the first. Its posterior wall is
lost. Its fundus reaches to tlie maxillopremaxillary suture, but
as its anterior wall is entirely premaxillary, the tooth is probably
an incisor, and not a canine.

The anterior Incisor is a tusk of flattened form, with a slight
taper from base to apex, and a narrow diamond-shaped section.

' Proceedings Amer. Philos. Soc, 18G9, p. 190.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 53

Two end-sides of the diamond which present anteriorly, are shorter
and more divergent than the posterior two. The latter encloses
a wedge-shaped space, with an obtuse apex. Thus the posterior
edge of the tooth is narrow and rounded. Of the anterior lateral
angles the external is the more prominent. The tusk is gently
curved outwards, and the posterior lateral face is also concave in
anteroposterior section. The pulp cavity enters the crown for
two-fifths of its length. The latter is composed of uniform dentine,
and there lare no traces of cemeutuni or enamel. There are trans-
verse bands of several delicate rugas each, separated b}'^ considerable
spaces. I count eleven from apex to base. The tooth is also
obsoletely longitudinall}' striate, but cannot be called sulcate on
the external face. On the internal face the longitudinal concave
face is divided into a narrower and wider portion by a longitudinal
ridge which marks the middle of the shaft. The triturating surface
is narrow, and presents obliquely backwards. The projection of
the crown bej'ond the alveolar border is not more than one-fourth
the total length of the tooth.

The second incisor tooth is lost. Its alveolus shows that its
form was less compressed than that of the first. While its size is
considerable, it is evidently less developed than the first. Its
anterior border slightly overlaps the i)osterior narrow edge of the
anterior tooth.

Jleasurevients. M.

Vertical depth of premaxillary at septum between

I. 1, and I. 2, -128

Length of ditto at middle of side, . . . . "118

Length of symphysis, . . . . . . •126

Length of first incisor. ...... -176

( anteroposterior, . . . -050

Diameters do. at base ( anteriorly, . -027

I transverse - •"

'^ (posteriorly, . -Oil

T^- - 1 . no (anteroposterior, . . . -037
Diameters do. at "02 i ' '

^ ) . 1 anteriorly, . '020

m. irom apex, J transverse J^ -J

' ( posteriorly', . -007

Projection of do. beyond alveolus (about), . , -053

Transverse diameter of alveolus of I. 2, anteriorly, -025

This species may be called Dioplotherium manigaulti. in honor
of Mr. Manigault, to whom the University of Soutli Carolina
owes the present admirable condition of its Museum. The typical

54 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

specimen was found in or on tlie Wando River, northeast of the
city of Charleston.

This genus furnishes a first step in tracing backwards the phy-
logeny of tlie Sirenia. These animals doubtless present the same
phenomenon as that witnessed in the series of the Rhinoceroses,
Ruminants, and some others, viz., a gradual reduction in number,
and final extinction of the superior incisor teeth. In Rhj/tina
the extinction is complete ; in Halicore one remains. Dioplo-
therium with two, forms the passage to the primitive types, not
yet known, which possessed three. They are considerably
specialized in the present genus, and a reduction of size is to be
looked for in the first ancestral genera of the Sirenia.

From the proportions of the parts preserved, the Dioplotheritim
manigauUi was rather larger than a dugong.

A portion of a Sirenian pelvis said to have been procured from
the same locality, Wando River, was given me by Mr. Jacob
Geismar. It resembles considerably that of HaJitherium. A
portion of the ischium and pelvis is broken away, so that it is
not easy to determine positivel^^ whether there is an obturator
foramen or not. Their bases are, however, united for a considerable
distance beyond the acetabulum, and form a wide plate. The
ilium is a stout rod, expanding a little towards the crest, which is
broken away. The sacral articular surface is in two planes, one
the inner side, the other the posterior edge of the hone, and are
strongly impressed. The section of the shaft is subtriangular.
The acetabulum is small, has raised edges, and an irregular fossa
ligamenti teris notching its superior border.

Measurements.

Length from acetabulum to sacral face, exclusive, . '052

Width acetabulum, ....... -027

( anteroposterior, . . '018

Diameter shaft ilium, ■< . „, _

' (transverse, . . . -Olo

1883.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 55

February 20.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Forty-nine persons present.

The death of B. Howard Rand, M. D., a member, was announced.

Notes on Prehi.sloric (Jopper Tmplt'ments. — Mr. H. T. Cresson
made some remarks upon a hammer of native copper found in the
Bohemian Mine, at GreenLand, Michigan, in ISfifi, by Mr. S. F.
Peck, and now in the Academy's collection. It exhibits a distinct
laminar surface, caused by hammering pieces of native copper
together while in a cold state, a process in which our aborigines
living in districts north of Mexico, seemed to have accpiired great
proficiency. This is shown hy the numerous wedges, chisels,
hammers, and other articles found in the ancient mining-pits at
Keewenaw Point, Lake Superior, and at Isle Royal, together with
axes, spear- and arrow-points, ornaments, etc., in Ohio, and
throughout those sections of our country which at one time were
inhabited by the mound-builders, a race of people whose remains
indicate a state of advancement in the arts and manufactures
superior to the savage nations who succeeded them. It is a very
interesting fact, that recent discoveries have shown upon various
forms of copper implements, deposited in their burial places by the
mound-builders — markings similar to those left by moulds in the
process of casting. It may, therefore, be supposed that these
people were acquainted with the art of smelting, besides that of
hammering copper. Professor Foster in his " Prehistoric Races
of the United States," mentions the fact, that in a collection made
by Mr. Perkins, he saw copper implements of mound origin, that
bear well-defined traces of the mould. . . . " It is impossible,"
he adds, " to infer after a careful examination of tliese specimens,
that the ridges have been left in the process of hammering or
oxidation." • . . " The more I examine their arts and manu-
factures the stronger becomes my conviction that they were
somethiiig more than a race of barbarian people." From these
observations of Professor Foster, a skilful and cautious observer,
it would appear that two processes were used, not only of ham-
mering, but that of smelting, which latter process was in all
probability suggested by their supposed method of extracting the
masses of copper from their pits — remains of wliich may still be
seen in the Lake Superior copper regions before mentioned. Some
of these pits have been explored by Colonel Whittlesey, an account
of which was j)ublished in the " Smitlisonian Contributions to
Knowledge for 18(53." They were found to contain, in all cases,
among the debris, fragments of charcoal and ashes, with tiaces of
fires against the sides thereof, indicating the use of heat in the
process of extracting their ores, thereby aiding tlie wedges and
copper chisels which were driven in by means of stone mauls until

56 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

the desired pieces were detached. It may, therefore, be probable
from the fact, that the melting point of copper is aliout 1000° C. to
1398°, there was sutiicient heat generated by fii-es, used in above-
mentioned method, to smelt the small points of copper attached
to the larger masses, and that these people possessing the intelli-
gence and quick perception of the Indian races, weie led to notice
and utilize it in smelting copper and casting their work. The
artistic forms and finish of their copi^er implements, whether cast
or hammered, cannot fail to impress the observer that a race of
men existed in the earl}' history of our continent, whose origin is
enveloped in mystery, and whose skill rivals man of historic times,
assisted hy all the inventions of this mighty age of Iron.

IVie Tritahereular Type of Bivpey-ior 3Iolar Tooth. — Prof. Cope
made some observations on the trituberculate type of superior
molar tooth among the mammalia. He remarked that it is now
apparent that the type of superior molar tooth which predominated
during the Puerco epoch was triangular; that is, with two external,
and one internal tubercles. Thus of forty-one species of Mammalia
of which the superior molars are known, all but four have three
tubercles of the crown, tliough of these thirt^'-seven triangular
ones, those of three species of Feripti/chus have a small supple-
mentary lobe on each side of the median principal inner tubercle.

This fact is important as indicating the mode of development
of the various t^'pes of superior molar teeth, on which we have
not heretofore had clear liglit. In the first place, this tyi)e of
molar exists to-day only in the insectivorous and carnivorous
Marsupialia ; in the Insectivora, and the tubercular molars of such
Carnivora as i)ossess them (excei)ting the plantigrades). In the
Ungulates the only later forms of it in the Eocene are to be
found in the molars of the GorypJwdonfidse of the Wasatch, and
Dinocerata of the Bridger Eocenes. In later ei)ochs it is chiefly
seen only in the last superior molar.

It is also evident that the quadritubercular molar is derived
from the tritubercular by the addition of a lobe of the inner part
of a cingulum of the posterior base of the crown. Transitional
states are seen in some of the Peripfi/chidse {Aniaonchus) and in
the sectorials of the Pr-ocyonidap.

The Spinal Chord of Bafrachia and PeptiJia. — Dr. Harrison
Allen called attention to the characters furnished by the spinal
chord in the systematic study of batrachians and reptiles. In
making a i^esume of the researches of Stieda Liideritz, S. H. Gage
and J. J. Mason he had formulated the following structural features
which may be added to tliose cliaracters already employed by
systematists. In batrachians, as illustrated in Bana, Meno-
poma and Siren the connective is seen about the central canal
to be of unusual development, and in Siren to embrace the entire
chord in a conspicuous cortical layer. In addition to these
features, connective-tissue corpuscles are sparsely distributed

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 5*7

through the chord when studied in transverse sections. The poste-
rior columns are projected above the plane of the lateral columns
and exhibit distinct diiferences in the arrangement of nerve-fibres.
In lacertilians and crocodilians the commissures are perforated
longitudinally by a pair of columns of nerve-fibres. In ophidians
the posterior nerve-roots are seen to be rudimentary or absent and
when present to tend to arise from the cervix cornu of the poste-
rior horn of gray matter. In chelonians the motor-cells are few
in number; the anterior median fissure is of great width, the com-
missure of relatively great size, and the reticular fibres lying to the
lateral aspect of the gray columns are unusually well developed.

February 27.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.
Walter Rogers Furness was elected a member.

On DinodijysaK and Causus. — Prof. Cope drew attention to a
recent important discovery made by Prof. Peters, of Berlin, of
the new genus of venomous snakes, Binodipsas. He stated that
he regarded the genus as pertaining to the Gausidse^ a family he
had proposed as a subfamily in his first paper read before the
Academ\^ in 1859. As the only genus heretofore known, Gausus,
is African, the statement of Peters tljat Dmodipsan is South
American, adds an important fact to geographical zoology. Prof.
Cope then corrected a statement made by Peters in his Herpetology
of the Reise nach Mozambique (1882), that he (Prof. Cope) had
referred Gausus to the Vipers. In 1859 he had divided the
venomous snakes with vertical and hinged maxillary bone, into
the subdivisions of the rattlesnakes, the vipers, the Atractos-
pidines and the Causines. He then designated the entire group
Viperidffi after Bonaparte, and had not until later used Dumeril
and Bibron's term Solenoglypha for that division. But this did
not justify Peters in stating that he had referred the genus Gausus
to the Vipers, and that he, Peters, was the author of the separate
family- to receive that genus and Dinodipsas, the " Vipernattern."

He also corrected some other references to himself by Prof.
Peters in the Reise nach Mozambique. In one of these, Peters
had supposed him to refer to a combination of the genera Brem-
ceps and Ghelydohatrachus b}^ Peters, when he had really separated
them. Prof. Cope said that his language referred to their union
in the same family by Peters, which he did not approve.

Prof. Petal's also states that the peculiarities of the tongue in
the genus Hemisus, described by Steindachner and Prof. Co[)e,
nre due to mutilation. Prof. Cope could not coincide with this
view, and regards the structures descril^ed as normal.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

58 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [188c

A NEW UNIO FROM FLORIDA.
BY BERLIN H. WRIGHT.

TJnii Cunningham i. Plate I, figs. 1-4.

Shell ovate, ventricose and very inequilateral, smooth, inter-
rupted by numerous irregular, undulating lines of growth, causing
a scaly appearance near the margins, and very highly polished
above ; substance of shell very thick, constricted posteriorly,
angular behind and truncated before ; ligament margin moderately
arcuate and angular at the terminus (tip) ; posterior margin
wedge-shaped and slightly acuminate ; ligamental area elongately
cordiform and wide, nearl}^ forming a plane in old individuals ;
umbonal slope subangular from beak to margin ; anterior margin
angular above and somewhat abruptly rounded beneath ; basal
margin emarginate posteriori}^ in the males and uniformly curved
in the females ; epidermis usually dark chestnut or reddish brown,
interspersed with marginal bands of light horn-color; occasionally
the entire shell is of uniform light horn-color, wrinkled and entirely
destitute of rays ; greatest diameter near the middle of the umbos ;
beaks eroded and obtuse ; umbo broad and flattened ; nacre usually
a delicate pink : occasionally white ; cardinal and lateral teeth both
single in the right and double in the left valve, lateral teeth short,
slightly and uniformly curved and separated from the cardinal
teeth by a space equal to onedialf of their own length ; cavity of
the shell and beak both shallow ; dorsal cicatrices five and situated
above the centre of the cavity of the beak ; distinct anterior and
confluent posterior cicatrices ; ventral cicatrix usually present and
placed anterior to the centre of the cavity of tiie shell.

Habitat. — -Lakes of Sumter County, Florida.

This beautiful shell belongs near U. Buckleyi Lea, from which
it differs in being strictly ra^less in all stages of its growth, greater
diameter, more angular anteriorly above and more abruptly rounded
beneath, broader and flatter umbos and more abrupt posterior slope.
The cardinal teeth are much heavier and not as oblique as in
U. Buckleyi^ A large suite of the shells was sent to me by Mr.
T. L. Cunningham, of Yalalia, Sumter County, Florida, in whose
honor we name it.

Plate I, fig. 1, Unio Llaaiiinghami, old unile ; ~', full-giovvii iLinale ;
3, old male ; 4, young" male.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF THILADELPHIA. 59

NOTES ON THE BIRDS OF WESTMORELAND COUNTY, PENNA.
BY CIIAS. H. TOWNSEND.

Local lists have added so much to our knowledge of the range
and distribution of birds, that the following notes are submitted
as a contribution to the general fund of information. The species
enumerated represent perhaps not more than two-thirds of the
actual bird fauna of Westmoreland County. Many more might
probably be added, but I wish to restrict this list to those birds
identified with certainty, and have given onl}^ such as have come
under mj' personal notice, not having enjoyed the advantage of
comparing notes with a fellow-naturalist.

No special effort was made to find new birds, and this catalogue,
merel}' the result of observations jotted down from time to time
in my note-book, is ver^^ incomplete. It is hoped that its present
publication will call forth additional information, so that a supple-
mental paper may appear in the future.

Not having been a constant resident of the county since com-
mencing to note the birds, I aould not alwa3's collect at the most
fruitful seasons, consequently a large number of migratory birds
have escaped notice. The district being wooded and hilly, there
are no ver^- extensive marshes to harbor rail, snipe and other
swamp-loving birds. I feel confident that the number of water-
birds in general will hereafter be largely increased.

My rambles were mainl}' in the central portions of the count}'^,
along the Loyalhanna Creek, and in the vicinity of Latrobe, on
the line of the Penna. R. R. The Chestnut Ridge, a range of the
Alleghenies, extending through the S. E. part of Westmoreland,
is covered with heavy forests, and furrowed by deep wild ravines.
Many rare wood-birds doubtless lurk in these secluded spots, and
remain to be discovered by any one diligent enough to make the
search.

I may add that I have seldom taken a tramp through the forests
of Chestnut Ridge without seeing or shooting one or more birds
new to the region.

The species are arranged according to the second edition of
Pr. Coues' Check List.

60 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.

TURDID^.

1. Turdus migratorius. Robin.

A common and familiar bird. Stragglers are occasionally seen
in winter. Breeds abundantly.

2. Turdus mnstelinus. Wood Thrush.

Common in dense woods. An excellent songster, but not equal
to the Brown Thrush.

•i. Turdus fuscesoens. Wilson's Thrush.

Not very common.

4. Turdus unalascae nanus. Hermit Thrush.
An inliabitant of retired woods.

5. Mimus carolinensis. Cat-bird.

An abundant summer resident ; breeds.

6. Harporhynchus rufus. Brown Thrush.

Common ; nests in thickets and brush-heaps.

SAXICOLID^.

7. Sialia sialis. Blue-bird.

Common summer resident ; nests freely in artificial bird-boxes

near houses.

SYLVIIDJE.

8. Begulus calendula. Ruby-crowned Kinglet.

This and the next species are frequent in spring and fall.

9. Begulus satrapa. Golden-crested Kinglet.

10. Folioptila coerulea. Blue-gray Gnatcatcher.

Have taken but one specimen.

PABIDJE.

11. Lophophanes bicolor. Tuf ed Titmouse.

Common ; noticed oftener in winter than in summer.

12. Parus atricapillus. Black-capped Chickadee.

Associates with the last.

SITTID^.

in. Sitta carolinensis. White-bellisd Nut-hatch.

Resident, quite common. The Nut-hatches and smaller Wood-
peckers are indifferently- known as "sap-suckers" in this region.

14. Sitta canadensis. Red-bellied Nut-hatch.

Seen occasionally in spring.

CERTHIDJE.

15. Certhia familiaris. Brown Croepor.
A shy inhabitant of the woods.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 61

TROGLODYTIDiE.

16. Troglodytes domesticus. House Wren.

Apparently uot common. A pair nested on a beam in our
cellar, in 1880, and remained with their brood until the latter part
of July.

17. Anortliura troglodytes hiemalis. Winter Wren.

Resident ; frequently seen in winter in ravines and thickets.

18. Telmatodytes palustris. Long-billed Marsh Wren.

Seldom seen ; inhabits reedy swamps.
SYLVICOLIDJE.

19. Uniotilta varia. Black-and-wbite Creeper.

Occasionally seen in summer.

20. Dendrceca aestiva. Summer Warbler.
Common in spring and summer.

21. Dendrceca virens. Black-throated Green Warbler.
Migratory.

22. Dendrceca ccerulesoens. Black-throated Blue Warbler.
Migratorj'.

23. Dendrceca coronata. Yellow-rumped Warbler.
Migratory ; common.

24. Dendrceca blackburnae. Blackburn's Warbler.

Common during spring migrations.

25. Dendrceca striata. Black-poll Warbler.
Migratory.

2(5. Dendrceca castanea. Bay-breasted Warbler.

Saw several in the spring of 1881.

27. Siurus auricapillus. Golden-crowned Thrush.

Rather common in damp woods ; remarkable for its oven-shaped
nest on the ground.

28. Siurus motacilla. Large-billed Water Thrush.

Have seen it twice in a rocky ravine in Chestnut Ridge.

29. Geothlypis trichas. Maryland Yellow-throat.

Summer resident; common in briar patches and dense thickets.

30. Myiodioctes canadensis. Canadian Flycatching Warbler.
Migratory ; taken but once.

31. Setophaga ruticilla. Eedstart.
Not common.

TANAGRIDJE.

32. Pyranga rubra. Scarlet Tanager.
Summer resident ; common.

62 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

HIRUNDINIDJE.

■VS. Hirundo erythrogastra horreorum. Barn Swallow.
Common.

34. Petroohelidoa lunifrons. Cliff or Eave Swallow.

Breeds abundantly.

35. Steleidopteryz serripecnis. Rough-winjjed Swallow.

Have a single specimen, which I shot near Youngstown.

36. Progne subis. Purple Martin.

Very common ; breeds freely in bird-houses in the villages.

AMPELID^.

37. Ampelis cedrornm. Ce 'ar Waxwing; Cherry-bird.

Quite common, especially when cherry-trees are in fruit.

VIREONID^.

38. Vireo olivaceus. Red-eyed Grcenlet.

Common in orchards and groves.

39. Vireo solitar US. Blue-he ided Greenlet.

Apparently migratory.

LANIIDJE.

40. Lanius borealis. Gt. Northern Shrike: Butcher-bird.

Very I'are ; I have seen it near Latrobe.

PRINGILLIDiE.

41. Faseer domesticus. House Sparrow ; European Sparrow.

This irrepressible foreigner has established himself in our towns
and villages, to the total exclusion of native songsters.

42. Carpodaous purpureus. Purple Finch.

Not common ; have seen but few individuals, and those in
spring. Probably only migratory here.

43. Astragalinus tristis. Am. Goldfinch : Thistle-bird.

Summer resident ; abundant ; breeds.

44. Pleclrophanes nivalis. Snow Bunting.

One of my friends described to me a flock of bii'ds which he
saw flying about the fields during very severe weather in Jan.,
1881, which, from his description, must have been Snow Buntings.

45. Pocecetes gramin.eu>. Grass Finch.
Common ; breeds.

46. Melospiza palustri^ . Swamp Sparrow.

Common.

47. Melospiza f^sciata. Song Sparrow.

Common : breeds.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 63

48. Junco hiemalis Snow-bird.

Common in winter.

49. Spizella monticola. Tree Sparrow.

Common in winter.

50. Spizella domestioa. Chipping Sparrow ; Chippy.

Summer resident ; very common, nesting in garden buslies.

51. Spizella agrestis Field Sparrow.

Common in summer.

52. Zonotrichia albicoUis. White-throated Sparrow,

Not common.
5.'5. Zanotrichia leucophrys. White-crowned Sparrow.
Not common.

54. Passerella iliica. Fox Sparrow.

Rather rare ; occasionally seen late in antumn.

55. Zamelodia ludoviciana. Rose-breasted Grosbeak.

Uncommon ; have taken occasional specimens in midsummer in
the forests of Chestnut Ridge.

56. Passerina cyanea. Indigo-bird.

Common summer resident. ♦

57. Cardinalis virginiana. Cardinal Grosbeak ; Red-bird.

Frequent both in summer and winter ; have seen numbers of
them in Chestnut Ridge, where they probably breed, as I have seen
quite young birds there. One which I crippled by a shot in the
wing, lived in a cage for more than a j^ear and became an accom-
plished whistler.

58. Fipilo erythrophthalmus. Chewink; Ground Robin.

Common everywhere, in bushes and hedges.

ICTERID^.

59. Dolichonyx oryzivorus. Bobolink,

Summer resident ; gregarious in the fall migrations.

60. Molothrus ater. Cow-bird.

Yery common in summer ; I have seen its eggs in nests of the
Indigo-bird and Chipping Sparrow.

61.^Agel8BUS phoeniceus. Red-winged Blackbird.

Breeds plentifully.

62. Sturnella magna. Meadow Lark.

Abundant ; breeds regularly, gregarious in the fall. Have seen
stragglers in midwinter.

6.3. Icterus spurius. Orchard Oriole*.

Not common.

64 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

64. Icterus galbula. Baltimore Oriole; Hang-nest.

A familiar bird in summer, A pair nested regularly for several
seasons in the same tree near our door.

65. Scolecophagus ferrugineus. Rusty Grackle.
Common.

66. Quiscalus purpureus. Crow Blackbird.

Common everywhere,

CORVIDiE.

67. Corvus corax. Eaven.

Old residents report a "crow" of very large size, as once com-
mon. It was doubtless the Raven.

68. Corvus frugivorus. Common Crow.

Breeds regularly.

69. Cyanociita cristata. Blue Jay.

Resident throughout the year ; common,

TYRANNID^.

70. Tyrannus caroliaensis. King-bird: "Bee-bird."

Summer resident ; common ; much persecuted by bee-keepers,
who imagine it is destructive to bees.

71. Myiarchus crinitus. Gt. Crested Flycatcher.
Not as common as the last.

72. Sayiornis fusca. Pewee.

"Very common ; has nested under the eaves of our porch fre-
quently.
7:^>. Contopus virens. Wood Pewee.

Quite common in woodlands.

CAPRIMULGIDJE.

74. Antrostomus vociferus. Whip-poor-will.

Common in summer; a bird often heard after nightfall, but
seldom seen.

75. Choidediles popetue. Night-hawk.

Yery common in summer ; confounded with the last by many
persons; but, unlike it, the Night-hawk soars high in the air ; both
species nest on the ground.

CYPSELIDiE.

76. Chaetura pelasgica. Chimney Swift.

Common ; have seen numbers of them circling about tall chim-
neys, where they had nests.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 65

TROCHILID^.

77. Trochilus colubris. Ruby-throated Humming-bird.

Quite common ; I once found a nest containing eggs, near Beatty
Station, P. R. R.

ALCEDINID^.

78. Ceryle alcyon. Belted Kingfisher.

Common ; breeds regularly ; have seen stragglers as late as
Dec. 20, when all streams were frozen.

CUCULIDJE.

79. Coccygus erythrophthalmus. Black-billed Cuckoo.
Common ; breeds.

80. Coccygus americanus. Yellow-billed Cuckoo.

More common than the last ; usually called Rain-bird by

schoolboys.

PICID.^.

81. Hylotomus pileatus. Pileated Woodpecker.

Occasionally seen in heav}' -timbered localities.

82. Picus villosus. Hairy Woodpecker.

Resident ; common.

83. Pious pubescens. Dowuy Woodpecker.
Resident ; quite common.

84. Sphyropicus varius. Yellow-bellied Woodpecker.

Apparently not common.

85. Centurus carolinus. Red-bellied Woodpecker.
Rather common.

86. Melanerpes erythrocephalus. Red headei Woodpecker.
Abundant.

87. Colaptes auratus. Flicker; Golden-winged Woodpecker.

Very common summer resident.

STRIGID^.

88. Bubo virginianus. Gt. Horned Owl.
"A common resident.

89. Scops asio. Screech Owl.

Resident, very common.

90. Striz nebulosa. Barred Owl.
Resident, common.

91. Nyctea scandiaca. Snowy Owl.
Veiy rare.

66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

FALCONIDJE.

92. Accipiter fuscus. Sharp-shinned Hawk : Pigeon Hawk.

Not as common as the next species.

9;i. Accipiter cooperi. Cooper's Hawk.

Common ; have taken its nest,

94. Falco sparverius. Sparrow Hawk.

Veiy common ; breeds.

95. Buteo borealis. Red-tailed Buzzard ; Chicken Hawk-

Common ; breeds.

96. Buteo lineatus. Red-shou!dercd Buzzard.

Rather common.

97. Archi buteo lagopus sancti-jolianiiis. Am. Rough-legged Buzzard ; Black Hawk.

Very rare. A specimen was shot near Latrobe, in tlie spring of
1879, by Mr. Edgar Chambers. If I remember rightly, the bird
was perfectly black.

98. Pandi'^nhaliaetus. Fish Hawk: Osprey.

Rare ; I saw a specimen which was shot in the Lo^^alhanna
Creek, near Latrobe, in 18*79. Have seen specimens shot on the
Alleghen}'^ River, at the N. W. boundary of Westmoreland Co.

99. Haliaelus leucooephalus. Bald Eagle.

Occasional specimens have been taken. Fragments of one are

in my possession.

CATHARTID^.

100. Cathares aura. Turkey Buzzard.

Very rare ; formerly common, according to the statements of
old residents. Have seen several in an adjoining county.

COLUMBIDJE.

101. Ectopistes migratorius. Wild Pigeon.

Migratory ; appears in immense flocks in some seasons.

102. Zenaidura carolinensis. Carolina Dove; "Turtle Dove."

Breeds regularly ; abundant.

MELEAGRIDJE.

103. Meleagris gallipavo americana. Wild Turkey.

Resident ; no longer common ; a few are killed in the mountains

every year.

TETRAONID^.

104. Bouasa umbella. Ruffled Grouse; " Phea'^ant."

A well-known game-bird ; resident, common.

105. Ortyx virginiauus. Quail ; " Bob-white."

Resident, common ; neither this nor the last species as abundant
as in former years.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 67

CHARADRIID^.

106. .ffigialites vociferus. Killdeer Plover.

Summer resident ; abundant.

SCOLOPACIDJE.

107. Philohela minor. Woodcock.

Common; have seen it as early as Mai'ch 13.

108. Gallinago wilsoni. ?nipe.
Summer resident.

109. Tringoidc macularius. Spotted Sandpiper.
Common in summer ; breeds.

ARDEID^.

no. Ardea herodias. Gt. Blue Heron.

Migratory, occasional ; have two specimens in my collection,
shot on the Loyalhanna Creek.

111. Herodias egretta. Gt. White Egret.
Migratory ; irregular.

112. Butorides virescens. (ireen Heron.

Quite common in summer ; breeds.

113. Botaurus mugitans. Bittern.

Not common ; have one specimen shot by Mr. J. C. Head, of

Latrobe.

IlALLID.ai.

114. Rallas virginianus. Virginia Rai'.

Summer visitant.

115. Forzana Carolina. Carolina Rail : Sera.

Mr. G. N. Beckwith, of Latrobe, reports it common. Mr. G.
H. Adams, agent of the P. R. R., gave me the only specimen I
have seen in Westmoreland. It was found in a freight-car at
Beatty Station.

116. Fulioa americana. Coot; "Mud Hen."
Rather common.

ANATID^.

117. Cygnus columbianus. Am. Swan.
t)ccasionally shot on the Loyalhanna Creek.

118. Berniola canadensis. Wild Goose.
Migratory ; rather common.

119. Anas boscas Mallard' Duck.

Mr. G. N. Beckwith assures me of the occurrence of this and
the next two species.

120. Anas obscura. Black Duck ; Dusky Duck.

68 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

121. Dafila acuta. Pintail.

122. Querquedula carolinensis. Green-winged Teal.
Migratory.

123. Querquedula discors. Blue-winged Teal.

More frequent than the last.

124. Aix sponsa. Wood or Summer Duck.

Summer resident ; breeds.

125. Fuligula marila. Scaup Duck: Black-head.

Migratory ; usuall}^ abundant.

126. Fuligula ferina americana. Red-head: Pochard.
Probably migratory.

127. Clangula albeola. Buffle-head Duck ; Butter-ball.

Migratory ; common.

128. Harelda glacialis. Long-tailed Duck.

On J^ebruary 5, 1881, Mr. Harry Chambers shot a male of this
species, on the creek at Latrobe. It is tlie only instance of the
occurrence of this maritime duck so far inland, so far as I am
aware.

129. Erismatura rubida. Ruddy Duck.
Migratory ; abundant in spring.

l.SO. Mergus merganser. Goosander; Fish Duck,

Regularly migratory.

131. Mergus serrator. Red-breasted Merganser,

Migratory, occasional,

132. Mergus cucullatas. Hooded Merganser.

Irregularly migratory.

LARID^.

133. Larus delawarensis. Ring-billed Gull.

I have a specimen, shot on the Loyalhanna Creek, May 7, 1881.
Other species of gulls doubtless visit our streams during migration.

COLYMBID^.

134. Colymbus torquatus. Loon ; Gt. Northern Diver.
Migratory ; a few are shot every season by the gunners.

PODICIPIDJE.

135. Fodicipes cornutus. Horned Grebe.

Rare ; Mr. Harry Chambers gave me a specimen which he shot
on the Loyalhanna Creek. This is the only instance of its occur-
rence that I can cite.

136. Fodilymbas podicipes. Pied-billed Grebe; "Dipper."

Resident ; well known to gunners everywhere.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 69

March 6.
Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.
Twenty-six persons present.

Permian Fishes and Beptiles. — Prof. Cope exhibited some
specimens of fishes and reptiles from tlie Permian formation of
Texas. One of these was a new species of Crossopterygian fisli
which he named Ectosteorhachis ciceronius, which esliibited some
important characters of the posterior cranial region. He stated
that the base of the skull consists of ossified parachordals, and
these embrace the chordadorsalis posteriorly, and are continued
for a short distance posteriorly as a tube. Anteiiorly the chordal
groove is open. Trabecular not ossified. He considered the
cranial structure to be an excellent illustration of a permanent
embryonic type.

The most interesting reptile was a new genus which occupies a
place between the Pelycosauria with molar teeth, and those with
raptorial teeth, but with more resemblance to the former, or Dia-
dectidse. The teeth are placed transversely in the jaws, but the
crowns terminate in an incurved apex, without ledge. He named
the genus Chilonyx, and referred it provisionally to tlie Bolo-
sauridse. The t3^pical species is the Bolo,sauriis rajndens ( Cope,
1878), an animal with a skull as large as that of a hog, and with
robust limbs. The surface of the skull is divided by grooves
into numerous swollen areas, and some of these are, on the lateral
occipital region, developed into tuberosities like the rudimental
horns of the Phrynosoma douglassi.

Phenomena of Glaciation. — Professor Heilprin, referring to
his former communication on the phenomena of glaciation, stated
that if the principles laid down by him as to the limitation (in
height) of a polar ice-cap be correct, then the same principles must
likewise hold good for all portions of tlie earth's surface. In other
words, given an elevation of sufficient magnitude, then the upper
portion of the same, by virtue of its rising above the cloud-line,
must be either bare of snow or covered only with a comparatively^
feeble thickness of the same. This view, which the speaker
believed was first enunciated by Humboldt, receives confirmation
from observations made on the Alps and on other high mountain
peaks. Thus, according to Tschudi, only a comparatively very
feeble thickness of snow falls on the Alpine summits above an
altitude of about 10,800 feet, the heavy precipitation being princi-
pally confined to a zone comprised between 7000 and 9000 feet.
The brothers Schlagintweit determined the cumulus line in the

70 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [IS88.

same region to lie at a general elevation of 8-9800 feet, above
which storms were of only exceptional occurrence, and the atmos-
phere usually clear and serene. These observations as to feeble
precipitation were further confirmed by Dollfuss, who found that
on the Theodule Pass (10,800 feet) the total precipitation for the
six winter months amounted to onl}^ 7^ feet of snow. On the St.
Gothard, on the other hand, at an elevation almost exactly 4000
feet lower, nearly the same quantity fell in a single day. Agnin,
on the Grimsel (G150 feet) Agassiz found the winter snow-fall to
amount to 57^ feet. While, therefore, the highest Alpine summits
generall}' appear to be buried in an almost unfathomable thickness
of snow, there can be but little doubt that in actual fact this thick-
ness is but very moderate. This is proved by the circumstance
that under exceptional conditions the snow covering may almost
completely disappear as a result of a single season's melting. Thus
in September, 1842, the Ewigschneehorn was completel}^ dismantled
of its cap, and in 1860-1862 a whole series of the usually snow-
clad peaks showed only patches of snow. During the same period
the Stralech (11,000) feet could be crossed without the traveler
encountering a single patch of either hard or Soft snow (Reclus).
With these facts before us, we have good grounds for doubting
whether any extraordinary accumulation of snow, unless with a
much warmer climate, could take place in the region of the far
north (with a descending cloud line) on elevations of very great
magnitude. Granting, however, the possibility of a huge polar
glacier tending southward, some singular facts are brought out by
a calculation of its rate of progression. Allowing an average
rate of one foot per day. which is about that of the average Alpine
gl.'icier, it would necessitate for a glacier starting from about the
sixty-fifth parallel of latitude a period of no less than 25,000 years
for it to have reached the line of its terminal extension, the terminal
moraine. But with such an infinitesimal slope as such a glacier
must neoessarily have had, it ma}' be questioned whether its rate
of progression would have been more than one-fifth or even one-
tenth of that which has been here given it. At the average rate
of two and one-half inches daily, 125,000 years would have been
reqtiired for its southerly' progression, a period that would neavl}'
tide over the interval between the periods of greatest eccentricity
indicated by astronomers.

Professor Lewis remarked that arguments drawn from meteoro-
logical conditions as they now exist will not in all cases applj' in
considering the glacial epoch. The distribution of land and water
was so different in glacial times that meteorological conditions
must also have been different. He instanced facts which he had
observed in the valley of the Delaware and elsewhere, indicating
a depression south of the glaciated area, which produced a greater
water surface in the glacial epoch, and therefore dirterent meteoro-
lo"ical conditions. He remarked also that it was uiisafe to found
arguments upon any close analogy between the conditions of local

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 71

glaciers or isolated peaks and the great ice sheet of the glacial
epoch. While analogies might be drawn from the glacier of
interior Greenland or from the Antarctic ice-cap, he thought that
errors often arose from a too close comparison with more local
centres of glaciation.

Referring to the subject of glacial motion, Professor Lewis said
that while there were not yet sufficient facts at hand to determine
its rate, its general direction and continuit}' were clearly shown
in the striae on elevated summits. He spoke of the importance of
distinguishingthese high-level stria? from those occurring in valleys,
remarking that erroneous conclusions had frequently been drawn
from an examination of maps of strite, where the relative elevation
of the individual stria? was not noted. While the striae upon
mountain summits indicate the general direction of the top of the
ice, and are uniform over large areas, those in valleys show merely
the local movement of the lower strata, and, conforming more or
less to the direction of the valley in which they occur, vary in
each localit}' and are therefore of minor importance. A s an instance
he described some stria? near White Haven, Luzerne Co., Pa.
Those in the valley of the Lehigh near the tovvn bore S. 35° E. or
approximately down the valley, while on the othei\hand, upon the
summit of Penobscot Knob, 1100 feet higher than the valley
(2250 feet above the sea), the sti'ia? bore S. 10° W., this being the
general direction of ice-flow across northeastern Pennsjdvania.
In all cases the striae are at right-angles to the terminal moraine,
and they therefore point S. E. in western Pennsylvania. He
gave other facts which he had observed in Pennsylvania and else-
where, all pointing to the continuity of action and consequent great
size of the glacier. He spoke of the probable analogy between
the Antarctic ice-cap, some 2500 miles in diameter, and the Polar
ice-cap of glacial times, and mentioned CroU's estimate that the
former is twelve miles thick at its centre. In speaking of a Polar
ice-cap, he did not mean to imply, however, that the ice was
necessaril}^ thickest on the Pole. As in Europe the mountains of
Scandinavia and Scotland were probable centres of glaciation, the
glaciers from which joined to form the great meiwle-glace , so in
America either Greenland, Labrador, the Hudson Bay region, or
elsewhere, may have been centres from which glaciers grew finally
to coalesce into one mass of ice, the top strata of which flowed
southward to the great terminal moraine.

March 13.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-nine members present.
The death of Henry Scybert, a member, was announced.

72 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

A paper entitled " On the mutnal relations of the Bunotheriau
Mammalia," by Edw. D. Cope, was presented for publication.

Crystallized Serpentine from Delaivare. — Professor H. CARvrLL
Lewis remarked that a short time ago, his venerable friend, Dr.
Isaac Lea, had handed him for examination a specimen of Deweylite
from Way's feldspar quarry, near Wilmington, Delaware, upon
which were some crystals of an unknown micaceous substance.

The white, waxy deweylite, weathering to a pale yellow color on
the surface, contains numerous angular fragments of transparent
quartz, which vary in size from microscopic dimensions to frag-
ments two inches long b}^ one-half inch wide. In all cases these
fragments are perfectly sharp and are generally rhomboidal in
shape. These rhombic cleavage fragments are just such as would
be produced by throwing a heated crystal of quartz into cold
water. Under the microscope, the quartz is shown to contain
hair-like raicrolites and minute oval cavities, the major axes of
which are usually placed in one direction.^

The deweylite also contains irregular masses of feldspar ( albite),
which are more or less altered into deweylite. Unlike the frag-
m.ents of quartz, these feldspar nodules are almost invariabl}'^
rounded in outline, as though partially dissolved away The
feldspar has lost both its lustre and its hardness. It has a waxy
appearance, and its hardness is reduced to 4*5. In some speci-
mens one end is more altered than the other, and it is evident that
the deweylite is the result of the alteration of albite.

The third mineral in the deweylite is in the form of plates or
crystals of a micaceous substance of a pale smoky pearl color with
a faint greenish tinge. The plates may be several inches in diam-
eter, and are traversed by numerous joints or cracks filled with
deweylite, which are generally inclined to one another at angles
of 60-" and 120°. The crystals appear to be sections of an ortho-
rhombic crystal, bounded by six prismatic planes, whose angle of
intersection is 120°. In the polariscope, the mineral is seen to be
doubly refracting, and is biaxial with a small optic-axial divergence
(probably between 10° and 20°), the hyperboles being indistinct.

It has a strong pearly lustre, an eminent basal cleavage, almost
micaceous, and is brittle. It has a hardness of 2'5, and specific
gravity of 2'4l. It is translucent, and by transmitted liglit is
grayish or greenish yellow.

In the closed tube it gives oflT water and decrepitates slightly,
becoming blackish gray or dark steel-colored. In the blow-pipe
flame it blackens, then turns white, exfoliates slightly and fuses
with boiling at 4-5 to a white bead. In the salt of phosphorus
bead it dissolves completely to a clear glass which becomes milk-
white in a cold saturated bead. With cobaltic nitrate on charcoal

' V. Further notes on inclusions in gems Isaac Lea, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sc.
Phila., May, 1876.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 73

it turns pink. It is decomposed by hydrochloric or sulphuric

acid without gelatinization.

At the request of Professor Lewis, Mr. Reuben Haines had

made an analysis of the mineral wjth the following results : —
"SiO, . . . . . 43-63

MgO B^'ll

FeO 0-78

Al,03 2-23

H.O 13-20

99-55

Mr. Haines determined the specific gravity in a specific gravity
bottle containing a thermometer, the weighing being done at 60° F.

From the composition as well as from its physical characters
the mineral ap|)ears to be a true serpentine. Its optical characters
show that it is cr^'stallized, and not a mere pseudomorph. If so,
the crystallization of serpentine is micaceous, as already surmised
by Professor Dana.^

As the deweylite is the result of the alteration of feldspar, so
the serpentine has been altered from mica (muscovite). The rela-
tive amount of muscovite in the adjoining graphic granite is about
the same as tliat of the micaceous serpentine in the deweylite.
Moreover in certain specimens of feldspathic deweylite, where the
feldspar is not corapletel}^ altered, there occur crystals of hydro-
muscovite (margnrodite) in place of the micaceous serpentine.

Thus it is evident that the serpentine is changed from mica.
Were it not for the ready cleavage and the special optical charac-
ters of the serpentine, it should be regarded merely as a pseudo-
morph. The occasional markings at angles of 120°, though scarce
and imperfect, are in harmony with the same character belonging
to several other micaceous species among the magnesian hj^drous
silicates, and indicate a close relationship between the serpentine
group and the Yerraiculite group of minerals.

It is intere ting to find in the quartz, deweylite and serpentine,
just described, such complete evidence that they have been derived
from the direct alteration of graphic granite ( pegmatite). While
the albite and muscovite havechanged intodeweylite and serpentine
respectively, the quartz has been broken up into cleavage frag-
ments, and scattered through the deweylite. This fracturing of
the quartz may, perhaps, give a clue to the method of alteration.
As^Hunt^ has suggested, in an early period of geological history,
when the earth's crust was hotter than now, and when a high tem-
perature existed even at slight depths, thermal waters would abound
and chemical changes would be rapid. Should such waters, highly
charged with magnesian salts, come in contact with the heated

^ System of Mineralogy, p. 465.
'^ rhem. and Geol. Essays, p. 306.

74 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

feldspathic rocks, there might result such a change as is here shown
to have occurred. Certain facts which the speaker had observed in
the serpentine deposits of Chester County, Penna., notably in
Brinton's quarry, indicate that^a change from a granitic dyke into
serpentine Is not an uncommon occurrence.

The two points of interest offered by the specimens here described
are, 1. The crystallization of serpentine, as shown by its optical
character ; 2. The direct alteration of the feldspar and mica of
graphic granite into the magnesian minerals, deweylite and ser-
pentine, while the quartz has been fractured.

Contraction of Vegetable Tissue.^ Under Frost At tlie last

meeting of the Botanical Section, Mr. Meehan referred to a
prevalent opinion that the liquid in vegetable tissues congeah d as
ordinary liquid does, and, expanding, often caused trees to burst
with an explosive sound. Mr. Meehan made experiments with
young and vigorous trees, varying from one foot to three feet in
circumference. They were carefully measured in early winter when
the thermometer was about 40°, and again after they had been
exposed for many days to a temperature below freezing point, and,
at the time of measurement, to 10"^ above zero.

In no case was there the slightest evidence of expansion, while
in the case of a large maple (Acer dasycarpum)^ of 3 feet IH
inches round, there appeared to be a contraction of ^ inch. This
was the largest tree experimented with. In dead-wood soaked
with water, there was an evident expansion ; and the cleavage with
explosion, noted in the ease of forest trees in iiigh northern
regions, may result from the freezing of liquid in the centre or
less vital parts of the trunks of trees.

In some hardy succulents, however, instead of expansion under
frost, there was a marked contraction. The joints or sections of
stem in Opvntia Rafineaqui and 0. Missouriensis^ shrink remark-
ably with the lowering of the temperature. As soon as the ther-
mometer passes the freezing point, the shrinkage is so great that
the whole surface has the wrinkled appearance presented by the
face of some very aged person. A piece of Opuntia Bajinesgui,
which in November measured 4 inches in length, is but ;H now,
and is not half the thickness it was in the autumn. In the winter
when the thermometer was down to 10° above zero, the pen-knife
penetrated the tissue just as easily as in summer, and no trace
could be discovered of congelation in the juices of the plant.
Other succulents exhibited more or less signs of shrinkage under
extreme cold. MamWaria Nidtnllii, and M. riripora^ with
Echinocartus Simpsoni, a mamillose form, drew the mamnifc
upwards, and had them appressed as closely as the spines would
allow — and some species of Sempervivum did the same. This
could only be accomplished by the contraction of the main axis
from the apex downwards. Sediim Hisponiciim, which has not a
succulent axis, contracts its leaves into longitudinal wrinkles, pre-

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 75

senting the appearance of being withered or dead. Tliey expand
again in a few da3's of temperature above the freezing point.
Specimens of this Sedum, and of Opuntia Missouriensis^ preserved
just above freezing point under glass, did not shrivel — and a plant
of Echinocactus Simpsoni. taken under cover, after the mammae
had been appressed b}' frost, expanded them to its summer con-
dition in a short time afterwards.

Assuming from these facts that the liquids in plants which are
known to endure frost without injury, did not congeal, it might be
a question as to whnt power they owed this successful resistance.
It was [)robably a vital power, for the sap of plants, after it was
drawn from the tree, congealed easily. In the large maple tree
already referred to, the juice not solidified in the tree, exudes
from the wounded portions of branches and then freezes, hanging
as icicles ofteu six inches long from the trees.

March 20>
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty -eight persons present.

Note on a New Gold-purple -Dr. George A. Konig stated that

while experimenting with a solution containing

Ca,HiAs,0, . . . = 5-242

CaSO,

CaCl,

MgCl,

AuCl,

H.AsO,

= 2-983
= 4-890
= 2-736
= 0-112
= 10-290

26-1 63 grains per liter,
he observed that upon adding to it very slowly a solution of
one part of crystallized ferrous sulphate in ten parts of water,
stirring vigorously after each drop, at first a white turbidity
formed which gradually assumed a ver}^ rich purple color. The
fiocculent precipitate settles completely in twenty-four hours, but
may be collected on a filter at once. Sometimes the purple color
develops gradually, requiring several hours, the precipitate being
whife for some time. This result obtains, when less ferrous salt
is added than required. One cub. cent., containing yj^ milligr. of
gold, of the above solution with yV cub. cent, of ferrous solution,
developed a very fine precipitate. Sometimes the purple does
not develop at all ; the precipitate turns bluish gray and
remains so.

This purple substance can be dried at 100° C. without change of
color. Heated to red heat the pieces assume a glazed appearance
and turn black ; but the fine powder again shows a blue-purple

76 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

color. The purple obtained from 250 cub. cent, of the solution
contained

As.,0, . . = 0-0583 gram.

Fe.Os . . = 0-0340 "

Gold (Au) . . = 0-0188 "

CaSO, . . = 0-0060 "

The only jjold-purple heretofore known was the Purple of Cassias,
obtained by adding a mixture of stannic and stannous chlorides
to a dilute gold solution. Authors are divided in their opinions
as to whether the gold is contained therein in the metallic state
and only mechanically admixed as a red allotropic modification,
or chemically combined as gold dioxide. The speaker has
inclined hitherto to the first view, and finds in this ferric arseniate
gold-pu7'ple^ physically so very analagous to the stannic gold-
purple, a strong support to the mechanical hypothesis. Dilute
hydrochloric acid decomposes this purple at once into brown
gold, and arsenico-ferric solution.

A Flint Nodule from the Greenland of New Jersey. — ^Prof.
Leidy directed attention to a flint nodule, presented this evening,
obtained from the greensand of Pemberton, N. J. It is discoid,
about the size of a dollar, pitted and smooth, homogeneous and
bluish black, and exhibits no trace of organic remains. He
remarked that as flint nodules, regarded to be of organic origin,
were so exceedingly abundant in the chalk formations of Europe,
he had wondered that similar nodules were not of more frequent
occurrence in the greensand deposits, of contemporary ago, in
our country. The nodule presented was the only one of the kind
he had ever seen from the New Jersey marl.

March 27,
Mr. Geo. W. Tryon, Jr., in the chair.
Forty-five persons present.

April 3.

Rev. Dr. Henry C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.

Thirty-eight persons present.

A paper entitled " Aztec Music," by H, T, Cresson, was
presented for publication.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

1883] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 77

0!f THE MUTUAL RELATIONS OF THE BUNOTHERIAN MAMMALIA.
BY E. D. COPE.

The name Bunotheria was proposed b}' me for a series of
Mammalia which resemble in most technical characters the Eden-
tata and the Rodentia. That is, the^^ agree with these orders in
having small, nearly smooth cerebral hemispheres, which leave
the olfactory lobes and cerebellum entirely exposed, and in somie
instances the hemispheres do not cover the mesencephalum also.
From the two orders in question, however, they are easily distin-
guished. Their enamel-covered teeth separate them from the
Edentata, while the articulation of the lower jaw is different from
that found in the Rodentia. It is a transverse ginglymus, with
a postglenoid process in the Bunotheria, as distinguished from
the longitudinal groove, permitting anteroposterior motion, of the
Rodentia.

Such a group as is thus characterized will include two existing
groups recognized as orders — the Prosimiae and the Insectivora.
The latter group has always been a crux to systematists, and
when we consider the skeleton alone, as from the standpoint of the
palaeontologist, the difficulty is not diminished. Various extinct
types discovered in latter years, chiefly in the Eocene formations,
have been additions to this intermediate series of forms, giving
even closer relations with the orders already adjacent; i. e., the
Edentata, the Rodentia, the Prosimiae, and the Carnivora. As is
known, the groups corresponding to these orders have been
named respectively the Taeniodonta, Tillodonta, Mesodonta, and
Creodonta. With great apparent diversity ,.these suborders show
unmistakable gradations into each other and the two recent orders
alread^y mentioned. As such, I may mention Psittacotherium,
which relates the Tseniodonta and Tillodonta ; JEsthonyx, which
relates the Tillodonta with nearly all the other suborders ;
Achsenodon, which connects Creodonta and Mesodonta, and
Cynodontomys, which may be Mesodont or Prosimian. Then
the existing Ghiromys most certainly connects Tillodonta and
Prosimiae.

My original definitions of the suborders of the Mesodonta, given
in vol. ii of the U. S. Geological Survey under Capt. G. M.
Wheeler, p. 85, omitted the Prosimiae, and embraced a number

78 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

of characters whose significance must be reexamined. Thus it is
impossible to characterize the Creodonta as lacking a trochlear
groove of the astragalus, in view of the form of that element in
Mesonyx and Mioclaenus, where the groove is more or less dis-
tinct. It is impossible to distinguish the Insectivora from the
Creodonta by the deficiency of canine and large development of
incisor teeth. In Rhynchocyon the canines are large, and the
superior incisors wanting, while in Centetes the arrangement of
these teeth is precisely as in the Creodonta. As to the large
Achsenodon and other Arctocyonidae^ I find no characters whatever
to distinguish them from the generally small Mesodonta.

In view of these inconsistencies, I have reexamined the subject,
and find the following definitions to be more nearly coincident
with the natural boundaries of the divisions of this large order.
The importance of the character of the tritubercular superior
molar has recently impressed me (see Proceedings of the
Academy, 1883, p. 56), as it had previously done Prof. Gill.
This zoologist has already distinguished two divisions of the
Insectivora (without the Galeopithecidae), by the forms of the
superior molar teeth. The first possesses quadritubercular molars
above, the second tritubercular. That these types represent
important stages in the development of the molar dentition I have
no doubt. These characters far outweigh in importance those
expressing the forms of the skull, matters of proportion only,
with which a few systematists unnecessarily overload their diag-
noses. Such characters are of little more than specific value, and
serve to obscure the mind of the inquirer for a true analysis.
They may be used empirically, it is true, to determine relation-
ships when the diagnostic parts are wanting.

I propose to transfer the Insectivora with tritubercular superior
molars to the Creodonta, in spite of the fact that some of them
(Mythomys, Solenodon, Chrysochloris) have but weakly developed
canine teeth, and Chrysochloris has large incisors. As an extreme
form, Esthonyx will follow, standing next the Tillodonta. It will
then be necessary to transfer the Arctocyonidae and all the
Mesodonta to the Insectivora, where they will find affinity with the
Tupeeidae. These have well-developed canines and small incisors,
as in the extinct groups named. The Chiromyidse must be dis-
tinguished from all of the other suborders, on. account of its
rodent-like incisors, combined with its lemur-like feet.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 79

The characters of the six suborders will then be as follows :

I. Incisor teeth growing from persistent pulps :
Canines also growing from less persistent pulps, agreeing with
external incisors in having molariform crowns ; i. Tseyiiodonta.
Canines rudiraental or wanting ; hallux not opposable ;

II. Tillodonta.
Canines none ; hallux opposable ; iii. Daubentonioidea.

II. Incisor teeth not growing from persistent pulps :
Superior true molars quadrituberculate ; hallux opposable ;

IV. Prosimise,
Superior true molars quadrituberculate ; hallux not opposable ;

V. Insectivora.

Superior true molars trituberculate or bituberculate ; * hallux not

opposable : Vi. Creodonta.

While the above scheme defines the groups exactly, and, so far
as can now be ascertained, naturally, I do not doubt but that
future research among the extinct forms will add much necessary
information which we do not now possess. It is possible that the
group I called Mesodonta may yet be distinguished from the
Insectivora by characters 3'^et unknown. But I cannot admit any
affinity between this group and any form of '' Pachyderms," as
suggested bj' Filhol, or of Suillines, as believed by Lyddeker.^
Such suppositions are in direct opposition to what we know of
the phylogeny of the Mammalia. These views are apparently
suggested by the Bunodont type of teeth found in various
Mesodonta, but that character gives little ground for systematic
determination among Eocene Mammalia, and has deceived palge-
ontologists from the days of Cuvier to the present time. The
only connecting point where there may be doubt as to the ungulate
or unguiculate type of a mammal is the family Periptychidse. of
the suborder Condylarthra. The suborder Hyracoidea may fur-
nish another index of convergence.

^ The internal tubercle is wanting in the last two superior molars in
Hymnodon. This genus, of which the osteology remains largely unknown,
has been stated by Gervais to possess a brain of higher type than the
Creodonta. Prof. Scott, of Princeton, is, however, of the opinion that this
determination is erroneous, and that Hymnodon is a true Creodont in this
and other respects. If so, the genus will perhaps enter the Amblyctonidm.

^ Memoirs Geological Survey India, Ser. x, 1883, p. 145.

80 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

The families included in tliese suborders will be the following :
Tjeniodonta. Galamodontidse ; Ectoganidse.
TiLLODONTA. Tillotheriidae.
Daubentonioidea. Ghiromyidse.
Prosimi^. Tar Slid ae ; (?) Anaptomorphidse ; (?) Mixodectidse;

Lemuridse.
Insectivora. Soricidse ; Erinaceidse ; Macroscelidse ; Tupaeidse ;

Adapidse ; ^ Arctocyonidse.
Creodonta. Talpidae ; Ghrysochlorididse ; Esthonyvhidae; Gen-

tetidde { = Leptictidae dim); Oxysenidse ; Miacidse ; Amblyc-

tonidse ; Mesonychidas.

I at one time called this order bj'^ the name Insectivora, a course
which some zoologists may prefer. But a name should as nearlj^
as possible adhere to a group to which it was first applied, and
whose definition has become currently associated with it. Such
an application is correct in fact, and is a material aid to the
memory. There are various precedents for the adoption of a new
general term for a group composed of subordinate divisions which
have themselves already received names.

In order to determine the number of internal tubercles in some
of the Liseclivora, so as to ascertain the affinities of some ques-
tionable genera, it is first necessary to examine the homologies
of the cusps of the molar teeth. The opossums are characterized
by the presence of three longitudinal series of tubercles on the
superior molar. The homologies of these cusps are rendered
clear by the character presented by the fourth superior premolar,
where the anterior intermediate is wanting. The external cusps
are really such, and are not developed from a cingulum external
to the true external cusps, as appears at first sight to be the case
with such animals as the Talpidae. The intermediate cusps are
really such, although the posterior looks like the apex of a V-
shaped external cusp. In Peratherium the external cusps are
smaller than in Didelphys, and the intermediate Vs so much

' Two species of Pelycodus must be removed from this genus and family,
and be placed in the Creodonta with Miodcenus. They are the P. pelv/dens
and P- angulatus, which have the posterior inner tubercle of the superior
molars, a mere projection of the cingulum. I place them in a new genus
which differs from MioclcBnus in the possession of an internal cusp of the
fourth inferior premolar, under the name of Chriacus ; type C. pelvidens.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. , 81

better developed, that the type is much like that of the Talpidae,
in whose neighborhood I originally referred it.

This leads to a consideration of the question of the homologies
of the cusps in the genera of the old order of Insectivora proper,
and of the Greodonta. Mr. St. George Mivart has briefly discussed
the question, so far as relates to the former group.^ He com-
mences with the primitive quadrituberculate type presented by
Gymnura and Erinaceus, and believes that the external cusps
occupy a successively more and more internal position till they
come to be represented by the apices of well developed T's, as in
the ungulate types. The V's are well developed in several
families, and in Ghrysochloris the two V's are supposed to be
united and to constitute almost the entire apex of the crown,
while in Gentetes the same kind of a V forms a still larger part
of the crown.

I believe thnt these conclusions must be modified, in the light
of the characters of various extinct genera, and of the genus
Didelphys. In the first place there is an inherent improbability
in the supposition that tlie external V's of the superior molars of
the Insectivora have had the same origin as those of the Ungulata.
The movements of the jaws in the two groups are diflerent, the
one being vertical, the other partially lateral. In the one, acute
apices are demanded ; in the other, grinding faces and edges. We
have corresponding V's in the inferior dental series, and we
regard those as produced by the connection of alternating cusps
by oblique ridges. In homologizing the superior cusps, we have
as elements, two external, two intermediate, and two internal
cusps. The first are opposite the external roots, and the anterior
internal is opposite the internal root.

First, as regards Genletes and Ghrysochloris. Besides the
strained character of the h} pothesis that supposes the V-shaped
summit of the crown to repi-esent two V's fused together, there is
good evidence obtainable in support of the belief that the triangle
in question is the usual one presented by the Greodonta.

This clearly consists of the two external and the anterior
internal cusps united by angular ridges. The form is quite the
same as in Lepticti's and Mops, and nearly that of JJeliatherium,
where the external cusps are present. Gentetes and Ghrysochloris
only differ from these in that the external cusps are wanting. In

Journal of Anatomy and Physiology, ii, 188, figures.

82 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

addition, the latter genus presents a rudiment of the posterior
inner tubercle, as is seen in Deltatherium. An explanation similar
to this is admitted by Mr. Mivart to apply to the cusps of the
inferior molar of Centetes. It remains to ascertain whether tlie
cusp in this genus, Ghrysochloris, etc., represents an intermediate
or not.

Secondly, as regards the Taljjidse and Soricidae, where the
external Vs are well marked. If we examine the external cusps
in the genus Didelphys, we find that the posterior one becomes
gradually more anterior in its position, until on the second true
molar it stands largely above the interspace between the roots, in-
stead of over the posterior root. It will also be seen that the
anterior intermediate tubercle is distinct, and of insignificant
proportions, while the posterior intermediate is large and is
related to the posterior external, as is the apex of a V to its
anterior base. In this arrangement I conceive that we have an
explanation of the Y's of the Talpidse and Soricidse. The first
true molar of Scalops is a good deal like that of Didelphys, but
the anterior cusp is larger and there is no anterior intermediate
cusp, while the posterior external is of reduced size. The poste-
rior V is better developed than in Didelphys, but is composed in
the same way, of a posterior intermediate cusp, and a posterior
external with a posterior heel. These are united by stronger
ridges in Scalops, Condylura and Blarina, than in Didelphys.
On the second true molar in Scalops, a V represents the anterior
external cusp of the first true molar. Whether this Y has a con-
stitution like the posterior one, i. e., is composed of external and
intermediate cusps joined, is diflflcult to determine ; but it is prob-
ably so constituted. It seems to be pretty clearly the case in
Blarina, where the fourth premolar and first true molar may be
compared, with a resulting demonstration of the correctness of
this view. In Condylui'a, the Vs have become more developed
and the external cusps reduced, so that the analysis is more
difficult.

This interpretation applied to Urotrichus and Galeopithecus
gives them quadrituberculate molars, not trituberculate, as deter-
mined by Mivart. Mystoniys is tritubercular. The intermediate
tubercles are present, but are imperfectly connected with the ex-
ternal, so that Vs are not developed {vide figures of Mivart and
Allman). This genus offers as much confirmation of the homology

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

83

here proposed as do the opossums, but it differs from the latter
in having the anterior intermediate tubercle the larger, instead of
the posterior. Mystomys and Solenodon also confirm my deter-
mination of the homologies in Gentetes}

In conclusion I give the following synoptic view of the consti-
tution of the superior molar teeth in various genera of the
Bunotheria.

Cusps Present.

External.
Intermediate.
Two internal.

External.
No interme-
diate.
Two Internal.

External.
Intermediate
One internal.

External.
No interme-
diate.
One internal.

No external.
No interme-
diate.
Two internal.

No external.
No interme-
diate.
One internal.

Adapidae.

Grymnura.

Mystomyidae

Mesonyx.

Chrysochloris
(2d internal
rudimentary)

Centetes.

Tupaeidae.

Erinaceus.

Mioclaenus.

Leptietis.

Qaleopithecidae

Macroscelididae Miaeis.

Stypolophus.

Soricidae.

Urotriehus.

Talpldse.

(Didelphys.)

(Canis.)

Oxyaena.

Chriacus.

Deltatherium

Esthonyx.
(2nd internal
rudimentary)

Solenodon.
(do.)

1 This view was first advanced by the writer in the Annual Report U. S.
Geol. Survey Terrs., 1873 (74), p. 472.

84 proceedings of the academy of [1883.

April 10.
Rev. H. C. McCooK, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.

— — , _ _ — , _.

Thirty-two persons present.

Notes on Echinocactua. — Mr. Thomas Meehan announced, at
tlie meeting of the Botanical Section, the discovery of sensitive
stamens in Echinocactus Whipplei. This peculiarity had been
long known in Opuntia Rafinesqui and allied species, as well as in
Fortulaca., which, though its natural order was regarded as very
distinct in systems of classification, had much in common with
Cactaceae. The motion of the stamens when touched in this
species of Echinocactus was not instantaneous, several seconds
sometimes elapsing before the motion responded to the touch.
The flowers of this species are unable to expand to any great
extent, on account of their short tube, surrounded by long and
stiff spines. If the flowers could expand as in Opuntia^ and the
stamens lie flat, as in that genus, Mr. Meehan suggested that the
motion might be equal to that observed in Opuntia. The motion
in Opuntia was not always up towards the pistil, but might be
horizontal, to the rigiit or to the left — there seemed to be no rule.
That seemed to be the case also in the Echinocactus. The bending
was from the base, as the filament retained a perfectly straight
line during the movement.

Mr. Meehan further remarked that in descriptions of cactaceous
plants, the relative length of the pistil to petals or stamens was
often given. He had observed that in many species, about the
period of the ejection of the pollen from the anther-cells, the
stamens and style were of about equal length, the stellate stigma
being just above the mass of anthers ; but the style continued to
grow after the maturity of the anthers, and, in Echinocactus
Whipplei^ would finally reach to near half an inch above. He
had not been able to get any genera of Cactaceae to fruit under
culture except Opuntia,.^ unless they were artificially pollinized.
By the application of the flower's own pollen to the stigma, they
sometimes i)erfected fruit.

Mr. Meehan also remarked that in botanical descriptions,
Echinocactus Whipplei and Echinocactus polyancislrus were
described as having greenish or yellow flowers. His plants had
bright purple flowers, and he had no doubt wei'e correc ly referred
to the species named. They were from southern Utah.

Referring to Echinocactus uncinatus., he remai'ked that speci-
mens collected in New Mexico by George Vasey, and blooming
under culture, had the central spine double the length of the
others, whereas in the figure in Pfeiffer they are all represented
as uniform, and there were no green-edged sepals or bracts at the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 85

base of the flower, as in that figure, warranting the var. Wrightii
Eng.

On the Relations of Heat to the Sexes of Floioers. — At the
meeting of the Botanical Section on April 9, Mr. Thomas Meehan
referred to his past communications to the Academy, showing that
in monoecious plants female flowers would remain at rest under
a temperature which was sufficient to excite the male flowers to
active development. Hence a few comparatively warm days in
winter or early spring would bring the male flowers to maturity,
while the female flowers remained to advance only under a higher
and more constant temperature. In this manner the explanation
was offered why such trees were often barren. The male flowers
disappeared before the females opened, and hence the latter were
unfertilized. He referred especially to some branches of Corylus
Avellana, the English hazel-nut, which he exhibited before the
Section last spring, in which the male flowers (catkins) were past
maturity, the anthers having opened and discharged their pollen,
and the catkins crumbling under a light touch, but there were no
appearances of action in the female flower-buds. There were no
nuts on this tree last season. The jiresent season was one of un-
usually low temperatui'e. There had not been spasmodic warmth
enough to bring forward the particularly^ excitable maple-tree
blossoms. The hazel-nut had not, therefore, had its male blos-
soms brought prematurely forward. He exhibited specimens
from the same tree as last season, showing the catkins in a young
condition of development, only half the flowers showing their
anthers, while the female flower-buds had their pretty purple
stigmas protruding from nearly all of them.

Mr. Meehan remarked that his observatiqiis the past few seasons
had been so carefully made that he hardly regarded confirmation
necessarjr, but believed the further exhibition of these specimens
might at least serve to draw renewed attention to his former com-
munications.

April 11.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-two persons present.
The following was ordered to be printed : —

86 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

AZTEC MUSIC.
BY H. T. CRESSON.

Primitive music seems to have been limited to a few sounds,
produced either by percussion or by means of rude instruments ;
these sounds or notes in most cases, as musical authorities unite
in asserting, represented five tones of the diatonic scale, viz., the
tonic or prime note, second, third, fifth and sixth. This would
indicate that most barbarous nations were ignorant of the fourth
and seventh tones of the scales as known to us. Among the
Aztecs, whose remains show superior advancement in the arts, a
more thorough appreciation of music evidently existed. To speak
first of their percussive music, the huehuetl or large drum of the
great temple, at the ancient pueblo of Tenochtitlan, was covered
by the skins of serpents, and when beaten could be heard at a
distance of several miles. They had clay balls or rattles placed
inside of their grotesque clay images, also within the handles
attached to their earthenware vessels, which are generally hollow,
and contain pebbles or small pellets of clay.

The Poinsett collection possesses several objects among its
interesting and valuable specimens of ancient Mexican art, which,
unfortunately, are much injured or almost destroyed ; these are in
th>' form of a serpent's head, with protruding forked tongue, and
have a ball of clay placed within the mouth. The first-named
portion is attached to a handle of terra-cotta, to which, after an
examination of several specimens, I am inclined to think, were
joined large hollow cylinders of the same material. A portion of
these still remain united to the handle, suggesting that they must
have been concave. When shaken to and fro, the ball within the
head of this terra-cotta serpent rebounds from side to side, thus
producing a clear sound resembling that given by our American
rattlesnake {Crotalus horridiis) when irritated. A series of these
instruments may have been used in their religious ceremonies, and
were no doubt placed upon cylinders of large size, balanced so as
to regain the perpendicular when set in motion, and in swa^'ing
from side to side produced a rattling sound, suggesting that of
the serpent above named, which was esteemed a sacred animal by
these peoi)le.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 81

The desire to make imitations of objects hy which they were
surrounded emit musical tones, was no doubt suggested by the
songs of birds and various sounds produced by animals. Gurney,
in his admirable work entitled the " Power of Sound," page 143,
states that the third note of the scale has had a natural charm for
man as for the cuckoo ; thus this well-known musical authority
recognizes the fact that certain musical sounds or tones were
agreeable to the ears of man ; and hereafter, in a series of whistles
or pitch-pipes, exhumed from the sepulchres of these Aztec people,
I will endeavor to show that one of them is pitched almost
precisely in the tones given by the Mexican Hyludse. That
musical sounds attract the attention of barbarians and savages,
is well authenticated by travelers and those who have lived
among them ; it may therefore be supposed that these children
of nature noticed and strove to reproduce sounds, which, how-
ever harsh and unmusical to us, to them were pleasing, because
they recalled familiar objects. I am of the opinion that the chat-
tering of macaws and parrots can be imitated upon several instru-
ments I have denominated bird-calls, belonging to the Poinsett
collection, in the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia ; by
short, quick blowing, they emit sounds very similar to those given
by a flock of the above-mentioned birds.

Wind instruments were known to the Aztecs, as above indicated,
by the hii'd-calls ; they also possessed flutes, whistles made of sea-
shells and flageolets of baked day or terra-cotta.

There is a vase of this last-named material in the W. S'. Yaux
collection, now in the museum of the Academy of Natural Sciences
of Philadelphia, upon which musical sounds may be produced, by
applying the lips to certain parts. This unique specimen of a wind
instrument was formerly in the possession of my friend Professor
Leid}-, and afterward came into that of the late W. S. Yaux, Esq.
It is somewhat Roman in form, of a dark color, and ornamented
by four grotesque masks, placed around the exterior edge or upper
rimj of the base, between which, and the interior of the vessel,
there is a broad plane some two inches in width, that is perforated
at intervals by small slits at each side, exactly opposite the masks.
When covered by the lips and blown into, these slits emit certain
musical sounds ; by closing one of the eyes in the masks, which
are hollow and connect b}^ means of air-passages with the interior
of the vase and slits upon the plane surface, some approach to a

88 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [188-S.

half-tone lower than that proclucecl by leaving open the holes, can
be obtained. The discovery of the musical powers of this vase
is interesting, and I shall repeat the account of it given to rae
by Professor Leidy : '' Having been attracted by its artistic form
and decoration, [ bought the vase, and some time afterward pro-
ceeded to clean the slits or elongated holes in the rim and eyes
of the masks, these being filled with earth ; in applying my lips
to the slits, so as to blow out particles of dirt which remained
therein, I found to my surprise that they emitted musical sounds."

Mr. E. A. Barber, in a valuable article upon " Indian Music,"
contributed to the American NaturoXist of March, 1883, page
270, mentions a curious wind instrument of turtle-like form, which
was procured on the island of Ometepec, by the late Dr. Berendt
(during his recent excavations among the ruins and mounds of
Central America), which, by certain manipulations, can be made

to produce a number of airs " This unique relic is the

first of the kind found among the remains of the old Nahuatl
races which evinces any particular advancement in the art of
music."

I must beg leave to diflfer from Mr. Barber in this last assertion,
from the fact that in the Poinsett collection there exist Aztec
flageolets capable of producing not only the fourth and seventh of
the diatonic scale, but also the entire chromatic scale. A descrip-
tion of one of these flageolets will first be necessary, before
explaining how the above-mentioned scales may be obtained. It
measures nine inches in length, and the thickest portion is about
three-quarters of an inch in width — being generally in the centre
of the flageolet. The neck is considerably flattened, and measures
seven-eighths of an inch in width , grad ually contracting at the mouth-
hole, and growing more cylindrical in form as it approaches the
centre of the instrument. Viewed in profile a graceful curve from
above downward joins the neck to the body. At the junction of
these two parts may be seen protruding the portion which I have
denominated the clay reed (Plate III, A); through this the cur-
rent of air passes from the lungs of the performer into the bod}'
of the instrument, which is pierced by four finger-holes. ' The

' After a careful search I am unable to find in the Poinsett collec-
tion of Mexican antiquities, any Aztec flageolets posses&in* five finger-
holes, as stated by Mr. Barber in the American Naturalist of March,

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 89

terminal portion, or bell, is slightly concave exteriorly, of circular
form, and decorated with designs of unique patterns, which have
been stamped thereon while in a moist condition, b}' means of
forms or dies ; some of these, evidently used for a similar purpose,
and made of baked clay, are to be seen in the Academy. The
internal portion of this bell is hollow, becoming convex as it
approaches the edges, and contracting at the point of connection
with the tube or barrel, to a thickness of half an inch. Around
this is foi'med a small cup-like cavity, which bears a most important
part in performing upon the instrument. A careful examination
and analysis of the construction of these instruments was made
from a large number of fragments, some of which were splintered
and broken in such a manner that the internal structure was clearly
shown. It appeared that they must have been formed in four
parts, the neck, clay -reed, body and foot or bell, which were
afterwards united together while in a moist condition. Traces of
the sutures, although in most cases concealed by the modeling,
can be detected in man}^ of the instruments.

It has been asserted in the beginning of this article, tliat the
fourth and seventh tones of the diatonic scales could be produced
upon these four-holed instruments (Plate III, fig. 1), and as this
assertion is somewhat contradictory to most authorities who have
liitherto written upon the subject, my method of proceeding shall
be given in detail, witli the result obtained. I propose to show —

I. That the fourth, seventh and octave tones of the diatonic
scale as known to us exist in the Aztec instruments.

II. That the additional sounds or semi-tones, which constitute
the chromatic scale, are likewise present.

That the fourth and seventh tones do exist in the scale of the
ancient Mexicans or Aztecs, and can be produced upon their clay
flageolfets, will be hereinafter shown.

The objection may be raised, however, that although we, with
our knowledge of music, which has only been gained by the
experience and wisdom of centuries, can obtain all these tones,
3'et the Aztecs may have been ignorant of the ability of the

1883, page 270 ; although the ancient Peruvians seem to have possessed
flutes of this description, one of which is now in the cabinet of the
American Philosophical Society of Philadelphia, and is mentioned by
Mr. H. S. Phillips, Jr., their Corresponding Secretary, in his interesting
report for 1882, p. 15.

90 PROCEEDI\GS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

instruments under consideration to produce them. In answer to
this, I will simply state that such an objection would be against
the evidence of historical and musical authorities, who have
demonstrated that musical instruments of all nations, even of the
most savage, have been constructed with a thorough knowledge
of their full value and ability in the production of musical tones.
This is shown, even in our day, by the savage tribes of Africa,
and those of almost inaccessible regions in Asia, who thoroughly'
understand the instruments in use among them ; and from these,
we, with all our knowledge and liiusical comprehension, produce
no other tones than can the natives themselves.

The flageolets, having been tested and compared with the flute
and organ, were found to be pitched in the following keys : two of
similar color and shape stand in the key of C natural, and one of
like color in B natural ; another, smaller in size, stands in F sharp,
and the most perfect sounds emitted came from the flageolet of a
dark brown color, which was pitched in tlie key of B flat ; upon this
instrument most of the experiments were conducted. It was found
that by covering all four holes of the flageolet with the finger,
C natural was produced with the bell open (Plate II), and by closing
this last-named portion with the little finger, B flat could be ob-
tained, thus lowering the instrument a tone and a half in sound.
This action I have denominated finger-stopping, and it is a curious
fact, that this same method has been practiced by musicians of
our day with the hand upon the French horn. The fact having
been demonstrated, that the cavity in the cup-shaped depression had
been used for this purpose, it was necessary to find whether the
finger-stopping could best be accomplished by the fourth finger
of the right hand, or the little finger thereof. After repeated trials,
the little finger was found best adapted to that purpose, which
obliges the musician to hold the flageolet in the following manner:
the body of the instrument rests between the ball of the thumb
and the first or index finger of the left hand, covering 4 D
(Plate II), thus supporting the instrument. Hole No. 3 C is
covered by the second finger of the same hand. No. 2 B by
the index finger of the right hand, and 1 A b}' the second finger;
the little finger is used as stated — for the finger-stopping. The
instrument being held as above described, the fourth of the scale
or E flat can be obtained by half-closing the second hole or letter
2 B (Plate II), 3 C and 4D remaining closed. The sew^^/j, which

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 91

is A natural, is obtained by closing 2 B,and leaving the other holes
open. If these notes thus obtained be compared by a competent
musician with any wind instrument of concert pitch, such as the
flute, the truth of this assertion will be evident.

Musical authorities seem to have arrived at the somewhat hasty
conclusion, that the Aztec people were onlj^ possessed of a knowl-
edge of the so-called Pentatonic scale, but with all due deference
to their opinion, I must beg leave to differ upon this point, as it
is not probable that intervals which are so easily obtained, were
unknown to artisans capable of manufacturing these flageolets of
terra-cotta, pitched in different keys, and of determining the exact
distance apart of the finger-holes. This superior knowledge of
their artisans is still further shown by the ingenious and scientific
arrangement of the finger-perforations made in their whistles, or
l)itch-pipes, described hereafter, which, when covered, reduce the
tone exactly a fourth ; equaling the dominant of the scale.

The more I study the musical instruments of these people, the
firmer becomes my conviction that they must have possessed a
full knowledge of the diatonic and chromatic scales ; which can
be produced upon the four-holed clay flageolets by any one capable
of manipulating our modern flutes.

The instrument which stands in B flat, can be made to produce
that note by closing all the holes and the bell (full finger-stop).
B natural is more difficult to obtain, and is produced by a slight
movement, with much care and precision, of the little finger out-
ward from the centre of the cup-like cavity ; from which fact, and
the skill required to produce C sharp, E flat and G natural, I am
inclined to believe that the Aztecs, like the ancient Peruvians,
possessed musicians trained from early j^outh, who no doubt
assisted in their religious ceremonies and festivals. C natural
is produced with the four holes closed, and the cup-like cavity
open.' C sharp, 1 A half open, 2 B, 3 C, 4 D closed ; D natural,
1 A entirely'- open, 2 B, 3 C and 4 D closed. E flat, or the
fourth of the scale, is produced by leaving 1 A open, 2 B half-
closed, 3 C and 4 D closed; E natural, 2 B open, 1 A, 3 C and
4 D closed ; F natural, 1 A and 2 B open, 3 C and 4 D closed ;

' It may be seen in the Plate, that where it is necessary to close the cup-
like cavity in these tlageolets, S is used to indicate entirely closed, half S
for half-clo&ed, or half finger-stop, and O for open bell.

92 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

F sharp, 1 A open, 2 B closed (see Plate), 3 C open and 4 D closed ;
G natural, 1 A open, 2 B half-closed, 3 C open, and 4 D closed;
A flat or G sharp, 1 A, 2 B, 3 C open, and 4 D closed. A natural,
the seventh of the scale, 1 A open, 2 B closed, 3 C and 4 D open.
B flat, octave, is obtained by leaving all the holes and the bell
open.^ It becomes apparent by the above scales obtained upon
these four-fingered clay flageolets, representing the keys of B flat,
B natural, C natural and F sharp, that many interesting combi-
nations could be obtained by their simultaneous use, such as con-
certed pioces, each flageolet sustaining a part.

Professor J, S. Cox says : " I cannot imagine what object they
had in view for pitching their flageolets in different tones, unless
each instrument was intended to perform a separate part, which
when played together produced harmonious sounds ; this method
is used in our day by some of the fife and drum corps, there being

three, different kinds of fifes used in concert They

are too truthful in their various pitches (such as B natural,
C natural, B flat, F sharp) for these to be accidental." These
opinions of Professor Cox, whose reputation as a soloist upon
the Boehm-flute is well known in America, cannot fail to impress
the cautious observer that something more than mere accident
is represented by these instruments standing in diflTerent keys.

The Aztec whistles, or pitch-pipes, in the collection of antiqui-
ties already mentioned, were ascertained to stand in the key of
E flat, and together yield a full octave, so that four persons could
play simple melodies upon them.^ The fact that duplicates exist
in several of the above-mentioned whistles and flageolets adds
much probability to the theory already advanced, that these are
not tones which happen to stand in the keys enumerated, but that

^ It has been suggested that it was possible to produce the entire scale
(without closing the bell) by means of careful fiuger-inanipulation upon
any reed-formed instrument with four holes. Six notes can be obtained
by careful fingering ; an approach to the seventh (though very imperfect
and flat in sound) can be produced by leaving all the holes open, and
blowing strongly. After repeated trials, I am of the opinion that there is
no way of producing the octave upon these four-holed Aztec instruments,
except by means of finger-stopping.

^ I have numbered these pipes from one to eight (tonic to octave).
They, with their existing duplicates, may be seen in the museum of the
Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 93

the3^ were made by artisans who thoroughly understood the prin-
ciples of the scales as known to us ; moreover, upon these whistles
a ninth, eleventh and twelfth can be obtained (the tenth or
G natural is missing), which gives, with this exception, an octave
and a fourth.

Certain grotesque decorations upon these instruments maj'^
have some siguiflcation ; the cue which produces E flat, or the
tonic of the scale, possessing no ornamentation, is an exception
to most all the others, which are enveloped b^^ frog-like appen-
dages or legs, with feet attached, Tlie bodies are tipped with an
ornament resembling the tails of young sparrows, and the under-
neath portion thereof is furnished with an appendage or button,
pierced by a hole, through which a cord was passed by which it
was probably attached to the body of the performer. (Plate III,
fig. 3.)

The ingenious way in which the Aztec whistles are modeled is
well worthy of description, and must have occupied a great deal
of time to accomplish it. They have no doubt been made in four
parts, like the flageolets, and also possess a clay reed, which is
enveloped by the neck, to which is attached the body, furnished
with a vent-hole. This bod^' is a circular form, something like
the bulb of a retort (such as used in our laboratories), and was
no doubt fashioned upon a ball-shaped or circular form, and then cut
into two portions ; one of these was joined to the neck, and the
other piece fastened to it by careful modeling. An example of this
can be seen in the double whistle (Plate III, fig. 4), where these two
parts are shown somewhat separated ; no doubt the effect of the
action of the heat while in the kiln. The object of thus forming
the body in two portions can readily be seen by an examination
of these instruments, which are, with few exceptions, very care-
fully made, and tlie interior portion of the bod}' quite smooth and
regular within, as any imperfection would interfere with the regu-
larity and fulness of the sound. A smooth round form of some mate-
i;ial was chosen upon which to model or shape the body portion,
which it would be necessary to divide in two, so as to release it there-
from, thus explaining the division of the above-named parts. The
bodies of these whistles are each pierced by a stop-hole, w^ich, if
left unclosed when the instrument is blown, gives a clear piercing
sound ; by covering the same, a note one-fourth below that given
while open, is produced. This hole is generally placed to the

94 > PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

right side of a line drawn around the body from the centre of the
vent. In playing the scale of E flat, all of the holes in these pipes
are left open with the exception of that of pitch-pipe No. 2, which
is closed, so as to produce F natural.

To recapitulate, it would appear : I. That upon the four-holed
clay flageolets the chromatic and diatonic scales can be produced
with a full octave. II. That the clay whistles or pitch-pipes,
which may be manipulated in quartette, will produce an octave
and a fourth. III. From the facts above shown, the Aztecs must
have possessed a knowledge of the scales as known to us, which
has been fully tested by comparison with the flute and organ.

These superior attainments in the science of music suggest that
musicians of our day have arrived at a somewhat hasty decision
in regard to the music of these ancient people having been con-
fined within the narrow limits of a so-called pentatonic scale, as
it is highly probable that they may have had melodies containing all
the tones of the chromatic scale. Their ingenuity and skill in the
production of these instruments may well claim the admiration of
modern musicians and artisans. It is earnestly hoped that a much-
neglected branch of American ethnology — the stud}' of native
American music — will hereafter receive the proper investigation
due so important a subject. No doubt the researches now in
progress, under the auspices of the Bureau of Ethnology at
Washington, will develop many interesting facts in this con-
nection.

1883.] . natural sciences of philadelphia. 95

April 24.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-nine members present.

The following papers were presented for publication :
" On the Structure of the Skull of the Hadrosauridse," b}'
Edward D. Cope.

"On some Vertebrate Forms from the Permian of Illinois," by
Edward D. Cope.

A Social Heliozoan. — Prof. Leidy exhibited drawings and made
some remarks on a singular Heliozoan recently observed by him.
His attention had been directed to it by Mr. Edward Potts, who
discovered it, contained in considerable numbers in water, with
vegetal debris, from Lake Hopatcong, N. J., where it had been
obtained last autumn. The animal occurred mostly in groups
composed of numerous individuals. One of these groups, of
irregular, cylindroid shape, 0*84 mm. long b}^ 0*36 mm. broad, was
estimated to contain upwards of a hundred individuals. They
reminded one of a mass of tangled burs. Thej^ remained nearly
stationary even for twenty-four hours, and exhibited so little
activity, that without careful scrutiny they might readily' be taken
for some inanimate structure. The individuals composing the
groups appeared to be connected together only by mutual attach-
ment of their innumerable rays, and none were observed to be
associated b}' cords of protoplasm extending between the bodies
of the animals, as seen in Raphidiophrys elegans. The individuals
associated together were of two kinds : those which were active,
and a smaller proportion which were in an encysted, quiescent
condition.

The active individuals resembled the common sun-animalcule.
The body was usually spherical or oval, but variable from con-
traction, colorless, granular and vesicular, with a large central
nucleus more or less obscurely visible and variably granular, with
three or four or more peripheral contractile vesicles. The body
had a_ thick envelope of delicate protoplasm, with innumerable
and immeasurably fine, straight spicules. The envelope with the
spicules extended in numerous conical rays, from which pro-
ceeded numerous immeasurably fine granular rays. The encysted
individuals presented the same essential constitution, except that
the body was regularly spherical, enclosed by a structureless
envelope or membrane, contained no contractile vesicles, and the
enveloping protoplasm was devoid of granular rays. The body
of the active individuals measured from 0*024 to 0*036 mm. in
diameter; in the encysted individuals, usually about 0*02 mm.
An active individual, with the body 0*033 mm. in diameter, with
its envelope was 0*0,55 mm. in diameter. An encysted individual,
with the body 0*02, with its envelope was 0*036 mm.

The active individuals were observed to feed on two species of

96 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

minute monads, whicli were swallowed in the same manner as
in Actinophrys. After some hours, a few individuals appear to
have separated from the surface of one of the groups, but they
were as stationary' and sluggish as when in association with others.
The species is apparent!}^ distinct from others which have been
previous^ noticed, and may be named Baphidiophrys socialis.

Daniel E. Hughes, M. D., and Edwin S. Balch were elected
members.

May 1.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Tliirty persons present.

May 8.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-five persons present.

Canadian Notes. — Mr. Jos. Willcox remarked that a noticeable
feature in the Canadian landscape is the scarcity of springs of
water and running streams. The latter, when they exist, are
almost exclusively the outlets of lakes, which are very numerous
in that country. The abundance of lakes there is a fortunate
occurrence, as they store a large amount of water for use in sup-
plying power to mills and drink for live stock during the dry
summer and early autumn. By the action of the ancient glaciers
a large portion of the soil of Canada has been carried away, the
underlying rocks being usually near the surface, and in many
cases visible above the ground. It is reasonable to conclude that
the absence of springs of water is due to the prevailing scarcity
of deep soil, the material necessary to soak up a large amount of
rain and melting snow, from which springs are supplied, being
deficient. His observations were confined to the country which
lies north of Kingston and Brockville, in the Province of Ontario.
In Jefferson and St. Lawrence Counties, in New York, small
isolated areas of Potsdam sandstone occur, overlying the
Laurentian granite and limestone. Sometimes they cover a space
of only a few square yards. North of the St. Lawrence River, for
a distance of more than one hundred miles, the Laurentian rocks
are frequently covered with disconnected patches of calciferous
sandstone and Trenton limestone. These remnants undoubtedly
indicate the former existence of those rocks of great extent,
OA'erlying the Laurentian granite and limestone, the former having
been subsequently removed by erosion. The ancient glaciers
have probably performed a large share of this work, as their
erosive action, which has torn and worn away the granite rocks
to a considerable extent, would operate more rapidly on the softer
limestones and sandstones.

Tlie following were ordered to be printed: —

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 9t

ON THE CHARACTERS OF THE SKULL IN THE HADROSAURID^.
BY E. D. COPE.

In the year 1841, Professor Owen^ distinguished the Dinosauria
from other reptiles, as an order characterized by the structure of
the sacrum, the limbs, and tlie articulations of the ribs with the
vertebrae. The definition of the order remained without acces-
sion, until, in 1870, Prof. Huxley ^ determined the characters of
the pelvis. This important addition to our knowledge placed the
order on a firmer basis. No definitions were yet derived by
either author from the skull, so that the relationships ot the
Dinosauria still remained obscure. In 1861 Professor Owen de-
scribed part of the skull of a species of Scelidosaurus from the
English Lias. On this imperfect basis I ventured in 1870^ to
determine whether the Dinosauria are monimostylicate or
streptostylicate ; and I added to the definition of tne order,
"attached quadrate;" and later* " os-quadratum articulated with
its suspensorium b}' suture," thus placing these reptiles in the
monimostylicate series. This character, if found to be general
in the order, would distinguish it well from the Lacertilia, and
give a point of affinity to the Crocodilia.

This order embraces a number of families. I at one time pf-o-
posed to refer them to three suborders,-^ and Huxley concluded
that they should be arranged in two suborders. •• Professor Marsh,
after showing that one of my three orders (Symphypoda) was
established on characters erroneously ascribed to its type by
previous writers, proposed to divide the Dinosauria into seven
suborders. He later'' regarded the Dinosauria as a subclass, and
divided it into five orders, the fourth of which is composed of
three suborders. The characters used by Marsh to define this
supposed subclass, do not differ from those previously developed
as^above cited, excepting that a number are introduced which

V

^ British Fossil Reptiles, .

■^ Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, p. 33.

^ American Naturalist, 1871, p. 508.

* Proceedings Amer. Assoc, Adv. Science, 1870 (1871), p. 233.

^ Transactions American Philosophical Society, xiv, 1869, 90-99,

" Quarterly Jour. Geolog. Soc, London, 1870.

•^ Amer, Jour. Sci. Arts, 1882, p. 83.

98 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

cannot be used to distinguish a subclass, or in some instances an
order. In like manner, the definitions of his orders and suborders
embrace many characters whicli are not usually regarded as
defining groups higher than families. Such, e. g.^ are the numbers
of toes ; relative sizes of fore- and hind-limbs ; solidity or non-
solidity of bones ; presence or absence of dermal armor. Much
light was, however, thrown on the subject by Professor Marsh, b}'
the numerous characters he brought to light, and the number of
forms he defined.

The constitution of the pelvis is shown by Marsh to differ
materially in the different members of the Dinosau7-ia, As this
region presents characters diagnostic of the order Dinosauria
itself, its modifications within the order become of importance.
The ungulate or unguiculate character of the feet must also not
be neglected, although of less importance than in the mammalia.
If the order is susceptible of division into suborders, it must be
by means of the following definitions, which I select from Marsh's
diagnoses :
Feet ungulate ; pubes projecting and connected in front ; no

postpubes ; Opisthocoela .

Feet ungulate ; pubes projecting free in front ; postpubes present ;

Orthopoda.
Feet unguiculate; pubes projecting downwards and coossified dis-

tally ; calcaneum not produced ; Goniopoda.

Feet unguiculate; calcaneum much produced backwards ; ? pelvis;

Hallop)oda.

I have used for these orders the oldest names when the defini-
tions first given were not erroneous, although they were inadequate.
Thus I think the name Opisthocoela (Owen') must take precedence
of Sauropoda Marsh. I combine Marsh's two divisions, Stego-
sauria and Ornithopoda^ into one, and use the name I gave in
1866 and redefined in 1869,^ for the division thus remodeled.
The name Goniopoda^ given at the same time, I designed to
embrace the carnivorous Dinosauria^ but included in my defini-
tion some characters which are of less significance than I then
attached to them.

Prof. Huxley recognized thx*ee families ; the Scelidosauridae and

» PalaBontology, 18G0, p. 273.

^ Transactions American Philos, See, xiv, p. 90. See American Naturalist,
1883, March.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 99

Iguanodontidse, which belong to the Orthopoda^ and the Megalo-
sauridse, which pertains to the Goniopoda. To the former, I
added the family Hadrosauridae in 1869, and in 1877 T defined
the Caniarasauridae , of the suborder Opidhocoela.^ To this family
Marsh gave, in 1882, the name of Atlantosauridse? At the same
time he proposed a number of families, some of which will be
retained, while others are not sufficiently defined.

The Hadrosauridae are, so far as known, confined to the upper
cretaceous beds of North America, and continued, with their
accompanying carnivorous genera, later in geological time than
any other Dinosauria. Besides the genus Hadrosaurus, I have
added the genera Diclonius and Cionodon, and it is possible that
the genera Monoclonius, Dysganus and Agathaumas also belong
to it. These types are all found in the Laramie formation,
excepting Hadrosaurus, which is as jet only known from the
older Fox Hills or Maestrichtian, and Pierre epochs. From the
latter formations, came also Hypsibema, possibly a member of the
same family.

As the latest in time, the Dinosauria of the Laramie possess an
especial interest. Having recently obtained a specimen of a species
of the genus Diclonius Cope, I am in a position to give not only the
characters of the family and suborder more definitely than here-
tofore, but also to furnish some cranial characters of the order,
which have been hitherto little known or unknown. The species
on which these observations are made is the Diclonius mi?'abilis^^
of Leidy. It is represented by a nearly complete skeleton, in-
cluding the skull, which was discovered by Messrs. Wortman and
Hill in the Laramie beds of Dakota. At present, I only describe
the general characters, and those chiefly cranial, leaving the com-
plete description and iconography for my forthcoming volume on
the Laramie vertebrate fauna.

The character which distinguishes this genus from Hadrosaurus
is the attenuation of the astragalocalcaneum, and its coossification
witi^li the tibia. Ornithotarsus differs from Diclonius in the pro-

' Proceedings American Philosophical Soc, 1877, p. 243.

■■^ Araer. Jour. Sci. Arts, 1883, p. 83.

^ This species is part of the one called by Leidy Trachodon mirabilis,
who included in it a species oi Dysganus. He did not characterize the
genus Trachodon, and afterwards abandoned it. (Pi-oceedings Academy,
Phila., 1868, p. 199.)

100 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

duced calcaneum, which supports the extremity of the fibula.
There are four digits of the anterior foot, and three of the pos-
terior. The fore-limb is much shorter than the hind-limb, so that
the attitude of the animal was kangaroo-like, as in Hadrosaurus
and Laelaps. In this it differed from Monoclonius,^ where the
anterior limbs are as long as the posterior.

Ordinal Characters. — The quadrate bone is immovably articu-
lated to the skull by three elements ; the parietal, the quadrato-
jugal, and the jugal. The intercalare occupies a position on the
external edge of the exoccipital, and nearly approaches the
proximal end of the quadrate at its* posterior side. The post-
frontals and prefontals are well developed, and the parietals,
frontals, nasals and premaxillaries form the middle line of the
skull above, as in other reptiles. The elements of the lower jaw
belonging to reptiles are all present.

Subordinal and Fawily Characters. — The parietal is, as to its
superior face, a T-shaped bone, of which the transverse portion
rests on the supraoccipital bone, without interspace. The external
extremities of the transverse branches are excavated below to
]-eceive the proximal end of the quadrate. These extensions of
the parietal are stout, and represent the parietosquamosal arch
of the Lacertilia. Resting as they do on the occipital, the}" present
a character exactly intermediate between those presented by the
Crocodilia and Lacertilia.

The zygomatic arch is complete, having the usual flexure observed
in reptiles, and branching to a postorbital arch by the interven-
tion of a postorbital bone. The postorbital part of the 2;ygomatic
arch forms the external border of the superior aspect of tlie skull,
and encloses a crotaphite foramen. The portions of the frontal
and parietal bones which separate the crotaphite foramina, form
a narrow isthmus. The postorltital part of the zygoma consists
chiefly of the squamosal. This element is rod-like, and does not
reach or take part in the articulation with the quadrate. In this
respect this genus differs materially from Scelidosaurus, where,
according to Owen, the squamosal is more extended posteriorly,
and articulates with the superior part of the quadrate by a fixed
articulation. The external portions of the parietal are thus, in
Scelidosaurus, correspondingly reduced.

The malar or jugal bone is of large size, while the quadrato-

' Proceedinors Phila. Academy, 1876, Optoibei;'.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 101

jugal is rather small. Its articulation with the quadrate is
squamosal. The maxillary is convex on its outer face, presenting
the teeth inwards. The nasals are distinct, and much narrowed
forwards to their junction with the spines of the premaxillaries.
The latter bones are distinct. They form, when viewed from
above, an anchor-shaped bodv, with the curved flanges extending
outwards and backwards. These enclose, with the anterior apex
of the maxillaries, the huge external uareal orifices, which were
probably roofed over by membrane, as in the birds.

The pterygoids extend well posteriorly as broad plates, and are
in close contact with the inferior part of the quadrates. They are
separated for a short distance on the middle line posteriorly by a
fissure, which, with the narrow space between the pterygoids and
the presphenoids, gives exit to the transversely narrowed posterior
nares. The occipital condyle looks downwards. The sphenoid is
posteriorly horizontal, and overlaps the basioccipital with only a
trace of lateral tuberosities ; but in front it is curved abruptly
downwards. At this point, an elongate, flattened, truncate process
extends posteriorlj'^, forming the median part of the roof of the
fissure of the posterior nares. In front of this fissure the pter}"^-
goids are in contact, and extend a considerable distance ante-
riorly ; at least to opposite to the border of the large anterior
palatomaxillary foramen.

The maxillary bone is produced far posteriorly, so as to define
the zygomatic foramen on the inner side. The palatine bone
extends posteriorly between it and the pterygoid for a considerable
distance, when the expanding pterygoid cuts it off, and extends
to the posterior extremity of the maxillary, closing the space
occupied in the Lacertilia by the posterior palatomaxillary foramen.
I cannot distinguish whether the portion which extends to the
maxillary bone is distinguished as an ectopterygoid. The posterior
edge of this part of the pterj'goid projects below the posterior part
of the bone, which is nearly horizontal until it reaches the quad-
rat^. It then ascends, forming a lamina on the inner side of that
bone, reaching the process from the inner side of the condyle.

The vomer is a narrowed, horizontal lamina between the anterior
parts of the maxillary bones, anterior to which point it does not
appear to extend. It soon becomes a vertical lamina, spreading
at the base, where it is in contact with the middle line of contact
of the pterygoid bones (and perhaps of the palatines, but these

102 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

are not visible at that point). From this point it is a deep atten-
uated keel, dividing the palate into two deep channels, and
extends as far posteriorl3'^ as the nares. The posterior part is
free beyond its base. The entire vomer is like that seen in various
natatorial birds. The anterior maxillopalatine foramen separates
the vomer from the maxillaries anteriorly. Posteriori}', the fora-
men is bounded by an ascending process of the maxillary bone,
which is in contact with the palatines posteriorly.

The premaxillarg is divided its whole length. At the middle
line above, it passes between the nasal laminte, while below it
forms the roof of the muzzle part of the mouth, and the floor
of the huge nareal fossa on each side of its spine. This part
extends posteriorly as a thin lamina, each meeting that of the
opposite side on the middle line, and recurving upwards, forming
a median superior crest. The horizontal portion extends above
the maxillary bone, between it and the descending postnareal part
of the nasal, and extends over the anterior part of the lachrymal,
intervening between the anterior extremity of the malar, and the
posterior extremity of the nasal. Its posteiior portion develops
a rib-like projection, which descends downwards and forwards
towards the anterior part of the maxillary bone, and disappears.
This bone perhaps includes the inaxilloturhinal.

The preorbital region includes a not unusual arrangement of the
elements. The prefrontal bone descends as far as the middle of
the anterior border of the orbit, and to the lachrymal. The
orbital edge of the latter is interrupted by an element which pre-
sents a vertical edge outwards, and appears to be distinct from
it, extending under it anteriorly, and separated from it by a ver-
tical groove externally. It is, perhaps, the snperciliar}^ bone
of Cuvier, which occupies a somewhat similar position in the
Varanidee. Below the lachrymal a small part of the orbit is
bounded in front by the jugal. The latter sends forward a laminar
prolongation over the maxillary, separating it externally from the
posterior extension of the niaxilloturbinal.

The mandibular ramus includes all the elements of the reptilian
jaw. The arrangement posteriorly is a mixture of that of the
crocodile and that of the lizard, while the remaining portion is
peculiar. T!ie angle is formed by about equal parts of the articular
and angular, the former furnishing the external half,- the latter the
internal. There are a huge dental fossa and foramen, as in the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 103

Lacertilia^and no perforations either external or internal, in agree-
ment with the same type. The coronoid process is very large and
elevated, and its base, which is crescentic in section, is embraced
by the surangular, and is reached posteriorly by the anterior pro-
longation of the articular. lis posterior face is concave, and its
apex is curved anteriorl}', reaching the superior edge of the jugal
bone at the inferior border of the orbit. The angular bone forms
the internal border of the dental fossa, and extends to the
posterior edge of the splenial above. Below, it sends a prolonga-
tion forwards. The greater part of the external and inferior faces
of the ramus are formed by the surangular bone, which has an
enormous extent, far exceeding in size that of any known reptile.
It extends posteriorly to below the quadrate cot3'lus. Anteriorly
it spreads laterally, and unites with its fellow of the opposite side,
forming a short symphysis, and simulating a dentary. At the
base of the internal side of the ramns, it is separated Irom the
anterior prolongation of the angular by an open Meckelian groove,
which shallows out near the middle of its length. In correspond-
ence with this extent of the surangular, the splenial is enormously
developed, and contains the great magazine of teeth which I have
described as characteristic of this type.^ Its internal wall is very
thin, and adheres closely to the faces of the teeth, in the fossil, in
its present condition. This development and dentition of the
splenial bone distinguishes the Hadrosatiridse widely from the
Iguanodontidae. The dentary bone is a flat semicircular plate
attached by suture to the extremities of the surangulars. There
is no trace of symphysial suture, and the posterior border sends a
median prolongation backwards, which is embraced b}' the suran-
gulars. The edge of the dentary is flat, thin, and edentulous, and
closes within the edge of the premaxillary.

The dentition is remarkable for its complexity, and for the dif-
ference in character presented by the superior and inferior series.
Leidy pointed out the character of the latter^ in the Hadrosaurvs
foulkei, and I have described the character of the superior denti-
tion in the genera Cionodon^ and Dicloniiis.* The teeth of both

1 Bulletin U. S. Geol. Survey Territories, F. V. Hayden ; ill, p, 594-7.
May, 1877.

^ Cretaceous Reptiles North America, 1864, p. 83.

^ Vertebrata of Cretaceous formations of the West, 1875, p. 59.

* Proceedings Philadelphia Academy, 1876, p. 250.

104 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

series succeed each other in columns of from five to eight teeth
each, following an arc of a circle. The superior arc is convex
externally ; the inferior arc is convex internally, or towards the
position of the tongue. It results that the opposed grinding sur-
faces of the two dental series are vertical. The cementum-plate of
the tooth is, in both sets, on the convex side of the tooth, hence
external and inferior in the superior teeth, and internal and supe-
rior in the inferior teeth. The teeth replace each other differently
in the two jaws, or rather the replacement of the teeth does not
partake of the general reversal of relations which the opposite series
present in all other respects. The successional teeth rise in both
jaws on the inner sides of the older teeth. From this it follows,
that in'the superior series the replacement is on the non-functional
side of the tooth, or from the side which does not bear the cementum-
plate. In the lower jaw, the successional teeth follow on the side
that bears the cementum-plate, so that one tooth must be worn
away before the apex of its successor can come into use. The
arrangement of the superior series permits the successional to
overlap the functional tooth far beyond the base of the enamel-
plate, which in point of fact they do in the Diclonius mirabilis,
though not to the same extent as in the Cionodon arctatus. The
superior teeth are smaller and narrower in form than the inferior,
and both have a keel on the median line of their cementum-face.
There are no teeth on the anterior parts of the surangular bone
nor on the dentary or premaxillary bones. The extremity of the
muzzle is a flattened spatulate beak.

Dermal or corneous structures have left distinct traces in the
soft matrix about the end of the beak-like muzzle. Laminse of
brown remnants of organic structures Avere exposed in removing
the matrix. One of these extends as a broad vertical band round
the sides, indicating a vertical rim to the lower jaw, like that
which surrounds some tea trays, and which probably represents the
tomia of the horny sheath of a bird's beak. At the front of the
muzzle its face is sharply undulate, presenting the appearance of
vertical columns with tooth-like apices. Corresponding tooth-
like processes, of much smaller size, alternate with them from
the upper jaw. These probably are the remains of a serration of
the extremital part of the horny tomia, such as exist on the lateral
portions in the lamellirostral birds.

Systematic liesulls. — The structure of the skull of this species
adds some confirmation to the hypothesis of the avian affinities

1883. J NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 105

of the Dinosauria, which I first announced, as indicated by the hind-
limbs, and which Professor Huxley soon after observed in the char-
acters of the limbs and pelvis. The confirmation is, however,
empirical rather than essential, and is confined to a few points.
One of these is the form and position of the vomer, which much
reserrbles that seen in lamellirostral birds. The large development
of the premaxillary bone has a similar significance. So has the
toothless character of that bone and the dentary.

Among reptiles, this skull combines, in an interesting way, the
characters of the two orders Crocodilia and Lace7'tilia. The
presence of the ethmoid above the maxillar}- and overlapping the
lachrymal, is unique among vertebrata, so far as I am aware. The
free exoccipito-intercalare hook is scarcel}^ less remarkable.

Of mammalian afflnit}^ there is no trace to be found.

Specific Characters. — The general form and appearance of the
skull, as seen in profile, is a good deal like that of a goose. From
above it has more the form of a rather short-billed spoonbill
(Platalea . For a reptile, the head is unusually elevated poste-
riorly, and remarkably contracted at the anterior part of the
maxillaries. The flat, transverse expansion of the premaxillaries
is absolutely unique. The posterior edges of the occipital bones
are produced far backwards, forming a thin roof over the anterior
part of the vertebral column. This roof is supported by two
strong buttresses, one from each side of the -foramen magnum.
The latter is a vertical oval. The exoccipital (carrying the inter-
calare) descends on each side, forming a free hook-like process
behind the superior half of the quadrate. The recurved process
of the lateral branches of the parietal underruns the squamosal
two-thirds the length of the latter. The quadrate is separated
by a rather narrow, obliquely vertical fossa, from the postorbital
arch, owing to the posterior position of the latter.

The orbit is posterior in position, and is a horizontal oblong in
form. The superior (superciliary) border is flat, with slight
rugosities at the positions of the pre- and postfrontal sutures.
The frontal region is a little concave, and there is a convexity of
the superior face of the prefrontal bone in front of the line of the
orbit. The peculiar position of the teeth gives the side of the
face, when the mandible is closed, a horizontally extended con-
cavity. There are four and a half tooth-like colums on each side
of the middle line of the end of the muzzle.

106 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

The extremital teeth of both series are smaller than the great
majority, which are of equal size and similar form. Those of the
superior series are rod-like, narrowed at the extremities, and flat-
tened on one side. The edges of the cementum-plate are not
serrate, and the other faces of the tooth are finely rugose with
cementum-granules. In the inferior series, the cementum-faces
are diamond-shaped, and the tooth may thus be distinguished into
crown and root. The concealed surfaces are finely rugose ;• the
edges of the cementum-plate are not serrate, and its surface is
smooth. As compared with the Hadrosaurus foulkei^ the dental
magazine is much deeper, and contains a greater number of teeth
in a vertical column, and probably a larger number in the aggre-
gate. I find in each maxillary bone of the Diclonius mirahilis
six hundred and thirty teeth, and in each splenial bone four hun-
dred and six teeth. The total number is then two thousand and
seventy-two.

According to Mr. Wortman, who, with Mr. Hill, dug the skeleton
out, its total length is thirty-eight feet. The leugth of the skull
is 1-180 meters.

Restoration. — This animal in life presented the kangaroo-like
proportions ascribed by Leidy to the Hadrosaurus foulkei. The
anterior limbs are small, and were doubtless used occasionally for
support, and rarely for prehension. This is to be supposed from
the fact that the ungual phalanges of the manus are hoof-like,
and not claw-like, though less ungulate in their character
than those of the posterior foot. The inferior presentation of the
occipital condyle shows that the head was borne on the summit of
a vertical neck, and at right-angles to it, in the manner of a bird.
The head would be poised at right-angles to the neck when the
animal rested on the anterior feet, by the aid of a TT-like flexure of
the cervical vertebrae. The general appeai'ance of the head must
have been much like that of a bird.

The nature of the beak and the dentition indicate, for this
strange animal, a diet of soft vegetable matter. It could not have
eaten the branches of trees, since any pressure suflBcient for their
comminution would have probably broken the slightlj^ attached
teeth of the lower jaw from their places, and have scattered
them on the floor of the mouth. It is ditficult to understand also
how such a weak spatulate beak, could have collected or have
broken off boughs of trees. By the aid of its dentate horny edge

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 107

it may have scraped leaves from the ends of branches, but the
appearances indicate softer and less tenacious food. Could we
suppose that the waters of the great Laramie lakes had supplied
abundant aquatic plants without woody tissue, we would have the
condition appropriate to this curious structure. Nymphseas,
Nuphars, Potamogetons, Anacha?-is, MyriophyUum and similar
growths could have been easily gathered by this double-spoon-
like bill, and have been tossed, b}' bird-like jerks of the head
and neck, back to the mill of small and delicate teeth. In
order to submit the food to the action of these vertical shears, the
jaws must have been opened widely enough to permit their edges
to clear each other, and a good deal of wide gaping must, there-
fore, have accompanied the act of mastication. This would be
easy, as the mouth opens, as in reptiles and birds generally, to a
point behind the line of the position of the eye. The eye was
evidently of large size. On the other hand the indications are
that the external ear was of very small size. There is a large
tract that might have been devoted to the sense of smell, but
whether it was so or not is not easily ascertained.

We can suppose that the huge hind-legs of this genus and of
Hadrosaurus were especially useful in wading in the water that
produced their food. When the bottom was not too soft, they
could wade to a depth of ten or more feet, and, if necessary,
drag aquatic plants from their hold below. Fishes might have
been available as food when not too large, and not covered with
bony scales. Most of the fishes of the Laramie period, are, how-
ever, of the latter kind (genus Clastes). The occurrence of several
beds of lignite in the foj-mation shows that vegetation was
abundant.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

(All the figures are one-seventh of the natural size.)

Plate IV. Side view of skull of Diclonius mirabilis.
Plate V. The same viewed from above.
Plate VI. Inferior view of the same.

Plate VII. Fig. 1, View of occipital region of the same. Fig. 2, View of
the extremity of the muzzle from the front.

The complete iconography of this species will appear in the third volume
of the Report of the United States Geological Survey of the Territories,
under F. V. Hayden and J. W. Powell, now in course of preparation.

108 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

ON SOME VERTEBRATA FROM THE PERMIAN OF ILLINOIS.
BY E. D. COPE..

The first notice of the existence of the Permian formation in
Illinois was published in these Proceedings for 1876, p. 404, et
seq. I then described the genera, Gricotus and Clepsydrops, and
a species of fish allied to Ctenodus. In the Proceedings of the
American Philosophical Society for 1877 (commencing at p. 52),
I added descriptions of other species, and in a second paper in
the same volume, p. 182, 1 showed that the entire number known to
that date was seventeen. Since then Mr. William Gurle^', of
Dansville, 111., has sent me some additional specimens, which
increase our knowledge of this interesting fauna.

A tooth in the collection is an incisor of a species of the Diadeo-
tidee^ a family not hitherto recognized in Illinois, although I have
recorded it from Texas and New Mexico. It is more slender than
the corresponding teeth of any of the species known to me. I do
not know the incisors of the GMlonyx rapidens. I note here that
thegenus PhanerosaurusvoxiMeyer^from the Permian of German}'^,
probably belongs to the Diadectidae or the Bolosauridse. The
vertebrae are a good deal like those o£ JEmpedias,^ but apparently
lack the hyposphen.

Didymodus C?) compressus Newberry. Diplodus (?) compressus Newb. Cope, Pro-
ceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc, 1877, 5.3.

The name Diplodus was used by Rafinesque for a valid genus
of fishes before it was employed by Agassiz for the present genus.
I therefore propose to substitute for it the name Didymodus.
Thoracodus emydinus gen. et .=p. nov.

Char. gen. — The form of the tooth or jaw on which this genus
is proposed, reminds one of that of a Diodon, and also of one-half of
that of a Janassa. It appears to be the half of a bilateral plate, which
is divided on the middle line by suture. Its form is somewhat
that of the anterior part of an episternal bone of a tortoise. It
consists essentially of a smooth border, separated from the
remainder of the tooth by a transverse groove. The interior

^ Mittbeilungen a. d. Koeniglicli. Mineral., Geolog. u. praehistor.-
Museum, Dresden ; V, Nachtrage zur Dyas ; Geinitz und DeiclimuUer,
1882, p. 10.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 109

•

portion is, on the superior face (if the piece belong to the inferior
jaw, and vice versa), trans\ersely ridged and grooved, after the
manner of the genus Janassa.

Char, specif. — The smooth border is wide above and below.
Its edge is produced into a median projection, which is decurved.
On the inferior surface it is marked by shallow grooves, which
radiate from the gi'oove which bounds it posteriorly, extending
nearly to the free edge, Posterior to the bounding groove, the
surface is smooth. The posterior surface above has its grooves
concentric with the curved free margin. The ridges are narrow,
and step-like in position, presenting their free edges backwards.
There are no grooves other than these steps. They have an
angular curve opposite to the angle of the free margin, and at
the angle the groove which separates them is narrowed, while it
widens at other points. Free edge of border thickened ; surface
everywhere smooth.

Measurements. m.

Length of fragment transversely, . . . '014

Length of fragment anteroposteriorly,
Width of border area at median suture.
Seven cross ridges, . . .
Thickness at suture at cross-ridges,

•Oil
•005
•005
•002

'Ctenodus heterolophus .=p. nov.

This species is represented by a single broken tooth, which
presents remarkable characters. It had apparently, when perfect,
but three crests, which differ greatl}' in length, diminishing very
rapidly from the first or marginal crest.

The crest just mentioned is not only longer, but niuch more
elevated than the others, except at the base, where the second
crest is the liighest. But while the first rapidly rises, the second
retains its elevation, and then descends, forming a convex edge,
of which the distal part is obtusely serrate. The proximal part
of the first crest is worn by friction with the opposing edge of
the opposite jaw into a sharp edge, below which its base is
covered by a thin laj'er of the shining cementum which invests
the teeth and sides of the second crest. The amount of this
shining layer is thus more extensive than in any other species of
Ctenodus known to me. The third crest, judging by its base of
continuity with the second, is very small.

110 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Measurements. m.

Elevation of first crest at middle, . . '0095

Elevation of second crest at middle, . . '0065

Length of a tooth of second crest, . . *0020

The peculiarities of this tooth suggest that the genus Gnathor-
hiza Cope (Proceedings Amer. Philos. Soc, 1882, p. 629) is
Dipnoan, and allied to Gtenodus.

Ctenodus vabaseusis sp. nov.

This fine species is represented by an almost perfect tooth.
It is allied to the G. fossatus Cope, but is wider, and the crests
do not radiate so equally, but are chiefly directed in one direction
as in most species of the genus. The C gurleianus and G,
pusillus are at once distinguished by the small number of crests,
while the G. periprion and G. dialophus have a larger number of
crests, and are otherwise different. G. porrectus differs less from
it, but has only five \ crests, while the C. vabasensis has six \.
The \ represents the small posterior (?) crest, which is double.
This, with the next one, is directed slightly posteriorly; the
fifth is at right-angles to the long axis, and the anterior four
extend more or less forwards. They are serrate nearly to their
bases, but the teeth are obsolete on their basal halves. The
straight part of the internal edge extends as far forwards as the
fourth crest, and is continued posteriorly as a short process. No
fossae at ends of crests. Superior face of tooth wide, and slightly
concave. The anterior parts of the first and second crests are
broken away, so that it is impossible to say whether they are
produced as in G. porrectus.

Measurements. M.

Length to marginal base of second crest, . . '024

Width at marginal base of second crest, . . "009

Width at fourth crest, inclusive of apex, . . '015

Width of posterior side, "010

Thickness at base of fifth crest, .... '005

1883.] natural sciences of philadelphia. ill

May 15.

Tiie President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Twenty-five persons present.

The following were presented for publication : —
" Pinus Koraiensis," by Josiah Hoopes.

" On the Fishes of the Lakes of the Western Part of the Great
Basin," by Edw. D. Cope.

Observations on Forsythia. — Mr. Thomas Meehan, at the meeting
of the Botanical Section, May 14, referred to his communication
to the Academy (December 29, 1868), in which he suggested that
notwithstanding the strong specific differences between Forsythia
viridissima and F. susjyensa, he believed the}^ must have had a
common origin. F. suspensa has short styles and long stamens,
broad lobes to the corolla, broadly-ovate, thin, glaucous, sometimes
trifoliate, deeply serrate leaves, and makes a shrub of some ten feet
high, with numerous slender, pendulous branches. F. viridissima
is a stiff", erect bush, but of not half the height, with narrowly
lanceolate, thick, bright green, lightly serrate leaves ; flowers with
narrow lobes, and the style long and the stamens short. F. suspensa,
in cultivation, often produces abortive capsules ; F. viridissima
rarely, if ever. In the paper cited above, an account is given of the
production of seed-vessels on F. viridissima, hy using the pollen of
F. suspensa. Though the seeds were not wholly perfect, a winged
seed of one species was produced among the wingless ones of the
other. The resultant impression from those observations was that
in spite of what would be regarded as good specific differences,
they are but dimorphic forms, referable to sexual peculiarities.

Three years ago, the usually seedless capsules of F. suspensa
produced a number of good seeds, which were sown. This season
thirty-four flowered. The leaves and general habit of these
plants present every shade of gradation between F. suspensa and
F. viridissima; some of the leaves of the latter being even much
more slender than those of the original species. The flowers also
present in the larger number of cases the slender lobes of the
F. viridissima; some with the lobes recurved laterally to such
an extent as to seem much narrower than they are.

The most interesting fact in connection with this is the sexual
characteristics. Of the thirty-four plants, raised from a parent
having a short style and long stamens, only four have retained
this parental character, but have assumed that belonging to the
form viridissima.

Some interesting questions are suggested by these observations r

112 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

The fact that F. suspensa makes abortive capsules freely, and
F. viridissima rarely, though it has the best developed pistil,
indicates that fertility is dependent on the potency of the pollen ;
and this is confirmed bj^ the production of capsules on F. viridissima
when the pollen of F. suspensa was applied :

The fact that the speaker lias had both forms growing on his
grounds for many 3^ears, without any seed-vessel appearing on
F. viridissima, except in the case cited, shows that it is not likely
to be cross-fertilized through insect agency.

In the fully fertile case of F. suspensa, the plants of F. viridissima
were fully four hundred feet away; and the suggestion of inter-
crossing between these forms, considered in connection with the
points previously made, seems to place hybridization out of the
question.

We may conclude, therefore, that these two supposed species are
but sexually dimorphic forms of one ; and we have also the curious
fact that, in this case, notwithstanding the presumable influence of
the law of heredity, the strongly masculine tendency of the parent,
as indicated by the highly developed stamens, the potency of its
pollen on the F. viridissima. the power to almost perfect seeds in
l)artially developed seed-vessels generally, and the actual perfection
in one year, notwithstanding- the imperfectly developed pistil,
should have had to give way to the female tendency in the offspring
to such a great degree as to leave only four out of thirty-four to
represent the parent.

Influence of Circumstances on Heredity. — Mr. Thomas Meehan
referred to the fact that seed of the purple-leaved variety of Ber-
beris vulgaris, collected from plants growing near Philadelphia,
reproduced the purple-leaved peculiarity to an extent which it
could not do more perfectly if the variety were a true species.
In a bed of seedlings, containing on an estimate one thousand
plants, there were onl}^ two reversions to the original green-leaved
condition. Two years ago, he had been given, by Prof. C. S.
Sargent, some seeds of ligneous plants, sent to him from some
European Botanical Garden, and of thirty seedlings planted only
two aie dark purple as in the parent.

May 22.
Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.
Forty persons present.

A paper entitled " A Revision of the Species of Gerres found
in American Waters," by B. W. Evermann and Seth E. Meek, was
presented for publication.

1883.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 113

May 29.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Forty persons present.

N. A. Randolph, M. D., J. Reed Conrad, M. D., and Spencer
Trotter, M. D., were elected members.

Arnould Locard, of Lyons, Fred. W. Hntton, of Christchurch,
N. Z., and C. E. Beddome, of Hobart Town, Tasmania, were elected
correspondents.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

114 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

PINUS KORAIENSIS Sieb. & Zucc.
BY JOSIAH HOOPES.

Through the kindness of Chief Eng. G. W. Melville, U. S. N.,
I have enjoyed an opportunity of studying some excellent speci-
mens of this interesting species of pine, collected by him during
the late voyage of the unfortunate " Jeannette " to the Arctic
regions. These specimens consist of a branch clothed with foliage,
two immature cones, and a few mature seeds, and were collected
in the District of Tuknansk, in Eastern Siberia. It was seen
along the banks of the Lena, Yenisei and Obi Rivers, forming a
tree about thirty feet in height, with a trunk about ten inches in
diameter at base. The collector further states that it fruits
abundantly, and " the edible seeds are used b}^ the natives as
food, and by travelers as nuts." It is interesting to note that
this heretofore comparatively rare species has a wider habitat,
and is more numerous than has generally been supposed, although
reported as having been found up to the Amoor River, which
takes its rise in the mountain range dividing the Lena from the
Amoor ; hence it was reasonable to suppose it was more generally
distributed throughout Siberia and adjacent islands. Siebold
found it in Kamtschatka ; and various authors have described it
in the list of Japanese Coniferae, but only in the latter as an
introduced species, where it is said to be quite rare.

Pinus Koraiensis is placed by Dr. Engelmann, in his recent
revision of the genus Pinus^ in the subsection Cembrse, of his
first section, Strobus. It is distinguishable from the section
Eustrobi by reason of the parench3'matous ducts, and with leaves
sparingly serrulate, scarcely denticulate at tip. This nut-bearing
pine is well marked throughout, and especially so in its cones and
seeds, the latter being wingless, subangulate, flatly compressed,
leaving on both sides of the scale when removed, remarkably deep
impressions. The cones are very distinctive, with long reflexed
scales, terminating in an abrupt mucro-like apex. The leaf-
characters in the specimens before me coincide with the published
description given by Dr. Engelmann^ in relation to the absence
(or nearly so) of hj'poderm or strengthening-cells, as well as in
other peculiar features of the Cembran group.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 115

Murray, in his " Pines and Firs of Japan," records its height
from ten to twelve feet, yet Parlatore, on the authority of Pcrfetti,
giA'es it at " sometimes thirty to thirty-three feet." The latter is
corroborated by Chief Eng. Melville, thus showing conclusively
that it is a true northern species, attaining only its greatest size
near the extreme limits of arboreal vegetation ; and yet, like all
other species of nut-pines, it never forms a large-sized tree.

This species will no doubt make a valuable addition to our list
of ornamental Conifers, as its hardiness is unquestioned, and the
foliage is as attractive as an^- other of the White Pine group,
unless we except the P. excelsa. In England it has proven reliable,
and with us the small plants show evidences of success.

116 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

A REVIEW OF THE SPECIES OF GERRES FOUND IN AMERICAN WATERS.
BY B. W. EVERMANN AND SETH E. MEEK.

Upon attempting to identify various specimens of Gerres from
different points on our coast, and from Mexico and Central America,
we were led to the thought that the species of this genus have been
undul3' multiplied.

Through the kindness of Prof. D. S. Jordan, to whom we here desire
to acknowledge our indebtedness for tlie use of specimens and his
library, and for many valuable suggestions, we had placed at our
disposal his entire collection of specimens of Gerres, thus affording
us a considerable amount of material for purposes of comparison.
In Jordan and Gilbert's Synopsis of Fishes of North America,
six species of Gerres are given as found on the United States
Coast ; of these, G. homonymus appears to us to be identical witli
G. gula C. and V. ; and G. harengulus Goode and Bean, with
Eucinostonius pseudogula of Poey, and with Diapterus gracilis
described from Cape San Lucas b^'^ Dr. Gill.

In the present paper it is desired to set forth the conclusions
reached from a study of the material in hand. These conclusions
are all to be considered as provisional, perhaps to be modified by
the study of a greater number of specimens.

The synonymy given, however, appears to be fully justified by
the evidence before us.

We have been kindl}^ permitted to copy the synonymy of the
Pacific Coast species from Profs. Jordan and Gilbert's MSS.

The different species of Gerres noticed in this paper may be
readily separated b}' the following analysis : —
a. Preopercle and preorbital entire ; bod}' elongate, depth 2^ to 4
in length.
6. Premaxillary groove naked.

c. Anal rays II-8 ; body very elongate, depth less than one-
fourth its length. lefroyi. 1.
cc. Anal rays III-Y.

d. Premaxillary groove linear.

e. Eye small, about ^^ in head ; depth nearly 3 in

length. gracilis. 2.

ee. Eye large, less than 3 in head ; depth about 25 in

length. dowi. 3.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Ill

(Id. Premaxillary groove not linear.

e. Bod}' slender, depth 3 to 3^ in length, jonesi. 4.
ee. Body somewhat elevated, depth about 2^ in length.
/. Caudal fin moderate, shorter than head ; second
anal spine not very strong, shorter than
third, J to ^ length of head ; ventrals short,
little more than half length of head, not
reaching vent. Color bright silvery, darker
above ; snout and upper edge of caudal
peduncle somewhat dusky; dark punctula-
tions on body few or none ; no trace of
vertical bars ; upper part of spinous dorsal
becoming gradually blackish, other fins
nearly plain ; axil faintly dusk3\

californiensis. 5.
ff. Caudal fin about as long as head ; second anal
spine very strong, longer than third, one-
third or more length of head ; ventrals long,
two-thirds length of head, reaching vent.
Color in life, clear silvery, bluish above,
sides with obsolete longitudinal streaks ;
back and sides with 8 or 9 bluish vertical
bars, about as broad as the pupil ; a dark
blotch on upper edge of eye. cinereux. 6.
bb. Premaxillary groove scaled in front, forming a naked pit
behind ; depth about 2| in length. gula. 1.

aa. Preopercle serrate ; premaxillary groove broad.
b. Preorbital entire.

c. Premaxillary groove naked.

d. Body ovate, the outline somewhat regularly elliptical,

depth a little less than half length; spines rather

slender and short, second dorsal spine half length

of head, second anal spine less than half length

^ of head. aureolus. 8.

dd. Bod}^ rhomboid, short and deep, with angular outlines,

the deptii usually more than half length; spines

long and strong.

e. Anal rays III-8; second dorsal spine three-fourths

or more length of head ; second anal spine more

than half length of head. peruviaiws. 9.

118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1888.

ee. Anal rays II-9 ; second dorsal spine not nearly so

long as head, and not half longer than second

anal, rhombeus. 10.

cc. Premaxillary groove broad, rounded behind, with a median

linear depression, its surface scaled ; anal rays III-8 ;

second dorsal spine about as long as head ; pectorals

nearly as long as head, reaching front of anal ; teeth

long, slender, and brush-like ; depth 2 in length.

olisthostoma. 11.

bb. Preorbital serrate ; body with distinct dark stripes along the

rows of scales ; body rhomboidal, with angular outline;

spines very strong.

c. Yentrals blackish. fatao. 12.

cc. Yentrals pale.

d. Second dorsal spine f to | length of head, and f depth

of body, which is 2 to 2| in its length.

e. Pectoralslong,reachingabouttofrontof anal; caudal

longer than head ; lateral stripes numerous ;

depth nearly 2 in length. lineatus.^ 13.

ee. Pectorals short, barely reaching vent ; caudal

shorter than head ; lateral stripes few; depth

about 2| in length. brevimanus. 14.

dd. Second dorsal spine as long as head, and longer than

longest anal spine ; pectorals narrow, reaching

past tips of ventrals to anal ; lateral stripes about

12; depth 2 to 2j in length. plumieri. 16.

1. Gerres lefroyi (Goode) Glinther.

Diapterus lefroyi, Goode, Am. Jour. Sci. & Aits, 123, 1874.
Eucinostomus lefroyi Goode, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., No. 5, 39, 1876.
Mucinostomus productus Poey, Ann. Lye, xi, 59, 1876.
Oerres lefroyi Giinther, Voyage of Challenger, Fishes, i, 10, 1880.
(Name only.)
Habitat. — Bermuda Islands.

2. Gerres gracilis (Gill) Jordan & Gilbert.

Diaptertis gracilis Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Pliila., 246, 1863. (Cape

San Lucas.)
Oerres aprion Giinther, iv, 255, 1862. (San Domingo; Jamaica; Bahia.)

' The short description of Oerres brasilianus C. and V., vi, 458, contains no
characteristics by which we are able to distinguish it from either O. lineatus
or O. brevimamis, hence we do not include it in the Key.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119

Eucinostomus pseudogula Poey, Anal. Soc. Esp., iv, 124 & 125, 1875.

(Cuba.)
Eucinostomus harengulus Goode & Bean, Proc. IT. S. Nat. Mus., 1879,

132. (Western Florida.)
Diapterus harengulus Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879, 339.

(Clear Water Harbor, Florida.)
Gerres gracilis Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 274

(Guaymas) ; and Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 329 (Guaymas ;

Mazatlan ; Panama) ; ibid., 1882, 108 (Mazatlan ; Panama).
Oerres hareiigulus Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 584, 1883.

(Pensacola, Florida.)
Body elliptical, compressed, tapering regularly each way from
the spinous dorsal ; anterior profile almost straight and not steep;
angle at front of breast little marked. Mouth small, maxillary
reaching vertically from front of orbit or slightly past it. Teeth
rather strong, in broad patches. Exposed portion of maxillary
ovate, about twice as broad as long. Preorbital entire, very
narrow, its narrowest part about half width of maxillary-. £3^6
not very large, its diameter about equal to length of snout, or the
interorbital space, and is about 3i in head. Furrow for the base
of the premaxillaries a narrow naked groove, its length about
three-fifths of the eye, and more than three times its own breadth,
measured from the anterior limit of the scales along its sides.
Preopercle entire. Dorsal spines weak and flexible, the last two
or three proportionally stronger than the others. Longest dorsal
spine about twice in head, more than two-fifths greatest depth of
body, and nearly twice length of second anal spine. Anal spines
short, the second somewhat stronger than the third, but shorter,
its length 3f to 4^ in head. Third spine shorter than soft rays.
Yentrals short, three-fifths length of head, reaching about half-way
to anal, but not nearly to vent. Pectorals slender, about as long
as head, reaching about to vent. Caudal not very long, the inner
margins of the lobes convex, the middle rays about one-fourth
length of outer ones, which are a little shorter than head. Scaly
sheath at base of fins moderate, the last raj'S of the anal hidden
by it. A^entrals and caudal mostly covered with small scales ;
other fins naked.

Color in life, silvery, greenish above. Snout and upper part of
caudal peduncle du5k3\ Spinous dorsal, in a male specimen,
dusky, punctate at base, abruptly black at tip, the dark areas
separated by a transparent, horizontal bar; in a female specimen,
the dorsal grows gradually darker at tip. Soft dorsal punctate.

120 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Caudal with a faint duslvy margin, Yentrals very slightly dusky
on the middle in the male, plain in the female.

Head 3x\ ; depth 2j% ; D. IX-10 ; A. lll-l ; lat. line 5-45-9.

It seems probable that the habitat of the various species of
Gerres will be found to be much more extended than has hitherto
been supposed. Specimens of the present species have been
obtained in the West Indies, on the coast of Florida, and at
several points on the Pacific coasts of Central America and
Mexico. Prof. Chas. H. Gilbert reports it as abundant at Mazatlan,
where it is found in shallow waters near the shore. It reaches a
length of six inches or more, and is known to the fishermen as
Mojarra cantilena.

3. Gerres dowi (Gill) GUnther.

Biapterus dowi Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 162, 1863. (Panama.)

Gerres dowi Giinther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 448, 1866 (Description taken
from Gill); Steindachner, Ichth. Beitrage, iv, 13, 1875 (No descrip-
tion). (Callao, Peru ; Galapagos Islands).

Oerres dowi Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Coram., 1881, 329
(Panama); ibid., 1883, 111 (Panama); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S.
Nat. Mus., 1882, 377 (Panama).

Oerres aprion Giinther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 391, 1866. (Name only.)
(Panama.)

Habitat. — Panama to Peru Very abundant on the coasts of
the Galapagos Islands. (Steindachner.)

4. Gerres jonesi Giinther.

Gerres jonesi Giinther, Aun. and Mag. Nat. Hist., 1879, iii, 150, 389;
Voyage Challenger, Fishes, i, 10, 1880 (Bermuda).

Habitat. — Bermuda Islands.

5. Gerres californiensis (Gill) Jordan k Gilbert.

Diapterus californiensis Gill, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 245.

(Cape San Lucas.)
Gerres califotrniensis Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 274

(Guaymas); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 319

(Guaymas; Mazatlan); ibid., 1882, 108 (Mazatlan).
? Oerres gula Steindachner, Ichth. Beitrage, iii, 60, 1875. (Name only;

nee Cuv. & Val.) (Magdalena Bay.)

Habitat. — Pacific coast of Mexico. (Mazatlan; Guaymas; Cape
San Lucas.)

6. Gerres cinereus (Walbaum) Jordan k Gilbert.

Turdus cinereus peltatus Catesby, pi. ii, fig. 2, 1750. .

Mvgil cinereus Walbaum, Arte di Piscium, 228, 1792. (After Catesby.)

Proc A U 3 Phila 1383

Plate 1

T Sinc"liirilSan.Ua.-Pl:'ad

UNIO CUNNINGHAMl Wn^ht

PROC, A. N. S. PHIW.,

PL. II.

O 9 •

5 It ««,
ft 5> -b

2A.

.-.^

0:^

Co

C

o

c

C

Co ^ '^ k

f f I'i^ 4^ 1^

o

c

» o

o

>s

^

CRESSON ON AZTEC MUSIC.

PROC, A. N. S. PHILA.,

CRESSON ON AZTEC MUSIC.

PROC. OF ACAD. OF NAT. SCI. 1883.

PL. V.

i Frf

V\

7V<ii

\ i

/ , ' . /■

Fmjc

DICLONIUS MIRABILIS I

PROC. OF ACAD. OF NAT. SCI. 1883.

PL VI.

DICLONIUS MIRABILIS {

PROC.OF ACAD. OF NAT. SCI. 1883

PL. Vtl.

DICLONIUS MIRABILIS I.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 121

Oerres aprion Cuv. & Val., vi, 461, 1830 (Martinique; San Domingo;
Montevideo; East Coast of Mexico). (Not of Gi\ini\\ev = Eucinos-
tomus pseudogula Poey); Poey, Rep. Fis. Cuba, i, 316, 1865.

Diaptereus aprion Poey, Syn. Pise. Cuba, 321, 1868. (Cuba.)

Oerres zebra Miiller & Troschel, Schomburgk Hist. Barbadoes, 668,
1848 (Barbadoes); Giinther, i, 343, 1859, and iv, 254, 1862 (Copied);
Steindachner, Iclithyol. Notizen, iv, 11, 1867 (Surinam); Stein-
dachner, Zur Fisch-Fauna des Magdelenen-Stromes, 9, 1878 (Rio
Magdalena, identified with C. squamipinnis); Jordan & Gilbert,
Bull. U. S. Fish Comm., 1881, 329 (Mazatlan).

Oerres squamipinnis Giinther, i, 349, 18.59, and iv, 254. 1862 (Jamaica;
Gautemala); Giinther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 391, 1869 (No description)
(.Jamaica; Cliiapam; Panama); Steindachner, Ichthyol. Notizen,
iv, 12, 1867 (Surinam).

Oerres cinereus Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Comm., 1882, 108
(Mazatlan); and Syn. Fish. N. A., 935, 1883.

Habitat. — Both coasts of Tropical America (Mazatlan ; CJiiapam ;
Panama ; Bahamas ; Barbadoes).

7. Gerres gula Cuvier & Vnlencienne?.

Oerres gula Cuv. & Val., vi, 464, 1830 (Martinique; Brazil); Jenyns,

Zool. Beagle, Fishes, 58, 1842; Giinther, i, 346, 1859, and iv, 255,

1862 (Atlantic Coasts of Tropical America); Poey, Rep. Fis. Cuba,

i, 316, 1865.
Eucinostomus argenteus Baird & Girard, Ninth Smith. Report, 345,

1855; Baird & Girard, Mex. Bd. Survey, 17, pi. 9, figs. 9-12, 1859.
fOerres argenteus Giinther, iv, 256, 1862. (Atlantic Coasts of N.A.)
Eucinostomus gulula Poey, Anal. Soc. Esp., iv, 128, pi. vi, 1875.
Diapterus homonymus Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879,

340. (Clear Water Harbor, Fla.)
Oerres gula Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 934, 1883. (West

Indies, north to Cape Cod.)

Body elliptical, compressed, dorsal profile tapering regularly
each way from beginning of spinous dorsal ; anterior profile nearly
straight, posterior slightl}' more convex. Line from angle at
front of breast to vent nearly- straight. Mouth small, slightly
oblique (when not protruded), maxillary reaching just be3'ond
A^er-tical at front of eye, exposed part triangular, about twice as
long as broad. Premaxillaries very protractile ; premaxillary
groove longer than broad, scaled in front, with a naked pit behind;
these scales, however, are not very distinct in j^oung specimens,
and are apt to be rubbed off in poorly preserved ones.

Villiform teeth on both jaws ; no canines, incisors, or molars ;
no teeth on vomer or palatines. Pi'eopercle entire ; gill-rakers

9

122

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[188J

short, about seven below angle. Eye large, 3 in head, its diameter
a little greater than its distance from snout, and about equal to
the interorbital space.

Scales moderate, as in other species. Lateral line follows curve
of back, being most arched beneath fifth and sixth spines.

Spinous dorsal as long as soft, second dorsal spine nearly 1| in
second anal spine, which is stronger than the third, but equals it
in length ; posterior ends of anal and dorsal fins opposite, soft
parts of these two fins depressible into a scaly sheath. Pectorals
nearly as long as head, reaching to vent. Ventrals short, not
reaching quite to vent. Caudal deepl3'- forked.

Color, in alcohol, silvery, palest below, no lines or bars except
sometimes in young, but the scales are minutely punctate with
dark, thickest on dorsal region. A black spot at top of spinous
dorsal.

Head 3^ in length ; depth, 2|. D. IX-10 ; A. II 1-7 or 8 ; Lat.
line about 5-45-9.

We append averages of the measurements of thirteen specimens,
viz. : — 1 from Bermuda ; 2 from Beaufort, N. C. ; 2 from Charleston,
S. C. ; 7 from Pen-acola, Fla. ; 1 from Aspinwall.

From a comparison of these specimens and of some seven
others which we have examined, we are convinced that the
synonymy of this species should stand as given above.

TABLE OF MEASUREMENTS.

Number of specimens measured .

Specimens from

Greatest depth in length

Head in length

Distance from snout to spinous dorsal in length
Second anal spine in second dorsal spine . . .
Eye in head

Depth of deepest specimen in length

Depth of most slender specimen in length. .

Shortest 2d anal in 2d dorsal spine

Longest 2d anal in 2d dorsal spine.

cq

2.772.81
3.313.18
2.712.50
1.76 2.00

<1

2.672.612.672.66
3.333.233.083.23
2.512.422.392.46

1.701.73

3.05 3.02 3.00 3.00 3.00

2. 77'2. 772. 632. 332. 67
2.772.862.702.862.67
1.76,2.00 1.70,2.09
1.76 .... 1.7011.54

1.74
3.01

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 123

8. Gerres aureolas Jordan & Gilbert.

Gerres aureolus .Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Coram., 1881, 328
(Panama) ; ibid., 1882, 111 (Panama).

Habitat. — Bay of Panama.

9. Geries peruvianas Cuvier & Valenciennes. Moharra, China.

Gerres peruvianus Cuv. & Val., Hist. Nat Poiss., vi, 467, 1830 (Payta,
Northern Peru) ; Lesson, Voyage Coquille, Poiss., 180, 1828 ; Jordan
& Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm,, 1881, 330 (Mazatlan ; Panama) ;
ibid., 1882, 111, 108, 112 (Panama; Mazatlan; Punta Arenas);
Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 382 (Panama).

Gerres rhombeus Giinther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 391, 18tj6 (Name only;
nee Cuv. & Val.) (Chiapam) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat,
Mus., 1881, 232 (Salina Cruz).

Habitat. — West Coast of Tropical America (Mazatlan; Salina
Cruz; Panama; Chiapam; Peru).

10. Gerrea rhombeas Cuvier A Valenciennes.

Gerres rJiombens Cuv. & Val., vi, 459, 1830 (Martinique and San
Domingo) ; Giinther, iv, 253, 1862 (In part ; apparently confounded
with G. oUsthostoma Goode & Bean) (Cuba; Jamaica; Puerto Cabello);
Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat- Mus., 1882, 38^ (Aspinwall).

Habitat.-^W est Indies,

11. Gorres oUsthostoma (roode & Bean. Irixh Pompano ; Hog Fish.

Gerres rhombeus Poey, Syn. Pise. Cuba, 82, 1858 (Not G. rhombeus of
Cuv. & Val , vi, 459) ; Poey, Rep. Fis. Cuba, i, 316, 1865.

Mojarra rhombea Poey, Anal. Soc. Esp., Hist. Nat., x, 327, 1881.

Gerres oUsthostoma Goode & Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 423
(Indian River, Florida) ; Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 934,
1883 (West Indies, north to Southern Florida).

Habitat. — West Indies, north to Southern Florida.

12. Gerres patao Poey,

Gerres paiaa Popy, Mem. Cub., ii, 192, 1860; ibid., Syn. Pise. Cub.,
820, 1868; Gunther, iv, 253, 18Q2 (Cuba).

Habitat. — West Indies,

IS Gerres lineatus (Humboldt) Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Smarts lineatus Humboldt, Observ. Zodl., ii, 185, pi, 46, 1807-1834.
(Acapulco.)

Gerres lineatus Cuv. & Val., Hist. Nat. Poiss., vi, 470, 1830 (Descrip-
tion from Humboldt); Jordan & Gilbert, Bull. U. S. Fish Comm.,
1881, 880 (Mazatlan; San Bias); ibid., 1882, 108 (Mazatlan); Jordan
& Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 377 (Fresh-water lake at
Acapulco).

124 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Oerres axillaris Giinther, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 102, 1864; Giiatber,
Fish. Centr, Amer., 448, 1866 (Chiapam); Jordan & Gilbert, Proc.
U. S. Nat. Mus„ 1881, 233 (Name only). (San Bias.)

Habitat. — West Coast of Mexico.

14. Gerres brevimanus Giinther.

Oerres brevimanus Giinther, Proo. Zool. Soc. Lond., 152, 1864;
Giinther, Fish. Centr. Amer., 418, 1869 (Chiapam).

Habitat. — Pacific Coast of Central America.

15. Gerres brasilianus Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Oerres brasilianus Cuv. and Val., vi, 458, 1830 (Brazil); Poey, Hep.
Fis. Cuba, i, 315, 1865.

Habitat. — West Indies, south to coast of South America.

16. Gerres plumieri Cuvier & Valenciennes.

Oerres plumieri Cuv. & Val., vi, 452, 1830 (Antilles); Giinther, iv,
253, 1862 (Atlantic Coasts of Tropical America) ; Jordan & Gilbert,
Syn. Fish. N. A., 583, 1883 (West Indies, north to Eastern Florida);
Poey, Rep. Fis. Cuba, i, 315, 1865.

Habitat. — West Indies ; Aspinwall ; Indian River, Fla.
Profs. Jordan & (jilbert's collection contains specimens from
each of th& two places last named.

1883.J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 125

June 5.

The Rev, H. C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.

Twenty-five persons present.

A paper entitled " On the Genus Hyliota," by Graceanna Lewis,
was presented for publication.

The death of Dr. W. Lehman Wells, a member, was announced.

Observations on Actinosphserium eichornii. — A communication
from Miss S. G. Foulke on Actinosphserium eichornii was read
by Prof. H. Carvill Jjewis.

It was stated that while observing Actinosphseria, four indi-
viduals were seen to become fused, as it were, into one mass.

At the end of an hour, this mass had separated into three
Actinosphaeria, two of the original four remaining fused into one.

This double one then became constricted, a little to one side of
the middle, apparentl,y being about to separate. In a few minutes
the Actinosphserium began to eject, at the point of constriction,
a thin protoplasmic substance containing transparent granulated
globules and free granules. By a waving motion of the rays, the
masses of ejected matter were broken up, and the globules set
free in the water.

These globules developed from one side an extremel}^ long ray
of finely granular protoplasm, slightly elongating at the same
time, thus taking an oval shape. No trace of the axial threads
peculiar to the rays of adult Actinosphaeria could be discovered.
The average length of these globules, including the ray, was
•1422 mm. ; without the ray, •0121 mm.

The next act of the globules was the sending out another ray
from a point opposite to the first. Minute vacuoles appeared and
ranged themselves close to the surface of the globule. Other
rays were developed at various intervals of time. The appearance
of the young Actinosphaeria gradually became more perfect in
resemblance to the parent. The growth was very slow, the perfect
form not being attained for a period varying from one to two
weeks, and tlie size was even then small.

The external layer of vacuoles of the Actinosphserium, from
which the globules had been ejected, contained numbers of
granules in active motion. In the different vacuoles the number
varied from ten to about one hundred, as nearly as could be
counted. Tliey were usually congregated at one point and seemed
to be trying to force a way out.

Sometimes a globular mass of protoplasm was seen to run
out upon a ray, and then, instead of returning to the body as
usual, drop off" into the water, and develop into a peifect Actinc-

126 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP 1883.]

sphserium, in the same manner as those ejected in a mass from
the body.

Several free cells, having rays, were observed, npon touching a
ray of the Actinosphset'ium, to glide down it in the manner usual
to captured prey, and be re-absorbed into the body.

One globule of protoplasm, running out towards the point
of a ray, stopped, and while motionless sent out a long ray
at right-angles to that supporting the globule. Another smaller
globule ran out on this secondarj' i-ay and, in its turn, sent out a
third ray at right-angles to the secondary ray, but parallel to
the primary ray. It has been stated that the rays of the Actino-
sphasrtum never branched, but the observer tliought that the above
phenomenon could be truly called branching, as all the proto-
plasm returned to the main ray, and thence to the body.

To ascertain whether any globules of protoplasm artificially
freed from the body of the AcHnosphaeriuw would develop in the
same manner as those above described, an Actmosphaerium was
crushed in the livebox so violently as to completely disintegrate
it. The vacuoles were broken up, and the internal mass of proto-
plasm mixed with the water, only two or three small masses
of the external vacuoles remaining intact. On removing the
pressure, all the fluid protoplasm was seen to gather itself up into
globules, of sizes varying from -0507 mm. to •253 mm.

These globules contained vacuoles, the size and number of the
vacuoles A^arying with the size of the globules. The water became
free from protoplasm, though a large number of the granules,
which had been contained in the external vacuoles previous to
the crushing of the Actinosphaerium, remained swimming actively
about in every direction.

The globules remained quiet for some minutes, and then began
to extend pseudopodial rays. The vacuoles increased in number
and arranged themselves close to the exterior of the globules,
those of the largest size pushing out the thin protoplasmic
covering, so as to produce a strong resemblance to the perfect
AclinoHphserium. The resemblance of each globule to the original
Actinosphaerium became more and more perfect. The few masses
of the original vacuoles also protruded rays, thus conclusively
showing that the rays of Actinosphseria are not necessarily
dependent upon the central mass of protoplasm. The vacuole
masses developed into perfect Actinosphteria much more quickly
than the globules formed of the central protoplasm, an hour or
two being sufficient to perfect the development. The rays of all
the immature Actinosphseria were irregular and flattened and in
many cases lacked the axial thread.

The Actinosphseria moved their pseudopodial rays freely in all
directions, the ray being bent close to the peripheral layer of
vacuoles.

From an original colony of eight individuals, a small bottleful

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 12T

was manufactured in the manner above described, the time
needed for development being in proportion to the size of the
fragments into which the Actinospliseria were divided. The
above experiments were tried on many individuals, the only dif-
ference of result, in the various instances, being in the degree
of completeness with which the protoplasm separated itself from
the water. It was argued from the above facts, that the power of
any part of an Actinosphserium to develop into a perfect individual
was inherent, and not dependent upon any peculiar condition of
the animalcule.

Fig. 8, Pl.XLI of Leidy's Rhizopods of North America, which
he doubtfully refers to the Actinosphseria, exactly' resembles a
medium stage in the development of the globules ejected from
the body of the Actinosphserium.

The observer stated that the rays of Actiriosphaerium, when
irritated by being compressed, would be retracted completely
on all sides, and would again appeal* on the cessation of the
disturbance.

The length of time needed for the development of the Actino*
sphseria, in the reproduction by natural means^ was from seven to
fourteen days ; that needed for the development, in the reproduc-
tion by artificial means, was ft'om one to two days.

In the latter case this length of time was needed only in cases
when tlie crushing was carried to extremes, as, when the Actino-
sphserium, was simply divided into small pieces, a feW hours were
all that was needed to complete the development of the fragments.

June 12i
Mr. John H. REbFiELD in the chair.
Twenty4hree persons present.

Cutaneous Nerves in Mammals. — Dr. Harrison Allen, in con-
tinuation of his remarks on the trophic value of the cutaneous
nerves spoke of the distribution of the larger setae-bearing hair-
follicles in mammals as exposed after depilation. He described
the oral, the mental, the supra-orbital and the proximo-carpal
groups as well as those placed on the latei'al aspects of the limbs.
H^ had succeeded in tracing nerve-filaments to the follicles in all
instances and held that they bore close analogies to the pteryls of
the birds. In specimens in which the follicles were rudimentary
he had observed failure of the nerve also, and he was thus induced
to believe that a close relation existed between the setse-bearing
follicles and the nerves themselves.

The following was ordered to be printed :-^

128 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

ON THE GENUS HYLIOTA.
BY GRACE ANN A LEWIS.

By a letter of inquiry from Prof. G. Hartlanb, M.D., of Bremen,
German}', concerning some rare African birds of the genus Hyliota,
attention has been drawn to the specimens now in this Academy,
of which there are three, all of them being male birds.

The question at issue is whether there are two distinct species
or only one ; and as distinguished authorities differ on this point,
it seems proper to offer to ornithologists the testimony which
these specimens afford.

The genus was first characterized b}^ Swainson, who described
the species H. flavigastra. The bird was at first supposed to
belong to India, but was subsequently found to inhabit N. E.
Africa and Senegambia, and was for a long time the only known
species of the genus. Our specimen agrees moderately well with
Swainson's description, but is, no doubt, an immature male, the
wings are brownish and are not edged with glossy purple, but
instead with a dull grayish white. The two external pairs of tail
feathers are edged more or less with white, as in the female. The
band of white on the wing is formed largely by the middle and
greater coverts, and beginning nearly at the outer edge of the wing,
continues obliquely across the roots of the primaries, secondaries
and tertials, meeting on the back with the white of the rump so
as to form a deep curve over the folded wings and back. The
white on the wing is even more extensive than is apparent. On
lifting the overlying dark plumage this color is seen to involve
nearly all of the upper portion of the wing, the internal surface of
Which as well as the axillaries are white. The outer greater
coverts are white at the base but are black glossed with green on
their margins ; on the external feather, the black is so reduced
as to leave only a border on a white ground. The whole upper
plumage of the head and back as far as the rump is of deep blue-
black with glossy steel-blue reflections.

In 1851, J. and E. Verreaux described in the Rev. et Mag. de
Zool., p. 308, a second species, Muscicapa (?) violacea. In the
same year, H. E. Strickland brought home from the River Gaboon
a specimen which he described in Jardine's Contributions to
Ornithology, 18.51, p. lo2, under the name of Hyliota violacea,
after having had the opportunity of consulting the manuscript of
Verreaux, to which he refers. He remarks as follows : " This

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 129

bird is interesting as affording a second species of a genus of
which one specimen onl}-, the R. flavigastra, Swains., of Senegal,
was hitherto known. It much resembles H.Jlavigastra, but differs
in its broader beak, and the less extent of white on the wing.
Whole upper parts black with a steel-blue gloss, of a rather more
purple hue than in flavigastra. Three or four of the greater
wing coverts next the body arc white (in flavigastra the whole of
the middle, and the basal half of the greater coverts are white).
Lower parts pale cream-color.

Total length 5 ; beak to front 5 ; to gape 7 ; broad '2^; wing
o ; medial retrices 1 and 9 ; exteinal 2 ; tarsus 7."

Of Hyliota violacea, as above described, the Academy possesses
two specimens. One is the identical bird on which the species
was founded by Yerreaux, and its characters agree with the
description of that author, as well as with that of Strickland, and
also with that to be found in Hartlaub's Ornithologie Westafricas,
Bremen, 1857, p. 98.

The second specimen in possession of the Academy, belongs to
the Du Chaillu 1st Coll., and is also from the River Gaboon.
This bird is mentioned in Cassin's Catalogue, Proc. Acad, of Nat.
Sciences, 1869, p. 51, but no description is given. Essentiall}- its
characters are the same as the tj'pe specimen of Verreaux.

In this species, the only white to be seen on the whole wing is
on one single feather belonging to the inner portion of the greater
coverts. There are really about five feathers belonging to the
series of ornamental coverts, but the}' overlie each other, and are
so disposed that in the closed wing only one of them is visible.

The rump in both species is covered with long, loose, silk}'-
feathers, of a white or grayish white color, from the base to near
the .tip, when the feather sudclenly becomes dark and at the same
time pennaceous in structure. The only difference between the
two species appears to be in the depth of the dark margin, or its
entire absence in mature specimens of flavigastra. In Swainson's
rlescription of the type, the rump is given as pure white, but it is
not so in our specimen. The pennaceous dai*k border is nearly as
deep as in violacea, so that this character cannot be relied upon
as a distinction between the two species.

In his Ornithology of Angola, p. 190, Prof. Barboza du Bocage
acknowledges the receipt from M. Anchieta, of one specimen of
H. violacea. The description is that of a bird with a large amount
of white on the wing. This description does not resemble the

130 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

type specimen of Verreaux, but is much more nearly like ^aui-
gastra Swains.

Depending on this description, R, Bowdler Sharpe gives it in
his Catalogue of the Birds in the Collection of the British Museum,
instead of that of Verreaux, and. in consequence, considers H,
violacea as a doubtful species.

With the privilege of examination of the type, and of comparing
this with the DuChaillu specimen, and the descriptions of Verreaux,
Strickland and Hartlaub, it seems impossible to suppose that the
specimen sent by M. Anchieta to Prof. Bocage, was that of a true
violacea, but was either H. Jlavigaetra, or a form intermediate
between the two.

The striking differences between the two species, are the blue-
black plumage in the upper parts in flavigastra, and the violet-
black of violacea ; the broad bands of white on the wing of the
former, and the concentrated spot on that of the latter; the darker
shade of the under parts m flavigastra ; and the white thighs of
the one and the black of the other, together with the larger size
of violacea. They also inhabit different regions, fiavigastra
belonging to the N. E, of Afiica and Senegambia, while violacea
is found southward from the Gaboon to Benguela in "V^est Africa.

Swainson points out the general resemblance of Hyliota to the
African todies of the genus Flatystira, and to the Old World fly-
catchers of Muscicapa, with a bill so much lengthened and com-
pressed on the sides that at first sight it might be mistaken for a
Sylvia.

It also agrees with Muscicapa and Crypfolopha in having the
base of the bill broad and depressed as far as the nostrils, and
then compressed to the extremity, the bill being so much length-
ened in Hyliota that it becomes the tenuirostral form of the group
to which it belongs.

The glossy blue-black plumage, white wings and buff throat are
in unison with related fly -catchers. By the rump feathers Swainson
detects an analogy with the caterpillar-catchers of the Ceblepyrinse.

In Hyliota the sexes differ remarkably in color, as they do also
in Platystira, such difference not being the rule in the family of
the Muscicapidae. Hyliota agrees with the fly-catchers in general
by its small and weak feet and its syndactyle toes, the outer being
connected with the middle as far as the first joints. The wings
and tail are those of Muscicapa, in which group Hyliota is placed
by ornithologists.

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

131

June 19,
The Rev. H. C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.
The death of J. B. Gassies, a correspondent, was announced.

Note 071 the Intelligence of the American Turret Spider. — The
Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook exhibited nests of Tarentala arenicola
Scudder, a species of ground-spider, of the family Lycosidje,
popularly known as the Turret Spider. These nests, in natural
site, are surmounted by structures which quite closely' resemble
miniature old-fashioned chirane3's, composed of mud and crossed

Nest of Turret Spider, lined with cotton.

sticks, a« seen in the log cabins of pioneer settlers. From half
an inch to one inch of the tube projects above ground, while it
extends straight downwards twelve or more inches into the earth.
The projecting portion or turret is in the form of a pentagon,
more or less regular, and is built up of bits of grass, stalks of straw,
small twigs, etc., laid across each other at the corners. The upper
and projecting parts have a thin lining of silk. Taking its position
just inside the watch-tower, the spider leaps out and captures such
insects as may come in its way. The speaker has found nests of
the species at the base of the Allegheny Mountains near Altoona,
and in New Jersey on the seashore. In the latter location the
animal had availed itself of the building material at hand, by

132 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

forming the foundation of its watcli-tower of little quartz pebbles,
sometimes producing a structure of considerable beaut}'. In this
sandy site, the tube is preserved intact by a delicate secretion of
silk, to which the particles of sand adhere. This secretion scarcely
presents the character of a web-lining, but has sutficient consis-
tency to hold aloft a frail cylinder of sand and silk, when the sand
is carefully scooped away from the site of the nest.

A nest recentl}^ obtained from Vineland, N. J., fui-nished an
intei'esting illustration of the power of these araneads to intelli-
gently adapt themselves to varying surroundings arid to take
advantage of circumstances with which they certainly could not
have been previously familiar. In order to preserve the nest, with
a view to studj^ the life-history of its occupant, the sod containing
the tube had been carefully dug up and the upper and lower
openings plugged with cotton. Upon the arrival of the nest in
Philadelphia, the plug guarding the entrance had been removed,
but the other had been forgotten and allowed to remain. The
spider, which still inhabited the tube, immediately began removing
the cotton at the lower portion, and cast some of it out. But
guided apparently by its sense of touch to the knowledge that
the soft fibres of the cotton would be an excellent material with
which to line its tube, she speedily began putting it to that use,
and had soon spread a soft, smooth la^^er over the inner surface
and around the opening. The nest, in this condition, was exhib-
ited and showed the interior to be padded for about four inches
from the summit of the tower. Dr. McCook pointed out the very
manifest inference that the spider must for the first time have
come in contact with such a material as cotton, and had imme-
diately^ utilized its new experience by substituting the soft fibre
for the ordinary silken lining ; or, rather, adding it thereto. This
nest with the cotton wadding is figured on p. 131.

June 26.

Dr. W. S. W. RuscHENBERGER, in the chair.

Twenty-three persons present.

The Fishes of the Batsto Biver, N. J. — Prof. Cope gave an
account of the results of fishing in the confined waters of a broken
dam on the Batsto River, New Jersey. The species obtained
were the following. Percidje : Pcecilichthys erochi^ous Cope; En-
neacanthus simulans Cope ; Mesogonistius chsetodon Baird ; Apho-
doderidse : Aphododerus sayanus Gill.; Umbridfe : Umbra limi
Kirtl. ; Esocidai : Esox ttmbrosus Kirt. ; Esox reticulahis Les. ;
Cyprinidfe : Gliola chalyhsea Cope ; Catostomida? : Erimyzon
sucetta Lac; Siluridie : Amiurus prosthistius Cope, sp. nov. ;
Anguillidje : Anguilla rostrata Les. Prof. Cope remarked that
these fishes represent the fish fauna of the Carolinian district of

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 133

the Nearctic realm, only three of the above, Esox reticulatus,
Erirayzon sucetta and Anguilla rostrata, extending into the
Alleghanian district. Of the remaining eight species, four are
restricted to New Jersey, and in the case of two of them, Pceci-
lichthys erochrous and Mesogonistius chsetodon, the corresponding
parts of Delaware ; the other two species being Gliola chalybsea
and Amiurus prosthistius. Poecilichthys erochrous is the only
Etheostomine perch which inhabits muddy waters, though it is
not confined to such bottom, living as well in the gravelly but
dark brown-stained streams of the New Jersey pines. The
Amiurus is new to science, which is quite unexpected in the case
of so large a fish. Its characters are as follows : —

Caudal fin rounded when expanded, not straight or slightly
concave, the marginal rays being shortened. Anal fin long, one
specimen with 27 rays, two with 25, and one with 24 rays. An-
terior dorsal fin a good deal nearer the end of the muzzle than to
the adipose fin. Length of head 2-66 times in length without
caudal fin ; depth at first anal ray 4:'25 times in same. Greatest
width of head just equal to depth of body at first anal ray. Eyes
small, the space between them five times their long diameter.
Pectoral spines a little larger than dorsal spines, with posterior
points onl}', which are stronger than those of the dorsal. Maxil-
lary barbel to near the middle of pectoral spine ; humeral process
little roughened, extending a little beyond middle of spine. Radii
D. I. 6 ; C. + 18 + ; Y. 8 ; P. I. 8. Color generally black ; the
under surface of the head silvery white, fading on the belly to
dull white and posteriorly pink, as far as base of anal fin. Fins
black, pectorals and ventrals pale at base. Total length m. 0-208 ;
from end of muzzle to base of dorsal spine, '042 ; to posterior
base of adipose fin '149; to base of caudal fin (end of ha?mapo-
physis) -no. Depth at first anal ray -039. Total length of a
larger specimen -233.

When first seen the specimens of this species were supposed
to be unusually dark-colored examples of the common Ami-
urus nebulosus. A critical examination soon showed that they
diflGer in the important characters of the considerably more anterior
position of the dorsal fin, 4 to T more anal radii, and more rounded
outline of the caudal fin. He had compared it with the A. nebu-
losus from Lake George, N. Y., and from the Hudson and Dela-
^ware Rivers. In fact its characters ally it to the western A.
natalis, from which it diflTers by its more slender form and more
rounded caudal fin.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

134 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

on the fishes of the recent and pliocene lakes of the western
part of the great basin, and of the idaho pliocene lake.

by e. d. cope.

Preliminary Observations.

The numerous lakes of the northwestern part of the Great
Basin present many points of interest to the geologist and biol-
ogist. The region which they occupy is one of comparativel3'
recent geological disturbance, so that their topographical features
may be regarded as of relatively modern origin. Their former
greater extent and intercommunication in groups has been clearly
pointed out by the geologists of the U. S. Survey of the Fortieth
Parallel ; and the species of fishes found in the pliocene and post-
pliocene deposits of the adjacent regions have been shown by
myself^ to be nearly allied to those now living in the present lakes.

The geologists of the fortieth parallel have shown that a large
part of the present Territory of Utah was, during late tertiary
time, occupied by a large body of water, of which Salt Lake,
Utah Lake and Sevier Lake are the present representatives. To
this ancient sea they have given the name of Lake Bonneville.
They have also shown that the existing lakes of the western
region of Nevada were formerly united into an extensive body of
"water, to which they have given the name of Lake Lahontan. It
included the existing Walker's, Carson, Humboldt, P>'ramid and
Winnemucca Lakes. It is exceedingly probable that it will be
shown that a third lake existed in Oregon, north of the supposed
northern boundary of Lake Lahontan, which is now represented
by the Warner Lakes, Abert's Lake, Summer Lake and Silver
Lake, and probably by Harney's and Malheur Lakes on the eastern
side of the Oregon desert. As will be shown later, the larger
species of fishes found in such of these lakes as contain them, are
identical, and different from those of the lakes of the Bonneville
series. One species, the Catostomus tahoensis, is common to this
area and that of the true Lahontan Lakes (Tahoe and Pyramid),
and this Oregon lake may have been continuous with that of
Nevada, at a point some distance east of the mountains. Goose
Lake^ the Klamath Lakes, and doubtless Bhett and Clear Lakes,

' Proceedings American Philosophical Society, Nov. 1870 and Dec. 1877.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 135

form another series, characterized by several points of resemblance
in their fish faunjie. Whether they were connected, forming a
single body, at an earlier geological period, is not yet known.
Some of them are connected by rivers and creeks at the present
time, and the Klamath River discharges the contents of the lakes
of the same name into the Pacific Ocean.

Still another late tertiary lake existed in Eastern Oregon and
Western and Southern Idaho. No body of water represents it at
the present time, and the remains of fishes found in its sediments
belong to species different from those of the Oregon basin, both
recent and extinct. It is to be supposed tltet this lake was
separate from all of the others, and of earlier age, although one
of the pliocene series. It may be called Lake Idaho, and its
sediment, the Idaho formation. A list of its species will be
given after the consideration of the characters of the faunai
of the Lahontan and Klamath Lakes.

The cause of the desiccation of the Great Basin and other
interior regions of our continent, has not been satisfactorily
explained. It is usually ascribed to the intervention of the Sierra
Nevada and Rocky Mountain ranges, which precipitate the clouds
from the Pacific Ocean, and thus deprive the regions eastward of
rain. This would at first appear to be a sufficient explanation,
but the facts of geological history contradict it. The existence
of extensive lakes throughout the now dry region, in pliocene
and postpliocene time, has been already referred to. But the
Sierra Nevada was no less elevated then than now. Furthermore,
great lakes or seas occupied the centre of the continent during
miocene time, when the ranges were still higher. Yast forests of
vegetation, and a rich population of animal life, point to a humid
climate during the entire period that has elapsed since the great
elevation of the Rocky Mountains in the beginning of the eocene
epoch, to within comparatively recent times. Yet the mountains
have been steadily diminishing by erosion throughout that period.
■^ Of course the comparatively low elevation of the Great Basin
would accelerate its desiccation, other conditions being equal.
Mr. J. D. Clayton,^ of Salt Lake Cit}^ discovered immense faults
along the western slope of the Wasatch Mountains, and proposed
the hj^pothesis that the entire area of the Great Basin had de-

^ Published, I believe, iu a number of the Salt Lake Herald, which I
cannot at present lay my hands on.

136

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1883.

scended several thousand feet during tertiary times. Mr. C. King ^
states that the fault along the eastern edge of the basin amounts
to 30,000 feet, and that along the western border, from 3000 to
10,000 feet. The elevation of P3'ramid Lake above the sea level
is now, according to King,^ 8890 feet. That of the Great Salt
Lake is, according to Emmons, 4200 feet.^ The depression,
according to King, took place on the eastern side during early
eocene times, and ma}^ have been nearly simultaneous on the
western border. As a consequence of it, the Manti and Amyzon
beds were deposited, representing the eocene period west of the
Wasatch Mouirtains.

I. The Lahontan and Klamath Lakes.
The lakes of the Great Basin in Nevada and Oregon diminish in
alkalinity as we approach the Sierra Nevada Mountains. While
desiccation has concentrated the salts in all of them, those near
the mountains have been maintained in a more or less fresh con-
dition b}' the constant influx of the pure water of the mountain
streams. The lakes most remote from the mountains are not
habitable by fishes, their only animal population being Crustacea
and the larvae of insects. Such are Summer and Christmas
Lakes of Oregon ; and the Malheur and Harney Lakes are said
to have the same character. That of Pyramid Lake, although
receiving the fresh waters of the Truckee River, is too alkaline
to be potable. The following analysis is given in Mr. King's
II Yol. of the Survey of the 40th Parallel (p. 824), as made by
Prof. 0. D. Allen, of Yale College :

Sodium, .....

0-8999

Soda,

0-4234

Chlorine,

1-3870

Sulphuric Acid,

0-1400

Carbonate of Lime, .

o-ons

Carbonic Acid,

0-2392

3'23G5

in 1000 parts of the water.

1 Survey of the 40th Parallel, i, p. 744.
" Loc. cit., iii, p. 822.
* Loc. cit., ii, p. 466.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 137

The water of the Upper Klamath Lake is slightly alkaline to
the taste, and less so than that of Pyrainid Lake. The waters of
Goose and Silver Lakes are similar to it, while that of Warner's
Lake is rather more alkaline. All of these lakes abound in fishes.
Summer Lake, Christmas Lake, and others, are intensely alka-
line to the taste.

The locality which has furnished the greatest number of fossil
remains of the pliocene or postpliocene ages, is known as Fossil
Lake. It is twenty miles east of Silver Lake, in the western part
of the Oregon Desert. It is a shallow depression of perhaps a
hundred acres in extent, where drinkable water may be obtained
by digging. The soil is a mixture of sand and clay, vvhich supports
a more or less luxuriant growth of Artemisia. Bones of extinct
and recent species of vertebrata, thoroughly fossilized, mixed
with worked flints,^ and shells of Carinifex neioherryi bleached
snow-white, lie in profusion in this light material. Within a short
distance of this locality the soil becomes sandy, and a few miles
northeastwai'd the surface of the country consists of sand-dunes,
which rise to a height of one hundred feet. The sand is con-
stantly moving to the northeast under the influence of the
prevailing southwest wind, creeping up the long southwest slope
of the dunes, and falling in a fine shower over the apex of the
vertical northeast face. This tract is perhaps twenty miles in
diameter.^ A smaller tract of a similar character lies at the
northern end of Summer Lake, where the sand is piled up
against the basaltic hills that bound its valley on the east. I have
given lists of the vertebrate fossils of this region, as cited in the
accompanying foot-notes.

As described by Emmons,^ Pyramid Lake is thirty miles long,
by twelve wide. It is surrounded by mountains of eruptive
granite, trachyte and basalt. According to King, the level of this
lake rose, between 1867 and 1871, nine feet, while that of the
connected lake, Winnemucca, rose twenty-two feet. This lake is
exceedingly rich in life, as will be pointed out by and by. Messrs.
Jordan and Bean ^ have catalogued several species of fishes as

^ See American Naturalist, 1878, p. 125.

2 See Bulletin of the U. S. Geol. Survey of the Territories, F. V.
Hayden, iv, p. 389 ; v, p. 48.

3 Survey of the 40th Parallel, 1, p. 506.

* Kept, of the Chief of Engineers, U. S. A, Expl. and Surv. W. of 100th
Mer., G. M. Wheeler, 8vo, 1878, p. 187.
10

138 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

found in it, and I enumerate several additional ones in the present
article.

Tlie Mud Lakes in tlie neighborhood south of Fort Bidwell lie
in a monoclinal valley of moderately inclined beds of a plutonic
outflow. The strata dip towards the Sierra Nevadas, westwards.
A high divide on the north separates these lake basins from that
of the Warner Lakes. As already remarked, it is possible that
they may have been connected by water, which occupied lower
lands to the eastward, but this point remains as yet unsolved.

The four Warner Lakes occup^'^ a long valley, which trends
north and south. They are connected by a stream which flows
through a succession of swamps of Typha latifoUa. They abound
in fishes and fishing-birds. The valley is apparently a fractured
anticlinal, the strata dipping away from the lake on both the east
and the west sides. The rocks are a dark-colored basalt. At the
first and second lakes the western bluff is the higher, reaching, to
judge by the eye, nearly a thousand feet elevation at the lower
part of the third lake. At the northern part of the latter, at
Wilson's Ranch, the eastern bluff is the higher, reaching the
grand proportions of two thousand feet, estimated measurement.

Summer Lake is eighteen miles long and six or seven miles
wide. The hills and bluffs of the western side probably reach a
thousand feet in elevation. Those of the eastern side are much
less elevated, and are separated from the water by a wide slope
of sand and alkaline earth and mud. The western range is
basaltic. At one point where the escarpment is especiall^^ steep,
the brown basalt is overlaid by a deposit of white pumice or
siliceous dust, which is worn into a picturesque sculpture by the
weather.

I did not get a near view of Abert Lake, but it lies between
high basaltic bluffs, of which the eastern is the more elevated,
rising to a great height above the water. It is supplied with water
by the Chewaucan River, which is a large creek with a fine flow of
pure water. It abounds in fishes, especially the trout, Salmo
purpuratus.

Silver Lake also lies in a valley with eastern and western walls
of basalt. The sti-ata of which the walls are composed, dip away
from each other here, as at Warner's Lake, producing the impres-
sion that the lake occupies a fracture in an anticlinal. A range of
hills, terminating at its eastern extremitj^ in a bluff, extends along

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA 139

the north side of the lake. The rock of which it is composed
differs from those of the principal ranges, in being a finely bedded
volcanic conglomerate mud. The same material forms bluffs
forty-five miles eastward in the desert. During the season of
1882 the waters of Silver Lake rose higher than had been pre-
viously known. It is probable that these lakes are rising, as is
the case with Pyramid Lake. A comparatively small elevation
would connect the waters of Silver Lake with Summer Lake,
eighteen miles distant, and those of Summer Lake with the
Chewaucan River, seven miles distant. This would convert the
Chewaucan Swamp into a lake, and connect the Abert Lake with
the series.

Goose Lake is thirty miles in length and about ten miles in
width. It is bounded on the east and west by eruptive moun-
tains of no great elevation near the lake, but which rise gradually
to a considerable height, especially to the eastward. To the
north and south the valley of the lake continues for several miles.
It is cut off to the north by the watershed of the Chewaucan, and
to the south bj- that of Pitt River. The scenery of its banks is
tame as compared with that of some of the other lakes, but
presents nevertheless many elements of beauty. It is shallow
for a long distance from its northern and eastern shores. It
abounds in fishes and water-birds. I fished for a day with hook
and line without success, but procured a good collection of fishes
by another method. I found numei'ous specimens both fresh and
dry, which had been dropped by fishing-birds on or near the shore.

The great or Upper Klamath Lake is thirty-two miles long, and
of irregular width, and is said to be twelve miles across its
widest part. Its western shore is the base of the Cascade Moun-
tains, and its eastern shore is bordered b}- a low range of eruptive
hills. Both shores are wooded ; and the scenery, though it lacks
the rugged grandeur of that of Warner's and Abert's Lakes, is
highly picturesque. The symmetrical proportions of Mount
Pitt are ever visible on its eastern shore, while the more central
peaks of the Cascades are in view from its northern extremity.
It is fed by several streams, the most important of which is the
Williamson's River, which enters it from the east. This has a
considerable flow of water. The Link River, which connects the
Upper and Lower Klamath Lakes with the Klamath River, is a
wide and rapid stream containing much water.

140 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

The Upper Klamath Lake is more prolific in animal life than
any body of water known to me. The proportion of alkali which
it contains appears most favorable to the development of life.
Its waters are full of vegetable impurities, living and dead, and
mollusca and Crustacea abound everj'where. These sustain a
great population of fishes, which, though not numerous in species,
is so in individuals. Swarms of fishing-birds employ themselves
in catching them living from the lake. The most abundant mol-
lusca are the Planorbis ( Garinifex) newherryi Lea, and a Lymnsea.
A probably hydroid polyp is found attached to the bark of
submerged trees in large numbers. Its creeping yellowish stems
are imbedded in sarcode, forming a continuous mass. Each
zooid is of an elongate oval form, sessile, and with six rays of
equal size, each one-half as long as the body. These zooids are
translucent, but with two oval bodies in the lower half of the
body-cavity, of a yellow color. The masses are as large as the fist.
The length of each zooid is one millimetre. They did not extend
themselves beyond this length, neither did the rays elongate to
beyond half the same, so long as I observed them. They retracted
themselves on being irritated. They do not possess any fringes
like the arms of the Polyzoa. As the possession of a coencecium
distinguishes this genus from all the fresh-water hydroids, I pro-
pose to characterize this remarkable form as the type of a new
genus, with the name of Bhizohydra, and the species, by the name
of Jlamtincta}

The following mollusca which I obtained were identified by
Mr. Trj^on, to whom my acknowledgments are due : —

Ancylus newherryi Lea.

Limnsea stagnalis Lea.

Physa gyrina Say.

Pompholyx effusa Lea.

Planorbis corpulentus Saj'.

Garinifex newherryi Lea.

Anodonta wahlamatensis Lea.
In my explorations of these lakes, I was greatly aided by Col.
"Whipple, in command at Fort Klamath, and Col. Barnard, in
command at Fort Bidwell, and Dr. George Kober, surgeon at the

^ My attempts to preserve some of the masses of this animal in alcohol
were not successful.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 141

latter post. To these gentlemen I wish to express my thanks.
My especial thanks are also due to General W. T. Sherman,
commander-in-chief of the army, from whom I have received
many favors, on this and other occasions.

Synopsis op the Fishes.

ISOSPONDYLI.

Salmo pnrptiratus Pallas.

Pyramid Lake ; Chewaucan River ; Silver Creek (tributary of
Silver Lake) ; Klamath Lake, and Williamson's River.

As Jordan remarks, this fish varies as to its color-shades, and
is hence imagined by fishermen to include several species. A
specimen from Link River (the part of Klamath River connecting
the Klamath Lakes) is nearly- silver-white. Specimens from Wil-
liamson's River are of darker color. I examined a large number
of individuals from that stream, and found the following varia-
tions in some of them. One specimen Br. XI ; Anal lOj ; one, Br.

XII, A. 91; six, Br. XII, A. lOi; three,Br.XIII, A. 10| ; one, Br.

XIII, A. Ill; one, Br. XIII, A. 12}.

An impoi'tant food fish, sometimes reaching ten pounds in
Klamath Lake.

Salvelinus malma Walb.

Seven-mile Creek, which enters Lake Klamath from the north-
west.

PLECTOSPONDYLI.

APOCOPE Cope.
Apocope ventricosa Cope. Jordan, 1. c, p. 211.

Abundant in the small streams near Fort Bidwell, N. E. Cali-
fornia.
Apocope vulnerata Cope. Jordan, 1. c, p. 210.

Abundant in streams near Fort Bidwell, and in those tributary
to Warner's Lake and Abert's Lake,

AGOSIA Gird.

This genus is stated by Jordan to agree with Apocope, excepting
in the possession of a complete lateral line.
Agosia novemradxata Cope, sp. nov.

Scales 11-60-11; radii, dorsal I. 9; anal I. 1. The head is
rather elongate, especially the muzzle, which projects a little
beyond the mouth. Eye 4"5 times in length of head ; 1*5 times in

142

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

|_1883.

length of muzzle, and in interorbital width. Head four times in
length without caudal fin ; depth at ventral fin, five times in the
same. Dorsal fin originating behind line of last ventral ray ;
radii always I. 9. Caudal peduncle rather deep.

Measurements. m.

Total length (with caudal fin), . . . . -lOI

Length to edge of operculum, .... '010

Length to first ventral ray (outside), . . . '044

Length to first dorsal ray (outside), . . . "047

Length to first anal ray (outside), . . . •060

Length to base of caudal fin, .... -085

Depth at occipital region, . . . , . "OlS

Depth at first dorsal ray, . . . . . '018

Depth at first anal ray, . ... . . . 'OIG

Depth of caudal peduncle, '009

Color silver}-, dusted with smoky, to below the lateral line, and
marked on the sides and back with several rows of dusky spots.
Bases of inferior fins and upper lip red.

This species differs from the species of Apocope, which it
generally resembles, in having a perfect lateral line. It agrees
with the A. henshavi in having nine dorsal rays, but has a longer
muzzle and larger scales. The latter has the following scale
formula, 16-6*7-12. It is possible that some of the specimens
referred by Jordan to the A. henshavi belong here. Abundant in
Weber River at Echo, Utah,

CLIOLA Gird.
Hyho}38iii "Agass." Cope and others.
Cliola angustarca Cope. Proceeds. Amer. Philo?. Society, 1877, p. 230.

Well distinguished from the allied fossil species by its narrower
pharyngeal bones, and its teeth 4-4. Fossil Lake, Oregon.

MYLOLETJCUS Cope.

Annual Report U. S. Geol. Survey Terrs., 1871, p. 475. Jordan, Synopsis Fishes
North America, 1883, p. 887.

This genus differs from Leucus Heck, in its dental formula, 5-4
instead of 5-5. It is characteristic of the streams and lakes of the
Great Basin, and of those waters of Oregon and California which
lie nearest to them. Most of the lakes of southwestern Oregon
contain them, and their variations are such as to render their

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 143

specific characters somewhat difficult to unravel. Teeth of species
of this genus occur in the pliocene lake deposits of the Great
Basin.

Myloleucus gibbarcus Cope. AlhumojyB gihlarcns Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philis.
Society, 1877, p. 230. Anchybopsis breviitrctis Cope, 1. c, p. 229.

The presence of four teeth on the right pharyngeal bone of
specimens referred to Alburnops, as above, is not established ; and
the other characters point to the specific identity of the indi-
viduals included under the two names cited. It was abundant in
a fossil state at Fossil Lake, Oregon, whence I have obtained
about twenty pharyngeal bones of both sides. First discovered
by Chas. M. Sternberg.

The recent species may be distinguished as follows : —
Scales 11-12 — 51-5 — 6-7; anal rays I. 8; head 3*5; depth 3-5 to

4 times in length, M. formosus.

Scales 10 — 47-50 — 5 ; anal rays I. 8 ; head 3*5 ; depth 4 times in

length. M. parovanus.

Scales 9-46-4 ; anal rays I. 9 ; head 3-75 ; depth 4*5 times in

length. M. thallassinus.

Myloleucus formosus Girard. Jordan, Synopsis Fishes N.A., p. xxi. Leucus formoxtts
Jordan, Report Capt. G. M. Wheeler, Expl. W. 100th Mer., 8vo, 1878, p. 193.

Specimens of this fish from Silver Lake represent a form of
the species allied to the M. obesus, in the greater depth of the
body than those found in the Chewaucan River and the Warner
Lakes. In the first named, the depth enters the length 3*5 times ;
in the last two, four times. The Silver Lake specimens diverge
from the types in having the scales a little larger. They are
thus counted in the three sets of specimens : —

Silver Lake 11 — 51-3 — 8; Chewaucan 11-55-7; Warner Lake
12 — 54-5 — 7. The largest specimen is from Warner's Lake and
measures 8 J inches in length. ' '

Myloleucus parovanus Cope. Zoology Wheeler's Expl. Surv. W. lOOrh Mer., p. 669.

This species was originally described by me from the Beaver
River of Utah. It now appears that is the most abundant
cyprinoid of Goose and Klamath Lakes. It reaches a length of
10 to 12 inches, and forms a large part of the food of the great
flocks of various species of fishing-birds which live at those lakes.
Its specific characters are constant in a large number of indi-
viduals. Prof. Jordan identified this species with the M. bicolor

144

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

of Girard, but he gives the scale formula of that species as
8-50-5, and the anal rays as 7 — characters quite inconsistent with
the M. parovanus.

Myloleucus thalassinus sp. nov.

This species rests on a single specimen which I obtained at
Goose Lake, Oregon. It is a more slender fish than the M. paro-
vanus^ and its color when fresh is light, translucent green, quite
different from the more or less heavy olivaceous color of the
latter. Its proportions are expressed in the key above given, as
well as the smaller number of longitudinal rows of scales, and
the additional ray of the anal fin.

Measurements.

Total length (with caudal fin).

Length to edge of opercle,

Length to base of dorsal on lateral line.

Length to base of ventral on lateral line,

Length to base of anal on lateral line,

Length to base of caudal on lateral line,

Depth at first dorsal ray, .

Depth at first anal ra,y^

Depth of caudal peduncle.

Width of interorbital region, .

Width of orbit, ....

LEUCTIS Heckel.

M.

•143

•031

•059

•061

•0805

•114

•026

•022

•014

•010

•OOt

Fische Syriens, 1843, p. 48. Anchi/lopsis Cope, Proceed. Amer. Philos. Society, 1870,
p. 543.

I found recent species of this genus in Pyramid Lake, Nevada,
only. Some extinct species occur in the pliocene beds of Oregon
and Idaho. ^ The two species from P3'ramid Lake differ as follows :

Scales 18-14—56-9—7-8; anal rays I. 8; head 3-66 in length; depth
4 (3-75); eye in head 5 times. L. olivaceus.

Scales 14-15 — 63-6 — 8 ; anal rays I. 8 ; head 4 times in length ;
depth 4-5 times ; eye 3'5 in head. L. dimidiatus.

^ Leucus latus; Anchybopsis latus Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Soc,
1. c, Idaho; size large. Leucus altareus; Anchybopsis altar.cus Cope, loc.
cit., 1877, p. 239. From Oregon; small.

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

145

Leucus olivaceus sp. nov.

The largest cyprinoid of the Pyramid Lake, and veiy abundant.
The shape is a regularly compressed fusiform. The head narrows
to the muzzle, and the mouth opens obliquely forwards and
upwards. The end of the maxillary bone, when the mouth is
closed, is concealed in a sheath, and extends a little beyond the
anterior margin of the eye. The latter enters the length of the
muzzle (without the chin) 1-33 times; and the interorbital space
1*60 times. Middle of front a flat longitudinal surface, bounded
on each side by an angle, from which the surface slopes to the
superciliary border. In the Myloleucus parovanus, a fish of
similar size, the frontal is flat roof-shaped, there being a median
longitudinal angle. In specimens from Klamath Lake, however,
the lateral angles are more distinct than in those from Goose
Lake. This fish is everywhere a dusky olive, except on the belly,
which is silvery. No lateral band. Fins dusky.

MeasureTuents.

Total length, with caudal fin, .

Length to edge of opercle, . . • .

Length to base of dorsal, on lateral line,

Length to base of ventral, on lateral line,

Length to base of anal, on lateral line.

Length to base of caudal, on lateral line.

Depth at first dorsal ray, .

Depth at first anal ray.

Depth at caudal peduncle, .

Width of interorbital region.

Width of orbit,

M.

•283
•064
•122
•131

•lt3
•235
•060
•043
•027
•020
•0126

This and the smaller L. dimidiatus swim in schools in the lake,
and may be seen from the elevated road along the rocky shores,
rippling the surface like a gust of wind. At this signal, the
pelicans, gulls and terns quickly congregate, and are soon actively
employed in fishing.

Leuous dimidiatus Cope. sp. nov.

This very abundant fish is much smaller than the adult L.
olivaceus, and has a more slender form, smaller scales, and a
difierent coloration. The eye nearly equals the interorbital width

146

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

and a little exceeds the length of the muzzle. The mouth slopes
upwards, and the extremity of the maxillary bone reaches to the
anterior edge of the orbit. The ventral fin originates behind the
point below the first dorsal ray by the width of a ray. TJie fins
are all rather small, except the caudal. The sides and belly are
a pure silver-white up to the eighth row of scales below the dorsal
fin. Above that line the sides and back are a light brown,
becoming lead-colored along the border of the white. In some
specimens this lead-color forms an obscure band.

Measurements.

M.

Total length with caudal fin, "104

Length to edge of operele, *021

Length to first dorsal ray on lateral line, . . -042

Length to first ventral ray on lateral line, . . '043

Length to first anal ray on lateral line, . . . '060

Length to caudal fin on lateral line, . . . '084

Depth at first dorsal ray, "019

Depth at first anal ray, ' •0148

Depth at first caudal peduncle, 009

Width of interorbital space, .... 'OOt

Width of orbit, -006

This species exists in immense numbers in Pyramid Lake, where
it doubtless furnishes much food for the trout, Salmo purpuratus.

LeactiS altarcus Cope. Anchybopsia altarcus Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos3ph. Soc,
1877, p. 229.

Extinct; from Fossil Lake, Oregon, only. Represented by
pharyngeal bones and teeth.

SIPHATELES Cope.

Gen. Nov. Char. — Pharyngeal teeth 5-5, with well developed
grinding surfaces. Ventral fins beneath the anterior part of the
dorsal. Lateral line very imperfectly developed.

This genus is Leucus, with undeveloped lateral line. The only
species does not resemble any of the others here described.

Siphateles vittatus sp. hot.

Scales 11-55-5 ; radii D. I. 8 ; A. I. 8. Head 4 times in length
without caudal fin ; depth of body 4*5 times in the same. Eye
one-third of length of head, and a very little less than interorbital

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

U1

width. Mouth opening obliquely upwards, the maxillary not quite
reaching the anterior edge of the eye.

Measurements.

Total length with caudal fin,

Length to edge of operculum,

Length to line of dorsal fin on lateral line,

Length to line of ventral fin on lateral line,

Length to line of anal fin on lateral line.

Length to base of caudal on lateral line.

Depth at first dorsal ray.

Depth at fix'st anal ray,

Depth of caudal peduncle.

Diameter of interorbital space,

Diameter of eye, . .

M.

on

016

032.3

0328

045

061

0133

0105

0068

045

0445

Belly and sides silvery ; a straight lead-colored lateral band ;
above this, pale reddish (in spirits). The leaden band is inter-
rupted at the base of the caudal fin by a vertical band of straw-
yellow, which has a dark posterior edge.

In the species of Leuciis from the same locality (Pyramid Lake),
there are 23 or 24 longitudinal rows of scales; in this one there are
only 11.

SQTJ ALIUS Bonap.
Jordan, Sj nopsis Fishes N. America, p. 230.

The species of this genus, as defined by Jordan, that I have
observed in the Oregon Lakes, are two, which differ as follows :

Scales 13-63-7 ; dorsal rays I. 9 ; head 3-'l5 to 4 times in length;
depth in do. 4 times ; eyes in head 4*25 times ; teeth 2*5-5*2.

S. coeruleus.

Scales 12-60-5; dorsal rays 1.8; head 4 times in length;

depth in do. 4-25 times ; eye in head 3 times ; teeth 1'4-5'1.

S. galtix.
S^nalius coeruleus Girard. Jord«n, 1. c, p, 241.

Abundant in Klamath Lake. The specimens differ among

themselves somewhat ; thus, the depth enters the length 3'60 times

in some; 4 times in others. The dorsal fin originates above the

ventral in some ; a little behind in others. The teeth all have the

grinding surface distinct, and the dorsal fin always has I. 9 rays.

Length of the longest specimen, 5^ inches.

148

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1883.

Squalius galtise sp. nov.

This species belongs to the group Glinostomus, where the dorsal
fin originates a little behind the line of the front of the ventrals,
and the teeth have no grinding surface. The lateral line is, on
the other hand, but little decurved, and there are but eight anal
rays (in one specimen nine). The muzzle is short and the mouth
oblique, without prominent chin, and with the extremit}" of the
maxillary bone extending a little beyond the line of the anterior
rim of the orbit. The interorbital region is gently and regularly
convex, and is as wide as the diameter of the orbit.

The color is olive above, as far laterally as a plumbeous band
which extends fi'om the superior angle of the operculum to the
middle of the base of the caudal fin. Below this line, the sides
and belly are silver, except a broad band of crimson, which extends
from the branchial fissure, to the line of the first anal ray. Side
of head with a dusky band. This is the only species I have seen
in this region which displays brilliant colors.

Measurements. m.

Total length with caudal fin, .... -067

Length to edge of opercle, -014

Length to first dorsal ray on side, . . . "0298

Length to first ventral ray on side, . . . '0282

Length to first anal raj' on side, . . . "0385

Length to base of caudal fin, .... '056

Depth at first dorsal ray, . . * . . 'OH

Depth at first anal ray, '0103

Depth of caudal peduncle, '006

Interorbital width, -0043

This pretty species is quite abundant in Pyramid Lake.

THASMISTES Jordan.

This curious genus is confined to the lakes of the Great Basin.
One species, the G. liorus J. and G., is very abundant in the
Utah Lake, while the others occur on the western side of the
same zoological area. Two of them I discovered in Lake Klamath
in 1819, and I now add a fourth from Pyramid Lake. These
fishes are the largest that inhabit the waters of the Great Basin.
They are essentially Catostomi in which the fleshy lips are wanting,
the mouth having the characters of the majority of the Cypri-
nidse.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 149

Chasmistes cajus sp. nov.

I procured but one specimen of this fish from Pyramid Lake,
where it is difficult to obtain. The size is large ; the specimen I
procured measured eighteen inches in length. The head is wide and
flat, the width of the interorbital space being more than half the
length. The upper lip is very thin ; the lower lip is represented
b}' folds on each side, which do not connect round the symphysis.
Scales 13-65-11. Dorsal rays 12; anal I. 8. The eye enters the
length of the head 8"5 times, and the interorbital width 4*5 times.
The swim-bladder has but two cells. The colors are pale olive.

The pharyngeal teeth of this species are much like those of the
G. liorus in their triangular section ; they are, nevertheless, of
delicate construction. The head of this species is relatively
larger and wider than in any of the others, which gives it a heavy
and clumsj^ appearance.

This fish is said by the fishermen to inhabit the deepest water,
and to be seen in numbers only at the time of breeding. Its
habits in this respect agree with what is said of the C. luxatus of
the Klamath Lake. The Indian name of the Chasmistes cujus
is "Couia."

Chasmistes brevirostris Cope. American Na'uralist, 1879, p. 785. Jordan, Fishes
N. Amer., p. 132, 1883.

This fish does not exceed 14 to 16 inches in length, and has a
differently formed head and muzzle from the C. luxatus. They are
shorter, especially the muzzle, and the latter is without the hump
produced hy the protuberant premaxillar}- spines. Parietal fon-
tanelle small. The lower lip-fold is only present at the sides of
the mandible. Both lips are smooth. Eye round, its diameter
entering the length of the head six and two-thirds times, of which
three times enters the muzzle. Interorbital region flat, its width
entering the length of the head two and one-eighth times. Body
nearlj'^ cylindric. Scales 12-t4-ll; radii D. 11, A. 9. Color
dusky above, silvery below ; fins colorless. This fish is abundant
'"in Klamath Lake, but I was informed by a Klamath chief, that it
does not ascend Williamson's River in spring with the C. luxatus
and Catostomus labiatus. Klamath name, "Xodptu."

Chasmistes luxatus Cope, American Naturalist, 1879, p. 785. Jordan, 1, c, p. 132.

Form elongate ; head long, flat above, and with a large fontanelle.
Mouth terminal, the spines of the premaxillary bones projecting
so as to form a hump on the top of the snout. Lower lip a very

150 PROCEEDINGS OF THB ACADEMY OF [1883.

thin dermal fold, extending entirely around the chin. Both upper
and lower lips 'delicately tubercular. Eye oval, the axis longi-
tudinal, and contained seven times in the length of the head, of
which three and a-half times are contained in the muzzle. Inter-
orbital region flat, one-third as wide as the head is long. Scales
12-80-9 ; radii D. 11, A. 9. Color clouded above with black punc-
tulations ; below paler, with red shades in some specimens ; fins
uncolored. It attains a length of nearly three feet. It ascends
the streams tributary to Lake Klamath in thousands in the spring,
and is taken and dried in great numbers by the Klamath and
Modoc Indians. The former call it "Tswam."

The character of the lips, the oval e^'e, and the less interorbital
width distinguish this species from the C. brevirostris, as well as
the longer muzzle and superior size adduced in my original
description.

On this species and the C. hrevirostris I proposed the genus
Lipomyzon, on the supposition that the phar3^ngeal bones and
teeth of G. liorus were like those of the genus Catostomus, from
which those of these species differ in their greater attenuation.
During the summer of 1882, 1 obtained a number of specimens of
C. liorus, and find that while its pharyngeal bones are less atten-
uated than those of G. luxatus, they are more so than in some
species of Catostomus, so that I cannot distinguish, generically,
the species of Klamath Lake. The pharyngeals of G. brevirostris
are not more attenuated than those of G. liorus.

CATOSTOMUS Le?.
Catostomus labiatus Ayres. Cope, American Naturalist, 1879, p, 785.

This species abounds in Klamath and Goose Lakes, but I did
not observe it in any of the lakes to the eastward of these. The
formulae are : —

Klamath Lake: scales, 10-14-11 ; radii D. 1. 11 ; V.IO ; head 45
times in length ; eye 5"5 times in head.

Goose Lake; scales 12»-13 — 15 — 11 ; radii ; D. I. 11 ; V. 10 ; eye
6 ; head 4*5 times in length.

The largest specimens measure twelve inches in length.
Remains of species of this family are abundant in the pliocene
sands of Oregon, but do not represent many species. Phar3^ngeal
bones and teeth indicate that the species are true Catostomi.

Crania and other bones of one of the species have been found
abundantly at Fossil Lake. In some of the specimens the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 151

pharyngeal bones and teeth are preserved. I cannot distinguish
the specimens from corresponding parts of the common sucker of
Lake Klamath, named by Ayres as above. They, however, present
considerable variations among themselves. These may be stated
as follows :

I. Ethmoid and front convex transversely.
a. Parietal fontanelle small. Two specimens.
aa. Parietal fontanelle large. Three specimens ; two of them
lent me by Prof. Thos. Condon, of Eugene, Or.
II. Ethmoid and front a little convex ; fontanelle large ; in both
points resembling the typical specimens from Lake
Klamath. One specimen.
III. Ethmoid and front plane, the latter a little concave in
profile. Fontanelle large. One specimen.
There are numerous other skulls in my collection, but they are
not yet sufficiently cleared of matrix to display their characters.
Catostomas batraohops sp. nov.

This sucker is characterized by the short, wide and depressed
form of the cranium. The ethmoid bone is considerably more
than twice as wide as long (minus the spine), while in G. labiatus
it is only half as long as wide. The interorbital width is equal to
the length of the skull, minus the ethmoid bone and epiotic spine ;
in G. labiatus this width is a good deal less than the dimension
mentioned. The ethmoid and frontal bones are less convex than
is the case in the more common fossil variety of C. labiatus.
Although the bridge separating the temporal and pterotic fossae
is wide in G. labiatus, it is wider in the G. batrachops, and has a
concave superior surface, which is not separated by ridge or
angle from that of the superior plate of the parietal bone. There
is ncr frontal keel, and the fontanelle is well developed.

Measurements. m.

Length from epiotic spine to ethmoid spine, inclus., '084

Length of ethmoid, minus spine, .
Length of frontal bone (median), .
Length of parietal bone (median),
Interorbital width.
Width at pterotics, about
Width between apices of epiotics.
Width of ethmoid.

•018
•032
•015
•056
•062
•032
•042

152 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

This species appears to have been about eighteen inches in
length. The only skull which represents it was found by Charles
H. Sternberg, near Silver Lake, Oregon.

Catostomus tahoensis (tHi hii I Jordan. Synopsis Fishes N. Amer., 127.

This is the common species of the lakes which represent the
Lahontan Basin. I found it in Pyramid Lake and the third
Warner Lake. The formulae are as follows :

Pyramid Lake: scales 14-89-14; radii D. I. 11 ; Y. 9; head
4'5 times in length.

Warner Lake: scales 16-83-15; radii D. I. 11; V, 9 ; head 4

times in length.

PERCOMORPHI.

TIRANIDEA Dekay.

Uranidea minuta Pallas. Jordan Synopsis, p. C98.

Abundant in Klamath Lake ; not seen elsewhere.

General Remarks.
The species noticed in the preceding pages may be enumerated
with reference to their geographical distribution, in the following

lists : —

I. Pyramid Lake.

Salmo purpuratus henshavi Siphateles lineatus Cope.

Jord, Squalius galtiee Cope.

Leucus olivaceus Cope. Chasmistes cujus Cope.

Leucus dimidiatus Cope. Catostomus tahoensis G. & J.

II. Fort Bidwell.

Apocope vulnerata Cope. Apocope ventricosa Cope.

III. Warner's Lake.
Apocope vulnerata Cope. Catostomus tahoensis G. & J.

Myloleucus formosus Gird.

IV. G008E Lake.
Myloleucus parovanus Cope. Catostomus labiatus Aj'tes.
3Iyloleucus thalassinus Cope.

V. Klamath Lake.
Salmo purpuratus Pall. Chaamistes hrevirostris Cope.

Salvelinus malma Walb. Chasmistes luxalus Cope.

Myloleucus parovanus Cope. Catostomus labiatus Ayres.
Squalius coeruleus Gird. Uranidea minuta Pall.

Squalius hicolor Gird.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 153

VI. Silver Lake.
Salmo purpurafus Pall. Myloleucus formosus Givd.

VII. Abert's Lake.
Salmo vurpuratus Pall. Myloleucus formosiis Gird.

Apocope vulnerata Cope.

VIII. Weber River, Utah.
BhinichthystransmontanusCoT^e. Squalius montanus Cope.
Agosia novemradiata Cope. Pantosteus platyrhynchus Cope.

IX. Fossil Lake, Oregon. (Fossil.)

Leucus altarcus Cope. Catostomus labiatus Ayres.

Myloleucus gibbarcus Cope. Catostomus batrachops Cope.
Gliola angustarca Cope.

Examination of the preceding lists discloses the following
facts: (1). The species of Leucus replace in Pj'ramid Lake the
3Iylo1eucus of the other lakes. (2). All the species of Pj-ramid
Lake are peculiar to it, excepting the Catostomus te7ioensi.s', which
is found in the third (and probably other) Warner Lakes, one
hundred and fift^' miles north of it. (3 \ The Myloleucus formosus
inhabits the eastern line of lakes — "Warner's, Abert's and Silver
Lakes; while the M. paroranus is confined to the more western
lakes, the Goose and Klamath. (4\ The distribution of the
Catostomi is similar; the G. tahoensis being the eastern, in
Pyramid and Warner's Lakes, and the C. labiatus in the Goose
and Klamath Lakes.

The distribution of the other species is not sufficiently known
to enable us to draw any conclusions regarding them.

II. The Fauna op the Idaho Lake.
RAIIDJE.

Baia pentagona Leidy, Oncohatis pentar/onns Leidy, Proceeds. Phila. Academy,
1870, p. 70.

A species said to have been found in the beds of this deposit.

It ii8 referred to a new genus, by Leidy, who, however, does not

characterize it.

CYPRINIDJE.

This family predominates over all othei's in the number of
species and individuals. Typical carnivorous forms (Squalius)
were not rare, but the greater number of genera are carnivorous
with the teeth less (^LeucuSj Myloleucus) or more {Mylocyprinus)

11

154 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

adapted for crushing hard substances. The food of such species
was probably mollusca. There were but few herbivorous forms,
and these {Diastichus sp.) not typical, but related to the adjacent
carnivorous genera. Especial interest attaches to the present
distribution of some of the genera. Diastichus is the only one
which is extinct, so far as known, though its characters approach
those of existing genera so nearly, that it may be found at any
time in the recent fauna. Mylocyprinus has a living species in
China. Leucus is found in Europe and Asia. Myloleucus is
American, and is confined to the lakes of the Great Basin and
California ; two species occurring in Utah and two in Oregon.
Cliola is found in North America east of the Sierra Nevada.
Squalius is generally North American and European.

MYLOCYPRINUS, Leidy.

Proceedings Academy Phila., 1870, 70. Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Society, 1870,
543. Mi/lophari/nf/odon Peters, Monatsberichte Berlin Academy, 1880, 925.

I am acquainted with three species of this genus ; two extinct
from Idaho, and one, the Mylocyprinus sethiops Basilewsky,
{Mylopharyngodon Peters) recent, in China. The pharyngeal
bones of these species may be distinguished as follows. I know
those of the M. sethiops from a figure given by Prof. Peters.

I. Teeth commenciug near the symphysis ; curvature of pha-
ryngeal very abrupt ; apex shorter than tooth-row ;

31. inflexus.

II. Teeth commencing at a distance from symphysis, leaving a

style; curvatui-e gradual.

Style and apex each shorter than tooth-row ; M. robustus.

Style and apex each longer than tooth-row ; M. sethiops.

Mylocyprinus inflexus Cope, sp. nov.

Established on two pharyngeal bones of the left side, one of
which indicates a fish of perhaps two pounds weight, and the other
one of half the size. Its form is peculiar in the very abrupt curve
of the external border, the. great abbreviation of the style, and
the shortness of the tooth series. The proximal and distal ex-
tremities of the bone are connected across the concavity byja thin
expansion of the inner border, not seen in M. I'obustus. The first
tooth is small, but larger than the corresponding one sometimes
seen in 31. robustus, so that I would be incliued to think it a per-
manent character, were it not wanting from the smaller specimen.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 155

The second tooth is broadly molar. Two foramina perhaps indi-
cate the position of two teeth of an internal row. The toothless
apex of the bone is longer and flatter than in 31. robustus. The
entire bone is flatter than in that species. The first tooth stands
on the edge of the symph3^sis.

Measurements. m.

Total length on tooth row, '025

Length of base of tooth row, . . . . 'OlS

Length of apex, ....... '016

Width at middle, -018

Near Sinker's Creek, Idaho. J. L. Wortman.

Mylooyprinns robustus Leidy. Loc. cit. Report U. S. Geol. Survey Terrs., i, p
262, PI. XVII, figs, 11-17.

This is the most abundant fish of the Idaho beds, and is repre-
sented by a great many pharyngeal bones with teeth, in my col-
lection. These present a great many variations, and I have
proposed in a former paper to recognize three species: 31. kingi,
31. robustus and 31. longidens. Study of m}^ material shows that
these forms intergrade, and that if they represent distinct species,
two others must be admitted. I incline to look upon the differ-
ences as due in part to age, and in part as subspecific variations.
I tabulate them as follows :

1. Small; style more slender, five teeth in outer row, the
upper very small and subprehensile ; the lower small,
conic.
II. Like the last, but the style stouter.
III. Like I, but only four teeth ; the inferior tooth wanting.
. IV. Like I, but four teeth; the superior larger and obtuse;

31. longidens.

T. Larger ; four teeth, the last obtuse but much smaller than

the others ; style stout; 31. robustus.

YI. Larger; style stout; four teeth, the superior nearly as

> large as the others, which are equal ; 3f. kingi.

The slenderness or stoutness of style is not coincident with the

other characters, but the latter condition is always found in large

specimens. In these the convex border is also much thickened.

The small, partly hooked form of the superior tooth is only found

in small fishes, and is probably a character of j^outh. It indicates

that the genus is descended from more purely carnivorous types.

156 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

The minute first tooth is generallj^ found in small specimens, but
not always. It lingers in some to middle size. This species has
not been found in the Oregon basin. The settlers call the
pharyngeal bones " baby-jaws."

LEUCUS Heckel.
Fifche Syriens, 1843, p. 48. Anehybopais Cope, Proceed. Amer. Philos. Soc, 1870,

p. 543.
LeuCUS latUS Cope. Anchyhopais lafuK Cope, 1. c.

Much the largest species of the genus, as yet only represented
b}^ two pharyngeal bones of opposite sides. Southern Idaho.
Leucus condonianus Cope, sp. nov.

This fish is represented b}^ four pharyngeal bones, two of each
side, which have the dental formula 2"5-5-2 ; the presence of the
two inner teeth being doubtful on one of those of the right side.
The}' indicate a smaller fish than the L. altarcus, and one about
the size of the Ceratichthys biguUatus. The teeth display but little
grinding surface, and have swollen subconic crowns, which are
less expanded transversely than those of the L. altarcus. The
style is moderately long and not much recurved. The external
aliform border is rather full, and expands graduall}' from the
style, not abruptl}', as in L. altarcus. It is especially full oppo-
site the supei'ior extremity of the tooth series, where it is con-
tracted in L. lafus.

Measurements of Medium Size. M.

Length on tooth line, '014

Length of tooth line, "007

Length of apex from tooth line, .... "005

Width at middle, -005

Dedicated to Professor Thos. Condon, of Eugene, Oregon, who
first discovered and explored in part, the fossiliferous formations
of the Oregon and Idaho basins.

SQUALIUS Bonap.
Jordan emend. PtycJiochilua Ag&ss. Clinoslom ii8 Girsbrd. 0/("(/ofee?»s Cope, Proceeds.
Amer. Philosoph. Soc, 1870, p. 540.

The American species generally diflfer from the t3^pe in the
reduced number of teeth in the right phalangeal series. The
dental formula is 2-5-4-2, in our extinct and recent species. In
the pliocene species here noticed, the teeth have acute, slightly
incurved, apices. They diflfer from each other as follows :

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 157

I. Inner face just above superior tooth much narrower than
anterior or posterior faces.

a. An external marginal expansion.
Width at fourth tooth equal length of bases of superior three
teeth ; an external bevel below first tooth ; large ; S. posticus.
Width at fourth tooth considerably less than length of bases of
superior three teeth ; a bevel below base of first tooth causing
ala to be more distinct ; large ; S. laminatus.

Ala not projecting ; width less than length of bases of superior
three teeth ; no bevel below first tooth ; smaller ; S. reddingi.
aa. No external ala.
Bone very narrow ; teeth spaced ; larger ; S. hairdi.

II. Inner face just above superior tooth deep, equaling anterior
and posterior faces.
No external ala ; bone narrow ; S. arciferus.

Squalius posticus Cope. Semotilas posticus Cope, Proceeds. Amer. Philos. Society,
1S70, p. 541.

The original specimen is from Idaho. Onl}' a fragment of two
others are known.
Squalius laminatus Cope. OUgohelns luminntus Cope, loc, cit., 1870, p. 541.

Originally founded on a single fragmentary pharyngeal bone.
A complete right-hand bone with all the teeth, found hy Mr.
Wortman, shows that this is as large a species as the G. postica^
but of more slender proportions.
Squalius reddingi Cope, sp. nov.

This species is founded on pharyngeal bones of individuals of
smaller size than those which represent the others mentioned in
this list. They represent a fish of the average dimensions of the
Pogonichthys insequilohus of California. The five teeth occupy
as much length as the style, and the apex is as long as the bases
of four teeth and an interspace. The apex is flat, and its inner
face is convex, and as deep at the base as one-half the width. The
e:Sternal alar expansion is slight but distinct, and originates
opposite the third tooth from below. The stj'le is not recurved.

Measurements. m.

Length on tooth series, •02()

Length of tooth series, ..... '012

Length of apex from teeth, . . . . 'Oil

Width of bone at middle, "005

158 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

One right and two left pharyngeal bones of this species were
found by Mr. Wortman in Southern Idaho. It is named for luy
friend, the late Mr. B. B. Redding of San Francisco, Vice-President
of the California Academy of Sciences.

Squalius bairdi Cope. SemotUus bairdi Cope, loc. cit., p. 542.

This species was established on a right pharyngeal bone which
supported four teeth in the principal row. My original reference
of it to the genus Semotilus, was based on supposition that the
left pharyngeal bone would be found to support five teeth in the
principal row. This is shown to be the case by such a bone
discovered by Mr. Wortman. It belonged 'to a smaller individual
than the typical one, and shows the very narrow basis of a
probably shorter stj^le than those seen in the other species here
mentioned.
Squalius arciferus Cope. Oli<iohelus arciferus Cope, loc. cit., p. 541.

The most robust species, represented by parts of two pharyn-
geal bones.

DIASTICHUS Cope.
Proseedings Amer. Philos. Society, 1870, p. 539.

An entire pharyngeal bone of the typical species of this genus
has five teeth in a single series. The opposite bone of another
species presents also five teeth, so that the formula is probably
5-5. The teeth are compressed and short, and somewhat expanded
transversely to the direction of the bone. They display an
oblique grinding surface on use. The}^ might then be referred to
the genus Leucus, but the apical branch of the bone is much
more elongate and is truncate at the extremity. This character
is best seen in D. macrodon, where there appears to have been a
superior as well as an inferior symphysis. The direction of the
tooth series is at right-angles to this apical portion, as in other
genera.
Diastichus macrodon Cope. Loc. cit., p. 539.

A specimen of pharyngeal bone, found by M. Wortman, is not
more than half the linear dimensions of those obtained by Mr.
King from the same part of Idaho.
Diastichus parvidens Cope. Loc. cit., p. 540.

No additional material.
Diastichus strangulatus sp. nor.

"Represented by two pharyngeal bones from Southern Idaho.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 159

One of these lacks the style, and the other the apical portion.
The species differs from the D. macrodon in the flatter apical ramus,
which is devoid of the marginal tuberosity' and distal recurvature,
seen in that species. It is straight and forms an acute angle with
the axis of the tooth series. The style is short, stout, and some-
what recurved. The marginal ala is rather abruptly given off oppo-
site the second tooth from below. The necks of the pharyngeal
teeth are contracted, so that the internal and external outlines of
the crown are convex. The grinding surface is quite oblique.

. -013
. -010
. -005
fish. From Southern

Measurements. m.

Length of tooth line, -014

Length of apical ramus,

Width of bone at middle,

Width of crown of tooth,
This species was about the size of the gold-
Idaho, J. L. Wortman.

CATOSTOMID^.
Catostomns shoshonensis sp. nov.

Of this fish I have two crania from the Idaho basin, one
obtained by Mr. Wortman and the other by Mr. Clarence King.
Two other crania, collected by the same gentlemen, represent a
variety, or possibly another species.

The bones of the skull are relatively more elongate than those
of the C. labialus. The width of the superior surface of the
parietal bones between the lateral angles is equal to two-thirds
the length of the superior surface of the ethmoid bone posterior
to the base of its anterior spine. The two measurements are
equal in the C. labiatus. The ethmoid has three median longi-
tudinal concavities and raised borders in the C. shoshonen.ns, but
is regularly convex in the C. labiatus. The temporal fossa is
separated by a narrow raised band from the pterotic fossa in the
former, but by a very wide band in the latter. The supratemporal
crests are not raised and sink gradually to the level opposite the
posterior part of the supraorbital border. There is a slight
median frontal keel which extends forwards from the same point.
The frontoparietal fontanelle is well defined, elongate, and rather
narrow. It commences at the base of the supraoccipital spine
and extends to opposite the anterior foramen of the postfrontal
bone. The bones of the skull are smooth.

160

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1883.

Measurements. m.

Length from apex of epiotic to end of ethmoid

spine, inclusive, ....... 'OtS

Length of ethmoid without spine (median), . . '018
Length of frontal bone (median), .... 'OSO

Length of parietal (median), .... '0105

Interorbital width, -028

Width at pterotics, -040

Width between apices of epiotics, .... '0245
Width of parasphenoid at middle of orbits, . . '0070
Diameter (long) of hyomandibular cot^lus of

pterotic, -0070.

The above measurements equal those of the largest size of the
Catostomiis teres of our waters. It will be desirable to compare
its skull with that of C. macrochilus Gird., which comes from the
Columbia River. Girard says that it is of more elongate propor-
tions than that of the C. labiatus.
Catostomus cristatus sp. n )V.

This species is known to me from a skull, of which only the
cranium posterior to the anterior orbital region remains. It
belongs to the same elongate type as the C. reddingi, and differs
from that species as follows : —

The lateral casts of the frontal bone are more elevated, and are
carried farther forwards. Instead of gradually diisappearing
anteriorly, they descend abruptly to their termination, enclosing
a groove with the supraorbital plate of the frontal. The fonta-
nelle is wide, and extends farther into the frontal bone. The low
median frontal ridge commences at its anterior border. The bridge
between the temporal and pterotic fossse is narrow. There is a
transverse ridge on each half of the supraoccipital bone ; in C.
reddingi this ridge is oblique, descending towards the middle line.

Measurements. m.

Length of parietal bone (median), . . . '014

Length of frontoparietal fontanelle, . . . '023

Width at ptei'otics, ...... '046

Width between frontal crests at anterior extremi-
ties, -014

Width between apices of epiotics, . . . "024

Diameter (long) of hyomandibular cot^dus, . . '008
Found by J. L. Wortman in S. W. Idaho. One specimen only.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 161

COBITIDJE.

A species of this family left remains in the Idaho Lake basin.
I have reached this conclusion by the discovery, among the speci-
mens submitted to me hy the Smithsonian Institution, of the
inferior element of the three modified anterior vertebrae,^ which
are so characteristic of certain families of the Physostomous
fishes. This portion, moreover, is that which occupies the posi-
tion among the Cobitidse only. Among them, it consists of a
longitudinal plate terminating posteriorly in a bladder-like chamber
on each side, each of which is closed below by a transverse pro-
cess of the inferior plate ; an angular fissure extends around the
ends of these, and at the angle sends a short continuation
upwards. This is quite similar to what is observed in Cohitis.

This occurrence of Cobitidse is, perhaps, the most interesting
fact brought to light by the examination of these extinct fishes.
All of the numerous existing species of this family are found in
the Eastern Hemisphere, and the great majority in tropical Asia,
a few only occurring in Europe and South Africa. Extinct
species are found in the miocene of Oeningen. We have then, in
this form, another example of the occurrence of Asiatic tj'pes in
North America prior to the glacial epoch ; and as in a fresh-water
fish, more strongly demonstrative of continuity of territory of
the two continents, than can be with any other type of animal.

SALMONID^.

EHABDOFAKIO Cope.

Proceeds. Amer. Philosoph. Society, Nov., 1870.

A genus represented by skulls, in which the maxillary bone is
cjdindrical and rod-like, thus differing from Salmo.
Rhabdofario lacustris Cope, 1. c.

A species with a head as large as that of the Salmo mlar^ which
was not uncommon in the Idaho Lake. In addition to the type
obtained by Mr. King, Mr. Wortman found parts of several
intlividuals.

SILURIDJE.

AMIUEUS Raf.
? Amiurus sp.

Represented by pectoral spines. These do not diflTer from those

of some recent species, but difler from those of the species of

^ The pharyngeal bones referred to this family by me as above cited,
belong to the Cyprinidae in the restricted sense. See genus Diastichus.

162 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Bhineastes from our eocene beds, except perhaps the JR. arcuatus,
iu the possession of but one row of teeth. The surface is delicately
striate. The anterior edge is smooth and acute, and the posterior
edge has two rows of serrffi separated by the usual groove.

COTTID^.
COTTUS L.

I refer to this genus four species from the Idaho beds. They
maj^ belong to Uranidea^ but as I can only identify them as y&t
by the preopercula, I cannot determine this point. The parts in
question are not rare, showing that this type was well represented
in this region.

The preopercular bones are furnished with three or four acute
spines of no great length. In this they differ from the living
American species of Uranidea, which have only one or two spines,
excepting the U. spilota, which has (fide Jordan) four spines,
three of which are inferior. The four species of the present col-
lection differ in their prominent features, as follows : —
a. Foramina on inner side of preoperculum.
Four spines ; angular spine directed backwards ; inferior ones
forwards ; smaller ; G. divaricatus.

Angular spine directed backwards ; posterior inferior downwards ;
inner side with two faces separated by an angle ; larger ;

G. pontifex.

aa. Foramina on the posterior edge of preopercle.

Angular spine directed backwards ; two strong similar inferior

spines turned forwards ; larger ; G. cryptotremus.

aaa. No foramina.

Angular spine directed downwards ; inferior spines forwards ; the

anterior inferior flattened ; large ; G. hypoceras.

Cottus divaricatus sp. nov.

Represented by two preopercula. These indicate the smallest
of the four species, and one about equal to the G. richardsoni^
Ag. The preoperculum is flatter and thinner than in the other
species, and the foramina are all on the inner side of the branches.
These are : one large one above base of superior spine, one small
one between bases of superior and angular spines, one do. between
bases of angular and posterior inferior, and one at anterior base
of posterior inferior. The two inferior spines are smaller than
the others, and are incurved. The superior posterior is the largest

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 163

and is curved upwards, and compressed at the base. Both ex-
ternal and internal faces are flat.

Measurements. M.

Length from base of superior to base of exterior

inferior spines, inclusive, '008

Length of superior spine above, .... '003
From Willow Creek, Oregon. J. L. Wortman.
Cottus pontifex sp. nov.

The preopercular bone of this species is robust, especially in
the transverse diameter. Instead of being flat as in C. divaricatus,
it presents two faces on the side which is perforated by foramina,
which are separated by a vertical angle. The anteroexterior face
is flat, while the posteroexternal is somewhat irregular. The
foramina which pierce it are larger than in any other species,
especially the one between tihe second and third spines. The
foramina communicate below the surface, the canal thus formed
being spanned by a narrow bridge from the base of each spine.
The opposite side of the preoperculum is a little concave, and
plane at the base of the spines. The bases of the superior and
the angular spines are closer together than in any other species,
being absolutely in contact.

Measurements. , M.

Length of three upper spines on bases, incl., . '008
Length of joined bases of two upper spines, . '005

It is not possible to be certain whether there is any anterior
inferior spine. One specimen was obtained by Mr. Wortman,
probably from Willow Creek, Oregon.
Cottus. cryptotremus sp. nor.

A larger species, very different from the last, and nearer the G.
divaricatus. Three preopercula are in my collection. In all the
specimens the superior limb is broken off", so that it is impossible
to state the character of the superior spine. The angular spine
has a round section and is directed backwards, and in line with
the inferior border. The two inferior spines are at a little dis-
tance from its base, and are well developed, acute, and of equal
size. They are directed forwards and inwards. The external
face of the inferior limb is divided by a prominent obtuse angle
on its entire length. There is a small foramen at the posterior

164 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

base of each inferior spine, and a large one at the anterior ex-
tremity of the inferior branch, looking partially outwards.

Measurements. m.

Length of base of three inferior spines, inch, . 'OOSS
Length of inferior spines, inclusive, . . . '0055
Length of anterior inferior spines, . . . '0045
Length of inferior branch of bone, . . . -0140
Discovered by Mr. J. L. Wortman, Castle Creek, Idaho.
Cottus hypoceras sp. nov.

The preoperculura of this species differs widely from those of
the three already described. Although it has four spines, they
are distributed differently', three being inferior and one posterior,
instead of two posterior and two inferior. The base of the pos-
terior spine is less compressed than in the others, and looks as
though the apex is directed posteriorly instead of superiorly as in
C. divaricatus, and C. pontifex. It is opposite the inferior branch
instead of above it as in the species named. The angular spine is
round at the base ; the first inferior is compressed at the base, and
the anterior is compressed to the rounded apex, its superior edge
being acute, the inferior rounded. This spine therefore differs
from that of anj- of the other species.

The external face is gently rounded, and is smooth. The
internal face has the usual excavation with bordering rim, and is
roughened. There are no foramina except two above the base of
the anterior inferior spine. In size this species is about like the
C. pontifex.

3Ieasu7^ements. m.

Length of base of four spines, inclusive, in a

straight line, 'Oil

Length of bases of anterior two inferior spines

inclusive, 'OOY

Length of angular spine, . . . . . '004
Elevation of vertical limb of preoperculum, . . "012

One specimen ; obtained by Mr. J. L. Wortman, probably at
Willow Creek, Oregon.

PERCIDiE.

The spines of the dorsal fin of a species of this family are not
rare in the formation, but I have not yet been able to fix them
generically or specificall}^

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

165

Genep.al Observations.
In the preceding pages there are described from the Idaho plio-
cene formation the following species : —

Percidfe, 1 species.

Cottidffi, 4 "

Salmonidpe, 1 "

Cyprinidfe, 11 "

Catostomidifi, 2 "

Cobitidse 1 "

Siluridge, 1 "

Raiidae, • • 1 "

Total, 22 species.

Of the above, all differ from existing species so far as known,
but three of the species which represent the Percidas, the Cobi-
tidx and the Silui-idse respectively, have not been exactly deter-
mined. All the species differ from those of the Oregon Lake (or
Lake Lahontan as it may prove to be). Of the families, all are
existing and all are represented on the North American Continent
excepting the Gobitidse, which are now confined to Ear-Asia. But
of these eight families four are not now found in the American
waters which empty into the Pacific Ocean, viz., the Percidae^
Siluridse^ Cohitidse^ and Raiidse^ excepting that there is one
species of the Percidre in California. Five of the seven families
have not yet been found in the Oregon fossil lake basin, but as
two of them (Salmonidse^ Cottid^), are found in the existing
lakes of that region, they will probablj' be found in that deposit.
The above evidence is sufficient to prove that the Idaho pliocene
formation is distinct from any formation previously known. It
is older than the Oregon lake deposit.

In addition to the fishes, three species of craw-fishes were dis-
covered in this formation by Capt. Clarence King. These I
named Astacus subgrimdialis, A. chenoderma, and A. hrevifor-
ceps} The mollusks of this formation have been described by F.
B. Meek, and they, like the fishes, determined it to be 'lacustrine
and fresh, as already stated by Prof. Newberry. The species are
stated by Meek^ to be distinct specifically, and in some cases

' Proceedings Amer. Philos. Society, 1870, p. 605.
2 Proceedings Acad. Nat. Sci., Phila., 1870, 56.

Loc. cit., Nov. 1870.

166 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

generically, from all others hitherto described from the West.
Leidy observes/ that mammalian remains received from Gapt.
King's expedition include portions of Mastodon and Equus
excelsus. Mr. Wortman obtained teeth and bones of the latter,
and a cannon-bone of an undetermined ruminant of the size of
the Cervus elaphus. The ungual phalange of an edentate allied
to Megalonyx was obtained from the same horizon and locality.
The map of the adjacent parts of Oregon, Nevada and California,
showing the lakes, is copied from the map issued by the War
Departn;ent of the United States, Brig. Gen. A. A. Humphreys,
Chief of Engineers.

' L. c, 1870, 67. On Cretaceous and Tertiary Reptilia and Fishes, by
Prof. E, D. Cope, November, 1870.

168 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

July 3.
Prof. Edw. D. Cope in the chair.
Seventeen persons present.

A paper entitled " Description of a New Hydrobiinoid Gastero-
pod from the mountain lakes of the Sierra Nevada, with remarks
on allied species and the physiographical features of said region,"
b}" R. E. C. Stearns, was presented for publication.

The death of Isaac T. Coates, a member, was announced.

On some Fossils of the Puerco Formation. — Prof. Cope stated
that he had recently received from the Puerco beds of New Mexico
remains of a number of individuals of the extinct mammal he
had named Feriptychus ditrigonus} Besides jaws and teeth with
permanent and temporary dentition in good preservation, the
pelvis, femur and tibia are included in the specimens. These
show that the species must be referred to the genus Gonoryctes
Cope, and render it very probable that the genus belongs to the
family of the Periptj'chidae. The absence of ungual phalanges
preverts absolute certainty. The genus is near Feriptychus^ but
differs in the one root and simple conic crown of the second true
molar in both jaws, and the presence of cingular cusps of the
superior molars, exterior to the external tubercles. Gonoryctes
ditiHgonus has the molars of both jaws larger than those of the
G. comma, and there is less difference in size between the posterior
and anterior teeth than in that species.

The following new species accompanied the above :

Periptyghus coarctatus. This species represented by teeth
of the lower jaw, viz.: one incisor, three premolars, and two
molars, two of the latter imperfect. The characters of the species
are well marked in the premolar and molar teeth. The former
lack the anterior and internal ledges of the F. carinidens and F.
rhahdodoyi, having only a prominent ledge-shaped heel, besides
the principal conical cusp. The true molars lack the small
tubercle which is between the pair of threes Avhich compose the
crown. The adjacent cusps of the threes are connected by low
longitudinal ridges instead of oblique ones. The cusps themselves
are closer together than in the other species, especially those of
the anterior three, which are closely approximated. The anterior
one is small and low. The enamel is grooved as in the other
species.

Diameters of crown of fourth premolar: anteroposterior, -0115 ;
transverse, '0115 ; elevation ^^worn), -010. Diameters of crown

1 Proc. American Philos. Society, 1883, p. 465.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 169

of second true molar: anteroposterior, 'Oil; transverse, "OOO.
From the Lower Puerco beds. D. Baldwin.

Pantolambda cavirictus sp. nov. Represented by a nearly
entire mandibular ramus with all the teeth represented excepting
the crowns of the incisors. The characters are seen, first in the
large size, the teeth having twice the linear dimensions of those
of the P. bathmodon ; and second, in the lateral prominence of
the inferior edge of the ramus, which produces a concavity of the
side of the jaw posterior to the canine teeth. It is the largest
mammal known from the Puerco formation.

The inferior canines are strongly curved, so that the crown is
directed upwards and a little backwards. Both root and crown
have a round section, but the apex of the crown cannot be de-
scribed, as it is greatly worn by use in the specimen. The
incisive border is regularly convex, and the three incisors are not
of large size, the first being least, and the third largest. The pre-
molars and molars have the form of those of the P. bathmodon. The
latter present two Y's, the anterior narrower and more elevated.
In the former the posterior V is represented by a short crest.
The last molar is produced into a heel, which supports the pos-
terior branch of the posterior V, and no cusp. The first premolar
is one-rooted, and is separated from the second premolar by a
moderate diastema. The symphysis is not long, is regularly
curved upwards, and has a flat inferoanterior face. The canine
alveoli create a marked prominence on each side.

Measurements. — Depth of ramus at diastema, m. "045 ; do. at
third premolar, '056 ; width of ramus below third premolar, '021 ;
length of bases of three incisors, •023 ; diameters of canine at
base: anteroposterior, '018; transverse, '018; diameters third
premolar: anteroposterior, '012 ; transverse, 'Oil ; diameters first
true molar: anteroposterior, -077; transverse, "014; diameiers
third true molar: anteroposterior, "022 ; transverse, '014.

The jaw of this species is about the length of that of a large
tapir, but is deeper and more robust. The flare of the inferior
edge in front is suggestive of the structure seen in the Dinocerata,
and of the probabilit}^ that the Taligrada (to which Pantolambda
belongs) are the ancestors of that suborder as well as of the Pan-
todonta. The flare is related to the flange of Uintatherium^
exactly as the similar ridge in Nimravus is to the flange in Ma-
chaerodus.

Ztetodon gracilis, gen. et sp. nov. Char. Gen. — This genus
and species are founded on a broken lower jaw which contains the
second and part of the first true molars, and the fourth premolar.
The teeth are of very peculiar character. True molars consisting
of narrow crescents in two paii's, which ai'e both concave towards
each other, embracing a fossa. The posterior crescents soon
unite on attrition, closing the fossa, while the anterior are well sep-
arated, and only unite by their anterior apices. Each molar has a

12

170 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

small columnar heel. Fourth premolar with the posterior pair of
crescents only, which soon unite. The anterior pair is repre-
sented by a part of the external one, which forms a narrow lobe.
The heel is larger than in the true molar.

The position of this genus it is impossible to determine from
the specimens in my possession. It may be Marsupial or Con-
dylarthrous, and if the latter, one of the 3Ieniscotheriidse ; but if
not of these groups, its position is not likel}^ to be in an}' known
order of the tertiary periods.

Char. Specif. — Crowns compressed, deeply grooved at the points
of junction of the crescents. This is effected by a narrow
lamina from the anterior inner to the posterior outer ; the
anterior outer being free posteriorly, excepting after considerable
wear. A groove on the external side of the crown distinguishes
the heel, which sinks into the crown below. It is lai'ger on the
tirst than on the second molar. The heel of the fourth premolar
is elevated on its posterior edge. No cingula except a weak one
at the exterior base of the posterior lobe of the true molars, and
at the anterior base of the anterior lobe of the fourth premolar.
Ramus compressed ; but little of it preserved. Diameters of p.
m. iv. : anteroposterior, -0055 ; transverse, '0020 ; of second true
molar : anteroposterior, -0045 ; transverse, "002. From the lower
red bed of the Upper Puerco epoch. D. Baldwin discoverer.

July 10.
Mr. Charles Morris in the cliair.
Twent}' -eight persons present.

A paper entitled " Preliminary Observations on the Brain of
Amphiuma," by Henry F. Osborn, was presented for publication.

July 17.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Sixty-two persons present.

July 24.
Mr. John H. Redfield in the chair.
Fourteen persons present.

July 31.
Mr. J. H. Redfield in the chair.
Eleven persons present.
The following were ordered to be printed :

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. Itl

DESCRIPTION OF A NEW HYDSOBIINOID GASTEEOPOD FROM THE MOUN-
TAIN LAKES OF THE SIERRA NEVADA, WITH REMARKS ON ALLIED
SPECIES AND THE PHYSIOGRAPHICAL FEATURES OF SAID REGION

BY ROBERT E. C. STEARNS.

The interesting form herein described was first brought to m}'
notice through the kindness of Mr. Xenos Clark, son of the
lamented Prof. Henry James Clark, in 18V9. Owing to ill-health
and other causes, it has remained nndescribed until this time.
Recently I have been stimulated to inquire into its characters and
relationship, by the reception of a letter and further specimens
from Prof. R. Ellsworth Call, who, while believing it to be nnde-
scribed, thought possibly it had been made known by some of our
West Coast naturalists, and wrote to me for information.

While it appears to have certain analogies with Lioplax of the
Viviparidffi on the one side (see L. suhcarinatu Sa}'), and witli
the Strepomatidai (see the carinatcd Goniobases like G. torulosa ^
Anthony), on the other, yet the sum of its characters, inclusive
of faunal and geographical relationship, seems to me to point
rather in the direction of the fresh-water Rissoids. The late Dr.
Stimpson's genus Tryonia applies only to shells with a " surface
longitudinally ribbed or plicated,*' as distinct from the usual
smooth-surfaced shells of the various groups embraced in his
'•Researches, etc."'^ He includes, however, the little group
Pyrgula of Cristoforo and Jan, and arranges it directly preceding
Tryonia, which my judgment confirms as being its proper place.

Woodward ^ included this genus (Pyrgula) in his syuon3-my of
Melania ; he also placed Amnicola as a subgenus of the foregoino-.
H. and A. Adams * place Pyrgula with the Melaniaus, but Amni-
cola Ts grouped by them with the Rissoidne. The}- further include

' L. and F. W. Shells of N. A. Part IV, p. 229, S. T. Miss. Coll., 258.
See also Meek and Hayden's Tertiary Goniohans temiicarinata, Proc.
Phila. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1857, p. 124, and G. nebrascensis, id., 185G, p. 124.
Also Wheeler's Report. Palgeoiitology, vol. iv, and Hayden's Inv. Palagou-
tology, vol. is.

* Researches upon the Hydrobiinae and allied forms. Smitlis'n Misc.
Coll., 201.

■^ Recent and Fossil Shells, 2d ed., pp. 246, 247.
^ Adams' Genera, pp. 305-308, vol. i.

172 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

the genus Tricula of Benson with the Melaniidae, an arrangement '
which has been followed hy Chenu.^

Benson's Tricula is based upon a small fluviatile fonn which
the Adams say " somewhat resembles Paludomus ; * * * *
the only species known is an inhabitant of the River Kamaan in
India." The specific name montana implies a station similar to
those inhabited by the various species of Pyrgula herein quoted.
The figure of Tricula as given by the Adams and Chenu, together
with the totality of testimony furnished by said authors, leads me
to suspect that the Indian species should be removed from the
Melaniid£e to the Hydrobiinse and near to Pyrgula.

It is not without some little hesitation that I place the Sierra
Nevada shell in the genus Pyrgula. Its principal characteristics,
however, indicate said group as well as the environmental features.
Stimpson's generic description of Tryonia applies only to shells
longitudinally sculptured (" ribbed or plicated "), a too restricted
limitation for a generic standard in this case, because if literally
applied it would exclude ninety-five per cent, of the individuals
which form the mass of which Stimpson's ^ species is but a rare
varietal aspect. Upon this point he wrote : " In company with
the Trj'onise, Mr. Blake found a small cancellated shell, which has
been described as Blelania exigua by Conrad, and as Amnicola
protea hy Gould. In view of the character of the surface, I think
it scarcely possible that this species can belong to the Hydrobiina?.
It will, perhaps, be found to be allied to Bittium. The occurrence
of this marine or brackish-water genus in the Desert would not
be surprising, since Gnathodon was found in the same basin at a
point somewhat nearer the Gulf." It is quite evident to my mind
that Stimpson could not have had a very large number of specimens
as they are usually found ; if so, they would have included not
only his T. clafhrata^ as well as Conrad's and Gould's types, but
intermediate and connecting varieties, sufficient to have caused
him to expand his generic diagnosis, and either to have made him
hesitate before investing the variety before him with specific
dignity, or else to have included Conrad's and Gould's forms as
species of Tryonia. He was not aware of the countless millions
of these tiny shells, that are scattered over a vast area, or of the
depth of the fresh-water sedimentarj' deposit throughout which

1 Manuel de Couchyliologie, etc., p. 294, vol, i.
" Researches, etc., etc., id., p. 48, et »eq.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. ITS

they are distributed. At Walter's Station, on the Southern Pacific
Railroad, the perpendicular section exhibited by the digging of a
well to the depth of forty-seven feet, contained these shells from
the surface of the desert to the bottom of the well.^ Again, in
suggesting relations between Conrad's and Gould's forms with
Bittium^ a genus belonging to the brackish-water division or sub-
family (Potamidinae) of the Cerithiidae, he seems to have overlooked
the fact that the longitudinally plicated sculptiire of his species is
a character common also to the brackish-water genus Gerithidea^
which belongs as well as Bitlium to the Potamidinae.^

Had Stimpson's generic definition of Tryonia been more ample
I should have been tempted to have given the shell herein dis-
cussed a place in said group rather than Fyrgula, which latter, as
figured by the Adams and Chenu, shows an angular termination
to the aperture at the base of the columella, indicative of a more
pronounced feature in the soft parts (siphonal) at this point than
the rounded aperture of Tryonia and Tricula (as figured), and
the form before me presents. This, however, is a somewhat vari-
able feature as between individuals of the same species, and still
more so between forms of one species as compared with forms of
another.

With the concurrence of Prof. Call, I have described the shells
received from him and Mr. Clark as follows :

Genus PYRGULA Cristoforo and Jan.
Fyrgula Nevadensis, n. s.

Shell small, elongated, ovate-conic, turreted ; number of whorls
five to six (5-6), with a conspicuous keel following
spirall}' the periphery of each and terminating near
the middle of the outer edge of the continuous peri-
treme, which is otherwise simple, ovate and slightly
effuse, and appressed (to the whorl) above; in some
specimens somewhat produced on its inner side and
suggesting a faint umbilicus. Shell white or nearly
so ; smooth and glossy, with a slight epidermis on

' For further information on this point, see my remarks on the "Fossil
Shells from the Colorado Desert," in Am. Naturalist, March, 1879.

^ The connection of the marine Cerithiidse with the fresh-water Melaniidae
through the brackish-water Potamidinae, seems natural and logical. In this
connection the remarks of Swaiuson in his "Treatise on Malacology," are
well worth perusing.

K4 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [18^3.

some specimens. Dimensions as follows, being the measurement
of ten (10) specimens, all adult :

Longitude -14, Latitude -08 inch.

•15,

•08

•16,

•09

•17,

•09

•17,

•09

•18,

•10

•18,

•10

.22

•10

•22

•11

•21,

•12

The mean of the above measurements is eighteen-hundredths of
an inch in length by ninet3'-six-thousandths of an inch in breadth,
or very nearlj* two to one. The largest specimen measured ^23
V)y •I 3 inch. Aperture about one-third the length of the shell,
being as forty-one to one hundred and twenty (xVo)- ^^ the
sixteen specimens examined ^ nine are from Pyramid Lake (Clark),
and seven from Walker's Lake (Call).

The Pyramid Lake lot, from Mr. Clark, were accompanied by
specimens of the flat-spired form of Pompholyx effusa, to which
Dr. Dall has given the name of " var. soliday ^

The several specimens of Pyrgula Nevadensis exhibit similar
differentiation as Tryonia in size of mouth, variability in coil,
robustness or attenuation ; and many of the specimens from the
alkaline deposit of the lake bottom are discolored, varying from
light ashen slate to dark slate, approaching black.

In connection with the above, I have to thank Professor Call
for the following notes :

•' I have it as collected by the U. S. Geological Survey the past

1 Subsequently thirty-two specimens, adolescent and mature, from the
dredging "(1) " Pyramid Lake ; and about the same number, young and
adult, from "(2)" North Shore, Pyramid Lake, were received from Prof.
Call and examined with care.

■' Annals of Lyceum of Nat. History of N. Y., March, 1870, p. 334.
The locality here given, through some misapprehension, is "Clear Lake,"
which is in California; it should read "White Pine, Eastern Nevada. '
Dall, in Science, vol. i, No. 7, page 202 (March 23, 1883), refers to the
occurrence of PompJiolyx effnsa in a calcareous deposit in Pyramid Lake,
and remarks on its variations.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 175

summer. Where known, I give the name of the collector as
authority for localit}'. (1) From dredgings of P^-ramid Lake
bottom; Bussell (I. C); August 30, 1882. (2) North side of
P^-raraid Lake, Nevada; BusseU (I. C). (3) In tufa, shore of
Walker's Lake, Nevada ; Bussell (I. C), and also loose. This is
the locality represented by the shells sent to you.

" P^-ramid Lake,' although it receives the fresh water of the
Truckee River, the outlet of that gem of lakes, Tahoe, is very
strongly alkaline, and the water is not good for human use,
although it can be used for a short period without much incon-
venience."

The elevation of Pyramid Lake is 4890 feet, as stated in
Gannett's'^ List, etc., and Walker's Lake, according to the same
authority, has an altitude of 8840 feet. The water of this lake
is probably similar to that of Pyramid ; it is brackish, as I have
been informed by Prof. Joseph LeConte.

These lakes are the remnants of the great tertiary lake which
covered this general region, and are the pockets or deeper
depressions in the floor of the ancient lake ; the bitterness of
their waters being the result of the accumulated alkaline and
saline sediments, or dregs, of centuries.

Assuming that I have placed the above form in its proper
position, much greater interest attaches to it than that of the
addition of a new species to the fauna of the general region
within which it is found, or that of adding a peculiar t3'pe to the
living molluscan fauna of the North American continent.

The species of Pyrcjula heretofore described,^ are the type, P.
helvetica, from Switzerland; P. bicarinata, France; P.pyrenaica,
from the Pyrenees ; and P. andicola, from the Andes of Bolivia.

Its- distribution hitherto, it will be seen, is Europe and South
America ; inhabiting, as Stimpson observed, " fresh waters in
mountainous regions," and as he further remarked, " It is inter-
es^ting to notice that all the species of the genus as yet described
are severally reported to occur in mountainous districts ; an
instance of correlation of form to external conditions,"

' Lieut. Symons, in Lieut. Wheeler's Report Geog. Survey, etc., 1878,
p. 114.

•^ U. S. Geol. Survey. Hayden, Misc. Pub., No. 1. Fourth Ed.

^ Vide Stimpson, ihid.

116 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF 1883.J

These facts tend to give this new species ^ its chief importance,
and point to further interesting discoveries.

Specimens of Pyrgula Nevadensis have been distributed to the
Museum of the Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila. ; the U. S. National
Museum, Washington ; the Museums of the. University of Cali-
fornia and California Acad, of Sciences ; and are contained in the
cabinets of Professor A. E. Call and my own.

' Mr. John AVolf has described Pyrgula scalar if or mis from the post-
pliocene of Tazewell, Illinois River. Vide Tryon, in Proc. Acad. Nat.
Sci. Phila., May 1, 1873.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. HT

PEELIMINARY OBSERVATIONS UPON THE BRAIN OF AMPHIUMA.
BY HENRY P. OSBORN, SC. D.

The North American Urodela, embracing a wide variety of forms
which can readily be obtained, offer an attractive field for the
comparative study of the amphibian brain. The work upon the
subject hitherto has been chiefly in Germany, but many members
of this large group have barely been touched upon, so that a sys-
tematic research into the whole subject would form a valuable
contribution to Comparative Morphology.

In the hope of extending my study later I have recently been
investigating the brain of Amphiuma,^ having procured a quantity
of live specimens from New Orleans. This paper contains a pre-
liminary account of this investigation.

Among the more important studies upon the amphibian brain
are those of Wy man ,2 Fischer,^ Stieda* and Wilder.^ Stieda's
work is principally upon the microscopic structure of the brains
of the Frog and Axolotl ; "Wilder, in his study of the Frog and
Menobranchus, has directed attention largely to parts of the brain
which have been less studied hitherto, namely to the cavities and
the thinner portions of the brain parietes surrounding them, as
well as to the brain membranes. I am indebted to the writings
of both of these authors for light upon this subject, although I
have not as yet so fully consulted either as I would like to do.

In the general description the usual terminology of different
portions of the brain is employed, but in referring to the various
segments of the brain tube and to the ventricles they enclose I
largely employ the terms partly adopted and partly introduced by
Wilder. His system of nomenclature, which is chiefly founded
upon the embryonic divisions of the brain, is admirably clear and

^•i employ this title as it is the family name (AmpMumidw), and is more
generally known, although Murcenopsis, the three-toed genus, is the one
which I studied.

^ Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, Washington, 1853.

* Amphibiorum Nudorum Neuroglia ; also, Anat, Abhandlungen iiber
die Perennibranchiaten und Derotremen.

* Zeitschrift fiir wiss. Zoologie, Band xx, xxv.

* Anatomical Technology, Wilder and Gage, 1883,

118 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

consistent, although objections may be raised to the author's
means of indicating position and direction.'

My method of study was: (1) A careful examination of the
external features of the brain. (2) A series of very thin transverse
and longitudinal sections of the brain, the sections after staining
being carefully mounted in serial order. These series naturally
supplement each other and give a ver}- accurate idea of the gross
and minute structure.

The technical process of preparing the brains was as follows :
The}' were hardened, after removal fi'om the skull, in a saturated
solution of bichromate of potash, the acid being subsequently
removed with alcohol of different densities. The brains were then
embedded in an egg-mass prepared by shaking the white and 3'olk
of egg together, with three drops of glj-cerine to each egg. This
mass was first stiffened around the brain by placing in a vapor of
alcohol, then hardened in absolute alcohol until ready for cutting.
Its advantages are that it closely embraces the brain, holding all
the parts together and becoming transparent in oil of cloves.
The section cutting was done with one of the large instruments
manufactured by Jung, of Heidelberg, which is far superior to
any other instrument of its kind now in use.

External Structure. The brain of Amphiuma (Plate VIII, figs.
A and B) resembles that of Menopoma (figs. C and D) more
closely than that of any of the remaining Urodela. Its most
striking feature is that the component parts are, in the main, little
differentiated from each other, giving the exterior very much the
simple character of an embr^'onic brain. This is especially true
of the Di-, Mes- and Epencephala. The vertical longitudinal
section (fig. H) shows that the construction of the interior is
equally simple. The brain flexure is apparently slight. The
brain is also extremely small in proportion to the body, and has
a narrow, elongated form ; a remarkable feature is the diminutive

' The following are some of the terms employed and their synonyms:
RMnencephalon, olfactory lobes ; Prosencephalon, including the cerebral
hemispheres and their cavities (procalice); Diencephalon, including the
thalami optici, the infundibulum, the pineal gland, etc., and the dia-
coelia or third ventricle ; Mesencephalon, including the optic lobes, the
crura cerebri and mesocalia or iter ; the vahula, or valve of Vieussens ;
Epmcephalo>i or ceTehellum] Metencephalon, medulla oblongata, and roof
of fourth ventricle.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 119

size of the cerebellum. This general simplicit}' corresponds to
the partial blindness and to the degenerate structure and habits
of Amphiiima.

The Metencephalon is very broad and shallow, with its upper
surface divided longitudinally by a central and two slight lateral
furrows, and with its borders turning bluntly inwards anteriorl}',
apparently to enter the cerebellum. On its lower surface the
medulla is divided b^- the central furrow, a continuation of the
anterior fissure of the spinal cord. As in other Amphibia, the
medulla passes without clear demarkation into the crura cerebri.

The Epenoephalon. The cerebellum is a narrow, band-like
structure, arching across the wide medulla. It is unusually small,
and was actually overhung by the optic lobe in my specimens,
so as not to be seen in the median line, although this point may
require confirmation. The valvula is therefore out of sight, in the
dorsal aspect of the brain, but may be seen in the longitudinal
sections.

The Mesencephalon. The optic lobe has no longitudinal
furrow, but forms a single, narrow, unpaired body, passing
forward into the roof of the Diencephalon without demarkation.
TheS'B divisions of the brain cannot be distinguished upon the
dorsal surface, but can be seeu in side view by noting the position
of the infundibulum below. The Crura (pars peduncularis) form
a broad base for the posterior half of the Mesencephalon, which,
by an oversight, is not represented in the drawings. As they
pass forward, however, they cannot be distinguished from the
optic lobe nor from each other, so that this division of the brain
forms a cylindrical tube, the component parts of which can onl}-
be detected in the microscopic structure.

Tho,' Diencephalon. The roof of this portion of the brain ter-
minates anteriorly in the large pineal gland ; its median surface is
marked, in Sfeyiojyoma, by two circular thickenings which were
not, noticed in Amphiuma. These ma,y correspond to several
structures in the brain roof, which are apparent in the sections.
The sides of the Dienoephalon form the thalami, but the promi-
nent feature of this portion of the brain is the production of the
floor into the long, backward-directed infundibulum, which is best
seen in side view. At the base of this process is the large pitui-
tary body. At the sides of the infundibulum are two thickenings
which converge to enter the thalami ; their relations are clearly

180 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

shown in the sections. In front of the infundibular region the
Diencephalon as a whole becomes higher and narrower. There is
quite a space between the infundibulum and optic chiasma ; the
latter has no clear decussation of fibres as in the frog ; on the other
hand, the nerves are given off as two slender fibres on either side
of a slightly raised whitish plate.

The Prosencephalon. The cerebral hemispheres are very long,
flattened-oval bodies, narrowing forwards ; they are in close
contact, but there is no structural union, except for a short
distance in front of the lamina terminalis. The Rhinencephala
arise from the outer anterior third of the hemispheres and give off
on the lower surface of the brain, the large olfactory nerves.

Internal and Microscopic Structure.

The internal structure of the brain, so far as studied, has many
interesting features, which may here be considered in connection
with the various divisions of the brain tube, concluding with
some observations upon the general distribution of the gray and
white matter. It must here be said that the minute histology has
not been so carefully studied as to afford conclusive data.

Fig. H represents a longitudinal vertical section of the brain
of Amphiuma, magnified four diameters, the shaded portions
showing the gray or cellular matter. The vertical lines indicate,
approximately, the position of twelve of the thirteen transverse
sections which are figured. Fig. 9 passes through the anterior
commissure and the forward portion of the diacoelia, not quite
agreeing with any vertical line that could be drawn through fig. H.
Much enlarged longitudinal and transverse views of the cere-
bellum are given in E and F. Fig. G gives an imperfect idea
of some of the cells found in the crura.

The Epencephalon is the only divisioil of the brain which has
a complete investment of gray matter ; this statement needs the
reservation that the cells surrounding the cerebellum may be of
epithelial origin, although this doubt is apparently disproved by
the close similarity and continuity of their structure with those of
the optic lobe. If this be admitted, the cerebellum is composed
of three parts: (1) A continuous band of fibres arching from
side to side of the medulla. (2) A fine layer of fibres which
have an autero-posterior direction. (3) An investing la3er of
cells one or two rows deep. These parts are represented in
fig. E, 6, a and c; also in fig. F, h and c.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 181

(1) The transverse band of fibres (fig. 1) form the greater
part of the cerebellum; they appear to arise from columns of
fibres in the lateral portions of the medulla, so that they
correspond partially to the inferior peduncles of the mammalian
cerebellum arising from the restiform bodies. (2) The fine layer
of fibres have a direction at right-angles to these, and are three
or four deep, seeming to terminate in the lateral portions of the
cerebellum, in some cells lying between the cerebellum and the
optic lobe. This layer, owing to the peculiar position of the
cerebellum beneath the optic lobe, is dorsal to the main transverse
band ; if the cerebellum were turned backwards, this layer would
be ventral to it. (3) The cells composing the cortex of the
cerebellum are of an elongated-oval shape, usually one row, in
some places two rows deep. Their greatest diameter is arranged
parallel to the main band of transverse fibres. Here, as in other
portions of the brain, it was difficult to ascertain whether or no
these cells were continued into fibre processes. No such processes
were discovered.

The above account differs widely from that given by Stieda' of
the frog's cerebellum ; although the latter is somewhat difficult to
understand owing to the lack of figures.

The 3Iesencephalon. Posteriorly, the mesocoelia is broad and
low, and the brain tube has a subpyramidal section ; anteriorly,
it becomes more circular and is surrounded by a shield-shaped
mass of cells (figs. 2 and 3), surrounded in turn by the mass of
longitudinal fibres, the whole constituting the optic lobe and
crura. According to Stieda,^ the brain of axolotl has a similar
structure in this region.

The Diencephalon is the most interesting division of the brain;
its deep but narrow cavity (diacoelia) is filled with the large
choroid plexus ; it has a'ver}^ thin roof and floor, but broad lower
sides. The infundihulum is formed b}- the thrusting downward
of the posterior portion of the floor. Its walls are much convo-
luted; they are composed cliiefly of white matter, with here and
there a scattering of nerve-cells, which in some places form a
continuous layer. The base of the infundibulum is closely
reflected over the pituitary body as a thin lamina. The pituitary
body has therefore no communication with the brain cavity, as has

^ Zeitscbrift fiir wiss. Zcologie, Baud xx.
^ Same Jourual, Band xxv.

182 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

been observed in some animals. It is composed of a solid
mass of granular cells, traversed by numerous blood-vessels, and
resembles in structure, although more compact, one of the ordi-
nary Ij-mphatic glands.

The lumen of the infundibulum becomes narrower before it
comm.unicates with the diacoelia, and the lateral walls become
thickened into two solid oval masses, largel}' composed of nerve-
cells. These bodies resemble the lobi inferiores of the Teleosts,
and, according to Stieda,' correspond in position with the tuber
cinereum of the mammalia ; anteriorly they gradually converge
(figs. 4 and 5), finally entering the thalami. At this point the
diacoelia has a cruciform shape, the lateral cavities separating the
tuber cinereum from the walls of the Diencephalon above. In
front of this is the thickening of the optic chiasma, and around
the upper portion of the ventricle is a row of compact cells which
resemble columnar epithelium. Anteriorly the latter flatten out,
covering a lateral expansion of the ventricle. Above this is a
small hollow sphere formed of a single layer of cells (fig. 7, a;);
the meaning of this structure is not known, and no mention of it
has been found by the writer elsewhere. It corresponds in
position with the external markings noticed upon the dorsal
surface of the Menopoma brain at this point (see fig. C, Di. f.).
Immediately below this point is a transverse band of nerve-fibres
which probably belong to the optic chiasma.

The roof of the Diencephalon is of irregular thickness; forward
it is carried as a very thin lamina over the jiineal gland. The
structure of this body is nothing more than a rich plexus of blood-
vessels produced from the choroid ; in the apex are numerous fine
nuclei, resembling those of connective tissue, certainly not of
nerve-tissue. There is no evidence that the latter is present.

It will thus be seen that the pineal Ixidy is a simple vascular
structure, properly speaking, in communication with the brain
cavity, since it is apparently surrounded by the brain parietes.
The pituitary body, on the other hand, is a compact glandular
structure, not in apparent communication with the brain cavity.,
except l:)y an improbable process of osmosis through the attached
cells.

1 Stud, iiber d. centrale Nervensystcm d. Knochenflscher. Zeits, ftir
wiss. Zoologie, Band xviii.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 183

The sections are imperfect in the forward portion of the root
of the Diencephalon (diatela); they do not show the j^ostcommis-
sura, described b}' Stieda and Wilder. The prsecommissxira^ h.as
its usual shape and position.

The relations of the Diencephalon to the Prosencephalon are
shown in figs. 7, 8 and 9. The procoelife extend back into the
posterior sections of the hemispheres. Anterior to this the hemi-
spheres fuse with the thalami below, receiving from the upper
portion of the Diencephalon a conspicuous band of fibres (fig. 8, a).
The relations of the dia- to the procoeliae are best obtained by
means of horizontal longitudinal sections ; these have not been
made as yet, so that the nature of these cavities is somewhat
doubtful. It appears that the procoeliaj communicate with each
other some distance anterior to the lamina terminalis.

The hemispheres have a great lateral extent, containing exten-
sive cavities. Their posterior halves are partly fused together ;
anteriorly, however, they are quite separate and distinct, becoming
more c^'lindrical in section in the region of the Rhinencephalon.
A peculiar feature of each proccelia is the formation of a short
superior median cornu (fig. 11, a); corresponding to this is an
extension of the gray matter lining the cffilia to the cortex of the
hemisphere. Forwards the coelise have a vertical and more in-
ternal position. The Rhinencephala arise in masses of gra}' cells
in the anterior third of the lateral portions of the hemispheres ;
they do not contain anj- cavit^-jbut are continued forward into the
solid olfactory nerve.

The structure and distribution of the nerve-fibres and cells
have not been closely studied ; the following are some preliminary
notes :

The cavities of the brain are throughout lined with masses of
nerve-cells of varying thickness. Nerve-cells are also found
scattered among the fibres, but these are somewhat rare. The
gra}' substance lining the hemispheres corresponds to the central
gra>y^ the Hohlengrau of Meynert. At a few points it is found
upon the brain cortex; these are : (1) the lateral bodies of the
infundibulum (fig. 3) ; (2) the upper surface of the central portion
of the hemispheres (fig. 11) ; (3) and the inner sides and front of
the foremost portion of the same (fig. 12) ; (4) the cerebellum.

' Anterior and posterior commissures.

184 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

None of these cortical exposures of the central gra}' can be
considered to correspond to the cortical gray (Rindengrau) of
the mammalian brain. The gray substance is, therefore, chiefly
central.

The scattered nerve-cells above referred to are principally found
in the substance of the hemispheres above the cavities, internal
to fig. 11, a. Here they are numerous.

The nerve-cells are chiefly small, oval and nucleated bodies,
very compactly placed ; among these at some points, as in the
crura, much larger cells enveloped in loose capsules were discov-
ered. No processes were found leading out of these cells, in fact
no unmistakably branched cells were found at any point ; this
may have been the fault of the preparation methods, for Stieda
has found that the branched nerve-cells are very numerous in the
frog, while Wyman, emplojdng simpler histological methods, failed
to find them.

This is as far as the sections have been studied, although they
offer very tempting opportunities for making out the nerve-tracts.

The following is a resume of the results thus far obtained :

In external characters, Amphiuma differs widely from the frog
type in the simpler differentiation of its parts, the mid-region of
the brain being a rounded tube with no separation of its optic
lobes and thalami indicated above. The cavities of the brain are
equally simple, the meta-, meso- and diacceliae forming a uniform
cavity, forking into the procoeliae in front. The infundibulum has
the large size which is so characteristic of it in the fishes, and its
lateral bodies recall the lohi inferiores in the Teleosts, although
passing forwards they form the tuber cinereum. The pineal and
pituitary bodies are constructed upon clearly different principles,
one being within, the other without the brain walls, the former a
vascular plexus, the latter a gland. In the roof of the Dien-
cephalon is a small spherical body whose meaning is not known,
but which may prove to be of some morphological significance.
The cerebellum has a cellular investment and consists of two sets
of fibres with a transverse and fore and aft direction. The gray
matter of the brain lines the cavities throughout, as the " central
graj^ ; " continuations of it extend in some places to the cortex,
but the "cortical gra^^," if present at all, is verj- limited in
distribution.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 185

EXPLANATION OF PLATE VIII.
Illustrating the Brains op Amphioma and Menopoma,

Lettering and Abbreviations.

Eh. — Rhinencephalon ; Pr. and Pro. c. — Prosencephalon and Procoelia ; Di.,
Bi. t. and Di. c. — Diencephalon, Diatela (roof of Diencephalon), and
Diaccelia ; Me. and Me. c. —Mesencephalon and Mesocoelia ; Ep. and
Ep. c. — Epencephalon and Epicoelia ; Met. — Metencephalon.

Tc. — Tuber cinereura ; ch. — optic chiasma ; pt. — pituitary body ; p w. — pineal
gland; era.— infundibulum ; c/to.— choroid plexus; cr.— crura cerebri ;
p. cm. — prsecommissura (anterior commissure); i^.— optic thalamus.

I, — Optic; II. — Olfactory ; III— Oculo-Motor ; V.— Trigeminis ; VL —
Abducens; VIL — Facial; VIII. -Auditory ; IX, X, XL— Vagus
Group. N. B. —The identification of yie nerves was by noting their
origin ; the distribution of the nerves has not been -worked out.

Special References in Figures.

Figures A-D, twice natural size. Figs. H and 1-13, eight times natural
size.

Figure A. Dorsal view of the brain of AmpMuma.

Figure B. Ventral view of the same.

Figure C. Dorsal view of the brain of Menopoma.

Figure D. Lateral view of the same. Dit. corresponds to vertical line
7, tig. H.

Figure E. Enlarged view (about 30 diameters) of a longitudinal section
of the cerebellum and a portion of the optic lobe, taken at one side
of the median line. The valvula, v, is broader in the median line ;
d, white, e, gray portion of Mesencephalon ; a, fine longitudinal fibres ;
b, transverse band of fibres ; c, cortical layer of cells.

Figure F. Transverse section of the cerebellum, lettering as in fig. E.

Figure G. a, large, b, small cells found in crura cerebri (30 diameters).

Figure H. Longitudinal section of the brain of Ainfhiuma, taken to the
left of the median line. Vertical lines, 1 to 13, correspond to trans-
verse sections represented by figs. 1 to 13. Black line represents the
pia mater ; the roof of the metacoelia (fourth ventricle) is omitted in
the drawing.

Figure 1. Vertical transverse section through cerebellum, showing it as
a transverse band passing beneath Mesencephalon.

Figure 2. Ditto through pituitary body and infundibulum, showing
crura cerebri and optic lobe unpaired.

Figure 3. Sliowing sides of infundibulum thickening into tuber cinereum.

Figure 4. Through posterior portion of the Diencephalon.

Figure 5. Through the median portion of the Diencephalon.

Figure 6. Slightly anterior to fig. 5. y, a constriction of the upper por-
tion of the diaccelia.
IS

186

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

Figure 7. Forward portion of Diencephalon. y corresponds to y in fig.

6 ; X, see x in fig. H.
Figure 8. Forward portion of Diencephalon. a, bands of fibres passing

downwards into the hemispheres.
Figure 9. Forwaid lower portion of Diencephalon {Di. c), showing

prsecommissiua and proccelia.
Figure 10. Through the hemispheres slightly anterior to the lamina

terminalis.
Figure 11. Median portion of hemispheres ; a, gray matter extending to

cortex.
Figure 12. Anterior third of hemispheres ; showing the beginning of the

Rhinencephalon.
Figure 13. Section near the tips of the hemispheres.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 187

August 7.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.
Six }Dersons present.

August 14.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair,
Nine persons present.

August 21.
Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.
Six persons present.

August 28.
Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Fifteen persons present.

Soine Evidences of Great Modern Geological Changes in
Alaska. — Mr. Thomas Meehan exhibited a piece of wood taken
from a prostrate tree, in what appeared to have been a sunken
forest in Alaska. It was in Hood's Bay, as mnrlced on some
charts, on a peninsula formed by the junction of Glacier Bay and
Lynn Channel, and facing Cross Sound, in lat. 58° 30'. The
arboreal vegetation generally prevailing in this section consists
of Abies Sitkensis (A. Menziesii of many botanists) ; Abies Mer-
tensiana, the western hemlock spruce ; and Thuja gigantea,
called here "cedar" and "white cedar." Thujopsis horealis is
said to " abound " in these disti'icts by some authoi's, but Mr.
Meehan remarked that though looking for it through man}^ hun-
dred miles along the shores of the inland seas in southeastern
Alaska, he did not see one specimen. The trees in the forest are
of all ages,fcom young seedlings to aged decaying and dead ones.
But in sailing into Hood's Bay he noted that the forests all had
a comparatively young look — few of the trees appearing over
fifty 3^ears old. The shores were high — at the point where he
landed not less than fifty feet above tide-water — and the soil was
sand, or of glacial production. Across from here to Lynn Channel
the distance might be about twelve miles, and, so far as could be
judged, the soil and trees across were of the same character; and

188 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

it appeared the same up and down the peninsula for miles. Along
the shore he found numerous prostrate trees, and upright stumps
which had been ground off a few feet above the surfiice. The
stumps could be seen extending down below low-water mark, and
the}' extended up to the bottom of the highland at high-water
mark, where the mud in which they had grown was covered hy the
glacial deposit already referred to. The wood exhibited was part
of one of these prostrate trunks, and is evidently the same species
as that now existing on the land, Abies Sitkensis. It is quite
sound, and exhibits no evidence of great age since it became
covered with tJie drift. The shores are strewn with rocks and
stones of various classes, as usual in eases of glacial deposits.
On one of the prostrate trunks — the one from which the piece of
wood exhibited was taken — there lies a block of granite which,
by measurement, was found to contain 2214 cubic feet. This
trunk was partiallj^ bent in the middle by the weight of the huge
block of stone, showing that the block had fallen on it, while the
ground beneath the trunk was comparatively soft. Near this, but
so far as could be seen not on any trunk, was a much larger mass
of granite, comprising 3888 cubic feet. The whole of the circum-
stances pointed to the almost certainty that there had been a
sudden subsidence of the land, and that with the subsidence there
was a flow of w-ater with icebergs on which were these huge rocks,
and which crushed the trees and tore off those which were strong
enough to resist ; and that subsequentl}^ to the destruction of the
forest, the whole surface became covered to a great depth with
drift. Since that time there must have been an elevation of the
land, and the remains of the trees are again brought to their
original surface, but with a deep bed of earth above them. Mr.
Meehan believed that the botanical facts might aftbrd a clue to
an approximation to the time when these events occurred. The
youth of the living forest indicated that, at the farthest, it could
not have been more than a few hundred years since the elevation
occurred. As already noted, the trees in the immediate vicinity
appeared to be but about fifty years since germination ; but
Tmless the original parent trees which furnished the seed for the
uplifted land w-ere near by, it might take some years for the seed
to scatter from bearing trees, grow to maturit}', again seed, and
in this way travel to where we now find them. But as original
forests were evidently not so very far distant, two or three hundred
years ought to cover all the time required. The Rev. Mr. Corlies,
a missionary at Juneau, or Harrisb,urg as it is marked on some
charts, informed the speaker that an Indian chief had told him
that about seven or eight generations ago, as tradition told them,
there had been a sudden and terrible flood in that land, and only
a few Indians had escaped in a large canoe. The probable iden-
tity of the sunken trees with the present species, and the freshness
of the wood, would indicate no ver}- great date backwards at
which the original subsidence occurred.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 189

In connection with tlie subject of tlie comparative recentness
of great geological changes as indicated by botanical evidence,
Mr. Meehan referred to an exposure of the remains of a large
forest near the Muir glacier, one of five huge ones which form the
head of Glacier Bay, between lat, 59"^ and 60°. This glacier is
at least two miles wide at the mouth, and has an average depth of
ice at this spot of perhaps five hundred feet. At the present time
there is not a vestige of arboreal vegetation to be seen an3'where,
except some willows on the hillsides, some miles from huge hills
of drift piled up everywhere around. The river which flows under
the glacier, and which has a volume equal to the Schujdkill at
Philadelphia, does not flow into the bay from under the ice at the
face, but rushes out in a mighty torrent on the northwest side, a
few miles above the mouth, and has cut its way through mountains
of drift, the gorge being many hundred feet in width, and the
sides from two hundred to five hundred feet high. The torrent
through the bed is now comparatively level, canying with it an
immense quantit}' of heavy stones, some of which must have
comprised masses of six or eight cubic feet. Along the sides of
this gorge were the exposed trunks, all standing perfectly erect,
and cut oflT at about the same level. Some were but a few feet
high, and others as much as fifteen — the difference arising from
the slope of the ground on which the trees grew. These trunks
were of mature trees in the main, and were evidently of Abies
Sitfcensis, with a few of either Thuja gigantea or Jiiniperus,
perhaps Occidentalism the uncertaint}^ arising from the imperfec-
tion of the bark — what there was of this indicating the former,
while an eccentricity of outline of the wood, not uncommon in
Juniperus, favoring the latter view. These trees must have been
filled in tightly by drift to the height of fifteen feet before being
cut off, or the trunks now standing would have been split down
on the side opposite to that which received the blow, and the
grinding off could not have been many years after, or the dead
trees would have lost their bark, as the}^ always do when under
varying conditions of heat and moisture. The facts seemed to
him to injdicate that the many feet of drift which had buried part
of the trees in the first instance was the work of a single season,
and that the subsequent total destruction of every vestige of these
great forests was the work of another one soon following. As
in the, case of the facts noted in Hood's Bay, Mr. Meehan believed
that the conclusion was justified that the total destruction of the
forests here, the covering of their site by hundreds of feet of
drift, and the subsequent exposal to view of their remains, were
all the work of but a very few hundred years.

Mr. Charles Peabody was elected a member.

190 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

September 4.

Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.

Sixteen persons present.

The death of John C. Dawson, a member, Avas announced.

Exudation from Floioers in Relation to Honey-dew. — Mr. Thos.
Meehan remarked that our standard literature 3^et continued to
teach that the sweet varnish-like covering often found over every
leaf on large trees, as well as on comparatively small bushes, was
the work of insects, notably Aphides. So far as he knew, Dr.
Hoffman, of Giessen, who in 1876 published a paper on the subject,
is the only scientific man of note who takes ground against this
view. He met with a camelia without blossoms, and wholly free
from insects, and yet the leaves were coated with "honey-dew,"
as it is generally known. He found this substance to consist of a
sticky colorless liquid, having a sweetish taste, and principally gum.
Mr. Meehan said he had often met with cases where no insects
could be found, as well as others where insects were numerous,
and where in the latter case, the attending circumstances were
strongl^'^ in favor of the conclusion that the liquid covering was
the work of insects.

He said he believed that few scientific men had any knowledge
of the enormous amount of liquid exuded by flowers at the time
of opening, and he had seen cases where the leaves were as com-
pletely covered by the liquid from the flowers, as if it had exuded
from the leaves, as he believed Dr. Hoffman had good grounds for
believing is often the case. He had already biought to the atten-
tion of the Academy cases where, large quantities of liquid had
dropped from the flowers to the leaves below, of which Yvcca^
Mahonia and some others had been recorded in the Proceedings
of the Academy. Akebia had been noted by Mr. Wm. M. Canby to
drop from the leaves at certain times, and Sach notes in his Text-
book the moisture which fills the small flowers of Thuja. In
connection with the last case, the exudation from Coniferae, he
met with a remarkable case during his recent journey through the
northwest coast. While collecting plants along the east shore of
the Columbia River he noticed a plant of .4Z???/.s- Oregana, covered
with honey-dew. The woolly Aphis, so well known for its pref-
erence for alder, also abounded. Little drops of liquid were in
many cases attached to the apex of the abdomen, and ti>e conclu-
sion was reached that in this case at least, the probabilities favored
the insect origin of the liquid on the leaves. Proceeding a few
feet further, towards the trunk of a large spreadiiig Sitka spruce
{Abies Sitkensis)^ and then on the other side, a bush of -P//?v/.s
rivularis was observed also covered, but not a sign of an insect

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 191

anywhere about it. This caused a reexamination of the wl\oIe
case, when it was noticed that stones under the spruce tree,
forming the shore of the river, and many feet outside of the circle
formed by the branches of the Pyrus and Alder, were quite black
with a gummy coat, which most probably had fallen from the
spruce, the branches of which overshadowed the two bushes already
named, as well as the stones. The branches of the spruce hanging
towards the river were covered with young cones of probably
one-half their full size, and the scales were found to be filled with
sweet liquid. Taking the cone as it hung on the tree and stripping
it down as one would milk a cow, a drop as large as a pea gathered
in the hand from a single cone. There could be no doubt but that
the viscid covering on the leaves of the two shrubs below, as well
as on the unprotected stones, came from the cones of the spruce
tree. He had seen, two years ago, the glossy covering over the
leaves of the Liriodendron at flowering time, and found the
opening flowers with a large quantity of liquid at the base, and
had intended especially to give the matter minute attention the
past summer and then report to the Academy ; but his long
journey had diverted him. Recently the subject had been again
brought to his attention during some experiments in relation to
pollinization and cross-fertilization in Platycodon grandifiora not
3'et concluded. Cutting open very carefully a corolla just about
to expand, the whole inner surface was found to be coated with
minute drops of moisture, which, as they gathered in size, streamed
down toward the base of the pistil. This liquid was not sweet,
but had the taste of lettuce. In the case of the moisture which
exuded from the divisions of the perianth in Yucca gloriosa and
Yucca arigustifolia before reported, the taste was rather bitter
than sweet. He said there was reason for the belief that much
of the moisture found at the base of flowers was not the product
of " nectariferous glands," which were sometimes guessed at rather
than always detected, but was rather the collection from exudation
from the petals ; and if so it was a confirmation of Dr. Hoffman's
idea of the origin of honey-dew through the surface of the leaf,
as we nVight reasonably suppose a modified leaf like the petal of a
flower to have some functions in common with the primary leaves
from which they sprung.

AVhat is the object of this abundant exudation of sweet liquid
and vliquid of other character from leaves and flowers ? Tlie
speaker said we were so accustomed to read of nectar and nec-
taries in connection with the cross-fertilization of flowers, that
there might seem to be no room for any other suggestion. But
plants like' the Thuja and Abie^ were anemophilous, and having
their pollen carried freely by the wind, had no need of these
extraordinary exudations from any point of view connected with
the visits of insects to flowers. In the case of Thuja, Sach had
suggested another use : " Tlie pollen-grains which happen to fall on
the micropyle of the ovules are retained by an exuding drop of fluid,

192 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

which about this time fills the canal of the micropyle, but after-
wards dries up, and thus draws the captured pollen-grains to the
nucleus, where they immediately emit their pollen-tubes into the
spongy tissue. In Gupressinese^ Taxinese and Podocaryese this
contrivance is sufticient, since the m3'crop3'les project outwardly;
in the Abietinese^ yvhere they are more concealed among the scales
and bracts, these themselves form, at the time of pollination,
canals and channels for this purpose, through which the pollen-
grains arrive at the micropj-les filled with fluid " (Strasberger).^
Mr. Meehan said that in his former observations on liquid exuda-
tions in Thuja and other plants he was inclined to adopt the
suggestion of Sach as to the purpose of the liquid suppl}^ ; but as
it was here in Abies so long after fertilization must have taken
place, and as it was held up in the deep recesses of the scales of
the pendent cone, where it could hardly be possible the wind could
draw up the pollen ; and as, moreover, the extract shows that these
eminent botanists believe Abietineae does not need the moisture
they did not know existed in this abundance, we must look for
other reasons, which, however, do not yet seem to be apparent.

September 11.

Mr. Meehan, Yice-President, in the chair.

Sixteen persons present.

The death of the Curator-in-charge, Charles F. Parker, on the
7th inst., was announced.

Irritability in the Flowers of Centaureas and Thistles. — Mr.
Thomas Meehan called attention to some flowers of various com-
positse on the table, sent by Miss Mary E. Powel, of Newport,
Rhode Island, who has observed a singular motion in the florets
of Centaurea Americana. This motion had long been known
to German botanists, and a reference to some features of it
may be found in Sach's Text-book of Botan}^, and there was an
illustrated paper by Cohn in Zeitschrift fur ivis. Zoologie^ vol.
xii, showing the mechanism of the contraction of the anthers.
As, however, the motion had failed to attract the attention of
American observers, or at least he knew of no refei'cnce to it in any
American work at his command, he believed it might do good
service to place on record an independent statement of the phe-
nomena as exhibited by the specimens before us.

Besides the motion in Centaurea ^?7jeWcana, observed b}^ Miss
Powel, Mr. Meehan said that he found a similar motion in the
following plants growing in his garden : Centaurea alba, Centaurea

' Sach, Text-book of Botany, Oxford edition, p. 449. The various ways
of spelling micropyle in the same paragraph, are of course retained in the
quotation.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 193

nigra, C. ochroleiica, G. rutifolia, Cirsium serrulatum, G. dis-
color, and G. lanceolatum. The motion seems most active when
the anthers are ready to shed their pollen, and, as pollen-gathering
insects anticipate the observer, it is best to cut the flowers and
place them in water in a room. Endeavoring to observe the motion
of Girsium discolor in the growing plant almost failed from this
cause, but on drawing a light substance over the whole head, some
of the florets were found to move.

In the Gentaurea flowers on the table, the best period for
observing the motion is when the anthers which cover the apex
of the pistil seem about to allow the pistil to protrude. If then
touched, the pollen is seen to issue from the mouth of the united
stamens, and the whole crown of anthers to decline. Cohn, above
cited, gives the exact measurement of this contraction, and
explains the mechanism by which the contraction is accomplished.
At the same time, if the motive power be very active, the whole
upper portion of the floret, moves in some direction, apparently
without order or system. Sometimes it is in a lateral direction,
at other times upwards or downwards, and sometimes describing
a circle round its own axis. In some cases the motion is commu-
nicated to other florets — two and sometimes three moving to the
touch of a single one. In ten minutes after the exhibition of
irritation, it is ready for another fit, and goes through the motions,
though less actively than before. Mr, Meehan had failed to get
any motion three times from the same floret, and not always two.
Touching the pistil had no effect unless the force was sufficient to
press one side against the anther. The irritation seemed to be
confined to the stamens, and through these probably down by their
nervous connections through the achenium, and in this yvay com-
municating with the nerves which run up through neighboring
achenes to the stamens which they support.

Since the above communication was made to the Aeademj'-,
Mr, J. H. Redfield believes that the neutral raj' florets in Gen-
taurea Americana, which have neither stamens nor pistil, also
possess the power of motion, and Miss Powell, without knowledge
of Mr.'Redfield's observation, notes a similar experience.

September 18.
Mr. Thomas Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Thirty-one persons present.
The death of John C. Trautwine, a member, was announced.

Notes on the Sequoia gigantea.-^M.r. Meehan remarked that so
much had been written about the mammoth trees, that there seemed
little room for more; but to one of the fullest accounts given,
namely, that by Mr. Muir in the Proceedings of the Meeting of

194 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

the American Association for the Ach^ancement of Science, at
Buffalo, 1876, he believed he might add a few additional facts,
drawn from or suggested by a visit made to a few of the groves
during the i)ast summer. He could confirm the statement of Mr.
Miiir that there were comparatively few young plants growing
among the old ones in the Calaveras or Mariposa groves. In the
latter spot a few might be found in swamp}' places. Man}' of the
large trees were also growing in swamp}' ground, while some were
found where the ground would be pronounced quite dry. Mr.
Muir gave 5000 feet as about the elevation of the trees in these —
the northern part of tiie belt occupied by them. On the soiithern
part of the belt Mr. Mnir found them at about 8000 feet, and there
numerous young trees formed the great mass of the undergrowth,
and furnished an abundance for a perfect succession of forest
trees. Here Mr. Muir found them in ground not swampy, as well
as in situations as swampy as possible, and he concludes that the
Sequoia giganlea is a tree which has the power of growing in
dryer and wetter soil than most other species. He adds : " It is
constantly asserted in a vague way, that the Sierra (in past times)
was vastly wetter than now, and that the increasing drouth will
of itself extinguish Sequoia, leaving its ground to other trees
supposed capable of flourisliing in a dryer climate. But that
Sequoia can and does grow on as dry ground as any of its present
rivals, is manifest in a thousand places. ' Why, then,' it will be
asked, ' is Sequoia always found in greatest abundance in well-
watered places where streams are exceptionally abundant ?' Simply
because a growth of sequoias always creates these streams. * * *
Drain the water, if possible, and the trees will remain ; but cut off
the trees, and the streams will vanish." He has seen a fallen
trunk make a dam of 200 feet long, and similar bogs made by
roots and fallen trunks damming the earth, are familiar features in
the more luxuriant sequoia forests. On this bare suggestion Mr.
Muir builds as if it were a demonstration, and proceeds to say :
" Since the extra moisture found in connection with the denser
growths is an effect of their presence, instead of a cause of their
presence, then notions, * * * based upon its supposed
dependence on greater moisture, are shown to be erroneous."

In the light of these views, Mr. Meehan said he had carefully
examined the trees in the groups scattered from the Fresno to
Calaveras, and could say that in these Ic^calities the sequoias pos-
sessed no more power of making the ground swampy than any
othrr tree which might form the leading forests in heavy wooded
districts. The huge specimens o^ PwusLamhertiana, Finuaponder-
oaa, and the thick groves of Liboced run — huge, tljough averaging at
best but two-thirds the diameter of the mammoth sequoias — did not
make the ground swampy in the slightest degree. Mr. Muir's
supposition — for it surely cannot be regarded as such a demon-
stration as science requires — would give us snnill swamps, at
least, for the smaller trees.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 195

Experience of forest growths in the eastern states gave abun-
dance of facts, which were quite sufficient to exjjlain the existing
state of things, on grounds very different from those assumed by
Mr. Muir. Observers knew that there were trees which loved
moisture, and trees which preferred dry ground. Swamp-lovers
would grow in dry places almost as well as in wet ones, but the
dry -lovers would not grow in wet places. The swamp magnolia,
swamp willow, swamp azalea, the bald c^qjress, the swamp maple,
the sweet gum — every swamp tree that can be named — do just as
well, and in man}' cases better, in dr}" ground. This is so well
known to every intelligent cultivator of trees, that its correctness
is beyond dispute. Here in the east, the largest red ma})les,
willows, cypresses, and other swamp trees, aie the occasional
specimens which by accident find themselves on dry ground. On
the other hand, the dry-land species of pine, oak, maple, and other
trees, can under no circumstances be made to grow in wet places;
and, theiefore, if Mr. Muir's suggestion that the Sequoia was once
a dr^'-land plant, and made the land swampy through its own
growth, should b}- any possibility be found correct, it would
])robably be an exceptional case in the vegetable kingdom. It had
been shown by himself, the speaker said, in past communications
to the Academ}', printed in its Proceedings, that trees only grow
in swamps from a provision of nature that their seeds shall only
germinate in wet ]jlaces. It seems like a determination of nature
that some trees shall grow in swamps, whether they prefer it or
not. Though these trees grow better and fruit freely in dry
ground, the trees cannot spread, because there is not the moisture
required for the seed to grow.

Mr. Muir mistakes the argument. It is not that sequoias will
not grow in dry ground, but that the seed will not germinate to
any extent except under highly humid conditions. Ground need
not be absolutely wet. The cultivator raises swamp ferns on
bricks, and the swamp rhododendron is often found on rocky
ledges, but this is onh- where a humid atmosphere keei)S the seed
from drying till it grows. The atmospheric humidity at 8000 feet
would be more likely to help Sequoia at 8000 feet than at 5000.
In concluding this branch of the topic he said the facts spoke for
themselves. The seed did not grow now — there were no seed-
lings— though seeds were abundant. They grew in former times
or the trees would not exist. There must be some change in the
conditions necessary to make seeds grow since the forest was
started. We know from outside observations that seed of swamp-
loving trees will not grow under arid conditions. AVe see that
the Sequoia is a swamp-lover. Is not this getting to as close an
explanation as science rarely reaches? Ma}'- we not say that
Sequoia does not spread because the humid conditions are not as
they once were when the forests were founded? This was cer-
tainly his conclusion from the i'acts as they presented themselves
to his observation.

196 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

If this be incontrovertible, it opens up an interesting question
as to the cause of the desiccation in the vicinity of the big trees.
The ratio of disintegration in a mountain peak, b}' the frost, rains,-
and elements generally, and the descent of the loose mass to the
lower lands by the simple law of gravity alone, would depend on
the width of the peak, as well as the nature of the material. In
the process of ages, peaks covered with snow would be lowered
till they were no longer snow-capped in summer, and thus lower
regions in the vicinit}^, covered perchance with Sequoia, would be
under dryer atmospheric conditions. To a greater or less extent
this must be the case in all mountain changes, but whether this
could have been going on to any appreciable extent in the few
thousand years during which these trees have occupied the spot,
is a question for geologists to determine. However, Mr. Muir
himself gives good reasons for the belief that these trees followed
from the west, eastwardly, in the close wake of retreating glaciers,
and when the atmospheric moisture, as well as that of the earth
contiguous, must have been more moist than now.

In regard to the age of the trees, Mr. Meehan said doubts had
been expressed whether the Sequoia might not make more than
one annual circle of wood a j'ear, and thus render the count by
these annual circles unsafe. He had given close attention to this
point on the ground, by measuring the height of thrifty young
trees, and estimating by the growth per year the probable age.
A tree of say thirt}', forty or fifty feet, would be seen to be about
that many years old. The diameter of the trunk would then be
taken and found to correspond with the one annual ring per year
in the sections of the larger trees, as per actual count. There
would be no question but the larger trees were over 2000 years old.

He found that when about three or four hundred years old, the
trees ceased to increase in height to any appreciable degree, the
effort of the tree being more in a lateral direction, and the nutri-
tient matter necessary to the building up of the trunk was mainly
the work of the side branches. Tiie height of one called " Haver-
ford," after our sister college, he found, by a rough triangulation,
to be about 249 feet.

September 25.
Rev. Dr. H. C. McCook, Vice-President, in the chair.

Thirty-seven persons present.

The death of Alexis T. Cope, a member, was announced.

Restoration of Limbs in Tarantula. — Rev. Dr. McCooic re-
marked that the tarantula exhibited had been kept in confinement
nearly a year, fed during winter on raw beef and in summer on
grasshoppers. In the spring it cast its skin, by a laborious

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 197

process, which was described to the Academy, in the course of
which it lost one foot and two entire legs. This summer again,
during the latter part of August, the animal moulted ; the moult
as exhibited is a perfect cast of the large spider — skin, spines,
claws, the most delicate hairs all showing, and their corresponding
originals appearing bright and clean upon the spider. The moult-
ing occurred during Dr. McCook's absence, but was just finished
when he returned. When the cast-off skin was removed it showed,
as might be supposed, the dissevered members to be lacking.
But on looking at the spider itself, it was seen that new limbs
had appeared, perfect in shape but somewhat smaller than the cor-
responding ones on the opposite side of the body. The dissevered
foot was also restored. The loss of the opportunity to see the
manner in which the legs were restored during moult was greatly
regretted ; but we have some clue from the careful and interesting
studies of Mr. Blackwall. Several spiders whose members had
been previously amputated, were killed and dissected immediately
before moulting. In one of these the leg which was reproduced
was found to have its tarsal and metatarsal joints folded in the
undetached half of the integument of the old tibia. Another like
experiment was made with an example of Tegenaina civilis. The
reproduced leg was found complete in its organization, although
an inch in length, and was curiously folded in the integument of
the old coxa, which measured only one-twenty-fourth of an inch
in length. Dr. McCook's tarantula had lost both legs close up
to the coxae, and in the moult tlie hard skin formed upon the
amputated trunks was wholly unbroken, showing that the skin
had been cast before the new leg appeared. We risk nothing in
inferring that, as in the case of Blackwall's Tegenaria, the rudi-
mentary- legs were folded up within the coxae, and appeared at
once alter the moulting, rapidly filling out in^ manner somewhat
analogous to the expansion of the wings in insects after emerging.

Messrs. Henry F. Clagliorn and Emanuele Fronani were elected
members.

October 2.
Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Twenty-eight persons present.
The death of Charles Magarge, a member, was announced.

The Synchronism of Geological Formations. — Professor Angelo
Heilprin, referring to one of tlie many vexed problems which from
time to time engross the attention of geologists and naturalists,
namely, the contemporaneity of geological formations, stated that
the order of deposit of the various formations, from the oldest to
the newest, was constant the world over, and that nowhere, except

198 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883,

where there may have been a reversal of the strata themselves,
was there evidence of a reversed i)osition. Corresponding strata,
as indicated by the contained fossils, had tlierefore been supposed
to belong to the same age, althougli occurring in widely separated
regions. This view, for a long time maintained undisturbed by
the earlier geologists %nd palaeontologists, had, however, been
dissented from by Edward Forbes, Huxley, and other advocates
of the doctrine of faunal dispersion from localized areas or centres
of distribution (opponents of independent creation), on the obvious
ground, that faunas starting from a given point of origination
could only spread by migration, and that such migration must
consume time, proportional to the distance traveled and the ph3's-
ical and phj'siographical facilities afforded for traveling. Hence
it was argued that widely separated formations showing an
equivalent faunal facies, as, for example, the Silurian of America
and the Silurian of Europe or eastern Asia, or the Cretaceous of
Europe and South America, could not be of identical age, and,
with a fair show of probability, not even appi'oxiraately so. In
support of this position it has been urged that during the present
age of the world the faunas of the several continents are widely
distinct, and could, under geological conditions, be considered as
indicating different zoological (geological) eras. In conformity
with this view, Professor Huxley had proposed (Anniversary
Address, Geol. Soc, 1862. Q. J. Geol. Soc, xviii, p. xlvi) the term
" homotaxis," indicating similarity of arrangement, in place of
sjaichrony, to describe the relations of distant areas of the same
formation.

Pushing his conclusion to what appeared to be its furthest legit-
imate point. Professor Huxley deduced therefrom two important
considerations :

I. That formations exhibiting the same faunal facies may belong
to two or more very distinct periods of the geological scale as
now recognized ;and conversely, formations whose faunal elements
are quite distinct, may be absolutely contemporaneous ; e. g. :
" For anything that geology or palaeontology is able to show to
the contrary, a Devonian fauna and flora in the British Islands
may have been contemporaneous with Silurian life in North Amer-
ica, and with a Carboniferous fauna and flora in Africa " (loc. cit.).

II. That, granting this disparity of age between closely related
faunas, all evidence as to the uniformity of physical conditions
over the surface of the earth during the same geological period
{i. e., the periods of the geological scale), as would appear to be
indicated by the similarity of the fossil remains belonging to that
period, falls to the ground. " Geogi'aphical provinces and zones
may have been as distinctl}' marked in the Palseozoic epoch as at
present, and those seemingly sudden appearances of new genera
and species, which we ascribe to new creation, ma}' be simple
results of migration."

These views, enunciated b}- Prof. Huxley, were still largely

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 199

held, Prof. Heilprin maintained, by a very large body of geolo-
gists. But it can readily be shown by a logical deduction that at
least one of the conclusions arrived at (I) is, in almost certainty,
erroneous ; and that the second, based upon this one, derives no
confirmation from the supposed facts. If, as is contended, several
distinct faunas — i. e., faunas characteristic of distinct geological
epochs — may have existed contemporaneousl}^ then evidences of
inversion in the order of deposit ought to be common, or, at any
rate, they ought to be indicated somewhere, since it can scarcely
be conceived that animals everywhere would liaA'^e observed the
same order or direction in their migrations. Given the possible
equivalency in age, as claimed, of the Silurian fauna of North
America with the Devonian of the British Isles and the Carbon-
iferous of Africa, or any similar arrangement, why has it never
happened that when migration, necessitated by alterations in
the physical conditions of the environs, commenced, a fauna with
an earlier facies has been imposed upon a later one, as the Devonian
of Great Britain upon the Carboniferous of Africa, or the Amer-
ican Silurian upon the Devonian of Britain ? Or for that matter,
the American Silurian may have just as well been made to succeed
the African Carboniferous. Why has it just so happened that a
fauna characteristic of a given period has invariably succeeded
one which, when the two are in superposition, all over the world (as
far as we are aware), indicates precedence in creation or origina-
tion, and never one that can be shown to be of later birth?
Surely these peculiar circumstances cannot be accounted for on
the doctrine of a fortuitous migration. Nor can it be claimed
that, through the interaction of the evolutionary forces, a
migrating fauna with an early -life facies will in each case at the
point of its arrest have assumed the character of the latei'-day
fauna which belongs to that position. Therefore it appears inex-
plicable that a very great period of time could have intervened
between the deposition of the fauna of one great geological epoch
at one locality, and that of the same or similar fauna at another
locality distantly removed from the first. In other words, the
migrations, for such must undoubtedly have been the means of the
distant propagation of identical or very closely related life-forms
(unless we admit the seemingly untenable hypothesis that equiva-
lent life-forms may have been veiy largely developed from inde-
pendent and very dissimilar lines of ancestry), must have been
much more rapidly performed than has generally been admitted
by naturalists. {Sic Huxlej^ : "All competent authorities will
probably assent to the proposition that phj^sical geology does not
enable us in any way to reply to this question, Were the British
Cretaceous rocks deposited at the same time as those of India,
or are they a million of years younger or a million of years
older?")

But what applies to the broader divisions of the geological
scale also applies to the minor divisions. Thus the subordinate

200 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

groups of a formation are almost as definitel}^ marked off in the
same order, the world over, as are the formations themselves.
After breaks in formations the appearance of characteristic fossils
is largely the same ; whereas, on the theory of synchronism of
distinct faunas, such a succession of forms would certainl}^ not be
constant. After deducing further evidence from the lithological
characters of the rock-masses of the various geological formations,
the speaker maintained that the views entertained on the subject
by the older geologists were more probably the correct ones,
namely : that formations characterized by the same or very
nearly related faunas in widely separated regions belonged, in
very modei'ate limits, to approximately the same actual age, and
were, to all intents and purposes, synchronous or contem-
poraneous.

Longevity of Trees. — At the meeting of the Botanical Section,
October 8, Mr. Thomas Meehan remarked that there was nothing
phenomenal in the great age of the mammoth sequoias, as other
trees on the Pacific coast exhibited great age. In order to ascer-
tain whetlier more than one annual circle of wood is formed in
each year, he tested the matter in various ways. For instance, a
pine or spruce would be found to make an average growth of a
foot a year up to fifteen j^ears old ; from that to about thirt}"^
years, nine inches ; from that on, six inches ; after that a stage
was reached where the erect growth ceased to any considerable
extent, and the growth force seemed turned toward the lateral
branches. In the pine forests of the Pacific coast, there was no
danger of error in fixing the age of the average tree of 'sixty feet
high, at about fifty years. Wherever such a tree was cut down,
and an opportunity afforded to count the circles, they would be
found to correspond so nearl}^ with the calculated age, as to
prove that it was quite safe to assume a single circle for a single
year. Then there was a remarkable degree of uniformity in the
diameter of these annual growths in most trees, so that when
once we had the number of the circular lines to an inch, and the
diameter of the tree, we could tell its age near enough for general
purposes. In some pine trees growing on ver>- rich soil, he had
found as few as about four circles to an inch. For instance, a section
of a Finns Lambertiana (in Mariposa), four feet across, had but
189 circles ; but here the increased size of the trees corresponds
with the larger annual circles. Trees of this species of pine here
were not uncommon, measuring tliirt}^ and a few thirty -three feet
around. No matter, however, how vigorous may be the growth of
trees under fifty or one hundred years, they decrease with age, and
we may safely allow six rings to an inch in these older sugar pines,
which would make the thirty-three feet tree 396 years old. The
outer growths of sequoia were ver^- narrow. He counted as many
as eighteen to the inch, while the rings in the interior of cross-
sections would show about six to the inch. Allowing twelve as

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 201

the average per annum, a tree of thirty-three feet diameter would
give 2376 years old, which is about the same as given by an actual
count of rings. At Harrisburg or Juneau, in lat. 58°, a Sitka
spruce (Abieii Sitkensis) cut down, gave 149 rings from centre to
circumference — 298 lines, in a trunk three feet across. This
gave an average of about eight to an inch in this 149 years old,
three feet tree. At Wrangel, lat. 56°30', a tree of the western
hemlock {Abies Merlensiana) which had been blown down, and
afterwards divided by a cross-cut saw at four feet from its base,
gave eighteen lines to an inch, and the annual growths seemed
ver}^ regular almost to the centre of the tree. It was six feet in
diameter, and must have been a grand old tree in its day. It had
evidently been broken off years before it was blown down, but
the length of this trunk up to where it had been broken was 132
feet, and four feet in diameter at that height. But allowing as
much as twelve to an inch, it would give for the point cut across,
six feet, an age of 432 years. At Kaigan Harbor, lat. 55°, the
Sitka spruces were very large, and of great height. He measured two
of the largest, which were twenty -one feet in circumference each.
Allowing eight to the inch, as in the tree of the same species at
Harrisburg, it gives 336 years as the age of the tree ; so far as
appearances went, these trees were in the height of vigor, and
there seemed no reason, judging from experience in other cases,
why these trees might not flourish for a hundred years yet. Mr.
Meehan had no doubt that these trees in these latitudes in Alaska,
would easily have a life of 500 3^ears.

Turning now to the Atlantic States, we find 200 years as
the full average term of life for its forest trees,- with the excep-
tion, perhaps, of the plane, Plalanits occidentalism which is the
longest lived of all. Trees famous for longevity in Europe are
comparatively short-lived here. In the old Bartram Garden,
near Philadelphia, where the trees can be little more than 150'
years old, nearly all are past their best. The English oak,.
Quercus Robur^ which in England is said to live for a thousand
years, has grown to full size and wholly died away in this garden,,
and the foreign spruces are on the down grade. The great
cypress, Taxodium distichum, which must have made an average
growth of four lines a year, has also begun to show signs of
deterioration. Silver firs, Abies pectinata^ in the vicinity of
Philadelphia, known to be planted in 1800, are decaj'ing. This is
the general experience.

In seeking for the cause of this difference, we are accustomed
to look at the relative humidity of the atmospheres of Great
Britain and the Atlantic United States. Evergreens like Cerasus
Laurocerasus^ Laurus nobilis^ and Viburnum tinus, which will
endure a temperature of 25° below freezing point in Great
Britain, are killed by 10° in Philadelphia; and it is believed
by the dryer atmosphere causing a heavier drain for moisture on
the vital powers of the plant to supply. A strain which will
14

202 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

wholly destroy plants in some instances, must have an enervating
influence where it does not wholly destroy, and this would
naturally be exhibited in shortening the life of the tree.

The climate of Alaska had the same favoring influences we
found in Great Britain. The warm sea of Japan flowed against
its southeastern face, along which the trees referred to were found.
The atmosphere was always moist, and severe weather almost
unknown. At Sitka, in lat. 51°, as much as 100 inches of rain
had fallen in a single year. The harbor was rarely frozen ; boats
came in and went out at all times of the year. There were some
winters when no ice of any consequence was seen. These were
circumstances favorable to longevity in trees.

Mr. Median concluded by remarking that Dr. Lindley had said
somewhere that his researches had failed to show that there was
any period of duration of life set for any tree, and that if circum-
stances favored there seemed no reason why trees might not live
for an indefinite period, and, therefore, arguments offered in
connection with the " wearing out of varieties," based on what is
called the " natural life of a tree," had little force. Mr, Meehan
believed his observations on the longevity of trees on the Pacific
confirmed Dr. Lindley's views. At any rale, there seemed nothing
phenomenal in the age of the Sequoia gigantea, as other species
partook of similar longevity to a great extent.

Prof. Angelo Heilprin was elected Curator, to fill the vacancy
caused by the death of Charles F. Parker.

October 9.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Thii'ty-two persons present.

The Council reported the appointment of Prof. Angelo Heilprin
as Actuary to the Curators, or Curator-in-charge.

Mineralogical Notes. — Dr. Leidy exhibited a large crystal of
topaz, from Mursinsk, Siberia. It is pale blue, with perfect
termination, and weighs three pounds three ounces. He also
exhibited large cut specimens of white topaz and rich green
beryl, which had met with a curious accident. The two, in
unpacking, had been violently struck together, and the former
had been broken through the middle so as to exhibit a perfect
cleavage.

October 16.
Mr. Thos. Meehan, Vice-President, in the chair.
Thirty-seven persons present.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 203

October 23.

Mr. Charles Morris in the chair.

Six persons present.

The deaths of Joachim Barrande, Oswald Heer and W. Kowa-
lewsky, correspondents, were announced.

October 30.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Forty-five persons present.

The following were presented for publication :

" Proceedings of the Mineralogical and Geological Section of
the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, from January
23, 1882, to November 26, 1883."

"On the Anatomy of Ancylus lacustris and Ancylus fluviatilis,"
by Dr. Benj. Sharp.

" Note on a Collection of Fossils from the Hamilton (Devo-
nian) Group, of Pike Co., Pa.," by Prof. Angelo Heilprin.

" Manayunkia speciosa," by Prof. Jos. Leidy.

"On the Evidences of Glacial Action in Northern New York
and Canada," by Jos. Willcox.

"Obituary Notice of Charles F. Parker," by Isaac C. Martindale.

The death of J. Lawrence Smith, a correspondent, was announced.
Francis A. Cunningham and S. Mason McCoUin, M. D., were
elected niembers.

Eugene A. Rau, of Bethlehem, Pa., was elected a correspondent.
The following were ordered to be published :

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

MANAYUNKIA SPECIOSA.
BY PROF. JOS. LETDY.

At the time of the discovery of the pretty polyzoan, Urnatella
gracilis^ of which a description is now in course of publication in
the Journal of the Academy, I found an equally interesting little
annelide, of which I gave a brief notice in 1858, published in the
Proceedings for that year, page 90, under the name of Mana-
yiinkia speciosa. The two were found in companj' together,
attached to the same stones, in the Schuylkill River, at Fairmount,
Philadelphia. They seem fitting associates, for while Urnatella is
nearly related with the marine Pedivellina, Manayunkia is closel}'
related with the marine annelide Fahricia. Manayunkia has
proved to be less frequent than Urnatella^ nor have I found it
elsewhere than in the localit}^ named. Recentl}^, several specimens
were submitted to my examination by our fellow-member, Mr.
Edward Potts, who found them attached to a fragment of pine-
bark, in Egg Harbor River, New Jersey. Independent of the
interest of finding the worm in a new locality, the specimens have
enabled me to complete an investigation of the animal so far as to
prepare the following description, though I have to regret that
the material has been insufficient to allow me to clear up several
impoitant points. I have had the opportunity of comparing
Manayunkia with a species of Fahricia living on our coast, and
have found the two to be so nearly alike, that I am prepared to
hear it questioned whether the former should be regarded as
generically distinct from the latter.

Manayunkia forms a tube of mud, which it occupies. The tube
is composed of the finest particles, aglutinated by a mucoid secre-
tion of the worm. It is C3'lindrieal, straight or bent, mostly even
or slightly uneven on the outside, and sometimes feebl}' annulated.
It is attached partly along its length to fixed objects, with the
greater part free, directed downward and pendant. Most speci-
mens observed were single, but several were found in which two
or three tubes were conjoined, and in one instance five tubes with
remains of others were given off, in a candelabra-like manner,
from a common stem, as represented in fig. 2, Plate IX. From
the open mouth of the tube, the worm protrudes its head and
spreads its crown of ciliated tentacles, in the same manner as in

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 205

most tubicolous annelides. The simple tubes range from two to
four lines in length by the one-fifth to the one-fourth of a line in
width.

3Ianayunkia is very sensitive, and on disturbance withdraws
deeply into its tube, so that half the length of the latter may be
removed before reaching the worm. The little creature clings
tightl}^ to the inside of its habitation, apparently mainly by
means of the minute podal hooks of the posterior segments of
the body.

The mature worm (fig. 1) is from three to four millimetres in
length by about one-fourth of a millimetre in breadth, and is
divided into twelve segments, including the head. The color is
translucent olive-green, with the cephalic tentacles of a slightly
brownish hue. As the worm shortens, the segments become more
bulging laterally and the constricti6ns deeper ; in elongation, the
segments become more cylindrical and ' the constrictions less
marked. When the worm is elongated, it is of nearly uniform
width for about three-fourths of the length, and then slightl^'^
tapers to the end, or is a little widened again in the two segments
before the last. The head is about as broad as it is long, and is
surmounted by a pair of lateral lophophores supporting the ten-
tacles. Its border above projects dorsally into a short rounded
process. The succeeding four segments of the body are about
as broad as they are long, and nearly of uniform size ; the next
one is somewhat longer than those in advance. The seventh
segment, in all the mature worms observed, greatly exceeded any
of the others. It was usually twice the length, and differed from
them in having an abrupt expansion at the fore-part, which sug-
gested the production of a head prior to division of the worm ;
a process, however, if it occurs in Manayunkia, I had not the
opportnnity of observing. The succeeding segments, smaller
than the anterior ones, differ little in size, except the last two.
The terminal segment abruptly tapers from above its middle in an
obtusely rounded extremit}^ When the worm protrudes from its
tube, the lophophores are reflected from the head, and they
exhibit a double row of tentacles extending forward. The num-
ber of tentacles varies with the age of the worm, but at maturit}?^
there are usually eighteen for each lophophore. They are of
moderate length, and of uniform extent, and measure about half
a millimetre. Two of them internally, one for each lophophore,

206 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

are rather longer and larger tlian the others, and are rendered
conspicuous b}' a large vessel filled with bright green blood.
The tentacles are invested with ciliated epithelium, with actively
moving cilia, and in all respects bear a close resemblance to those
of the polj'zoa. In the allies of Manayunkia, they are regarded
as branchial appendages, and usually named cirri ; and although
this is unquestionably correct, as in the case of the corresponding
organs of the polyzoa, thej' perform a varied function, and may,
with equal correctness, be called tentacles.

When Manayunkia is about to withdraw into its tube, the
lopliophores approach, and together with the tentacles form a
close longitudinal fascicle. Along the lophophores, at the base of
the tentacles, there is a row of half a dozen or more brownish pig-
ment spots, resembling eyes, but not having the usual constitution
of such organs. The segments of the body of Manayunkia, suc-
ceeding the head, are furnished on each side with a fascicle of
locomotive setfe, which is divided into two portions, one usually
consisting of shorter setse than the other. The fascicles, when
most protruded, project from a papilla, which disappears with the
partial retraction of the former. They are projected directly
outward or in a slanting manner either forward or backward, and
are moved in the same manner and by the same arrangement of
muscles as in other chsetopods. The number of podal setae is
from four to ten in each fascicle. In several mature individuals
the numbers in the different segments were as follows : 8 to 10
setre in the first to the sixth segment ; 6 to 1 in the tliree suc-
ceeding ones ; 4 or 5 in the tenth, and 3 or 4 in the last segment.

The sette, figs. 3, 4, of the anterior segments are longest, and
range from about 0*15 to 0*25 mm. in length. They consist of a
long, straight rod, with a linear-lanceolate blade tapering into a
long filament. The rod varies little in length in the different
seta? ; but the blade varies considerably in this respect. The
blade is more or less bent from the rod, and is longest in the
longer setoe.

Except the head and the first setigerous segments, the others
are provided on each side with a fascicle of podal hooks, which
are situated ventrally behind the bottom of the podal sette. The
hooks are 4 or 5 in each fascicle in the setigerous segments from
the second to the eighth inclusive, and are very different from
those of the succeeding segments. The podal hooks, fig. 5, of the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 20Y

anterior segments, are about 0"05 to 0'06 mm. long, and consist of
a long curved handle, ending in a small recurved hook.

The podal hooks of the posterior three setigerous segments
form close transverse, rows, fig. 6, of variable number, from 9 to
24 in each row. The hooks are minute, and measure from 0*025
0'03 mm. long. They consist of a broad handle, ending in a lateral
comb-like extremity, as represented in figure 7.

The number of podal seta and podal hooks is more or less
variable in the corresponding segments of different individuals,
and frequently also on the two sides of the segments of the same
individual. The difference is due sometimes to the accidental
loss of some of the appendages ; sometimes probably to circum-
stances interfering with their development. In several specimens
the following differences were observed :

Specimen 1.

First segment, 6 and 8 setae.

Second to fourth segment, inclusive, 8 to 10 setae and 4 to 5 hooks.

Fifth to eighth segment, inclusive, 6 to 8 setae and 4 to 5 hooks.

Ninth segment, 6 setae and 9 and 22 hooks.

Tenth segment, 4 setae and 12 and 18 hooks.

Eleventh segment, 3 and 4 setae and 12 hooks on each side.

Specimen 2.

First segment, 8 setae on each side.

Second to sixth segment, inclusive, 8 setae and 4 hooks on each

side.
Seventh and eighth segments, 6 or 7 setae and 4 hooks, except on

one side of the eighth segment, in which another fascicle of 6

setae substituted the usual fascicle of hooks.
Ninth segment, 6 setae on each side and 9 and 20 hooks.
Tenth segment, 4 and 5 setae and 13 and 16 hooks.
Eleventh segment, 3 and 4 setae and 12 hooks on each side.

Specimen 3.
First segment, 8 setae each side.
Seven succeeding segments, 6 to 10 setai and 3 to 4 hooks each

side.
Ninth segment, 7 setae and 24 hooks each side.
Tenth segment, 3 setae and 18 hooks, but on one side the latter

were all imperfect, mostly with the comb undeveloped.
Eleventh segment, 2 setae and 14 hooks each side.

208 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

In the last specimen the rows of 24 hooks in the ninth segment
measured 0-08 mm. wide; the rows of 18 hooks of the tenth seg-
ment 0-072 mm. wide ; and the i*ows of 14 hoolis of the last segment
0'06 mm. wide. The height of the rows corresponding with the
length of the hooks was 0-025 mm.

The intestinal canal of Manayunkia is of extreme simplicity,
consisting of a median tube alternately dilated within the segments
and contracted in the intervals of the latter, without any other
conspicuous division into more distinct portions. The widest
expansions are within the fourth to the seventh segment, inclusive,
but are also variable in these. Afterwards the intestine becomes
narrower to the anus, which opens ventrally in the last segment.
The mouth is funnel-like, capacious, and without armature of any
kind. Along the intermediate two-thirds of the canal the walls
are of a yellowish brown hue. Within the intestine in the seventh
segment, and within the terminal portion, active ciliary motion was
observed. The intestine, as usual in other annelides, is connected
by thin diaphragms to the wall of the body-cavit^y in the intervals
of the segments. The intervals are occupied with liquid with
multitudes of floating corpuscles.

The ovaries, with ova in ditferent stages, occupy the fourth to
the sixth segment inclusive. Within the lower part of the head,
extending thence into the third segment on each side, there is a
large elliptical organ, which I have suspected to be the testicle,
though I did not examine its structure.

I was greatly puzzled in the attempt to ascertain the arrange-
ment of the vascular system of Manayunkia^ and am in doubt as
to the following explanation I give of it. The blood is of a bright
green color, and in many positions serves clearly to define the
course of the larger vessels. As represented in figure 1, the
chief blood-vessels appear to be a large one on each side of the
intestinal canal, closely following the course of this so as to seem
to form a green coat to it. In each segment of the body the vessel
gives off a pair of lateral branches apparently uniting in a loop.
In the head the two main vessels leave the sides of the intestine,
and after forming a close flexure or a sinus at the base of each
lophophore, proceed onward through the interior of the larger pair
of tentacles. In viewing the worm in any direction, the two main
vessels so constantly appeared at the sides of the intestine, that
I at first took them for the walls of the latter itself. The condi-

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 209

tion I did not comprehend until 1 found an explanation in the
following paragraph in Claparede's Recherches sur la structure
desAnnelides Sedentaires, Geneva, 1873, page 76 : " M. de Quatre-
fages has discovered that in certain Serpuliens," to which family
Fahricia and Manayunkia belong, " the intestinal canal is enclosed
in a lacupa or rather a veritable sheath taking the place of a
dorsal vessel." Claparede adds from his own observations the
statement " that a number of the sedentary aanelides present the
same peculiarity of having the intestine included in a vascular
sheath playing the part of a dorsal vessel." In this view the two
chief vessels, in figure 1, at the sides of the intestine, are to be
regarded as sections of the vascular sheath enclosing the latter.
The principal movement observed in the vessels of 3Ianayunkia,
consisted in an incessant pumping of blood into those of the two
larger tentacles alternating with contraction and partial expulsion
of blood from the same.

The nervous system of Manayunkia I did not attempt to inves-
tigate. A well-developed eye occupied the head at the side of the
gullet. It exhibited a clear vitreous humor in a choroid cup. No
trace of eyes was to be detected in the terminal segment of the
body, sucli as exist in Fahricia.

In several instances in which I have extracted Manayunkia
from its tube, a number of 3'oung ones, about half a dozen, have
been liberated, from which it appears that the eggs are laid within
the tube, there hatched, and the young then retained under the
care of the parent until sufficiently developed to be able to care
for themselves.

Figures 8-13, PI. IX, repi-esent an ovum and a series of 3'oung
in ditferent stages of development, which were obtained together
with others in the same condition from three tubes.

Th^ ovum, fig. 8, about 0*2 mm. long, obtained with several
similar ones from a tube, exhibits a central mass of large, yoYk-
cells enclosed by a layer of smaller ones. Fig. 9 represents an
em.bi*yo, which accompanied the former. It was motionless and
devoid of cilia. The yolk-cells appear J;o have been resolved
into a stomachal cavity. The embryo was about the same size
as the ovum. Fig. 10 represents a more advanced embryo, from
the same tube. It measured 0"265 mm. in length. The intestine
indicates a division into eight segments. Fig. 11 is a more
advanced stage of development of the worm from another tube.

210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

It measured one-third of a millimetre in length. The bodj'-wall
and intestine are quite distinct, the latter exhibiting eight seg-
ments. Tiie tentacular lobes have commenced development. Fig.
12 represents an individual further developed, from the same tube
as the former. It measured half a millimetre Ipng. The body is
distinctly divided into nine segments, of which eight bear a pair
of setae on each side. The tentacular lobes exhibit each the rudi-
ments of four tentacles. Eyes also have made their appearance.
Fig. 13 represents a young worm, from another tube, the only one
accompanying its parent. It measured 0*72 mm. long. The body
is divided into the same number of segments as in the former.
The tentacular lobes have developed each four tentacles with the
rudiment of a fifth. Podal hooks could be detected in none of the
segments except the last, in which there were three comb-hooks on
each side. Another young individual observed, from another
tube, about the same size of the preceding, had five tentacles on
each side, but was otherwise exactly similar. Another individual
three-fourths of a millimetre long, with five tentacles on each side,
had one more setigerous segment than in the others.

The species of Fahricia to which I referred in the beginning of
the present communication, and which I examined with pai'ticular
interest on account of the near relationship of Manayunkia to it,
is the same as that described by Prof. Verrill, as being common
from New Haven to Vineyard Sound and at Casco Bay (see Report
on the Sea Fisheries of New England, Washington, 1873, p. 619).
I first noticed the worm at Newport, Rhode Island, in 1858, and
found it abundantly at Bass Rocks, Gloucester, Mass., in 1882.
It occurred on rocks between tides, under a luxuriant growth of
Fucus vesiculosus, With, its tubes projecting from among the mud
and sand firmly' fixed together with multitudes of little mussels
about the roots of the sea-weed.

The worm is three or four millimetres long and of a yellowish
or yellowish brown hue, with more or less reddish. The body is
compressed cylindrical and slightly tapering behind, and is
divided into twelve segments, including the head. This is pro-
longed dorsally in a half elliptical process or upper lip. The
vertex supports on each side a trifurcate lophophore, each fork
of which is provided with a double row of narrow cylindrical
tentacles invested with cilia.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 211

The segments succeeding the head are furnished with lateral
fascicles of podal setae, and, except the first oi^, are provided
with fascicles of podal hooks, all of which have the sarae general
arrangement and form as those described in llanayunkia. The
fascicles of podal seta?, from the first to the eighth segments, usu-
ally contain six or seven setie ; those of the ninth and tenth
segments, three or four setae ; and those of the eleventh segment
two or three setae. The longer setse, figs. 14, 15, resemble those
of Manayunkia, consisting of a straight rod with a feather-like
vane ending in a long point and bent at an obtuse angle from the
rod. The stouter setae, fig. 16, have the same form, but differ
in the variably much shorter proportion of the vane. The setse
range from 0'12 to 0-25 mm. long.

The first setigerous segment possesses no podal hooks, as in the
case of Manaxjunkia. The fascicles in the succeeding segments
to the fourth contain each eight or nine hooks, and those following
to the eighth, inclusive, six or seven hooks. The hooks of the
remaining three segments, as in Manayunkia^ are very different
from those of the anterior segments, and are arranged in close
transverse semicircular rows of from 20 to 28 in each row.

The anterior podal hooks consist of a curved handle ending in
a short robust hook, like those of Manayunkia, but differing in
the hook being furcate, or even divided three or four times on
the dorsum, as represented in figs. IT, 18. These podal hooks
usually measure about 0-08 mm. long.

The posterior podal hooks resemble the corresponding ones of
Manayunkia as represented in fig. 19. They measure from 0"035
to 0'04 mm. long.

The intestinal canal of Fabricia has the same simple character
as that described in Manaywikia. The mouth has a pair of palp-
like appendages, situated between the lophophores. The vascular
system appears to exhibit the same arrangement as in 3Ianayunkia,
but the blood is of a red color.

Fabricia is remarkable for being furnished with a pair of eyes
to the terminal segment of the body as well as to ihe head. The
eyes are of simple character, but equally well developed at both
extremities of the body. They consist of a black pigment cup,
including a spheroidal vitreous body. In several instances I
observed a curious variation of the eyes "in different individuals
and on the diffei'ent sides of the same individual. Fig. 20 repre-

212 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

sents the usual form of the cephalic eye. Figs. 21 and 22 represent
the two eyes ofi the same individual, the right eye apparently
double. Fig. 23 represents another double eye, but with the lens
directed backward. Fig. 24 represents a caudal eye.

The tube of Fahricia is composed of exceedingly fine particles
of quartzose sand and indefinite particles of mud.

I observed no specimens of this genus, exhibiting the repro-
ductive organs in the condition usual in mature ones of Mana-
yunkia.

In several instances I observ^ed a few free eggs and young worms
of 0'12 mm. in length within tubes in company with the parent,
but did not have the opportunity of investigating them.

Manayunkia mainly differs from Fahricia in having a pair of
simple or undivided tentacular lophophores instead of having
them trilobate ; in the possession of an inner pair of larger ten-
tacles which receive a continuation of the main trunks of the
vascular s}- stem ; and in having no eyes to the terminal segment
of the body.

EXPLANATION OF THE FIGURES OF PLATE IX.

Fig. 1. Manayunkia sPECfOsA. Magnified about 50 diameters. The

worm in the ordinaiy condition of extension, with its tentacles

spread.
Fig. 2. A stock of five tubes. Magnified about 4 diameters.
Fig. 3. One of the longer podal setse from the second setigerous segment

of tlie body. 666 diameters.
Fig. 4. One of the shorter podal setae, from the same. 666 diameters.
Fig. 5. A podal hook, from the same. 666 diameters.
Fig. 6. A row of podal hooks, from the last segment of the body. 250

diameters.
Fig. 7. A podal hook from the same row. 666 diameters.
Fig. 8-13. Egg and different degrees of development of the young of

Manayunkia. 100 diameters.
Fig." 14-16. Podal setae oi. Fahricia Leidyii, Verrill. 500 diameters.
Fig. 17, 18. Podal hooks of anterior segments. 500 diameters.
Fig. 19. Podal hook of posterior segment. 666 diameters.
Fig. 20-24. 'Eyes of Fahricia. 250 diameteis.
Fig. 20. A cephalic eye of the usual form.

Fig. 21, 22. Ri^ht and left cephalic eyes of the same individual.
Fig. 23. A double cephalic eye.
Fig. 24. A caudal eye.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 213

NOTE ON A COLLECTION OF FOSSILS FROM THE HAMILTON (DEVONIAN)
GROUP OF PIKE CO., PA.

BY PROF. ANGELO HEILPRIN.

Among a small collection of invertebrate fossils obtained from
the Hamilton rocks of the vicinit}' of Dingman's Ferry, Pike Co.,
by Drs. E. C. Hine and J. Holt of this city, and now in their
possession, I have been able to identify the following species
and genera. Most of these are probably not new to the State,
but inasmuch as the palEeontology of Pennsylvania has been but
very imperfectly (indeed, one might say, not at all) worked up,
and the fossils there occurring, although known in some part to
amateur collectors, but very S[taringly recorded, it has appeared
to the writer that the publication of the present list, as well as of
others of a similar character to follow, may not prove entirely use-
less, tending toward a more complete knowledge of the extinct
fauna of the State.

ACTINOZOA.

Heliophyllum Halli.

Mollusc A.

i^e»es/e/Za, sp. indet. Aviculopecten duplicahis? or

Crania Hamillonise. A. scabridus ?

Spirife.i- mucronatus. Limoptera macroptera.

Sjjirifer granuliferus. Paracyclas lirata.

Sijirifer medialis? Grammysia hisulcata.

Sti'eptoi'hynchus Chemimgeyisis. Orthoceras (impression).
Orthis^ sp. indet. Nautilus or Goniatites (septal

Ghonetes^ sp. setigera ? lines too imperfectly preserved

for generic determination).

Crustacea.
Phacops bufo, a complete specimen and several tail-pieces.
HomalonotuH Dekayi, several well-preserved fragments unques-
tionably' belonging to this species.

"Crinoid stems or impressions belonging to several distinct
species are common in the rock-masses. It may be noted that
Prof. I. C. White, during his survey of Pike and Monroe counties,
was unable to discover any traces of trilobites in the rocks of this
series. " Not a single specimen of a Trilohite was observed in all
this thickness of rock at the many localities where it is exposed
for observation within the district" (Second Geological Survey of
Penns3'lvania, Report of Progress, G 6, p. 112, 1881).

214 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

ON THE ANATOMY OF ANCYLUS FLUVIATILIS 0. F. Muller AND
ANCYLUS LACUSTRIS Geoffrey.

BY BENJAMIN SHARP, M. D., PH. D.

This paper first was written in German, and served as an
inaugural dissertation for the Philosophical faculty at the Uni-
versity of Wiirzburg, in Bavaria. In rewriting it I have merely
omitted a few unimportant details, and made one or two slight

changes.

Introduction.

The position of these little animals in the system of classifica-
tion was long a subject of dispute. At first they were placed by
Linnaeus ^ in the genus Patella, but in the same year (1767)
Geoff"roy^ formed an especial genus for them, which he called
Ancylus, on account of the resemblance of the shell to a Pliygean

cap (A'yX'"5oO.

The specimens of Jiuvialilis, which I had for examination, were
obtained in the Main near Wiirzburg, and in a branch of the same
near Gemiinden — the only place in which the other species could
be had was in a small pond near Aschaffenburg.

The work was carried on in the laboratory of Prof C. Semper,
at Wiirzburg, and I here take the opportunit}^ of expressing my
sincere thanks to him for his kindly advice and assistance.

Ferussac placed this genus, in 1837, among the Pulmonata, to
which order it undoubtedly belongs.

Moquin-Tandon ^ believed that Ancylus was amphibian in its
habits. I do not believe that the animal under natural and healthy
conditions ever approaches the surface of the water. He says :
" Does the animal breathe free air or that air dissolved in water?"
Ferussac * said positively that the animal was compelled to come
to the surface to breathe. L. Agassiz,^ Depuy, and others, were
of the same opinion. To prove this, Moquin-Tandon ^ made the
following experiments : —

1 Linnseus, Syst. Nat., 1767.

2 Geoffroy, Trait, somm. d. Coquil fluv. et terres., etc., Paris, 1767.

^ Moquin-Tandon, Recher. anatomico-physiol. sur I'Ancyle fluviatile
{Ancylus fluviatilis), Journal de Concbyliologie, Tome ill, 1852, p. 12-1.
* Ferussac, Diet, class, d. Hist. Nat., Tome i, 1822.
^ L. Agassiz, Act. Helvit., 1841.
^ Eeclier. anat. i^hysiol. s. I'Ancyle, etc., pp. 124-126.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 215

Many animals were placed in a vessel of water, and the following
facts were observed :

1. That not all the animals found the need of coming to the
surface to breathe, and that many stayed at the bottom of the
vessel.

2. That the need of air did not seem very strong, as they came
slowly to the surface.

3. That certain individuals remained in the upper portion of
the fluid.

4. That many went only partially out of the water.

5. That others left the water entirely', but remained in the
neighborhood of it.

These and other facts show that they breathe air and are not
water animals. Further on he sa3^s : —

1. Seven animals wei'e placed in tall champagne-glasses, which
were filled with water ; in the middle of the glass was placed a
partition, so that the animals could not come to the surface ; the
water, however, could freely circulate. The animals lived three
daj's, at which time they were taken out.

2. Three individuals were placed in 45 cu. mm. of well-water,
and these lived only eight hours.

3. Six Ancyli were placed for three days in 25, 30 and 50
cu. mm. of river-water ; all remained living and some deposited
eggs.

This last experiment seems to prove that they are not amphib-
ious.

I made essentially the same experiments with the same results,
and further found that when the Ancyli were placed in aquaria,
in which there was running water, the}' never came to the surface ;
if, however, the water was not fresh, they would invariably come
to the surface of the water. I think, therefore, that the apparent
amphibian habits are due to the fact that the water was not suffi-
ciently aerated. Probably the cause of such rapid death in the
caTse of the animals that were placed in the well-water, was the
presence in it of such a small percentage of air.

I will first take up the anatomy of both species in general, and
describe the differences between them, and then consider the
special part, which consists in : —

1. Formation of the radula.

2. Observations on the nervous system.

3. The anatomy of the excretory organ.

216 proceedings of the academy of [1883.

General Anatomy.

In the following description I will first consider the anatomy of
A. fiuviatilis as a basis, for the anatomy of this is tolerably well
known from the papers of Carl Yogt * and Moquin-Tandon.-^ The
first paper is short and incomplete, containing at the same time
many mistakes, while the latter, unfortunately, is without plates.
On A. lacustrU no paper has as yet appeared, as far as I know.

The shell of A. fluviatilis is much larger than that of A. lacus-
fris. In both species the form is that of a depressed cone and of
a dirty brown color. In A. Jiuviatilis it is said ^ that the shell is
wound to the left. I have never as yet seen a shell of A. Jiuvia-
tilis which was in the least unsymmetrical, for the apex of all the
specimens that I have examined lay in the median line, onl}'^ rolled
a little backwards.

In A. lacudris^ however, the apex of the shell is wound slightly
to the right, and this character has been considered sufficient to
place this foi-m in a separate genus, that of Acroloxus (Beck,
1831), or Vellitia (Gray, 1840), which, however, is not generally
accepted.

The opening of the shell {apertura) is oval in both species ; in
A. lacustris, howcA'cr, it is a much longer oval than in A. fluvia-
tilis.

The shell contains such a quantity of conchyolin, that if it be
thrown into an acid and left there until all the carbonate of lime
be dissolved away, the organic framework of conchyolin remains
perfect and the form unchanged.

If a piece of this be placed under the microscope a large number
of the siliceous cases of diatomes are seen. This is easily
explained : the diatomes are found in large quantities on the
objects on which the Ancyli are found, and as they are so small,
they can easily pass between the mantle and the shell and then
become covered b}^ a layer of mother-of-pearl or nacre which is
secreted by the external surface of the mantle and by which the
shell grows in thickness. This process of imbedding diatomes in
nature is similar to that effected artificially by the Chinese, when
they place their little leaden images between the mantle and the

' Bemerkungen iiber den Bau der Ancylus fluviatilis. Archiv fiir Anat.
und Physiol. (Miiller), 1841.
* Recher. anat. physiol. s. I'Ancyle, etc.
' C. Claus, Grundziige d. Zoologie, Marburg, 1880-82, and others.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 217

shells of bivalves, and allow them to become coated with mother-
of-pearl.'

The mantle. — If the shell be carefully removed from the animal,
the form of the body is found to be like that of the shell, namely,
a depressed cone, and covered with a thin white membrane, the
mantle. The base of the mantle, or that part which comes in
contact with the aperture of the shell, is thickened and separated
from the body, so that a deep groove is found running around the
foot bounded externally by the internal surface of the mantle.
The deepest point of this groove is at that point where the mantle
and foot join. From this point, or the base of the groove
(looking at the animal from below), hangs the gill, between the
foot and the mantle, on the left side in A. Jiuviatilis, and on the
right in A. lacudris. The inferior portion of the external surface
of the mantle has a deposit of black pigment ; this band of black
pigment is not present in A. lacustrin.

Organ of locomotion. — The only organ of locomotion is the
foot, which is an oval muscular disk. The shape is like that of the
aperture of the shell to which it belongs. The foot is formed of
muscular fibres which run in four different directions, and between
which the lacunae or blood-spaces are found. One system of mus-
cular fibres passes from before backward (longitudinal fibres) ;
another, perpendicular to these, passes from side to side (transverse
fibres). The other two systems are continuations of the muscle
that binds the body to the shell. These latter fibres pass perpen-
dicularly from the shell, and entering the foot, spread out fan-like
into it, so that some of the fibres are almost horizontal and
others almost perpendicular to the sole of the foot ; these may be
called lateral fibres. The animal holds itself to objects on which
it creeps, by the foot, which acts like a sucker. If the animal be
disturbed it draws the shell tightly downwards so that the soft parts
are completely covered by the shell and thus protected. The
movement of Ancylus is very slow. It never swims, as does, for
example, Limnseus^ on the surface of the water, as Gray and

^ Ad intei'estiiig account of this process may be found in F. Hague,
Ueber d. natiirliche u. kiinstliche Bilduug der Perlen; and C. Th. von
Siebold, Ueber d, Perlenbildung chinesischer Siisswasser-Muscheln, als
Zusatz z. d. vorbergcheuden Aufsatz. Zeitschr. f. wiss. Zool., Bd. viii,
1857.

15

218 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Turton ^ observed. Moquin-Tandon^ states that he had never
observed the animal creeping or swimming on the surface of the
water.

The shell of the animal is fastened to the body b}' a muscle,
which, as already said, passes perpendicularly from the shell and
enters the foot obliquely, and with which it coalesces, forming with
the foot the sides and floor of the visceral cavity respectively.
In the figure (PI. X, fig. 1) we have a cross-section of the animal
about the middle, drawn with a camera lucida, and to which I
have added the lines s, which represent a cross-section of the shell.
The letters m c represent the musculus cochlearis, which enters
the sides of the foot ; q m are the transverse fibres. The longi-
tudinal fibres are not represented, as they are transversely cut
and onl}' appear as points.

In the musculus cochlearis of the left side in A. fluviatilis and
on the right of A. lacustris a cavity is found in which the heart
is situated. The walls of this cavity form the pericardium.

The gill. — In the space between the foot and the mantle in A.
Jluviatilis on the left side is found a broad, leaf-like fold of the
integument, the gill. This fold or gill reaches down as far as the
lower border of the mantle. In the figure (PL X, fig. 1) the gill
(k) is represented on the right side of the section, although really
on the left side of the animal, and we must imagine that we are
looking at the animal from the front. The gill is one-third as
long as the whole animal and lies in the middle third of the
body. In the living animal it is of a lighter color than the sur-
rounding tissues and the surface of it is smooth. Although the
gill of ^4. lacustris is on the right side of the animal, its relative
position is the same as in A. Jluviatilis. The space between the
foot and the mantle, into which the gill hangs, ma}^ be called the
branchial chamber.

I believe that the organ which Moquin-Tandon ^ speaks of as
the lobe auriforrae is what I prefer to call the gill. It is physio-
-logicall}'^ one, as we will presentl}' see.

The whole surface of the gill is covered with ciliated epithelium,
and the interaal part is formed of cutis, consisting of loose
connective-tissue fibres which run in all directions and between

' Manual of Shells, ed. ii, 1840.

^ Recher. anat. physiol. s. I'Ancyle, etc., p.'3o.

^ Recher. anat. physiol. s. I'Ancyle, etc., p. 12.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. ♦ 219

■which the blood-spaces (lacunae) are found. A long continuous
one runs the whole length of the inferior border of the gill, and is
in connection with the mantle-vein. The nuclei of the connective-
tissue fibres are very distinct ; the rectum passes perpendicularly
through the tissues of the middle of the gill, and opens at the
anus, situated on the external surface.

Several organs open into the branchial chamber ; in the middle
of the external surface of the gill, as said, opens the anus. In
A. la custris, when the gill is on the right side the rectum iind anus
also are on that side. Close behind the base of the left tentacle in
A.Jluviatilis, is found the male genital pore or opening, and close
behind this the female ; as with the anus, these openings are on
the right side of A. lacustris ; in A. fiuviatilis, on the internal
surface of the left mantle, is found the minute opening of the
excretory organ, the kidney, which lies embedded in the tissues of
the mantle ; in A. lacustris the kidney is on the right side ; thus
we see that four organs open into the branchial chamber, the S
and 9 genital openings, the anus, and the kidney.

The alivientary canal. — The mouth, which opens on the inferior
surface of the body, is surrounded by three lips ; the two anterior
lips are placed together so that they form an inverted V (A) ; the
open part of the Y is closed by the under lip, which is the extreme
anterior end of the sole of the foot.

The mouth leads into a small tube, which passes perpendicularly
upwards, opening on the floor of the buccal mass (Plate X,fig. 2jji).
About half-wa}' between the mouth and the buccal mass is situated
the horseshoe-shaped jaw, which is placed in the anterior wall of
the tube. The jaw consists of a single membrane of conchyolin,
upon which are situated numerous little teeth or denticles.
Moquin-Tandon says, however, that '■'' Ancylus possesses three
jaws, 'disposed as those in Limnseua — ^a transverse one above, and
two vertical ones on the sides, * * * the borders of which
are formed of a series of little denticles." ^ I do not find this to
bev exactly the case, but agree with Keferstein, who saj'S : " In
Ancylus we see, instead of the simple jaw, a large number of long
pieces, which are tolerably symmetrically arranged, and encircle

' L* Ancyle possedfe trois machoires, disposees comme celles des Limnees,
uue transversale, en liaut et deux verticle, sur le cotes * » * celles des
bords formeut comme une serie de petites deuticules : Recbe. anat.
physiol. s, TAncyle, etc., p. 16.

220 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

the upper (anterior) side of the cavity of the mouth." ^ These
long pieces are the denticles.

The buccal mass, which is of a spheroidal form, lies in the head,
between the two tentacles. Immediately over the mouth is found
the opening of the oesophagus, and in the middle between these
two openings projects the tongue, which is covered by the radula.
The odontophore is in Ancylus exceptionally long, and reaches
from the buccal mass to the middle of the body. The opening of
the odontophore lies in the superior part of the buccal mass : the
first part of the odontophore itself lies sunken in a groove of the
buccal mass, so that seen from the side it appears to spring from
the posterior wall.

The diagramatic figure (PI. X, fig. 2) represents a longitudinal
section of the odontophore (od), which opens into the spheroidal
buccal mass. In the figure the odontophore is relatively much
shorter than it is in reality.

After the odontophore leaves the buccal mass it passes back-
wards, lying directly under the oesophagus and parallel with it ;
then it passes in A. Jtiiviatilis to the right, and in A. lacustris to
the left side. The oesophagus and odontophore are at the position
of insertion in the buccal mass, separated from one another by
the commissure of the buccal ganglia. Soon after leaving this
commissure the odontophore passes to the side and then upwards
and over the oesophagus, so that in the latter part of its course it
lies above it.

The alimentary canal has in both species nearly the same form,
except that the windings are different. The esophagus arises in
the middle of the superior and anterior angle of the buccal mass,
directl}' over the position where the mouth enters from below (PI.
X, fig. 2oe).

The salivary glands cpen by a very short duct into the oesoph-
agus, immediately behind the position of its exit from the buccal
mass. These glands are two in number, and lie on the side of the
oesophagus.

The stomach is of a good size and spheroidal in form, the walls
are thick and muscular. It is embedded in the liver, which lies

^ Bel Ancylus sehen wir an die Stelle der einfachen Kiefeis ein grosse
Menge kleiner langlicher Stiicke treten, welche ziemlich symmetrisch
angeoidnet, die Oberseite der Muudhohle umgiirten. Bronn's Klass. u.
Ord. d. Thieneichs, Bd. ill, 2 Abth., 1862-1866, p. 1190.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 221

beneath, behind and, in A. Jluviatilis, on the right side; the left
side being covered by the albuminous gland. In A. lacustris the
relation is only reversed, so that the liver lies on the left side of
the stomach and the albuminous gland on the right.

The intestine passes from the stomach at about the middle of
its superior wall and then passes into the liver, forming a loop,
which is clearly visible when the shell is removed in A.Jlaviatilis,
but difficult to be seen in A. lacustris. After a few turns it passes
to the left side of A.Jiumatilis and to the right in A. lucustris^
and proceeds downwards, entering the gill and opening on the
external surface of the same.

I will here call attention to a peculiar ring of long cylindrical
epithelial cells which lies in the walls of the rectum in A.fluviatilis.
It is in the middle of that part of the rec turn which lies in the gill.
These cells are ciliated, as are indeed the epithelial cells of the
whole intestine.

The physiological significance of the cells forming the ring I
have in no way been able to determine.

In both species the liver is large and fills up the greater part of
the bod3'-cavity. It consists of a number of follicles ; each follicle
is formed of an external tunica propria and an internal layer of
large cells. These cells secrete the bile, which is led into the
intestine, close behind its exit from the stomach, by means of
three ciliated ducts.

The vascular system. — As the vascular system of Ancylus
differs so little from that of moUusca in general, it is not neces-
sary to go into details. The heart, which is an arterial one, is
formed of two parts, an auricle and a ventricle. In A. Jluviatilis
it lies on tiie left side of the body above the gill and in advance
of thei rectum. The auricle, the smaller of the two parts, is
divided from the ventricle by a contraction, and at this point a
valve is found opening into the ventricle. From the end of the
ventricle arises the aorta, which soon divides into two branches ;
one of these passes to the head {Arteria cephalica) and the other
supplies the viscera. These two branches divide into siTialler ones,
and finally open into the body-cavity, where they pour out their
blood. The blood, which can freely circulate in this cavity, is
collected into the lacunae of the foot which open in the floor of
the body-cavity. One of these lacunae, which can almost receive
the name of vein, passes from the foot into the mantle and becomes

222 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

connected with another large lacuna, the mantle-vein, which lies
above the tubular part of the kidne}'. It then sends a branch
downwards into the gill, and after passing through this, again
becomes joined to the mantle-vein, so tliat both pass into the
auricle together.

The heart lies in a closed sack, the pericardium, on the external
walls of which it is fastened (PI. X, fig. 3 Ht). The external wall
of the pericardium is onl}^ separated from the shell by the mantle,
while the other parts lie in contact with the musculus cochlearis.
The wall of the pericardium consists of a tunica of connective
tissue, in which, here and there, the nuclei can be distinctly seen.
The lobe auriforme of Moquin-Tandon ^ is intimately connected
with the vascular system, and seems to aerate the blood, and
physiologically is a gill.

The generative organs. — Ancylns, as is well-known, is her-
maphroditic. The hermaphroditic gland or ovitestis, in which
sperma as well as ova are formed, lies in the superior and posterior
part of t!ie body, immediatelj^ below the apex of the shell. In
A. fluviatilis it lies in the median line, while in A. lacustris, where
the apex of the shell is wound to the right, the ovitestis also is
on the right side of the median.

When the shell is removed from the animal, the ovitestis is
easily seen by its having a much lighter color than the sur-
rounding parts.

The larger part of the genitals in A. fluviatilis is on the left
side of the body, and in A. lacustris on the right side. Stephanoff ^
believes that albumen is secreted by the epithelial cells of the ovi-
testis. I cannot indorse this belief, as I never observed albumen
in the ovitestis, and, further, there is a well-developed albumen-
secreting gland present which opens into the oviduct. This
albuminous gland has been described by C. Yogt ^ and Moquin-
Tandon.^

I do not consider it necessary to enter into a detailed account
of the genitals, as they have been completely described by

' Recher. anat. physiol. s. I'Ancyle, etc., p. 13.

''■ Ueber d. Geschlechtsorgane u. Entwickl. v. Ancylus fluviatilis. Mem.
de r Acad. d. Science d. St. Petersbourg, Tome X, No. 8, 1866, p. 2.
•' Bemerk. \\. d. Ban d. Ancylus fluv., etc.
* Recher. anat. physiol. s. I'Ancyle, etc., p. 540.

1883,] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 223

Moquin-Tandon ^ ; suffice to say that Stephanoff,^ in his descrip-
tion of these organs, made many blunders, and at the same time
did not seem to have known of the existence of Moquin-Tandon 's
work.

I. — The Formation of the Radula.

The radula is formed in the odontophore. This consists of four
parts, which can be best understood by a reference to the figures.
Fig. 4 a (PI. X) represents a horizontal section through the
posterior portion of the odontophore. Fig. 4 b (PL X) is a trans-
verse section of the same. Botli figures serve to illustrate the
four parts making up the odontophore.

First, we have to distinguish the tongue-papilla (PI. X, fig.
4 ac), which fills up the interior of the odontophore; this is
surrounded, as is seen in the drawing, by the radula (r). Ex-
ternal to the radula is the epithelium of the radula. If we make
a transverse section through the odontophore (fig. 4&), we find
that the radula (r) has the form of the letter TJ, and consequently
does not entirely surround the papilla, while the epithelium of
the radula (s) encircles its external surface. At the open part of
the letter TJ, where the radula is wanting, the epithelium passes
gradually into the papilla.

The line x in the transverse section (fig. 4 &, PI. X) represents
the position of the horizontal section (fig. 4 a).

The only part not mentioned now is the fourth and most impor-
tant of all. I propose to describe it in Helix aperta^ as the parts
in this form jfre larger and more distinct than in Ancylus.

Fig. 5 (PI. X) represents the posterior part of the odontophore,
drawn by a camera lucida. It represents that part of the odon-
tophore which is enclosed by the bracket (a) in fig. 4 a.

In ,the drawing we see at that point where the tongue-papilla
coalesces with the epithelium of tbe radula, five large, sharply
defined cells (1, S, 3^ 4 and o), which I propose calling the matrix
of the radula — thus differing from other writers on the subject,
who have not seen these cells, and who call the matrix that part
to which I have given the name of tongue-papilla.

Before I pass to the formation of the radula I will first take up
the histology of the separate parts of the odontophore in Helix
aperta.

^ Reclier. anat. physiol. s. I'Ancyle, etc., p. 337.
^ U. d. Gesclilectsorg. u. d. Entwick. von Anc, etc.

224 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

As has already been described by Semper/ the tongue-papilla
consists of two layers. The internal layer is formed of loose
connective tissue, the fibres of which run in every direction, and
in which can be distinctly seen the large fusiform nuclei; most of
these nuclei are bipolar, although here and there a cripolar one
can be seen.

The external layer of the tongue-papilla is made up of cells
which possess a large nucleus, and the cell-wall, if seen at all,
is very faintly evident ; this la3'er seems more to be a homo-
geneous mass of protoplasm, in which are embedded large numbers
of nuclei ; here and there fine lines may be seen, which may be
regarded as the cell-walls (PI. X, fig. 5 m). This layer comes in
close contact with the radula and its teeth. The axes-of these oval
nuclei seem to have a definite direction. In the posterior part
they are all directed to the point where the radula begins, while
those further forward become perpendicular to the radula itself.

When the object is well stained the difference between these
two parts of the tongue-papilla is distinctly seen ; the loose
internal part being of a light color, while the external part, rich
in nuclei, takes a very dark shade.

In Ancylus the demarkation between these two parts is not so
pronounced as in Helix. The peripheral part of the tongue-papilla,
rich in nuclei, passes gradually into the loose, pale, internal part
(PL X, fig. 5 a).

The epithelium of the radula, s (PI. X, fig. 5), is composed of a
single layer of long cylindrical epithelial cells, with well-defined
nuclei and distinct cell-walls. These cells are much longer at the
posterior part of this la3'^er, i. e., at the point where they lie in
contact with the matrix of tlie radula, than those nearer the mouth.
The larger cells rest obliquely on the tunica and parallel to the
large cells of the matrix ; as they become shorter they become
more and more perpendicular, as is seen in the figure (PL X,fig. 5 s).
The nuclei are small, although with a high power they can bedis-
tinctlj^ seen. When thus examined they have the same general
appearance of nuclei, and are placed in that part of the cell
nearest to the tunica.

Between these long cylindrical cells of the epithelium of the
radula and the posterior part of the odontophore are seen five

1 Zuni feineru Bau der MoUusken-Zunge. Zeitschr. f. wiss. ZooL, Bd.
ix, 1858.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 225

very large cylindrical cells (PI. X, fig. 5, i, ^, <5, 4 and 5), to
which I have given the name of matrix. When a horizontal
section is examined these cells are very striking and easily dis-
tinguished b}'^ their having a much lighter color than the sur-
rounding parts ; each one of these five cells has a peculiar and
characteristic form. The cell marked 1 stands obliquely to the
tunica, and that end farthest from the tunica is rounded or dome-
shaped ; all the other of these five cells, with the exception of 4i
are pointed at the corresponding extremity, and also placed
obliquely' to the tunica. In 4 tliis condition is reversed, the
pointed extremity being nearest to, but not touching, the tunica.
The blunt end of this cell is in contact with the radula, and the
point is inserted between cells 3 and 5.

The protoplasm of these five cells of the matrix is quite clear,
taking only a slight reddish tinge with borax (Grenadier's) car-
mine. There is not the slightest trace of a granulated structure
to be found. The nuclei of these cells are very large and oval in
form; their size is about twice that of the nuclei that are found
in the neighboring tongue-papilla (PI. X, fig. 5 m). The structure
of these nuclei diff"ers somewhat among themselves ; some contain
only one nucleolus, in others it is more or less broken up, and
others still have a granular appearance.

The cells 1, 2 and 8 form the basal membrane (PI. X, B. 31.)
and cell 4 the bases of the teeth. The convex end of cell 1
secretes a mass of conchyolin, which is the beginning of the basal
membrane. The posterior part of this membrane, narael}^ that
part which lies against cell 1 in the figure (fig. 5), has the appear-
ance of a hook, the point of which lies between cells 1 and 5, just
overlapping the tip of the point of 3. These three cells are those
which take part in the formation of the basal membrane of the
radula, the cell 3 forming the upper, and cell 1 the lower face of
this so-called hook, and cell 2 probably adds a little to the point.
This hook-like appearance is only present in longitudinal sections.
In%reality, naturally, this part of the basal membrane is not a
hook, but a sharp edge, which is curled over and fits into a groove
formed by two rows of cells ; cells like cell 1 (fig. 5) forming the
anterior, and cells like cell 2 forming the posterior wall.

The formation of the teeth is cari'ied on by the cell marked 4-
This is triaiigular in shape with the base abutting the posterior
face of the tooth, d (PI. X, fig. 5). I believe that this cell 4- is

226 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

formed b}^ division from cell 5, and dies when the tooth is fully
formed, and the remains of this cell are carried forward between
the teeth as the radula advances. This can be the only way, for
if the cell remained living and continued to secrete conchyolin
instead of a series of teeth, we would have simply a solid layer
formed on the top of the basal membrane. By a continuous
secretion of the cells 1 and 5, the basal membrane moves or is
pushed forward, and thus carries the tooth {d) along with it ; after
this has proceeded for a short distance (viz., the distance of the
space between the teeth), a new cell, which has been formed from
cell 5, is ready to commence secreting again, and a new tooth or
transverse row of teeth begins to form, and thus the process con-
tinues.

The caps of the teeth are shaded darkly in the figure (PI. X,
fig. 5), and are formed after the base of this is completed
by cell Jf. The caps are formed by the cells that make up the
external layer of the tongue-papilla. If the preparation has been
colored with picro- or borax-carmine the basal membrane and
bases of the teeth do not color, or only take a slight tinge, while
the caps of the teeth are colored darkly. This shows, I should
think, that the basal membrane with the bases of the teeth and
the caps are of two different formations.

The covering of the odontophore, which may be called the
sheath, consists of two layers. The internal, c' (PI. X, fig. 5),
which is made up of a simple laj^er of connective-tissue cells,
passes directly into the internal or loose part of the tongue-
papilla (e), and it seems that this la3'er is merely a continuation
of this part of the papilla. The external layer of the sheath,
which covers the whole of the odontophore and is continuous
with that which covers the buccal mass, consists of a more com-
pact layer of connective-tissue fibres, in which, as in the internal
layer, distinct nuclei may be seen.

In the odontophore the teeth of the radula are directed back-
ward. The radula passes from the posterior part of the odonto-
phore and extends to the opening in the buccal mass, over the
tongue, where it makes a bend and returns on the under surface of
the tongue ; the teeth are placed reverse to those on the upper
surface, which are directed backwards, while those on the under
surface are directed forwards. In fig. 2 (PI. X), I have given a
diagramatical longitudinal section of the buccal mass and the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 227

odontophore, in order to show the direction of the teeth on the
radula (r). Tiie arrow (c) in the same diagram shows the direction
in which the radula moves wlien the animal is rasping the food.

As regards the disappearance of the worn-out and useless teeth,
Semper says : " There are only two ways possible, since the view
that each tooth continually grows is not to be considered at all.
Once we thought, as did Troschel, Claparede and others, that the
radula gradually moved forward, and that the forward teeth that
were worn out were thus gradually replaced ; or there must be a
periodical shedding of the radula. This latter view seems to me
the most natural."^

Above it was shown that "the epithelium of the radula had no
connection whatever with the formation of the radula. On the
other hand it was observed that the radula as well as the teeth, a,
b, c, d, etc. (PL X, fig. 5), with the exception of the caps, grew
from behind, that is, from the cells of the matrix 1-5 (PL X,
fig. 5).

From this we see that the radula grows at the posterior end of
the odontophore and must gradually be shoved forward, and that
the teeth that are used up at the mouth are gradually being replaced
from beliind. The view of a renewal of the radula by a periodical
shedding, as Semper thought most probable, is consequently
excluded. In many sagittal sections it is easy to see the anterior
part of the radula breaking awa^^ at the point, a; (PL X, fig. 2).
At this point separate teeth and parts of the radula could be seen,
and they would have been cast out at the mouth.

Trinchese ^ gives in his paper on Spurilla Neapulitana a short
notice on the development of the radula in this species. He
speaks of from five to seven cells which go to form the teeth, and
also the cells forming the layer which I have called the epithe-

1 "Hier sind nur zsveiFallo moglich, da die Annahme, dass jeder Zabn
fortwiihrend wachse, nicht welter zvi beriicksichtigen ist. Einmal konnte
man nun annehmen, dass, wie es audi Troschel, Claparede u. A. thun,
die Reibniembran alhiiiihlig vorriicke uiid dadurcb sowolil die vordern
untauglicheu Zabne ersetzt wiirden, als audi eine Grosseuzunahrae der
Zaline ermoglicht sei, oder man miisste eine von Zeit zu Zeit stattfindende
Hautung annehmen ; die letzten Annahme sdieint mir die natiirlichste."
Zum fein. Bau d. Molluskenzunge, jj. 277.

* Anat. e fisiol. della Spurilla Neapolitana. Estrat. d. Serie III, Tomo
IX, d. Mem. dell' Acad, delle Scienze dell' Institute di Bologna, 2 Febbriao
1878.

228 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

liiim of the raclula. These cells do not form the basal membrane
directly. It is formed from the many-layered epithelium of the
radula. It is not formed, as one would sujipose, by a cuticular
secretion of the cells, but at the cost of the cells themselves. The
upper layers of the epithelium of the radula coalesce, and thus
form the basal membrane. In this manner the epithelium gradu-
ally decreases in thickness as it passes forward. Trinchese sa^^s,
regarding the formation of the radula, that : "The superior part
of the body of each shell is divided into many small rods, which
are very small at first and which gradually lengthen as they pro-
ceed downwards. These small rods a;-e the denticles. The inferior
part of the cell, which takes no part in the formation of the tooth,
forms with the similar part of the neighboring cell, the tooth-mass
or the true body of the tooth. Final I3' the boundary l)etween the
different cells disappears. The nuclei of the tooth-forming cells
which remain under the tooth undergo division and give origin to
a very compact layer of nuclei, which become more and more
pointed as the tooth is shoved forward, are gradually formed
in the matrix. When the teeth are so far protruded from the
sheath (odontophore), the inferior part of the tooth forms, by
means of the la3-er of nuclei, a very resisting cuticle. This cuticle
thickens as the tooth advances, while the nuclei or cell-layer
gradually diminish in thickness." ^

The little rods that he speaks of are not to be found in Helix
ajje^ia. As the form of the tongue and the radula is as different
in Helix, and further as the tongue-papilla, in the true sense of

1 "La parte superiore del corpo di ogni cellula, si divide in tauti ])iccoli
bastoncelli, i quail, molto costi in principio, si allungano man mano manzan-
dosi verso il nucleo 11 quali viene spinto In basso : questi bastoncelli sono
i dentinl. La porzlone Inferiore della cellula die non piende parti alia
fonnazione dei dentin!, concorre coUa porzlone omologa delie cellule vicine
a fonnare il corpo del dente. In fine il limito delie diverse cellule scom-
parisce ed il dente e cosi fonnato. I nuclei delie cellule udontogene
rimasti sotto 11 dente, si segmentano e danno origine ad uno stratodi nuclei
molto spesso, il quale si va assottigliando a secanda die ildente vicne spinlo
in avanti dagli altii clii si tbrmans via via uella matrice. Quando i denti
sono per uscire dalla guaina, in comincia a formarsi sotte di ossi, per
1' attuita dello strato nucleaie, una cuticola molto resistente, la quale li
fissasolidameute sul margiue della rotella. Questa cuticola, a seconda che
11 dente si spinge in avanti, divene sempre piu spessa, nientie lo strato
sottostante si assottiijlia e si esaurice.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 229

the term, is wanting in Spurilla^ it is hardly to be supposed that
the formation of the radula is exactl}- the same.

The cells of the matrix lie, in his figure (Tab. YITI, fig. 2&),
behind one another, and only the most anterior one comes in
contact with the tooth and takes part in its formation. As is
easily seen, these relations are very different from the state of
afiairs in Helix.

Riicker,' who docs not seem to have known of the paper by
Trinchese, calls these teeth the ontoginous teeth. He shows five
cells to be present, but not arranged in Helix pomatia as I have
found to be the case with H. aperta. His cell a takes the place
of my 4 and 5. Over his cell d is fornaed the future tooth. Then
"the part of the cell that lies on cell d, the future hook, is raised
from its bed, and the tooth passes through the arc of a quadrant
in order to assume the normal position." ^

How or by what means the tooth is raised he does not say. I
believe, however, that, as I have shown, the death of cell ^ (PL
X, fig. .5), after the tooth is formed, is a much more plausible
explanation.

II. — Observations on the Nervous System.

The nervous system of Ancylus flamatilis was first described
by C. V'ogt, in 1841, while that of ^4. lacuftris, as far as I know,
has never yet been especially described. It is, however, formed
on the same plan as that of the former species ; the difference in
the two being merely one of position. Vogt described the oesoph-
ageal ring in the following manner : The oesophageal ring con-
sists of two superior, two lateral, and one inferior ganglia.^ This
description is not correct. The part was better described by
Moquiu-Tandon^ in the j'ear 1852.

Moquin-Tandon * found that the 03Sophageal ring consisted of
seven ganglia : two superior, which he called the cerebral ganglia

1 Ueber die Bildung der Radula bet Helix pomatia. Besond. Abdruck
au^d. xxii. Bericht d. Oberli. Ges. f. Natur- und Heilkuiide, 1883.

^ Dann "hebt sich der Zelle d aufliegende Theil der Zahner, der
zukiinftige Haken desselben von seiner Uuterlage ab, der Zahn beginnt
eine vierteldielung, um allmablig aus der iibergekippten in die uomaler
Stelliing iiberzugeheu." Ueb. d. Bildung d. Kadula, etc., p. 217.

^ "Der bchlundring besteht aus zwei obern, zwei seitliolien und einem
unteni Knoten." Benieik. u. d. Bau d. Ancjlus, etc., j). 29.

* Recher. auat. physiol. s. TAncyle, etc., p. 129, et seq.

230 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

(g. cerebroides), and five inferior (g. sous-oesophagiens). Of these
latter, two lie laterally {g. superieurs), and two lie below the
oesophagus (g. antero-inferieurs.) The fifth is an odd one, and is
placed between the lateral and the inferior ganglion of the left
side, and was called the supplementary ganglion {g. supplemen-
taire).

The lateral ganglia are now generally known as the pleural or
visceral ganglia, and the inferior the pedal ganglia. In A. lacus-
tris the supplementary ganglion lies between the visceral and
pedal ganglion of the right side. The reason of this difference of
position of the supplementary ganglion is probably that in A.
fiuviatilia the genitals, wliich are in part supplied by tliis gan-
glion, lie on the left side; while in the other form, where the
genitals are on the right side, tlie supplementary ganglion is also
on that side.

J'urther, Moquin-Tandon ' speaks of two small ganglia, which
are joined hj connectives'^ v^'ith. the cerebral ganglia, and which
he calls the buccal ganglia.

According to Moquin-Tandon, then, the nervous system of
Ancylus consists of nine ganglia. Tliere exist, however, other
ganglia, which Moquin-Tandon did not find. Two of these lie in
the tissue of the left mantle of A. fluviatilis and in the right of
A. lacustris. The other two form a pair, and lie in the cephalic
portion, at the base of the tentacles, near the position of the eyes.

First we will consider the two ganglia that are situated in the
substance of the mantle. They lie in the upper pai't of the same
between one of the windings of the kidney and the musculus
cochlearis. These two ganglia are best seen in a horizontal section.
They are very small, so that it would be hardly possible to
demonstrate their existence by dissection. They are connected
by a bundle of nerve-fibres ; besides this, there comes a bundle of
nerve-fibres from the body to the posterior of these two ganglia.
Although I was unable to demonstrate the connection of this

^ liecher. anat. physiol. s. I'Aucyle, etc., p. 129, et seq.

' I use the expression ^^ connective,^ ^ employed by Lacaze-Duthiers (Du
Systeme Nerveux d. Mollus. gastrop. pulmon. aquat. etc. Archiv. d.
Zoologie Exp. et Gen., Tome 1, 1B72), for those bundles of nerve-fibres
which join ganglia of the same side, in opposition to the term '^ commis-
sure,^^ which isouly emjiloyed to denote tliose nerve-flbres that join ganglia
of opposite sides.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 231

posterior ganglion with the oesophageal ring, I have no doubt of
the existence of such a connection.

We will first consider the anterior and largest of these two
ganglia. From the form, position and structure I conclude that
this is the so-called ganglion olfactoriura. The existence of this
ganglion was first pointed out by Lacaze-Duthiers ^ in the Pulmo-
nata, but he did not suspect it to be the organ of smell. He sup-
posed it to be the ganglion that provided for respiration, and at
the same time regulated the large quantity of mucus which is
secreted in the region of the respiratory orifice, the moment the
animal is irritated at this point. Spengel,^ in his researches on
this organ in the Prosobranchia, believed it to be the seat of smell,
and gave it the name of the ganglion olfactorium.

In Ancylus this ganglion lies on that side of the mantle which
forms the external wall of the branchial chamber, and almost at
the highest point of the chamber, namely, where the gill and
mantle join.

The ganglion consists of cells with larger nuclei which are so
large that they almost fill out the whole cell. ThesrC nuclei take
a dark color when stained in picro-carmine, and are filled with a
large number of fine granules. No nucleolus was to be seen. The
whole ganglion is enveloped in a fine tunica, made up of connec-
tive tissue, which is continuous with the tunica that covers the
bundle of nerve-fibres connecting the two ganglia.

The form of this ganglion olfactorium is in general spherical. At
that point where it comes in contact with the internal surface of
the mantle we find an invagination (PI. X, fig. 6 itif.)i so that
the whole ganglion has a cup-like form. This invagination I call
the infundibulum, because it has the form of a funnel. The
walls of the infundibulum are lined with cylindrical, cilated
epithelium, which seems to be identical to that which covers the
inner surface of the mantle, save that the cells and cilia of the
infundibulum seem to be a little longer than those of the mantle.

^The cells stand perpendicular to the internal surface of the
infundibulum, and are separated from the cells of the ganglia by
an almost imperceptible tunica of very fine connective tissue. I
was unable to determine positively- whether there was direct nervous

1 Du Syst. New d. Moll, gast., etc.

'■' Die Geruchsorgane iind das Nervensystem der Mollusken. Zeitschr.
f. wiss. Zoologie, Bd. xxxv, 1881. .

232 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

connection "between the cells of the infundibulum and the ganglion
cells, although one undoubtedly exists.

The nerve which connects tliese two ganglia consists of parallel
fibres which are connected with the poles of the ganglion cells. It
takes little or no color with picro-earmine, and is quite pale when
compared with the surrounding tissues.

The posterior and smaller of these two ganglia I am inclined to
believe is the supra-intestinal ganglion, which, according to
Spengel,^ lies in connection with the ganglion olfactorium. It is
about one-half the size of this latter ganglion, and lies in the
same plane with it, so that a horizontal section through one takes
in the other. On one side it lies in contact with the anterior wall
of the pericardium ; on tiie other it touches the internal portion of
the same part of the kidney which touches the internal portion of
the gnnglion olfactorium.

This ganglion receives a branch from the body, which is the one
probably connecting it with the a?sophageal ring. It sends also a
branch posteriori^'.

The form and structure of this ganglion are similar to that of
the ganglion olfactorium, save that there is no funnel-like invagina-
tion. This ganglion has all the points that characterize the supra-
intestinal ganglion : first, a branch which connects it with the
pleural or visceral ganglion ; secondly, a branch that connects it
with the abdominal ganglion, and thirdly, a connection with the
ganglion olfactorium.

The tentacular ganglia. — Besides the ganglia already described
as belonging to the central nervous system, together with the
ganglion olfactorium, there is a pair of ganglia which do not
belong to the central nervous system proper, and may be con-
sidered as belpnging to the peripheral nervous system. These
ganglia have already been pointed out by P. B. iSarasin,^ as
existing in the fresh-water Pulmonata. Sarasin agrees with
Lacaze-Duthiers,^ that this pair of ganglia are homologous to
those found in the end of the tentacles of Helix. They are situ-
ated behind the position of the eye, and in close contact with the

* D. Gcruchsorg. u. d. Nervensyst. d. Moll., etc.

* Drei Sinnesorgaue und die Fussdiiise eiiiiger Gastmpoden. Arbeit
aus dem Zool. Zootoin. Instit. zu Wiirzburg, Bd. vi, 1883.

^ Die Syst. Nerv. d. Moll, gast., etc.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 233

epidermis. When the eyes are retracted (for they can be retracted
in these animals) they lie close to this pair of ganglia.

In A. Jluviatilis the eyes and ganglia nre seen in the same trans-
verse sections (PI. X, fig. 8). This is not the case in A. lacustris,
as the ganglia lie a little posterior to the retracted eyes. Each
ganglion of this pair lies at the base of a tentacle, and each is ovoid
in shape, the longer axis being ante ro- posteriorly situated. They
are covered with a fine tunica of connective tissue. The nerve
that snpplies them comes from the cerebral ganglia and enters this
ganglion on its inner surface. The nerve-cells which make up the
ganglia are in ever}' respect similar to those already described for
other ganglia.

The tissue of the ganglia is pierced by a bundle of muscular
fibres (PI. X, fig. 7 rw), which comes from the buccal mass,
pierces each ganglion and is inserted in that part of the epidermis
which is covered by the ganglion. This muscle was not observed
by Sarasin.i When this muscle contracts, the epidermis, together
with the ganglion, is drawn inward.

The figures T and 8 (PI. X) represent two transverse sections
through the ganglion of the left side of J. Jiuxnatilis. In fig. 1
we see this most anterior of tlie two sections representing the
retractor muscle. Fig. 8 shows the relation of the ganglion to
the eye. In these two sections we see that the ganglion has a
deep groove on its external surface, so that in fig. 7 we have a
figure somewhat resembling that of the ganglion olfactorium (PI.
X, fig. 6 Go).

This groove, /* (PI. X, fig. 7), is caused by the contraction of
the retractor muscle. This groove was always present in sections.

In the figui'e 7, the nerve (n) which comes from the cerebral
ganglion is seen entering the ganglion in question. At that point
where the ganglion comes in contact with the cells of the epider-
mis (p)', they seem to be somewhat longer than those surrounding
this part. When the surface of this part is viewed from the exterior
a pale patch is seen, which is made up of these lengthened epi-
dermal cells. The external surface of these cells is covered with
cilia which are a trifle longer than those found on the adjoining
epithelium. Sarasin^ considers this pair of ganglia as a special
organ of sense ; I am inclined to believe that we have here an

^ Drei Sinnesorgane, etc.

^ Ueber drei Sinnesorgane, etc.

16

234 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

organ similar to the side line, or side organ, that has been found
in the annelides by Eisig' and Meyer.- The ganglion olfaetorium
may be one of a pair which would represent anothet segment, the
mate of which has been lost by the disturbance of the bilateral
symmetry. This so-called ganglion olfaetorium is paired in the
lowest Gastropoda, as Patella^ Haliotis, etc., when the bilateral sym-
metry is not as disturbed as in tlie higher forms of Gastropoda.

The 07'gan of touch, — Moqun-Tandon makes the following
observation : '■'•Ancylus does not possess an especial organ of touch.
The foot, which is large, flexible and capable of being exactly
applied to solid bodies, and embraces them in part, it is true,
receives and transmits tr^ct le impressions, but the animal rarely
uses it for this pui"pose.

" Blainville has proved that the tentacles of the Gastropoda
never serve as organs of touch, in spite of their sensibility; he
has merely confirmed the opinion of many earlier naturalists.

" This is not the case with the anterior part of the head, with
which the mollusk at times touches different bodies with the
appearance of smelling them. I have seen two individuals, which
were about to copulate, which had the air of feeling and caressing
themselves with the mouth.^ "

Moquin-Tandon was wrong when he said that no especial organ
of touch was present in Ancylus, for I have found one without
any difficulty. It is probable that Moquin-Tandon was unable to
find it, as he did not make any sections of the animal. As would be
supposed from the citation, the organ lies in the anterior part of

1 Die Seitenorgare und becherformige Organe der Capitelliden. Mit-
theil. a. d. Zool. Stat, zu Neapel, Bd. i, 1879.

' Zur Anatomie und Histologie von Polyopthalmus pictus. Clap., Archiv
f. Microscop. Anat., Bd. xxi, 1882.

3 "L'Ancyle iie possede pas d'organe special pour le toucJier active. Son
pied, qui est large, souple et susceptible de s'appliques exactement contra
les corps solids, meme de les embrasser en partie peut, il est vrai, recevoir
et transmettre de impressions tructiles mais I'animal I'emploie rarement a
cet usage.

" Blainville a prouve que les tentacles des gastrop tdes ne servaient jamais
a I'exploration du tact, malgre leur sensibilite ; il n'a fait que contirmer
1 opinion de plusieurs anciens natiiralistes. 11 n'est pas de meme du
chaperon et du moufle, avec lesqnel le MoUusque touche quelqnefois les
divers corps et semble les ttaiver j'ai on doux individus di.spose a
s'acconpler. qui avaient I'air de se pali>er et de se carresser avec la bouche."
— Reclier. anat. pliysiol, s. I'Ancyle, etc , p. 131.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 235

the upper lip, exactly in that part which, according to Moquin-
Tandon, was used for feeling.

The position and presence of this organ can best be demon-
strated in longitudinal sections of A. lacustris (PI. X, tig. 9), as
in this species it is better developed than in A. Jiuviatilis.

This organ is made up of a certain number of specialized
epithelial cells, which are connected with the cerebral ganglion by
fine nerves ; there are two organs which make a pair, and form a
patch on each side of the median line of the upper lip, and each
is connected with the cerebral ganglion of its own side.

The cells which make up this organ differ principally from the
surrounding epidermal cells in their great size (PI. X, fig. 9 6-c\
These specialized cells are not all of the same size, those in the
centre of the patch being the longer; and as we approach the
periphery, they grow smaller and smaller, until they pass imper-
ceptibly into the surrounding epidermis. This can be seen in the
drawing (PI. X, fig. 9), which represents a longitudinal section
through the upper lip of A. lacuatria.

The external or free surface of these cells is covered with long
cilia, which thus differ from the cilia of the surrounding epithe-
lium. The nuclei of these cylindrical cells differ from those
found in the neighboring epithelium in form as well as in size.
When the object is colored in picro-carmine, the nuclei take a deep
color, and stand out sharply from the rest of the cell. Although
these nuclei are somewhat different among themselves, they are. in
general, fusiform. In this respect they differ from the regular,
oval-shaped nuclei of the epidermis. Some of these nuclei appear
bent, while others are straight. In fig, 9 (PI. X) we see that
some of the nuclei are pointed only at one end, and others at the
other, while only one is pointed at botli. In reality, all the nuclei
are pointed at both ends, and the reason that they are not so in
the drawing is that the nuclei have been cut in two, the knife not
happening to pass from one point to the other, but to have taken
an oblique course. In consequence of this, some represent the
one half, and others the other half, of the nucleus. The bending of
tlfe nuclei is due, I believe, to action of the re-agents used in
preparing the specimen.

The substance of the nuclei is granular, as the other epidermal
nuclei, and I could not find the existence of a nucleolus.

The nerve-endings, which enter the cells of this organ, are the

236 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

terminal branches of that nerve which arises in the cerebral
ganglia, and are distributed to this region of the head. They
enter, as near as I could determine, the posterior end of the cell,
and become joined to the posterior end of the nucleus. The
opposite point of the nucleus approaches the free surface of the
cell, and probably is connected in some way with the cilia (PL X,
fig. 9 a). In this figure, the muscular and connective-tissue fibres
are intentionally omitted, as it would be diflficult to distinguish
the nerve-fibres, were they drawn in.

The other organs of special sense in Ancylus are so little different
from those in other Pulmonata, that I do not consider it necessary
to give a description of them here.

III. — The Anatomy of the Excretory Organ.

As yet, no one has completely described the excretory organ of
Ancylus. This organ has only been known in part, and described
under various names. C. Vogt,' in the year 1841, spoke of an
organ imbedded in the mantle which he called the " sulphur-yellow
body " (Schwefelgelber Korper), and supposed that the so-called
reticulated portion was the lung.

Moquin-Tandon also considered this organ an organ of respira-
tion, and said : " The breathing organ of Ancijlus is neither a tube
nor an external gill, it is an internal pouch. I am convinced of
this, after numerous dissections. This pouch is small, oblong,
straight and situated in the left side of the mollusk, toward the
border of the mantle, and in advance of the rectum."^

Blainville^ is of the same opinion, and considers that the orifice
of this respiratory organ is closed by an opercular appendage
(appendice operculaire). This appendage is what 1 have shown
to be the gill.

Moquin-Tandon adds that the orifice is very small. He further
speaks of a gland that surrounds the heart, concerning which
he says : " The pericardial gland surrounds the heart and the
breathing organ, as is the case with most Gastropoda; it occupies

' Bemerk. ii. d. Bau d. Ancylus, etc., p. 28.

^ V or (jane respiratoire de V Ancyle n'est, ni un tube ti-acheiform, ni une
branchie externa ; c'esL ute poche interieure ; je m'en suis assure, apres
de nombieuses dissections, cette poche est petit, oblongue, etroit, et situee
a la partie gauche du Molhisque vers le bord du manteau, en avaut du
rectum. Recber. anat. physiol. s. 1' Ancyle, etc , p. 123.

^ Manuel de malacologie et de conch ylogie. Paris, 1825, p. 504.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 237

the left and posterior part of the pulmobi'anehial pouch, and
extends transversely and expands behind the auricle and the
ventricle. Its color is yellowish, and opens without doubt at the
side of the respirator}'- orifice."^ He says further on : " The peri-
cardial gland produces a very large amount of mucus, I have
never found calcareous granules in it ; these I have only found in
the thick part of the mantle, principally near the margin ; they
were very large, a little irregular and transparent."^ Although I
have diligentlj^ searched for the reticulated part described by G.
Yogt, I have been unable to find it. It appears to me that he
had reference to what I have called the sacular part of the kidney,
later to be considered, which lies close to the pericardium, the
walls of which have not a reticulated appearance, but are thrown
into longitudinal folds. C. Yogt regarded this part of the organ
as the lung, while Moquin-Tandon, on the other hand, called it the
pericardial gland.

When the animal is laid upon its back, and the mantle and foot
separated, an S-shaped yellow body is seen through the thin walls
of the mantle.

In A. fiuviatilis this organ lies in the left, and in A. lacustris
in the right lobe of the mantle ; this is the organ of excretion, or
the kidney. Were this organ to be dissected out and measured,
it would be found to be about twice the length of the animal to
which it belonged ; thus in an animal measuring 7*4 mm., the
kidney was found to measure 14*4 mm.

In fig. 10 (PI. X) I have endeavored to give a diagramatical
drawing of the course of the kidney. To the largest part I have
given the name of the sacular portion ; it lies in contact with the

^ L' orifice respiratoire est ti es petit et perce dans un epaississement de la
peu, un peu plus pale que la i-e.^te du tissue * * *. La glande pericar-
diale est accolee conime dans la plupart des Gastropodes, au coeur et a
I'oj-gaue de la respiration ; elle <'ccupe les parties glauches et posterieures
de la poclie pulmobranclie, et s'elend transversalement, en se renflent,
derriere I'oreillette et le ventricle. Sa coleur est jaunatre, s'ouvre sans
doute, a cote de I'orifice respiratoire. Recher. anat. pbysiol. s. I'Ancyle,
etc., p. 128.

^ La glande pericardiale pi'oduit une assez grande quantite de mucus.
Je n'y ai jamais trouve de grains calcaires. J'en ai observe seulment
dans I'epaisseur du manteau particulierment vero sa marge ; ils etaient
assez gros, un peu irreguliers et transparent s. Recber. anat. pbysiol. s.
I'Ancyle, etc., p. 138.

238 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

posterior wall of the pericardium. The folds that I have referred
to above are not represented here, as they do not affect the general
form of the organ. At the point h' the sacular portion passes into
the tubular portion. Os represents the opening of the organ
into the branchial chambei*. The arrow is given to show the
position of the animal as regards the kidney, the arrow pointing
toward the head. The kidney is drawn as if the observer were
viewing it through the external wall of the branchial chamber.
The little canal {t) which is seen in the anterior part of sacular
portion is the communication between the kidney and the peri-
cardium. The diagram (PI. X, fig. 10 a) is drawn from a complete
series of •transverse sections, by first drawing each section and
then projecting it by measurement to surveyor's paper.

The organ may be divided into two parts, which are in form
entirely different from one another. The first part — that is, that
part which lies next to the pericardium — I call the pericardial or
sacular portion (PL X, fig. 10 a) ; it is the largest and most active
portion of the kidnej^; it is fiattened from the side, so that the
greatest diameter is perpendicular to the animal. The walls, as
above stated, are thrown into longitudinal folds, which are much
deeper at the pericardial end than at the end where this part joins
the others ; at this point, in fact, it may be said not to exist, as
they gradually grow fainter until they disappear altogether. The
anterior end of this portion is very broad, and covers nearly the
whole posterior wall of the pericardium. This part, which runs
obliquely backwards and downwards, has an oval form on trans-
verse section which gradually becomes more circular as the folds
disappear and we approach the tubular portion. The length of
this first portion, in an average sized animal, is about 2-8 mm. ;*
the greatest diameter, TO mm. ; and breadth, 0*3 mm.

In tlie posterior wall of the pericardium is seen a small funnel-
shaped opening (PI. X, fig. 3 inf)^ which is lined with long cilia;
this opening leads into a fine tube ; this tube lies in contact with
the internal wall of the sacular portion of the kidney for a short
distance, and then opens into it. Here we have, without doubt,
a direct communication between the pericardium and the kidney.

This small tube may be divided into two parts, histologically
different from one another, and the point where this division takes

1 All measurements are taken from an animal of average size, which
measured 7 "4 mm. in length.

1883,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 239

place is wliei'e the rectum, which is on its way perpendicularly^
through this part of the animal to the gill, comes in contact with
the tube. The anterior part of this canal I call the prterectal,
and the posterior portion the postrectal.

This little canal has nearly the same calibre throughout ; the walls
of the praereetal part are composed of cylindrical epithelial cells,
which lie on a fine tunica propria, and on the free ends of which
are found cilia. The cilia are longest at the pericardial opening
of this tube. The lumen of the postrectal part is nearly the same
as that of the pr.ierectal part ; the walls of the former, however,
are somewhat thicker.

The internal surface of the exeretor}- organ is also ciliated, and
consists of a layer of cylinder epithelium. In the walls are
found those concretions so characteristic of the gastropod kid-
ney. These concretions are not found in the walls all over the
kidney, but seem confined to a certain part. It is my opinion
that the concretions are identical to those small granulations
referred to by Moquin-Tandon (see p. 237) in the mucus of this
region.

The sacular portion of the kidney does not pass graduall}" into
the tubular portion, but at a sharp angle, as is seen in the diagram
(PI. X, fig. 10), where a little blind sac is formed (PI. X, fig.
10 z). The diameter of this part of the sacular portion is
0*2 mm.

The second part of the kidney, or the tubular portion, is
much longer than the pericardial or sacular portion, but has a
much smaller diameter than the latter, and is convoluted. At
the beginning it runs parallel with the inferior border of the
mantle, and bending at r (PL X, fig. 10) it returns on its course;
at c' (fig. 10), it makes another bend and passes for a short distance
forward again ; then forming a slight curve it passes to its most
inferior position, and then running parallel with the lower border
of t-lie mantle it opens at os, at a position about opposite the pos-
terior part of the gill. In the diagram (fig. 10) I have represented
the convolutions as if the}^ were all in one plane; this is, however,
not the case, as in a horizontal section we often see two convo-
lutions.

In A. lacustris the kidney has essentially the same form, lying
in the right mantle, save that the folds of the sacular portion are
not so marked.

240 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

As to the disposition of the concretion, I can say that they are
found in the postrectal and sacular portions, thickl}'^ embedded in
the walls ; the tubular portion, which may be looked upon as
the duct to the glandular or sacular portion, also has them in the
first part of its course, as far as o (PI. X, fig. 10) ; they then become
scattered and rarer until we get to c, when they have entirely
disappeared. The whole interior portion of the organ is ciliated.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE X,

Fig. 1. Tracsveise section, about the middle of A. fluviatilis ; s, shell ;
m, mantle ; mc, musculus cochlearis ; F, foot ; qm, transverse
muscular fibres ; L, liver ; mg, stomach ; E, albuminous gland ;
D, intestinal canal ; K, gill ; exo, excretory organ or kidney.

Fig. 2. Diagram of buccal mass and odontopbore ; m, moutb ; b, curved
arrow showing direction the food takes to (oe) oesophagus ; a,
anterior wall ; c, arrow showing direction of movement of
radula when licking (for x, see text) ; Od, odontopbore ; r,
radula.

Fig. 3. Part of horizontal section of A. fluviatilis ; Inf, infundibukim ; I
and ct, tube connecting kidney (a) to pericardium ( P) ; Ht,
heart ; 6s, blood-space ; m, mantle ; R, rectum ; mc, musculus
cochlearis ; alb, albuminous gland ; Oo, parts of genital
organs.

Fig. 4 a. Horizontal section of odontopbore of A. fluviatilis.

Fig. 4 b. Transverse section of same.

Fig. 5. Posterior part of a longitudinal section of odontopbore of Helix
aperta.
For explanation of the letters of the last three figures, see text.
All the figures, with the exception of fig. 2 and fig. 10 have been
drawn by means of a camera lucida

Fig. 6. Transverse section of the ganglion olfactorium {Oo) ; Inf, infun-
dibulum ; m, mantle ; d, kidney ; Brc, branchial chamber.

Fig. 7 and 8. Two transverse sections of the tentacular ganglion of left
side of A. fluviatilis ; n, nerve ; e, epidermis ; g, ganglion ; p,
enlarged epidermal cells ; /, groove ; c, cutis ; rm, retractor
muscle ; au, eye.

Fig. 9. Longitudinal section of upper lip of A. lacustris. For a, see
text.

Fig. 10. Diagram of kidney of A. fluviatilis. For letters, see text.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 241

The following, received tlirongli the Mineralogical and Geo-
logical Section, was also ordered to be printed : —

NOTES ON THE GE0L03Y OF CHESTER VALLEY AND VICINITY.
BY THEO. T>. RAND.

In a recent reply to criticisms by Dr. Frazer of statements in ,
regard to the serpentine on, ci'ops, etc., described in Vol. C 6 of
the Second Geol. Survej' of Pennsylvania, I stated that I would
exhibit before the Academy specimens from the outcrops in
question. Dr. Frazer stated (Am. Nat., Sept., 1883, p. 525) : "At
the same time it must not be forgotten that what one observer
would regard as evidence of a serpentine outcrop, another would
not. * * * 2t would seem to be only thus that such wide
divergencies as are here noted are explicable."

I have here specimens from the serpentine outcrops which I
had stated were overlooked in C 6, and specimens from two out-
crops represented in C 6 to be serpentine, which I questioned. I
think they speak for themselves, but if au}^ member has any doubt
or question, I trust the matter may be so discussed as to elicit
the truth.

I desire also to call attention to certain statements in the survej''
of Chester Co., C 4, recently published, statements with which
my observations do not agree.

1. The non-existence of Potsdam sandstone, or a sandstone very
closely resembling Potsdam, south of Chester Valle}'.

C 4 says, pp. 34, L24 : " The quartzite failed altogether on the
southern side of the valley.'' " No Potsdam sandstone has been
detected anywhere along the southern edge of the limestone
area."

I have here specimens from Samuel Tyson's, on north flank of
South Valle}'^ Hill, near King of Prussia station, Chester Valley,
land from three localities in Cream Vallc}'^ (between the South
Valley Hill and the Radnor syenitic gneiss range), one, on the
Brooks farm, about 100 yards west of the line dividing Delaware
county from Montgomery and 300 yards northeast of the south-
west corner of Upper Merion township ; another, one-half mile
west of this, near and south of the limestone on Stacker's place,
and the third the Pennsj-lvania Railroad cut northwest of Wayne
station, just north of the trap, in which cut Dr. Frazer, p. 283,

242 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

speaks of finding sandy gneiss^ with a hard serpentine-like mineral.
I have also the enrite of Barren Hill for comparison.

It will be seen that the correspondence is exact — the micaceous
partings, the rhomboidal cleavage, the minute tourmalines — all
agree.

I have also a specimen of the trap of the Conshohocken dj^ke

whicli crosses this cut about 100 feet southeast of the eurite. I

'could find no serpentine-like rock there, nor any other hard rock;

the rocks are^much decomposed, but the gneiss of Rogers' altered

primal is there unmistakabl}'.

2. I have also specimens (loose in the soil) from immediately
south of the eastern end of the serpentine, stated, on p. 87, to be
bounded both south and north bj- talcose slate. The rock is
Rogers' altered primal.

3. On page 87 it is stated : " It is evident that even a synclinal
belt of serpentine 2000 feet wide, or even 400 feet wide, can mean
nothing else than a great thickness of the talc mica schist forma-
tion, metamorphosed more or less completely into serpentine, and
a good cause for such alteration is present in an extensive out-
burst of trap close beyond."

" Everybody familiar with the surface of Delaware and Chester
counties knows how almost invariably its trap and serpentine
appear together."

If this is true, how can it be explained that a few miles further
east, what seems to be admitted (p. 282 to be the same serpentine
belt is wholly within the gneisses of C 6 (Rogers' altered primal),
over 1000 feet south of the trap, with gneiss, hornblende schist,
steatite and limestone intervening, and that the trap passes east-
ward for some five or six miles, at least, from Wayne station,
P. R. R., to a point far east of Conshohocken, through the hydro-
mica schists of the South Valley Hill to Bethel Hill without a
trace of serpentine.

At what locality in Delaware county, among its numerous ser-
pentine outcrops, does trap, properly so-called, occur?

It does not appear at Lenni, Media, Blue Hill, Marple, New-
town, nor at any of the numerous outcrops of the Lafa3^ette belt,
nor of that of the steatite belt on the south, nor of the Radnor
belt in Radnor. In Easttown they do appear together, but can

' This quotation is erroneous ; in place of "sandy gneiss" it should be
"a decomposed friable white gneissoid rock."

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 243

this possibly be construed to be more than that converging lines
must meet?

4. P. 84 : " The southern oflge of the South Valley Hill belt of talc
mica slates is defined upon the map b}^ a chain of dots and stripes
of two colors, representing outcrops of serpentine, and outcrops
of crj'stalline limestone. Were these outcrops ranged in more
than one line, the task of explaining their appearance would be
far easier. * * * It looks as if the serpentine might be a
subsequent modification of the limestone. No case is recorded
of the serpentine and crystalline limestone of our line being seen
in contact." I do not dispute the last sentence, but the speci-
mens show a variety of rocks in Radnor between the serpentine
and limestone, which there occupy, as shown on my map, approxi-
matively parallel positions a thousand feet and more apart — con-
clusive evidence that in that part of the line at least they have no
possible connection.

The map in C 4 shows, as clearly as possible on so small a scale,
that the line of limestone outcrops is north of the line of serpen-
tine outcrops; all the limestone outcrops shown are west of the
west end of the serpentine outcrop-.

There is some evidence tiiat tiiis serpentine belt is an altered
enstatite.

T show a specimen from near Devon Inn, Easttown township,
whicli seems almost certainly' altered enstatite ; and specimens of
undoubted enstatite from the Lafayette belt, the ser|)entine of
which so strongly resembles that of the Radnor belt, both in
structure and accompanying minerals.

5. The statement, p. 282 : '' The east end of this (the Easttown
and Williamstovvn serpentine belt) continues much further into
Montgomery county."

This is certainly an error, caused, perhaps, b}' confusing this
belt with that north of it, as was done in C 6. This belt ceases
abruptly on the land of Hon. D. J. Morell, in Radnor township,
Delaware county, where the contour suggests the possibility of a
fault. The lithological difference of the belts may be seen b}'^ the
'specimens produced. The northerly belt begins on the land of
Brooke, about one-fourth mile northwest of the easterly end of the
Radnor outcrop, east of Radnor station.

5. On p. 138, a Mr. Morely is quoted, without comment, as
stating that the Conshohocken trap follows the summit of Bethel

244 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEiMY OF [1883.

Hill into Delaware county, terminating near the road leading
from the Lancaster turnpike to the King of Prussia.

In fact, it is nowhere near the summit, but on the south flank,
or at the foot, and so far from ending at the road mentioned, it
extends several miles to the westward, its outcrops almost con-
tinuous.

7. P. 140: "Near Mr. Hitner's house, Marble Hall, there
occurs a thin bed of very ponderous rock, resembling closely a
white crystalline limestone. It contains, however, but a moderate
proportion of carbonate of lime, and consists chiefly of the car-
bonate of strontia." Whence there is deduced a bond of connec-
tion between the valley limestone and the No. 11 limestone of the
valleys of middle Penns3dvania.

Was carbonate of strontia ever found there ? Is it not the
well-known sulphate of baryta from that locality mistaken for
carbonate of strontia ?

8. P. 282 : "An old quarry close by the Spread Eagle hotel,
which is now filled with fragments of trap and rubbish, shows
serpentine along with the schistose matter, with a dip about
S. 35 E., and seemingly about 35°, etc."

" This quarry is over the line, in Delaware county."
This is an interesting contact. I regret that I have been unable
to find it ; the onl}^ quarry in that vicinity that I can find is about
200 feet west of the Spread Eagle, on the north side of the Lan-
caster turnpike, nearly opposite Pugh's store ; but it contains no
serpentine, and is in Rogers' altered primal quarried thence for
the turnpike. It was much filled up with trap and rubbish, but
has been recentlj^ opened again. Old residents assure me that it
is the only quarry in Delaware countj' in that vichiity.

9. P. 282: "As soon as one passes the creek north of Radnor
station * * * ^\iq measures assume an unctuous, schistose,
partly chloritic character,"

P. 284 : " Fragments of chloritic mica schist."

P. 28Y : " Willistown, broad conchoidal mica schist, containing
much chlorite and milk quartz."

Yet Prof. Frazer contends rightly (Am. Nat., October, 1883,
p. 1021) that this region contains hydro-mica schists only; that
the expression " talc mica " is erroneous, as the rocks contain no
talc ; do they contain chlorite ?

Dr. Frazer says (Am. Nat., May, 1883, p. 524) : " The observa-
tion of the intersection of the serpentine belt by the trap, which

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 245

has a more northerly trend in Easttown, is interesting, but not Tieto."
My words were : " A mile southeast of Berwyn, the latter can
be seen almost, if not quite, in contact with the serpentine, the
trap, however, being on the south of the serpentine. The same
is true south of Paoli, except that the trap appears to be on the
north side." Prof. Rogers (p. IfiS) speaks of this trap as
''occurring along and outside the northern edge of the serpentine,
in a succession of narrow, elongated d^'kes, ranging more north-
east and southwest than the serpentine. These I have not
examined, but such structure agrees precisely with what I have
observed of the serpentine further east."

This interesting occurrence is not upon the map in C 4 ; no
trap whatever is shown north of the large serpentine outcrop
south of Paoli.'

Dr. Frnzer {J. Frank. /??.';;., October 1883) kindly compares my
criticism with those of the good old gentlemen who, during the
war, criticized the army officers, from a safe distance at their
comfortable breakfast tables. This is not fair ; every observation
I have made has been made on the spot and on foot, and in proof
of this Dr. Frazer has not pointed out a single error of fact. Had
all the observations in C 6 and C 4 been similarl}^ made, many
blunders like those of serpentine in the Bryn Mawr cut, in the
cut northwest of Wayne, and on the Gulf road north of Matsons'
Ford road, would not have appeared.

" But it is not a fact that Rogers' altered piimal is a well-
defined rock ; pn the contrary, a more heterogeneous collection of
gneiss, mica schists, hydro-mica schists, chlorites, feldspar por-
phyries, clays, and quartz slates than are found in the regions
which he colored as altered primal it would be difficult to collect
from the two hemispheres." — Dr. Frazer, J. F. I., October, 1883.

I referred to the rock described by Rogers. Is it not possible
that Dr. Frazer has included, in the above, adjacent rocks which
Rogers had no intention of including, as the scale of the map
precludes the possibility of accurate ma])ping; and the rocks men-
tioned by Dr. Frazer do lie adjacent; but the peculiar rock here
shown and so well described by Rogers, is, at least through Lower
Merion, Kadnor and Easttown, very well defined indeed. Its
breadth nowhere exceeds 800 feet, I think, and this, on Rogers'

I In my leview, J. F. I., September, 1883, I inadvertently located this in
Easttown. It is really in Willistown.

246

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

map would be ^'^ of an inch ; its outcrops are almost continuous,
and between, its existence in the fields is constant.

Dr. Frazer attempts a joke founded upon his impression of the
absence of an allusion to the serpentine in Radnor and Easttown,
in my criticism of C 4. It would have been well for hira to liave
read the paper again. He will find on page 33 an " allusion " to
the serpentine in Radnor; on page 34 a map of the outcrops in
Radnor and some of those in Easttown.

I did not describe the echelon structure of the serpentine out-
crops as a theory, as Dr. Frazer says, but, as a fact, the under-
ground structure I do not attempt to demonstrate. That our
observations agree within limits that do not affect the question, is
shown in the table given below.

The lines of strike are in part deduced from the dips given by
Dr. Frazer, but it may be well to quote from C 4, p. 218 : " The
ser[)entiue * * * where exposed, it is so fractured and bi'oken
as to make the determination of its dip ver3' difficult or altogether
impossible. But its strike cannot unfrequently be pursued in
almost straight lines for miles."

For this reason, in recording my observations, I preferred to
give the dip and strike separately — for the dip varies greatl}', the
strike does not.

Outcrops.

Strike | Strike,

on map, Frazer, J. F.I,

C 4. Oct., '83.

1. yi mileE.
of Radnor
station,

3. Ya mile N,
W. of
Radnor
station.

6, S, W, of N, 70 E,
Old Eaf'le
station

7, N, W. of
and near
Devon
Inn,

9, Ivister, S, N. 76 E.
of Berwyn. I

Nearly
E, and W.

± N. 30 E,

90° from Dip.
Frazer.

K 70 to 85 E.

N, 70 E, !
N. 60 W.
(?N, 60 E, ?)'

Strike, Rand. I Difference.

N. 40 E.

N. 40 E.

Nearly
E. and VV.

N. 60 E.

N. 40 E.

N. 50 to 60 E,

N. 40 E.

0 to 20O

10=>
ISOOor OO

lOO

OO

A line joining the outcrops 6 and 9 on map C 4 is N. Si E,
One joining the Radnor outcrops on map by Hopkins, N, 80 E,

1883.] • NATURAL SCIENCES OV PHILADELPHIA. 247

Outcrop 3 runs for nearly 1500 feet parallel, or nearly so. to a
lane. The bearing of this lane, by surveys recited in the deeds,
is N. 62° 40' E.

Xow if the lines of strike given by Dr. Frazer be plotted on the
map, it will readily be seen that while a line about N. 83 E. will cross
all of them, the strike of all will cross this line at angles from 23°
to 43°, except the first. The strike of the outcrops, as given on
the map, is wrong, as shown by Dr. Frazer's own figures; but in
spite of this the echelon structure is deliiieated in the two out-
crops south and southwest of Old Eagle station, the error — making
them two parallel outcrops — being due to the fact that the westerly
one is not over 400 feet long, the easterly not over 200, while on
the map each is made over 1000 feet long.

Mr. Hall remarks (Am. Nat., June, 1883, p. 647) that I do not
account for the absence of slates on the north side of the valley.
From the specimens exhibited it will be seen that there are in the
North Yalley Hill slaty rocks with segregated quarlz closely
resembling those of the South Valley Hill, though it is true that
as a whole the hills are not alike.

I have here specimens to illustrate the succession of rocks north
and south of the Radnor gneiss belt.

I would particularly call attention to the rocks immediately
south of the Radnor gneiss belt. Their resemblance to those on
the north is striking, and it seems worthy- of further investigation
whether the belt of fine grained gneiss breaking into rhomboidal
fragments and connected with a white feldspathic rock, may not
be identical with the eurite and adjacent rocks on the north.

I have also two more specimens of the quartzite with supposed
fucoidal markings, one of which, from the Old Gulf road east of
Bryn Mawr, contains them unusually well defined.

248 proceedings of the academy of [1883.

November 6.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in tlie chair.

Forty-four persons present.

A paper, entitled " On the Value of the ' Nearctic ' as one of the
Primary Zoological Regions. Replies to Criticisms by Mr, Alfred
Russel Wallace and Prof. Theodore Gill,'' b}' Professor Angelo
Heilprin, was presented for publication.

On Visual Organs in Solen. — Dr. Benjamin Sharp called
attention to a remarkably primitive form of visual organ that he
had discovered in the siphon of Solen ensis and S. vagina (the
common '* razor-shell ").

His attention was directed to the probable possession of visual
organs by observing a number of these animals which were
exposed in large basins for sale at Naples. A shadow cast by
his hand caused the extendi d siphons of the specimens on which
the shadow fell, instantly to retract, while those not in the shadow
remained extended. Repeating tliis experinient at the Zoological
Station at Naples, and being fully convinced that the retraction
was due to the shadow and not to a slight jar which ir.ight have
been the cause; he was led to examine the siplion more closely,
and he also made a seiies of veitical sections for the purpose
of very minute stud} .

When the siphon of a large Solen is cut open and examined, a
number of fine blackish brown lines or fine grooves are seen.
These are situated between and at the base of the short tentacular
processes of the external edge of the siphon. As many as fifty
of these little grooves were found to be present in some speci-
mens, and some of them were from 1 to 1'.5 mm. in length.

When a vertical section is examined these pigmented grooves
are distinctly seen, and the cells of which they are composed are
very diti'erent from the ordinary epithelial cells which cover the
more pigmented parts. Tliese latter cells are ordinary columnar
epithelial cells witii a large nucleus which is situated near the
tunica on which it rests. The pigmented cells are from one-third
to one-half longer than those just described, and consist of three
distinct parts. The upper part, or that part farthest from the
^wmca, appears perfectly transpaient and takes up about one-ninth
or one-tenth of the total length of tlie cell ; this part is not at all
affected with the coloring matter which was used in coloring the
whole. The second part of the cell is deeply pigmented and con-
sequently opaque ; it is filled with a dark brown or almost black
granulated pigment; thi-* takes up about one-half of the length of
the cell. Below this is the third part cf this cell, consisting of

' [(^ '^'

3RA1N 01'' AMPHIUMA

\^o3

Fl.IX.

T Sinclair at tion, Lith , t'hilo

MANAYUNKIA SPECIOSA

_ FROC, A, N. S, PHILA:

PL. X.

SHARP ON ANCYLUS.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 249

a clear mass, which takes a slight tinge when colored; this is prob-
ably the most active part of the cell ; in this is imbedded the large
oval nucleus. This nucleus is sharply demarcated and is filled
with a granulated matter which takes a dark color in borax car-
mine, as do, indeed, the nuclei of all the epidermal cells.

These retinal cells, if they may be so called, are similar to
those described by P. Fraisse in 1881 (Zeit«chr. f. wiss. Zool.,
Bd. XX v), in the very primitive eye of Patella coerulea^ the
principal difference being that in Patella the transparent part at
the top of the cell seems to be a little more extensive. This eye
of Patella is open, being merely an invaginated part of the epider-
mis, and has no lense. In Haliotis titberculafa we find an open
eye also, but with the addition of a very primitive lense. The
next higher grade of eye seems to be that of Fissur-ella rosea, in.
which tile eye is closed and possesses also a lense ; now in these
two lat'er forms, where we find a lense present, the retinal cells do
not possess the transparent ends as we find in Patella and Solen, .
but the pigment fills the upper part of the cell quite to the top.
This would indicate, he thinks, that the transparent part took the
place of a lense.

No special nerve-fibres could be detected passing to these pig-
mented grooves. Nerves passing to the e\e of Patella were also
wanting, while, on the other hand, distinct veins were found:
passing to the eye of Haliotis and Fissurella.

He further stated that this power of distinguishing a shadow
would be of great use to the animal in the struggle for existence.
The Solen lies buried perpendicularly in the sand and allows the
siphon to project a little above the surface. This projecting part
would, probably, frequently be bitten ofi' by fishes, were it not for
the fact that the shadow of the enemy would give warning, so
that the siphon could be withdrawn in time to ssxxe it fronii
destruction.

Notes on Glaciers in Alaska. — Mr. Thomas Meehan remarked!
that on his recent visit to Alaska he noted that the numerous
icebergs coursing down Glacier Bay, always pursued their swiff
downward course towards the Pacific Ocean quite independently
of the rising or falling of the tide. On reflection it was evident
that this might be due to the greater density of the cold glacier-
water pressing on towards the lighter water in the Japan Sea, .,
which set its force against the Alaskan shores. It was, indeed,
incorrect to speak of a warm current flowing northwards in any
active sense. Warm water never flowed or circulated because it
was warm, but it flowed under the simple laws of gravitation —
the heavier body pushing the lighter out of its place, and the
lighter then being drawn backwards to the vacuum caused by the
movement of the weightier volume. The flow of a warm current
in tlie atmosphere or in the water must, therefore, be taken in a
passive and not in an active sense; and it was, therefore, to the
17

250 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

immense ice-fields of Alaska themselves that we have to look for
the singularly moderate climnte of southeastern Alaska, rather
than to the mere action of heated water alone. They furnish the
heavy power which draws the warm current to it? shores. With
the disappearance of these huge glaciers, or the diversion of the
immense volume of cold water to another channel, the cold of tliis
■portion of Alaska would probably be as intense as that experienced
along its northern coast. The distinction was one of vast import-
ance, and he ventured an opinion that much of the disappointment
often experienced in Arctic navigation arose from overlooking
it, and in regarding the warm current as the active agent in circu-
lation.

In examining the Davidson, tlie Muir, and other glaciers, it also
occurred to him that there were active agencies at work, over-
looked by those who had made specialties of glacial study.
Beneath the Muir glacier, which was said by various authorities
to be about four hundred miles long, a large volume of water was
flowing in a rapid torrent — this volume, on a carefully considered
guess, being about one hundred feet wide with an average depth
of four feet. According to information from a white man who had
long lived with the Indians of this section, this subglacial river
was flowing in about the same volume, summer and winter. The
mouth of this glacier hung over into the sea, and formed icebergs
in three dillerent modes. Sometimes tlie edge of the glacier would,
in its tliinner sections, float over and be lifted off" .by the rise and
fall of the tide; at other times huge masses would break off by
their own weight; and at other times the upper edges, which, by
the action of running surfice water, would be worn into all sorts
of rough forms, would topple over, rubbing their faces against the
more solid ice, and making a sound which reverberated through
the ranges of hills like peals of artillery, and which could be
heard many miles away. There were thousands- of smallei* ice-
bergs floating down Glacier Bay, the most of these evidently
formed by the latter mode. It was not safe for the vessel on
which he made the visit to approach nearer than a quarter of a
mile to the i'ace of this glacier, where it anchored for a day in
oriier to make tlie examination ; but it was near enough, especially
with the aid of the ship's boats and good field-glasses, to muke
excellent observations. So far as could be ascertained through
occasional deep fissures, no water came out from under the face of
the glacier to the ocean. Tiie mass of ice was apparently l^'ing
flat on a bed of rock, the ice occupying a width of something less
than two miles, and estimated to be about 300 feet thick on an
average of its whole width. This would, of course, obstruct the
run of water directly to the ocean, and thus we had the lateral
flow which diverged from the glacier's bed about four miles from
its mouth. The Davidson glacier, in Pyramid Harbor, had retreated
from the ocean, and by comparing facts observed in tracing a
portion of its bed with what was seen in connection with this

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 251

torrent from the Muir glacier, it was evident that during a glacier's
existence the underflowing river might often become dammed, and
the torrent diverted, carrying glacial deposits to sections of country
long distances away from the track of the glacier, and through
portions of country over which glaciers had never flowed. And
there might be immense glacial deposits left by a glacier constantly
retreating, and after many subsequent years, by the diversion of
the glacial river, a new channel and new remains may be deposited
througli the mass, even by another distant and distinct glacier.
This was actually the case in this instance. This stream had
torn its way through immense hills of glacial deposits, many
hundreds of feet deep, exposing to view the trunks, still standing
erect, of a buried forest, though not a stick of forest-growth,
except a few alders and willows, could be seen anywhere in the
vicinity, as far as the eye could reach, and suggesting that the
original deposit was not made by the existing glacier, the waters
of which now tore their way through the huge hills.

Tlie question would now arise as to the souice of the water
supplying the subglacial liver-bed. It would be well to carry
some ascertained facts along with us in this examination. An
iceberg of more than usual dimensions had got aground in
Glacier Bay, and, having one good, fair face, it was found by
careful soundings that the vessel could be placed close alongside.
At seven and a half fatlioms, we were able to hitch on to the gi-eat
block, the sides of which projected far above our deck. The
surface of this berg exhibited, in a small way, all the features of
a tract of land : lakes, rapids, waterfalls, hills and valleys ; in
some places, earth and stones. To-day the course of a water-
channel might be in one direction, till a falling piece of ice or earth
would block it up, when a source would be opened for a new direc-
tion, and the little streams, once started, would form in a short
space of time Wide and d- ep chasms. A piece of rock, by its
dark color attracting the sun's raj's, would sink deep into the
berg, while earth, porous and non-conducting, would prevent
melting; and thus we would have mounds on the berg where the
surroundings, clear of earth, would be melted away. The action
of the ^un on melting portions of the berg was interesting. The
thermometer was but 42° ; yet on any side where the suu fell,
even at this low temperature, the little streams and rivulets were
coursing their way to the great ocean around. But on tlie
northern slopes, there were barely any streams, except such as
originated on t!ie sunnier sides. In fact, it was demonstrated
that wherever the sun struck on ice, even at a low temperature,
the deposition of water occurred. What he had carefully noted
on this iceberg he had before noted on high mountain peaks:
there would be always some melting from the face of a snow-
bank, no matter how low the temperature, where the sun shone-
fairly on it, and the water would sink to the bottom of this mass.
On this iceberg there were clefts and rifts and wells furrowed by

252 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

the gathering together of melted water into small pools or lakes,
or over where dark stones had sunk by the agency of the sun's
warmth ; but in no ease had the holes or cavities penetrated
wholly through the iceberg, except on its thinnest outer edges.
The temperature necessary for melting was reduced with the
depth, till at length there was not heat enough to melt further.
The focts all tended to show that very little water would
pass through a glacier by wa^^^ of its surface. Some may pass
over to the sides, and get beneath in that way, but the outer
ledges of ice seemed to rest very firmly on the ground, as it neces-
sarily must from its arch-like form, owing to the river beneath
and the immense weight pressing on the edges of this arch ; only
.occasionally can water be admitted that way, and scarcely could
anywhere the volume so acquired be described as flowing from the
side of the main glacier. What becomes of the melting snow on
the snow-cap of the glacier, the continual and almost imper-
ceptible meltings under the sun's influence at these heights ? A
prevailing impression is that glacier-ice is but snow which has
become ice by the enormous pressure of so thick a body. If this
be so, water thawed out from the snow by the sun's rays could
not percolate far below the surface of the snow, and there seems
no way left to account for the river beneath. If this be not so,
then the way would be clear. With no ice below the snow, with
the thermometer at the ground above the freezing-point, through
the natural warmth of the earth protected by the'snow-cap from
escaping, the percolating water would descend to the surface of
the mountain-top, part entering to furnish fountain-heads for
springs and underground streams, running often hundreds of miles
away, and the balance running down under the ice-channel formed
by the glacier.

It seems such a fair assumption that this may be so, that it is
worth while to consider the evidence offered for the belief that
glacier-ice is snow under the pressure of its own weight. Snow
has been artificall}' brought under pressure to ice, but such ice is
not translucent, as is ordinary crystallized ice. The ice of the
Alaska glaciers is i-emarkably clear, and, when in the proper
position against the atmosphere, presents the most lovely cerulean
tints imaginable. One of the speaker's pleasantest experiences
was a wandering among the wrecks of icebergs strewn all along
the shore, in Hoona or Bartlett Bay.'

No crystal could possibly be clearer than the fragments strewn
everywhere along the beach. The only difference observed
between this and the ordinary ice of every-day experience was
that, melting in the mouth, it would divide into pieces of the size
of peas before wholly uncongealed. Again, from the vessel

' At page 187, Proceedings of the Academy, 1883, Hood's Bay was
inadvertently used for Hopna Bay, Hood's Bay is some hundred miles
south of this point.

1883,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 253

anchored a quarter of a mile from the face of the Muir glacier
the portion to the southeast for a distance of perhaps a thousand
feet, as examined by the field-glass, was of a different character to
the rest of the face in having a milky white, marble-like look.
The line of demarkation between this opaque and the transparent
ice was exactly defined. It was not possible to get nearer for a
more satisfactory examination, but the conclusion of all was that
this portion was compressed snow. At this point the ice-sea had
to draw in, through passing an intruding bluff of rocks, and the
lateral pressure must have been enormous between the bluff and
the solid ice. It would be the best possible opportunity for a
mass of snow, carried down from the mountain side, and floated
along on the margin of a wide glacier, to become ice if pressure
would ever do it. It cannot, of course, be positively stated that
this opaque section was compressed snow, in the absence of
actual handling, but there is little room for doubt that it was. It
was, at any rate, an opaque section, and whollj' different from the
glacier-ice as generally seen. Again, from the amount of air-
cavities in snow, and the resistance these must oflTer to the self-
pressure of snow, and also from actual experience of deep snow-
drifts in ordinary mountain ranges, there is nothing to warrant a
belief, outside of an actual demonstration, that the pressure of any
depth of snow is of itself sufficient to turn it into glacier-ice.

If now we admit that above the glacial snow-line and under the
great snow-cap there may not be solid ice formed by compression,
but there may be a huge lake of water held back by the icy
breast-work at the snow's edge, we may conceive of a method of
forming the glacial sea quite different from any alread}'^ proposed.
The water must and will flow out from the edge of the snow-line
when the temperature is far below freezing-point, and form a
fringe of ice all along the line. How this is done can be readily
seen passing under the snow-sheds of a mountain railroad.

On the Denver and Rio Grande Railroad, passing over Marshall's
Pass, 14,000 feet altitude, as the speaker did in May of the present
year, the melted snow passed as water through the mass to the
bottom^then passed down the mountain-side under the snow to the
snow-shed, where it formed real glaciers down the railroad — cutting
under the sheds to the railway track. The law must of necessity
be the same on a mountain-top in Alaska as on a mountain-top in
the Rocky Mountain region. Snow occurring after this ic}'^ deposit
was Tormed, would extend down the mountain over the ice, and
new layers of ice would be continually forming over the old layers,
or on their edges with the occasional retrocession of the snow.
A portion of the water at the snow-head will naturally course
under the ice, and form a channel beneath. This will increase in
width and depth wdth time. In the torrent which sprung out
from above the mouth of the Muir glacier myriads of stones,
some of them of many cubic feet in size, were borne along by the
muddy waters. The force of the water, as well as the added

254 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

force of the rolling stones against the roofs of the glaciers, must
haA'e some influence on its descent, as also would the weight of
water under the snow forming the cap, pressing against it at the
highest point of the glacial departure. The roof of the glacier
above the torrent would possibly get worn away somewhat by the
friction of the torrent ; but as ice is now known to be ductile, it
w^ould bend down towards the water when any great hollowing
out occurred, and get aid in its downward flow. We may further
imagine tiat under such an explanation as this, the edges pf the
glacier would have much more of excoriating power, than when
the whole mass is spread equally over a wide rocky bed.

In regard to the existence of the glaciers, Mr. Meehan observed
that in many instances there were evidences of rapid retreat.
Davidson's glacier, at the head of Pyramid Harbor, near the
mouth of the Chilkat River, in about lat. 59^, had fallen back
several miles from the water in tlie bay. Having but little more
than half a day on shore at this point, an effort to reach the mouth
of the glacier failed through taking a "short cut" through a
forest of alder and spruce, the undergrowth of the spiny Pana
hon-ida being almost impassable. But field-glass observation from
the vessel, together with the examination of the track of the
retreating ice, showed successive terraces of moraine material,
with succeeding generations of trees on them in the supposed
distance of three miles from the sea to the glacier's mouth. Near
the glacier the trees appeared to be about twenty or twenty-five
years old ; nearer the sea, from seventy-five to one hundred. But
here, as in the Muir glacier, there were evidences of frequent
advances and of retrocession in the glacial material. Trees which
from their size may have been from thirty' to fifty years of age,
would have a deposit of twenty or thirty feet of material placed
around them, half burying them, and then again have it all cleared
away, leaving the dead trunks to tell the story.

The volume of water now flowing in the line vacated by the
glacier, is not near equal to the work which has been done in
former times ; and the less quantit}' with the retreat of the glacier
itself, while other glaciers not fifty miles away still continue their
connection with the water, shows that local causes may be at work
which maj^ either retard or accelerate a glacier's progress. As
alread}' noted, the warmth of the atmosphere near a glacier's mouth
will, in a great measure, depend on the volume of cold water pro-
jected into the ocean — the greater the volume, the more influence
on the warm current which must be drawn in to take its place ;
and this is as true of the atmosphere as of the water. The heavy
cold body pushes the higher w^armed air upvvards, which has to
take the place of the air which rolls forward towards the lighiened
spot. Hence the greater the volume of cold air departing, the
larger and s-tronger the current of lighter and warmer air which
returns to the source of motion, so the temperature is not low in
the vicinity of the glaciers. On the iceberg before described, the

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 255

thermometer indicated 42° ; but a quarter of a mile from the
immense body forming the mouth of the Muir glacier, the tem-
perature was 60^. These warm currents, however, vary with the
drafts tlirough the mountains. Within comparatively short dis-
tances, tlie temperature would vary from between 40° and 60° at
the time referred to. In the winter season the difference would
be the more remarkable, and hence a mountain or glacier torrent,
cutting out for itself a new channel, and making a deep rift in a
mountain, would originate a new current — warmer or colder, as the
ease might be — which must have an influence on the progress or
decrease of the glacier itself. The operations of these changes in
the atmospheric currents were ver}- evident in the vieinit}^ of the
Davidson glacier. Sometimes through chasms in the mountains
near, the whole mass of timber on either side would be quite dead
after having made a successful stand for from twenty-five to fifty
years, by the work of some severe cold current, which, hy some
local change, had found its wa3' along the course. Near by, on
land no better, quite as steep, and in no way more favoiable to the
growth of vegetation, the timber would be perfectly healthy, the
onl}' difference being in the freedom from the atmospheric current
that had destroyed the others. In short, the age of the trees on
the successive terraces left by the waters along the line of the
glacier's retreat, showed how much had been done within a com-
paratively recent period, and other attending facts showed that
local causes, induced by the glacier itself, may ripidly retard or
accelerate its development at various peiiods in its existence.

In the retreat of the glaciers, in this part of Alaska, an alder,
Alnus viridis, was apparently the first arborescent plant to
establish itself. Large tracts of the drift would be wholly
covered by a dense, bushy growth. In time, however, many of
these would advance to the dimensions of large timber-trees,
surprising to those who might have only seen them as eight- or
ten-feet bushes in other parts of the United States In the woods
bordering on the Davidson glacier, the speaker saw Indians at
work making canoes (dug-outs) from the trunks of this alder.

Favorable Injfuenee of Climate on Vegetation in Alaska. — In his
remarks on glaciers in Alaska, Mr. Thomas Meehan observed that
on the tops of what are known as " totem-poles " in some of the
Ind\an villages, trees of very large size would often be seen
growing. These poles are thick logs of hemlock or spruce, set
up before the doors of Indian lodges, carved all oyer with queer
characters representing living creatures of every description, and
which are supposed to be genealogies, or to tell of some famous
event in the family history'. They are not erected by Indians
now, and it i« difficult to get any connected accounts of what
they really tell. At the old village of Kaigan there are numbers
of poles erected, with no carving at all on them, among many
which are wholl^^ covered, and these all had one or more

256 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

trees of Abies Sitkensis growing on them. One tree must have
been about twenty years old, and was half as tall as the pole
on which it was growing. The pole may have been twenty feet
high. The roots had descended the whole length of the poles, and
had gone into the ground, from which the larger trees now derived
nourishment. In one case, the root had grown so large as to split
the thick pole on one side from the bottom to the top, and this root
projected, along the whole length to the ground, about two inches
be3^ond the outer circumference of the pole. Only in an atmos-
phere surcharged with moisture could a seed sprout on the top of
a pole, twenty feet from the ground, and continue for years to
grow almost or quite as well as if it were in the ground.

We may also understand by incidents like these how tree-life
endured so very long in this part of Alaska, and why rocky accliv-
ities, on which no vegetation at all could exist in the dry climate of
the eastern States, were here clothed with a luxuriant fresh growth,
so thick that it was almost impossible for one to make a journey
through it. Indians had very few trails ; most of their journeys
were by canoes. At this village he also saw a bush of Lonivera
involacrata^ which was of immense size, as compared with what he
had seen in Colorado and other places. This was at the back of
an Indian lodge and alongside of a pathway, cut against the
hill-side. The plant was growing on the bank and grew up
some ten or twelve feet, where it bent over, apparently of its
own accord, and rested on the roof of the lodge, its numerous
branches making a dense arbor under which the road passed.
The stems near the ground were, some of them, as thick as his
arm, and the whole plant was covered l\y very large black berries.
Stopping in admiration to look at and examine the specimen,
brought numbers of Indians to see what was the subject, who
smiled pleasantly on being made to understand that only the sight
of a huge bush had attracted the traveler. Subsequently another
specimen was noted in the woods on a plant of the native hem-
lock, Abies Mertenaiana. In the woods the plant is somewhat
sarmentaceous. It could not climb a hemlock without assistance.
This old hemlock was bereft of branches to about twenty feet
high, but the Lonicera was above the lower branches, and had
journeyed along them to the extremities, beyond which it was
beautifully in fruit. It could only have been there by growing up
Tvith the hemlock when that tree was young, and was probably' of
about the same age. The Indian village of Kaigan is not properly
in Alaska, but just over the border in British Columbia, at the
southeastern point of Alaska, but the climatic conditions are
about the same.

The following was ordered to be printed : —

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 25 T

NOTES ON GLACIAL ACTION IN NORTHERN NEW YORK AND CANADA.
BY JOSEPH WILLCOX.

In a former communication I have noted some results from
glacial action in northern New York and Canada. I have recently
observed some other matters connected with the same action, in
that region, viz., in Lewis, Jefferson and St. Lawrence Counties
in New York, and in Canada, for a distance of one hundred and
twenty-five miles north of the St. Lawrence River.

In this territory all the original soil appears to have been
removed by glacial action, and that which now remains there has
been deposited b^' the receding glacier. It is thinly distributed,
seldom being many feet in depth ; while, in man}' cases, the rocks
have no soil upon them. All the rocks are extensively eroded,
and those which are durable still remain smooth — both above the
ground and underneath — wherever I have seen the soil removed.

In the country south of the great terminal moraine, which
extends across our continent, the soil is usually deep, especially
in our Southern States. The top of the rocks, under this deep
soil, is ordinarily in a state of disintegration ; and the different
stages of transition from hard rock to soil may easily be observed.
Loose stones, on top of and in the soil, are more or less decom-
posed on their surface, relinquishing their substance slowly, as
new virgin soil, for the needs of vegetation. Where the country
has been extensively^ glaciated, this condition of the rocks and
stones does not exist, the soft portion of them having been
removed by attrition, and, since the glacial times, little disinte-
gratien of the surface of the granite and Pottsdam sandstone has
occurred.

If the great ice sheet should have receded north speedily' , by
rapid melting, less material would, of course, be deposited on the
ground, than in the case of a slow retrogression. In the former
case little would be deposited, in any locality, except what was
already on the ground, in the process of transportation.

Taking the country north of Philadelphia as illustrating prob-
ably the conditions prevailing elsewhere within the glaciated area,
I have observed that north of the great terminal moraine a large

258 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

amount of silt has been deposited, as moraine material, by the
receding glacier, as far north as Trenton Falls, in New York, but
not much farther. On the north side of the Mohawk Valley,
from Utica to Schenectady, vast deposits of glacial drift may be
seen. North of Trenton Falls the deposits appear to diminish
rapidly in quantity, so that I observed no large accumulations
near the St. Lawrence River or north of it. The farther north I
proceeded the smaller the deposits appeared to be, including the
ordinary surface soil.

From the above facts I consider there are reasonable grounds
for suspecting that the glacier receded slowly from Fenns3dvania
until its southern limit was not far north of the Mohawk River,
and then it was withdrawn more rapidly, with increasing speed,
as it proceeded north.

Some geologists consider that there was not a great amount of
glacial erosion accomplished upon the rocks in Pennsylvania. I
believe that the erosion proceeded with much greater effect in
Canada than in this State. While progressing from the north
the glacier would operate on the rocky surface of Canada during
a long time before it would reach the latitude of Pennsylvania.
Also during its decline it would still continue its abrasion in
Canada long after it had retreated from our State.

I have observed, in northern New York and Canada, that where
the country is level it is often covered with Silurian limestones or
sandstones, but where it is hilly the Laurentian rocks usually
prevail. In the latter case the Silurian rocks maj^ have formerly
existed and been removed, as they were more effectually' exposed
to the glacial erosion.

Many sharp, angular stones are scattered over the ground in
Canada among the rounded boulders. These evidently have not
been transported far from the parent i"ock, but they are suggestive
of the fact that, even near the close of the glacier's career, rocks
were still being torn into fragments. These fragments were
chiefly broken loose from the southwestern portions of the rocks.

As a shallow soil prevails in the district referred to, the trees
do not obtain a deep, substantial hold upon the ground ; conse-
quently they are easily blown down by the storms, and the forests
are filled with prostrate trees, which make travel a difficult oper-
ation there. When the forests are cleared off, the ground is in a

1883.J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 259

ver^^ rough condition. A bole in the ground indicates the place
where a tree formerly stood, while a pile of earth alongside
denotes the place where the roots of the prostrated tree trans-
ported and deposited the soil that was in the hole. Large fields
may be seen, the surfaces of which are almost wholly broken up
into holes and piles of eai'th, b}" the prostration of trees.

260 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

November 13.
The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Twenty-nine persons present.

The following was ordered to be pnblished

OBITUARY NOTICE OF CHARLES F. PARKER.
BY ISAAC C. MARTINDALE.

When a man has given to the service of the public good the
best years of his life, and that life perhaps shortened in conse-
quence of his devotion and faithfulness to known duties, it
should rest with some survivor to so place upon the historic
page this record, that perchance some disconsolate and weary
follower, ready to faint by the way, " seeing may take heart
again." For such a life is a conspicuous mark on the highway
of honest endeavor, and a beacon light ever before the devoted
inquirer after truth.

Hence I have assumed to place herein a notice of the life and
services of Charles F. Parker, late Curator-in-charge of this
Academy.

His parents resided in Philadelphia, where he was born on the
9th daj' of November, 1820. His mother dying when he was but
an infant, he was deprived of a mother's love to stimulate and
encourage him in his undertakings.

His father, being in humble circumstances, was able to give
him but a limited education. Charles, as soon as he was old
enough to be of any ser^ace, was apprenticed to bookbinding ;
his father having long been engaged in that business.

He remained in Philadelphia until about the age of 22 years,
when he went to Boston and engaged in the same business.
After residing there about two years he married Martha Kellom,
and in 1851 left Boston and moved to Leominster, where he
opened a book-store, and carried on bookbinding on his own
account. This business enterprise, not being so successful as he
had hoped, was abandoned in 1853, and he removed to Camden,
New Jersey, where he resided during the remainder of his life.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 261

About two years after the death of his mother, his father
married again, and when the father died in 1835, his widow con-
tinued to carry on the bookbinding, and Charles became a partner
and assumed the management of the business, subsequently
conducting the woik on his own account.

As a business man he was extremely conscientious in having
his work performed at the exact time that had been agreed upon ;
and he attained an enviable reputation as a neat workman — to
such an extent, that services in his business which required the
utmost care and nicety were sure to be sent to him to be per-
formed, and he would not undertake any kind of work that was
expected to be done in a cheap or hurried manner. Having the
oversight and employment of others for many years, his just
treatment of them always gave him the choice of the best work-
men, and those who were satisfactory- remained year after year
in his employ.

During the earlier part of his life he did not manifest any
especial interest in natural histor}" ; j'et for a long time he was a
companion of C. S. Rafinesque, the well-known naturalist, who
boarded in the same house. This was during the latter part of
the life of Rafinesque, when he was engaged in the manufacture
of medicines, which he contended were for the relief of " all the
ills that flesh is heir to." The writer has repeatedly heard
narrated some of the incidents in the life of this naturalist which
occurred during those years, and which seemed to have made a
lasting impression on the mind of our friend C. F. Parker ; so
much so that I am led to believe the love for natural science,
which developed in the later years of his life, was from some of
the seed then sown. One of these incidents, so characteristic of
the eccentric Rafinesque, may be mentioned here : Charles was
quite fond of remaining in bed at a later hour in the morning
than usual when he was not expected to be at his place of busi-
ness, and often entertained himself by singing some favorite
tufte; on one such occasion Rafinesque heard the usual melodious
sounds, and went to the room door, which he quickly opened,

exclaiming,

" He who sings in bed instead of sleeping,
And whistles at the table instead of eating,
Is either crazy or soon will be."

Having thus relieved his mind, he went away to his own quiet

2P)2 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF. [1883.

musings, which he did not seek to brighten by sucli display's of
levity or cheer.

Yery soon after making Camden his home, Charles became
interested in conchology, although he had never seen a collection
of shells, nor known anything of their scientific arrangement or
method of study ; neither was he acquainted with any one at
work in that department of natural history. His attention also
became directed towards insects, especially butterflies and beetles,
and learning that a society had been formed for their study, he
applied for membership in the Entomological Society of Phila-
delphia, and was elected November 11, 18G1.

This brought him in contact with men of science, and gave
him an opportunity to examine books and specimens that he had
never known of before, opening a new life and infusing a zeal
which increased with advancing years.

The study of conchology and entomolog}"^ opened the way for
other branches of natural history' ; and having become a frequent
visitor at this Academy, he was brought into intimate relations
with several of its members who were pursuing the study of
botany and making collections of plants in the immediate neigh-
borhood of Philadelphia. He soon became interested with them
in their pursuits, and took up the same study with especial
zeal. Withal, he never neglected his business, nor failed to keep
his appointments and engagements therein. He was elected to
membership in the Academy on the 29th of August, 186.5, and
forthwith entered heartily into work, for it will be remembered
that at this time the collections were not well arranged, owing
to the limited space occupied, and the want of means to secure
the services of competent workmen ; so that almost all of the
labor performed was voluntary and gratuitous.

His earliest labors in the Academy were directed to the con-
chological collection, and for seven years he devoted a large
portion of the time that could be spared from his business to its
systematic arrangement, preparing and mounting during that
period about one hundred thousand specimens, in a style which,
for neatness and adaptability for scientific study, has not been
excelled. This labor, perhaps the greatest volunteer work ever
done in the Academ3% was onl}'^ finished a short time before it
became necessary to pack the Academy- 's museum for removal to
the present building; he immediately engaged in this labor, and

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 21)3

had already' devoted much time to it, when it became apparent to
his fellow-members that the Academy would be greatly benefited
by employing him permanently for a compensation. In 1874 he
was elected one of the Curators, and on solicitation was induced
to partially give up his business as a bookbinder and accept the
meagre amount which the ISociet}^ could afford to pay him,
giving in return the greater part of his time to its work. The
entire museum was removed under his direction and arranged in
cases in this building in a very short period — the actual removal
being accomplished in about a month, the unpacking and display
in the cases in about five months. He has been annually re-elected
one of the Curators of the Academy at successive elections,
invariably receiving the full number of votes cast, however many
candidates were in nomination, thus showing the value and appre-
ciation of his services.

Although he continued his interest in the study of conchology
and entomolog}', and made quite extensive collections in both of
these departments, he seemed to have taken an especial fondness
for the study of botany, which he never afterward allowed to
falter. He was one of the first to discover that the ballast
deposits in and around Philadelphia and Camden were prolific in
introduced plants, and his knowledge of conchology sometimes
enabled him to determine the part of the world from which those
deposits came, as occasionally fragments of shells were found
therein.

In one of his journcyings to the swamps of Cape May County
he met Coe F. Austin, the noted cr^-ptogramic botanist, who died
at Closter, N. J., a few years ago, and who at that time was
engaged in the study of the flora of New Jersey. There at once
sprang up a real friendship between them, which increased as
time a*dvanced, terminating only when Austin died. The interest,
however, which had been created to endeavor to complete a list
of the plants of New Jersey was not allowed to abate ; and for
se-^eral 3'ears past, in connection with other botanists, the work
has been approaching completion to such an extent that a
preliminary catalogue has been compiled by N. L. Britton, and
printed under the auspices of the Geological Survey of New
Jerse}^, in which the name of C. F. Parker frequently appears.
Probably no botanist has made more frequent visits to the pine
barrens and swamps of that State, nor collected so extensively

204 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

of her flora, as he did ; the same ready tact displa3'ed in the work
of his hands everywhere has been especially noticeable in the prep-
aration of his herbarium specimens ; they are at once character-
istic and good, so much so that exchanges were desired from him
by the noted botanists of the country, and to-day his specimens
enrich many private collections and herbariums of institutions of
the United States and Europe. The collection of New Jersey
plants which he has left is one of the finest and most perfect that
exists, and of itself is a monument of patience and slvill of which
any one might feel proud.

The annual reports of the officers of the Academy, of late
years, show somewhat of the service he has rendered. The
mounting of specimens presented, and their arrangement, has
been one of great, labor, requiring skill, patience and care. The
neatness displayed, so characteristic of the man, has made the
collections of the Academy of inestimable value to the scientific
world and an ornament to the institution itself. Since occupying
its present building, between thirty and forty thousand additional
specimens of shells have been received, all of which have been
mounted by him, and nearly all outside of the hours in which he
was employed by the Academy, and without compensation. He
was one of the founders of the Conchological Section and of the
Botanical Section, and was active in their proceedings.

It has well been said he was a born naturalist ; he had a quick
eye and good judgment in perceiving and estimating specific
characters, and an excellent memory. His knowledge of con-
chology was probably almost as extensive as his acquirements in
botany, although he was, perhaps, more widely known in the
latter department. What he knew he was always ready to impart
to others, and the many naturalists who have consulted the col-
lections of the Academy during his curatorship invariabl}' received
from him valuable and generous aid.

The service which he gave to this Academy, the self-sacrificing
devotion to its interests ever manifested by him, pi'oved at last
to be the weapon of his own destruction. In the early part of
the present year his health rapidly gave way, so that he was
obliged to refrain from continuous work. The Council of the
Academy, mindful of his eminent services, unanimously granted
him leave of absence for the summer months, in order that rest
might, if possible, restore his wasted energies and give back

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 265

to the Academy his invaluable services ; but too late ! The
disease gradually assumed a more serious character, and at last
paralysis of the brain set in, which terminated his life on the
seventh day of September, 1883, in the sixt3'-third year of his age.
My acquaintance with him, extending back nearly a quarter of
a century, has given me full opportunity to know his character
and judge of his worth. Had he been favored with good oppor-
tunities for school education in early years, he doubtless would
have ranked among the eminent scientists of the day ; j'^et the
record which he has left of overcoming the many obstacles of
life, of his rigid adherence to right, his extremely conscientious
desire to be found faithful in all his undertakings, and the work
of his hands in all the departments in which he found engage-
ment, have given him a record and a name which must ever
remain ; whilst the memory of his many social qualities well
known to me serves to make up the triplicate of naturalist,
companion, and friend.

November 20. >

The President, Dr. Letdy, in the chair.

Twenty-nine persons present.
The following were presented for publication : —
"Notes on American Fishes preserved in the Museums at
Berlin, London, Paris and Copenhagen," by David S. Jordan.
" The Occident Ant in Dakota," by Rev. H. C. McCook.
" Staining with n8ematox3don," by Chas. L. Mitchell, M. D.
The death of John L. LeConte, M. D., a member, was announced.
The following was ordered to be printed : —

18

2.66 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

ON THE VALOE OF THE " NEARCTIC " AS ONE OF THE PEIMARY ZOOLOG-
ICAL REGIONS. REPLIES TO CRITICISMS BY MR. ALFRED RUSSEL
WALLACE AND PROF. THEODORE GILL.

BY PROFESSOR ANGELO HEILPRTN.

. The subjoined criticism bj' Mr. Alfred Russel Wallace on my
paper entitled " On the Value of the ' Nearctic ' as one of the
I'rimary Zoological Regions," published in the Proceedings of
the Academ}^ for December, 18S2, and my reply thereto, appear
in Nature under dates of March 22 and April 26 of this year: —
" In the Proceedivgs of the Academy of Natural Sciences of
Fhiladeljihia (December, 1882), Prof. Angelo Heilprin has an
article under the above title in which he seeks to show that the
Nearctic and Pahiearctic should form one region, for which he
proposes the somewhat awkward name ' Triarctic Region,'' or the
region of the three northern continents. The reasons for this
proposal are, that in the chief vertebrate classes the proportion
of peculiar forms is less in both the Nearctic and Pahiearctic than
in any of the other regions ; while if tliese two regions are com-
bined, the}- will, together, have an amount of peculiarity greater
than some of the tropical regions.

" This may be quite true Avithout leading to the conclusion
argued for. The best division of the earth into zoological regions
is a question not to be settled by looking at it fron:) one point of
view alone ; and Prof. Heilprin entirely omits two considerations
- — peculiarity due to the absence of widespread groups, and
geographical individuality. The absence of the families of hedge-
hogs, swine and dormice, and of the genera Meles, Equiis, Bos,
Gazella, Mus, Cricetus, Meriones, Dipus and Hystrix, among
mammals; and of the important families of fly-catchers and
starlings, the extreme rarity of larks, the scarcity- of warblers,
and the absence of such widespread genera as Acrocephalus,
JIypolai.<, liuticilla, Saxicola, Accentor, Garrulus, Fringilla,
Emheriza, Motaci la, Yunx^ C'uculus, Caprimulgus, Perdix,
Coturnix, and all the true pheasants, among birds, many of which
groups may almost be said to characterize the Old World as
compared witli tlie New, must surely be allowed to have great
weight in determining this question.

"The geographical individuality of the two regions is of no

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 26Y

less importance, and if we once qnit these well-marked and most
natural primary divisions we shall, I believe, open up questions
as regards the remaining regions which it will not be easy to set
at rest. There runs tlirough Prof. Heilprin's paper a tacit assump-
tion that there should be an equivalence, if not an absolute
equality, in the zoological characteristics and peculiarities of all
the regions. But even after these two are united, there will
remain discrepancies of almost equal amount among the rest,
since in some groups the Neotropical, in others the Australian,
far exceed all other regions in their specialt3^ The temperate
and cold parts of the globe are necessarily less marked by highly
peculiar groups than the tropical areas, because they have been
recently subjected to great extremes of climate, and have thus
not been able to preserve so many ancient and specialized forms
as the more uniformly warm areas. But, taking this fact into
account, it seems to me that the individuality of the Nearctic
and Paloearctic regions is very well marked, and much greater
than could have been anticipated; and I do not think that natur-
alists in general will be induced to give them up by any such
arguments as are here brought forward.

"Alfred R. Wallace."

Reply to the preceding : —

" Permit me to make a few remarks relative to Mr. Wallace's
criticism (Nature, vol. xxvii, p. 482) of m}^ paper on ' The Value
of the Neai'ctic as one of the Primary Zoological Regions.'
Briefly stated, it is maintained in the early portion of this paper
(1) that the Nearctic ' and Pahiearctic ftiunas taken individually
exhibit, in comparison with the other regional faunas (at least
the Neotropical, Ethiopian and Australian), a marked absence
of positive distinguishing characters, a deficiency which in the
mammalia extends to families, genera, and species, and one
which, in the case of the Nearctic region, also equally (or nearly
so) distinguishes the reptilian and amphibian faunas; (2) that
thi§ deficiency is principally due to the circumstance that many
groups of animals which would otherwise be peculiar to, or very
characteristic of, one or other of the regions, are prevented fromi

' In the paper under consideration, I have given what appear to me sutis-
factory reasons for detaching ce'tain portions of the Southwestern United
State's from the Nearctic (my Triarctic), and uniting them with the
Neotropical region.

268 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

being such by reason of their being held in common by the two
regions ; and (3) that the Nearctic and Palsearctic faunas taken
collectively are more clearly defined from any or all of the other
faunas than either the Nearctic or Palaearctic taken individually,
" In reference to these points, Mr. Wallace, while not denying
the facts, remarks : ' The best division of the earth into zoo-
logical regions is a question not to be settled by looking at it
from one point of view alone ; and Prof. Heilprin entirely omits
two considerations — peculiarity due to the absence of widespread
groups, and geographical individuality.' Numerous families and
genera from the classes of mammals and birds are then cited as
being entirely wanting in the western hemisphere, and which —
in many cases almost sutflcient to ' characterize the Old World
as compared with the New ' — ' must surely be allowed to have
great weight in determining this question.' No one can deny
that the absence from a given region of certain widespread
groups of animals is a factor of very considerable importance in
determining the zoological relationship of that region, and one
that is not likely to be overlooked by any fair-minded investi-
gator of the subject. But the value of this negative character
afforded by the absence of certain animal groups as distinguish-
ing a given fauna, is in great measure proportional to the extent
of the positive character — that furnished by the presence of
peculiar groups - and indeed may be said to be entirely depen-
dent on it. No region can be said to be satisfactorily distin-
guished from another without its possessing both positive and
negative distinguishing characters, Mr. AVallace has in his
several publications laid considerable stress ui)on the negative
features of the Nearctic fauna as separating it from tlie Palaj-
ai'ctic or from any other, but he has not, it appears to me, suffi-
cientl}' emphasized the great lack, lohen compared to other
faunas^ of the positive element, the consideration of which is the
point aimed at in the first portion of my paper, and which has
led to the conclusions already stated — that only by uniting the
Nearctic and Pala?arctic regions do we produce a collective
fauna which is broadly distinguished by both positive and nega-
tive characters from that of any other region. If, as Mr.
Wallace seems to argue, the absence from North America of
the ' families of hedgehogs, swine and dormice, and of the
genera Mehs, Eqiius, Boh, Gazella, 3Ias, Cricelus, Merionen,

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 269

Dipus and Hystrix,^ be sufficient, as far as the mammalian fauna
is concerned, to separate tliat region from the Palaearctic, could
not on nearly equally strong grounds a separation be effected in
the Paltearctic region itself? Thus, if we were to consider the
western division of the Palaearctic region, or what corresponds
to the continent of Europe of geographers, as constituting an
independent region of its own, it would be distinguished from
the remainder of what now belongs to the Palaearctic region by
negative characters probably fully as important as those indicated
by Mr. Wallace as separating the Nearctic from the Palaearctic
region. The European mammalian fauna would be wholly
deficient, or nearly so, in the genera Equus, Moschiis, Camelus,
Poephagus, Gazella, Oryx, Addox, Saiga, Ovis^ Lagomys, Tamias,
in several of the larger Felidse, as the tiger and leopard, and in
a host of other forms. A similar selection coiild be made from
the class of birds (among the most striking of these the Phasi-
anidse and Strutliionidae) , but it is scarcely necessary in this place
to enter upon an enumeration of characteristic forms. Divisions
of this kind, to be characterized principally or largely by nega-
tive faunal features, could be effected in all the regions, and in
some instances with probabl}'^ more reason than in the case under
discussion.

" But the question suggests itself, what amount of characters,
whether positive or negative, or both, is sufficient to distinguish
one regional fauna from another ? Mr. Wallace states : ' There
runs thi'ough Prof. Ileilprin's paper a tacit assumption that there
should be an equivalence, if not an absolute equality, in the
zoological characteristics and peculiarities of all the regions.'
Is it to be inferred from this quotation that Mr. Wallace recog-
nizes-no such general equivalence? Is a region holding in its
fauna, say from 15 to 20 per cent, of peculiar or highly charac-
teristic forms, to be considered equivalent in value to one where
the faunal peculiarity amounts to 60 to 80 per cent. ? If there
be no equivalence of any kind required, why not give to manj'^ of
the subregions, as now recognized, the full value of region ?

" Surely, on this method of looking at the question, a province
could readily be raised to the rank of a full region. In the
matter of geographical individuality little need be said, as the
circumstance, whether it be or be not so, that the 'temperate
and cold parts of the globe are necessarily less marked by highly

210 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

peculiar groups than the tropical areas, because they have been
recently subjected to great extremes of climate,' does not affect
the present issue, seeing that the peculiarity is greatly increased
by uniting the two regions in question ; nor does it directly affect
the question of the Nearctic-Palaearctic relationship.

" The second part of my paper deals with the examination of
the reptilian and amphibian faunas, and the general conclusion
arrived at is: 'That by the community of its mammalian,
batrachian and reptilian cliaracters, the Nearctic fauna (exclu-
ding therefrom the local faunas of the Sonoran and Lower Cali-
forhian subregions. which are Neotropical) is shown to be of a
distinctively Old World type, and to be indissolubly linked to
the Palsearctic (of which it forms only a lateral extension).'
Towards this conclusion, which, it is claimed, is also borne out
b}'^ the land and fresh-water mollusca and the butterflies among
insects, I am now happy to add the further testimony of Mr.
Wallace (overlooked when preparing my article) respecting the
Coleoptera ('Distribution,' ' Encycl. Britann.,' 9th ed., vii,
p. 274).

"As regards the name ' Triarctic,' by which I intended to
designate the combined Nearctic and Palaearctic regions, and
which may or may not be ' somewhat awkward,' I beg to state
that, at the suggestion of Prof. Alfred Newton (who, as he
informs me, has arrived from a study of the bird faunas at con-
elusions approximately identical with ni}- own), it has been
replaced by 'Holarctic' In conclusion, I would say that, while
the views enunciated in my paper may not meet with general
acceptance at the hands of naturalists, it is to be hoped that they
will not be rejected because they may ' open up questions as
regards the remaining regions which it will not be easy to set at
rest.' "Angelo Heilprin,

^^ Academy of Natural Sciences, Philadelphia, Apiil 6."

In the issue of Nature for June 7, Prof. Theodore Gill, in an
article entitled " The Northern Zoogeographical Regions," submits
the following criticisms on my paper supplementary to those of
Mr. Wallace : —

" The facts of zoogeography' are so involved, and often appar-
ently contradictory, that a skilful dialectician with the requisite
knowledge can make a plausible argument for antithetical postu-

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 271

lates. Prof. Heilpriii being a skilful dialectician and well
informed, has submitted a prett}^ argument in favor of the union
of the North American or ' Xearetic ' and Eurasiatic or ' Palae-
arctic' regions (Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1882, pp. 316-334,
and Nature, vol. xxvii, p. 606), but Mr. Wallace has, with perfect
justness it seems to me, objected to his proposition (Natu7'e, vol.
xxvii, pp. 482. 483). As Prof. Heilprin's arguments have not
been entirelj^ met, however, permit me to submit some further
objections to his views.

" Prof. Heilprin has contended ' (1) that by famil}-, generic,
and specific characters, as far as the mammalia are concerned,
the Nearctic and Palsearctic faunas taken collectively are more
clearly defined from any or all of the other regions than either
the Nearctic or Pala?arctic taken individually; and (2) that by
the community- of family, generic and specific characters the
Nearctic region is indisputabl3' united to the Palasarctic, of which
it forms a lateral extension.'

" Prof. Heilprin has formulated these conclusions after a sum-
maiy of the families and genera common and peculiar to the
regions in question.

"As to families Prof. Heilprin has pi'esented the following
figures : —

Nearctic,

Paljiearctic, .....
Oriental, .....
Australian, .....
Ethiopian, .....
Neotropical, ....

" The proportions of peculiar genera to the entire mammalian
faunas of the several regions are stated to be as follows : —

All.

Peculiar.

. 26

1

. 36

0

. 36

3

. 22

8

. 44

9

. 31

8

All. Peculiar. Percentage.

Nearctic, .... 14 26 35

Palaearctic, .

Oriental,

Australian, .
Ethiopian, .
Neotropical,

100 35 35

118 54 46

70 45 64

142 90 63

131 103 78

The question may naturally recur, why the line which sep-

272 PROUJiEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

arates ' regions ' from ' subregions ' should be drawn between 35
and 46 per cent, rather than between 46 and 63 or 64 per cent.,
or even between 64 and 78 per cent. Prof. Heilprin has not told
us why, and I am unable to appreciate the reason therefor.
Surely it is not sufficient to answer by simply asking the question
put in Nature (p. 606).

"But an analysis of more (but onl^' approximately) correct
figures and a more logical classification of mammals than that
adopted by Prof. Heilprin reveal factors materiall}^ contravening
the tabular statements of that gentleman.

" First we must exclude the marine mammals, because their
distribution and limitation are determined by other factors than
those which regulate the terrestrial ones. A consideration then
of the terrestrial forms leads to the following results : —

" The Arctamerican or Nearctic region has twenty-seven
families, of which eleven are not shared with Eurasia and four
are peculiar; it has sixt}' -eight genera, of which forty-five do
not enter into Eurasia.

" The Eurasiatic or Palsearctic region has thirty-two' families,
of which seventeen are excluded from North America, and it
possesses eighty -nine ' genera, of which sixty have failed to become
developed in America.

" Such contrasts will more than compare generally with those
existing between Eurasia and India, and even between the ' Tri-
arctic ' or ' Holarctic ' and Indian ' regions,' and the same de-
structive process by which the northern regions are abrogated
would entail the absorption of the Indian as well into a hetero-
geneous whole. The three can in fact be well united (as Csenogrea),
and contrasted with a group (Eogtea) consisting of the African,
South American, and Australian regions, as I long ago urged
{Ann. and Mag. Nat. Hist. [4], xv, 251-255, 1875), but the claims
of each to be considered as ' regions ' or realms are not thereby
affected. " Tiieo. Gill.

*' Smithsonian Institution, Washington, May 12."

The above criticisms of Prof. Gill fall into two distinct cate-
gories, which may be conveniently formulated as follows : —

' These are the groups admitted by Prof. Heilpriu, exclusive of the
Pinuipeds.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 2T3

1. Accepting the data as given, are tlie conclusions drawn from
them necessarily correct ?

2. Are the data themselves correct ?

The first of the questions is answered by a negative in interro-
gation, if so it may be termed. Prof. Gill objects to my (?) method
of distinguishing between the larger and smaller zoogeographical
divisions, and pointingly submits that "The question may natur-
ally recur, why the line which separates 'regions' from 'sub-
regions ' should be drawn between 35 and 46 per cent, rather than
between 46 and 63 or 64 per cent., or even between 64 and 78 per
cent. Prof. Heilprin has not told us why, and I am unable to appre-
ciate the reason therefor. Surely it is not sufficient to answer by
simply asking the question put in Nature (p. 606)." The problem
here stated is certainl}^ one that does not admit of a ready logical
solution, and one which the writer has never attempted to solve ;
nor, as far as he is aware, has its solution ever been effected by
an}' other writer on zoogeography. 78 is indisputably as near to
64 as this last is to 46, and but little less near than 46 is to 35 ;
and if one or two more terms be added to the series, it may still
be contended with equal justice that 46 holds approximately the
same relation (in this sense) to 35 as 35 does to 25, and 25 to 15
as 15 to 5, and so to either end. So far, well and good. But the
fact still remains, nevertheless, that a region whose fauna is char-
acterized by 90 or 78 per cent, of peculiarities is eminently well
defined from any and all other regions; that one whose peculiar-
ities amount to 64 or 46 per cent, is considerably less well-defined;
and that another, where the peculiarity amounts to only 15 or 10
per cent., is still less well-defined, and, in fact, scarcely defined at
all. If a line of division or separation is to be drawn at all it
must be drawn somewhere, and this somewhere must be dictated
in great part b}' common sense.

As regards the second question (2), Prof. Gill is much more
emphatic in his (negative) repl}'. In the first place, it is pleaded
that the marine mammals ought to have been excluded from any
analysis bearing upon the subject of zoogeography, "because
their distribution and limitation are determined by other factors
than those which regulate the terrestrial ones." But surely if
these forms are to be excluded, we might for almost identical
reasons exclude the birds, since in the distribution of this class
of animals factors are involved which are in no way operative in

274 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

the dispersal of severa,! other classes of land animals, such as the
mammals, reptiles, moUusks, etc. And yet it is largely, indeed it
might be said almost wholly, upon the distribution of birds that
the principles of zoogeography, with its existing classification,
were originally sketched out. Granting, however, for the sake of
argument, the justice of plea made, are the results in an}^ way
materially affected or altered ? Most emphatically not, as will
be made manifest b}^ an examination of the accompanying tables,
where the original and new (or reduced) data are placed immedi-
atel}^ under each other : —

Of 26 Nearctic families (land and marine) 19 are also Paliearctic

^14 per cent.
Of 23 Nearctic families (land only) 16 are also Paljearctic =

10 per cent.
Of 74 Nearctic genera (land and marine) 35 are also Pahiearctic

= 4*1 per cent.
Of 62 Nearctic genera (land only) 26 are also Palaearctic =

42 per cent.
Of 74 Nearctic genera (land and marine) 26 are peculiar =

35 per cent.
Of 62 Nearctic genera (land only) 23 are peculiar = 37 percent.

The 26 peculiar Nearctic genera (land and marine) comprise
60 species, or 21 per cent, of the entire number (279) of species.

The 23 peculiar Nearctic genera (land only) comprise 57 species,
or 21 per cent, of the entire number (267) of land species.

It will thus be seen that the greatest variation in any place is
only five per cent. If, as has been done in my paper, we unite
the Nearctic and Palaearctic regions, we will then have, as
claimed : —

86 peculiar genera (land and marine) out of a total of 139 = 62

per cent.; or, deducting the marine forms —
74 peculiar genera out of a total of 127 land forms = 58 per

cent.
And if we consider the specific forms represented by these
peculiar genera, we have —

284 out of a total of 675 (land and marine) = 42 per cent. ; or,

deducting the marine forms —
264 out of a total of 655 land forms = 40 per cent.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 275

Here ngain, therefore, the variation is reduced to an insignifi-
cant amount — to 4 and 2 per cent.

It has been further objected, that " a more logical classification
of mammals " than that which has been followed in my paper,
would reveal facts materially contravening my tabular statements,
but Prof. Gill fails to inform us what this " more logical classi-
fication " may be, and it therefore becomes impossible to theorize
on his premises.^ The distinguished naturalist of Washington is,
however, certainly in error when he maintains that the Arctamer-
ican fauna has 4 (instead of 2 — Haploodontidae and Zapodidae —
or at the utmost, including the not generally recognized Antilo-
capridse, 3) peculiar families ; nor can we understand from his
data how, if 29 Eurasiatic genera are represented in Arctainerica,
only 23 Arctamerican genera are developed in Eurasia.

From what has alread}^ been said it will be seen that there is
nothing in either Mr. Wallace's or Prof. GilPs arguments which
might tend towards altering my views on the question at issue ;
and I must therefore still maintain, in the face of the evidence
before us, that, in m}' judgment, there is not even the shadow of
a peg upon which to hang the Nearctic (as distinct from the
Palamrctic) region of zoogeographers.

' There can be no doubt that certain emendations to the classification
followed might have been advantageously made ; as, for example, by the
introduction of the genus Cariacits; but the very few alterations that
could have been suggested through the works of the most recent, and, as
usually recognized, most competent authorities on the subject of the
mammalia, would pioduce no really appreciable difference in the result.

2'76 proceedings of the academy of [1883.

November 27.
The President, Dr. Leidy. in the chair.
Forty-two persons present.

Note on Two New California Spiders and their Nests. — Rev.
Dr, McCooic presented a small collection of spiders received from
Mr. W. (j. Wright, San Bernardino, Cal., mailed November 18.
One of these came within a nest, and is a Saltigrade spider,
probably an Attus. The nest is a rare one, and was so happily
placed, by the builder, on a branch of sagebrush {Ephedra
antisyphillitica\ that it was preserved intact. It is the only one
which Mr. Wright had seen in site. Another nest, which he
had no doubt was the same, he had observed torn from its place
b^'^ some bird, as material for the construction of a bird's-nest.

Nests somewhat similar arc habitually made by Pennsylvania
Saltigrades upon or among leaves which shrink up as they die
and tear the spinning work so as to destroy the specimen. The
one exhibited was in perfect condition. It is the tent and egg-nest
of the species which was alive within it, and the speaker thought
to be new. It is a large example, five-eighths inch in body-length,
stout, the legs of moderate thickness, the whole animal covered
closely with grayish white hairs, the skin beneath being black.
Dr. McCook named the species, provisionally, Attus opifex., with
a double reference to the discoverer (Mr. Wright) and the admir-
able hous.ewright qualities of the aranead herself. The nest is
externally an egg-shaped mass of white spinning-work, three
inches long by two and one-half inches wide. The outer part con-
sists of a mass of fine silken lines crossing in all directions and
lashed to the twigs within which it is enclosed. This maze sur-
rounds a sac or cell of thickly-woven sheeted silk, irregularly
oval in shape, two inches long by one inch wide, and also attached
to the surroi^nding twigs. At the bottom this cell or tent is
pierced b}^ a circular opening which serves the spider as the door
of her domicile. It is the habit of her genus to live and hibernate
within such a silken nest. Against one side of the tent within
is spun a lenticular cocoon (double convex) of thick white silk,
within which the eggs were placed. The young spiders when
received had escaped from the cocoon, and occupied the package-
box. They are about one-eighth inch long, resembling the mother,
but less heavily coated with gray.

This collection also contained three specimens (9) of the
genus Pacetia, as defined by Thorell.^ This genus belongs to

^ See "On European Spiders, Novae Acta Reg. Soci. Sci. Upsalensis,"
vol. vii, ser. 3d, p. 196.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 2T'7

the famil}' Oxyopoida? of the Citigrade spiders, to which it is
doubtless properly relegated in spite of certain analogies with
the AttoidjB (Saltigrades) on the one hand, and the Philodrominffi
(Laterigrades) on "the other, Mr. Wright calls them "jumping
spiders." Hentz, who describes several species of Oxyopes, says
that 0. salticus leaps with more force and vivacity than .an
Attus.'^ Of 0. viridans he thinks it possible that the mother
carries its young like Lycosa. This family of spiders is arboreal
in habit, is found on plants, with their legs extended, thus dis-
guising themselves after the manner known as " mimicry," and
springing upon their prey. The cocoon is usually conical, sur-
rounded with points, placed in a tent made between leaves drawn
together and lashed, and is sometimes of a pale greenish color.
0^ viridon>^ will make a cocoon suspended mid-air hy threads
attached to the external prominences, which she will watch
constantly from a neighboring site. Dr. McCook believed the
species presented to be new ; the bodj'-length is fourteen milli-
metres ; legs long, tapering, many long spines. The body is
3^ellow and pale yellow; the cephalothorax striped longitudinally
with bright red streaks; the abdomen marked above with red
bell-shaped and angular patterns, and beneath by red streaks ;
the sternum red, the legs yellow with red rings at the joints. The
species was named Fucetia aurora, because of the bright red
streaks upon the 3'ellow background, suggesting " the daughter
of the dawn."

According to some field-notes forwarded by Mr. Wright since
the above was in print, Pucetia aurora is rather abundant in a
limited locality. The nests are uniformly upon bushes of Erio-
gonum coryvibosum, and several specimens of them were sent.
The nest is hung from three to four feet from the ground, and,
being upon the topmost twigs, is easily seen from a distance.
The cocoon is a straw-colored sphere or ovoid, five-eighths of an
inch in diameter. It is covered externall}' with various pointed
rugosities, from which numerous lines extend to the adjoining
foliage, and into the maze of right lines which extends below the
corjmib of the plant upon which all the specimens sent are
attached.' This retitelarian snare doubtless serves as a tem-
porary home for the young spiders. The cocoon has no suture,
the spiderlings escaping by cutting the case, which is thick and
closely woven. No tloss padding was found inside of the case.

Upon approaching the nest, the mother is usually seen
hovering over the young spiders, or guarding a new sack of
eggs. She lays two, and sometimes three broods on one twig.
Sometimes the young ones will be still in the old nest, while the
mother is guarding a new bundle of eggs immediately adjoining
the old one. In no case were an}' 3'oung ones seen on the
mother's back. The mother stays close by her nest. If the

1 "Spiders of the United States," p. 48.

278 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

spiderlings be hutched, she will, perhaps, drop down a foot or so,
if a first etfort to capture her he not successful ; but will not drop
to the ground, unless forced to do so. If guarding her eggs, she
must be forcibly separated from the cocoon. The young ones
take alarm sooner than their mother ; they drop down a few
inches — or, at times, two feet — every one on its tiny thread,
forming a pretty, swaying fringe. In a few moments, if all is
still, they climb up again ; but if frightened, will drop to the
ground, and run. The little ones in such case do not jump.

It is a further interesting fact in so-called " mimicry " that of
several examples of P. aurora seen by Mr. Wright, one found on
a green bush was in color almost wholly green, with scarcelj' a
trace of red ; while two found on a hoar^'-white bush had simu-
lated the v/hite color of their habitat. The specimens, as described
above by Dr. McCook, approach in coloration the prevailing
hue of the Eriogonum on which they were nested, and he was
inclined to think that this is the normal color of the adult, which
is taken on as the animal matures; indeed, as the green and
whitish specimens were not sent to him, he would be inclined to
think (awaiting further evidence) that those colors ma}' have
been due to immature age. At least, the tendency to such colors
is strong in young spiders. However, the fact of mimicr^^ is not
improbable, as Dr. McCook had observed it in our native
Laterigrades.

From the same gentleman and localit}^ Dr. McCook had
received a 9 specimen of Argiojje faKciata^y^hxiih is thus located
upon the Pacific Coast, giving this beautiful and interesting
spider a continental distribution.

A Web-Spinning Neuropterovs Insect. — Dr. Henry C. McCook
announced that a small neuropterous insect, Psocus sexpunclatus,
had been lecently found on the Wissahickon Creek, Fairmount
Park, Philadelphia, by Mr. S. F. Aaron, of this Academy. This
is the first time, so far as the speaker was aware, that this insect
has been found in the United States, or indeed North America.
Mr. Aaron took the insects home in the paper boxes in which he
had collected tliem, and thus observed the fact which has hereto-
fore been noted of the p]uropean species, that thej^ spin ivebs.
McLachlan ' expresses the belief that both sexes possess the
power of spinning a web, which, he affirms, is not distinguish-
able fi'om that made by spiders. If a number of living speci-
mens be enclosed in a pill-box, it will be found that at the
end of a few hours the interior is traversed in all directions by
numerous lines of web. Mr. McLachlan further states that the
eggs, which are laid in clusters, are also protected with a web by
the female. These insects are very common in England, where

' Monograpli of the Brit. Psotidse, Entom. Monthly Magz., vol. iii,
1866-G7, p. 228.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 219

they are found more or less in societies, on tree-trunks, palings,
amongst the herbage of trees, and even in houses. Mr. Aaron dis-
covered them in similar habitat here, that is to say on the trunks
of trees. A congener of the above species, Psocu>i purus Walsh,
which is also found in the vicinity', makes a tubular or tent-like
web in the farrows of bark and crevices of trees, in texture some-
thing like that spun b3^ certain tube-weaving (Tubitelarise) spiders
and other species ; or, perhaps more nearly like the covering
woven over themselves by certain Lepidopterous larvaj. The
insect lives under this tent precisely as do the spiders referred to.
One who would capture them must push them out by pressing
upon the tent.

It is a matter of such rare interest to find a true insect in the
imago state spinning a web, and apparently for its protection,
that Dr. McCoolc thought the discovery in our locality of such
an insect worthy of this record. The spinning function among
true insects, he believed, with the single exception of the Psocidte,
is confined to tlie larval state ; spiders (it is scarcely necessary to
state) not being true insects, but belonging to the Arachnida.
The speaker further thought that this larval characteristic of
web-spinning might be correlated with the rank which zoologists
usually assign the Neuroptera as lowest among the orders of the
insects, its larva-like body being one indication of its low position
in its class. However, it is a striking example of the diverging and
independent lines along wliich life-torms iiave sprung up in nature,
that a function which belongs to the larval stage of insects, and
which appears in the imago state only in the lowest type of tiie
same, should appear as the most permanent and characteristic
function of the spider — an animal which, although it is now
commonly given a lower place in the same subkingdom with the
insects (Arthropoda), is certainl}- very differently and little less
highh' organized. It would be a difficult task. Dr. McCook
thought, to trace or even imagine an}' evolutionary connection,
whether of progression or retrogression, between the web-spinning
spider, the web-spinning insect-Uirva, and the web-spinning neu-
ropterous imago Psocus Hexpunvtatus. There is, indeed, this
common factor, the spinning function, but the phj^siologist fails
to perceive any use or combination of the same which can unite
the organisms in which it inheres.

Art. yj, Chap. X, of the By-Laws was amended by striking out
from the first line the word " onl}^," and from the second and
third lines the words " obtain permission to," so that the article
now reads: "Members and Correspondents of the Academy shall
have free access to the librar3\ Other persons may consult it at
any time through the introduction of a member, or upon applica
tion to the librarian, while such member or librarian is present,

280 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

but minors under sixteen years of age shall not be permitted to
examine any work, except under the immediate supervision of
the librarian or of a member."

Art. YII, Chap. XI, was amended by striking out all after the
word " public," in the second line, and inserting in lieu thereof,
"dail}', except Sunday, and at least one day in the week without
charge on such conditions and under sucii regulations as the Council
shall establish from time to time," so that the article now reads :
" The Museum of the Academy shall be open to the public daily,
except Sunday, and at least one day in the week without charge,
on such conditions and under such regulations as the Council
shall from time to time establish."

The following were elected members : George L. Knowles,
Ferdinand McCann, Lewis E. Lev}-, J. Alexander Savage, and
Mrs. Wm. E. Ellicott.

The following were elected correspondents : E. Marie, of Paris,
Marchese di Monterosato, of Palermo, and H. J. Carter, of
Budleigh-Satterton, Devonshire, England.

The following were ordered to be printed : —

1883. J NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA, 281

NOIES ON AMERICAN FISHES PRESERVED IN THE MTJSEXTMS AT BERLIN,
LONDON, PARIS AND COPENHAGEN.

BY DAVID S. JORDAN.

In a recent visit to Europe, the writer had the privilege of
examining numerous typical specimens of American fishes,
preserved in the British Museum, in the Museum d'Histoire
Naturelle in Paris, and in the Museums of the Universities of
Berlin and Copenhagen. In the present paper are given selec-
tions from the notes taken on these specimens, which have a
bearing on the nomenclature of our fishes.

I have to express my personal obligations to Dr. G. A. Boulenger,
of the British Museum ; to Dr. Bocourt and M. Thominot, of the
Museum at Paris; to Dr.F.Hilgendorf,of the University of Berlin,
and to Dr. Christian F. Liitken, of the University of Copenhagen,
for many favors in connection with our studies of these spec-
imens.

1. Alius assimilis Giinther.

(Cat, Fishes Brit. Mus., v, 146.)

Type, Lake Yzabal, Atlantic slope, Central America.

Area between the eyes smooth, extending backward in the
form of a rather narrow triangle which is moderately obtuse
behind. Fontanelle narrow and short, ending far in front of the
occipital process, not extending backward as a gTOOve behind the
smooth area of the top of the head ; posterior end of fontanelle
midway between tip of snout and middle of ante-dorsal shield.
Occipital process broad, its edges not straight. Band of palatine
teeth large, but not produced backward on the inner margin.

The character of the fontanelle in this species is not described
by Dr. Giinther. We have elsewhere identified with A. aanimilis
(BulbU. S. Fish. Comm., 1882, 47), a number of specimens from
Mazatlan (28161, 28189, 28210, 28213, 28221, 28232, 28276 and
28304, U. S. Nat. Mus.), belonging to a species very different
from the true A. assimilis, although agreeing fairly with Dr.
Gunther's description.

There is no evidence of the occurrence of the true A. assimilis
in Pacific waters.

19

282 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF 1883.]

2. Arius caerulescens GUnther.

(Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., v, 149.)

Types from Huamuchal, Pacific slope.

Head more depressed than in A. assimilis. Fontanelle A^ery
short, ending abruptly behind and not produced in a groove
behind the smooth area of the top of the head, the boundary of
the smooth area being rather broadly convex. Occipital process
broader than long, its edges nearl}^ straight. Bands of palatine
teeth small, not produced backward on the inner margin. Paired
fins black at base above. This species is allied to A. guntemal-
ensis, but is apparently distinct. It is well separated from A.
assimilis.

3. Arius seemanni GUnther.

' (Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., v, 147.)
{? Arius assimilis, Jor. & Gilb., Bull. U. S. Fish Com., 1882, 47.)

Type from Central America, the exact locality unknown.

Fontanelle extending backward in a deep and narrow groove,
which reaches the occipital process. Middle of top of head
smooth, much as in A. plalypogon.

It is probable that this specimen belongs to the species hereto-
fore erroneous!}" called by us Ariui^ assimilis. We have had some
hesitation in making this identification, because in none of our
Mazatlan specimens does the fontanelle reach the occipital pro-
cess, and it is not certain that the type of A. aeemanni came
from the Pacific coast. Still, the probability is so strongly in
favor of identity that, in absence of further evidence, we shall
consider them the same.

4. Myrophis punctatus Lli ken. *

(Vidensk. Meddel. Nat. Foreu., Kjob, 1«51, 1 .)

Type, West Indies ; Suenson Coll.

Beginning of dorsal midway between gill-opening and vent.
Head 2f in trunk. Cleft of mouth about 3^ in head. This is
apparently identical with M. microsligmins Poey (Rep. Fis. Nat.,
ii, 50). The description of M. punctatus Gthr. (viii, 51 ) is taken
from the Panama species, M. vafer Jor. & Gilb. It is bareh'
possible that M. lumbricus Jor. & Gilb. will prove to be the
young of M. punctatus.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILAUELPIIIA. 283

5. ExoccettiS rufipinnis Cuvie'- & Valenciennes.

(Hist. Nat., Poiss., xix, 99.)

T3pe from Payta, Peru; an adult specimen, in good condition.

Head 4t in length to base of caudal ; depth 5§ ; lower lobe of
caudal 3^; eye 3J in head. Ventrals 3^ in body. D. 11; A.
1, 11. Insertion of anal scarcely behind that of dorsal, its base
but little shorter ; both fins low, the longest ray of dorsal little
more than half the base of the fin. Pectorals reaching base of
caudal; ventrals to just behind last ray of anal. Third ra^' of
pectoral branched, the fourth longest. Pectorals and A'entrals
centrally dusky, without distinct markings.

This species is probabW identical with E. doivi Gill (Proc.
Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1863, 161), from Panama, a species not now
represented in the National Museum.

6. Tylosurus hians (Cuv. & Val ) Jor. & Gilb.

(Belone Mans Cuv. & Yal., xviii, 432.)
In the type of this species the insertion of the ventrals is
about midway between the base of the caudal and the middle of
the arch of the base of the upper jaw, or slightly nearer tip of
pectoral than front of anal. According to Valenciennes, " elle
est attache un pen avant le milieu de la longueur totale." This
statement is not quite correct. On account of this discrepancy.
Poey has described the Cuban fish as distinct, under the name of
Belone macidata (Mem. Cuba, ii, 290), the ventral fin 1)eing
inserted behind the middle of the length of the body. It is not
likely that an^^ real difference exists. The specimens found along
our Atlantic coast agree ver}^ well with Poey"s description.

7. Querimana harengus (GUnther) .Tor. & Gilb.

[Myxus harengus Giintlier, lit, 467.)
The tj\)GHO^ Myxus harengus have but two anal spines, instead
of three, as stated in the original description. Specimens of this
species from Zorritas, Peru, are in the museum of Yale Colle<re.
In tiie National Museum are specimens from Panama, Mazatlan,
and Charleston, S. C.

8. Qaerimana cihilabis (Cuv. k Val.) Jor.

{Mvg'l ciliilabis, C. & V. xi, 151.)

The types of Mugil ciliilabis, from Lima, belong also to the

genus Querimana. The species is very close to Q. harengus

differing in rather stronger dentition, stiffened cilia, or teeth being

present in both jaws, rather strongest in the upper. Head 3? in

284 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

length, depth 4^; no adipose ej^elid ; preorbital serrate; anal
spines 2 ; first soft ray of anal simple, but evidently articulate.

9. Stromateus medius Peters.

(Berliner Monatsber., 1869, 707.)

Type, No. 7073, Berlin Museum, from Mazatlan. In the orig
inal description of this species the lateral line is said to be
"keeled" on the caudal peduncle. This "keel" is si m pi j^ the
ordinar^^ tubing of the lateral line, which is precisely as in the
ordinary species of Stromateus.

Head 3^ in length, depth 1^^^; pectoral 2f in body; dorsal
lobe 4^ ; caudal 2|. Dorsal with 42 develojied rays ; anal with
32. Length 7i inches, fins distinctly punctulate.

10. Caranx leucurus Guntber.

(Proc. Zool. Soc. Lonrl., 1864, 24.)

T^' pes, two young examples. In our Review of the Carangina?
(Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 194) ^ we have placed this species
in the group called Urasjns, among the species with broad
maxillaries. It should be removed to the group called Hemi-
caranx^ among the species with narrow maxillaries, its relations
being with G. atrimanus and C. amblyrhynchas.

Maxillary quite narrow, its length 2| in head, reaching pupil;
ej'e not large. Dorsal and anal fins unusually high, but the
anterior rays not exserted beyond the rest ; middle rays of dorsal
i to f length of head (probably shorter in the adult) ; sheath at
base of dorsal little developed ; caudal fin not deeply forked ;
pectoral short, 1^ in head (3'oung) ; curve of lateral line 1|^ in
straight part, its length 3| times its depth. Teeth slender, rather
long, uniserial above and nearly so below.

^In the paper above quoted (p. 194) we have placed Caranx ruber in the
group with the anterior r;iys of soft dorsal and anal not falcate. In speci-
mens from Guiana examined by ns, these rays, although very low, are still,
properly speaking, falcate, the longest being about 2^ in bead. The species
should therefore be removed from the subgenus Uruspis to that of Caranx.

On page 197. in the same paper, Caranx fasciatus, Cuv. & Val. (ix, p.
70), described from a drawing made in Mexico, may be added as an
extremely doubtful synonym of Caranx vinclus.

Caranx cubensis (Pojy) should doubtless be recognized as a distinct
species.

On pages 206 and 20"^ tlie name Chloroscombrus stirurii» occurs. This is
a Japuvs for Chlor. orqiieta, the former having been a MSS. name for which
the latter was substituted before the publication of the original description.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 285

Body everywhere finel}' punctulate,with rather sharply defined
dark bars. Caudal fin pale.

11. Epiaephelus ga'eus (MUIIlt & Trosclicl) Jordan.

(Serraiius gnleus Miill. & Trosch., Schomb. Reise, Brit. Guiana,
631.)
The types of Serranus galeiis belong apparently to the species
described as Serranus itaiara Cuv. & Val. and Vaillant &
Bocourt, and as Serranus quinquefasciatus Boconrt. According
to Vaillant & Bocourt (Miss. Sci. au Mexique\ the species found
on the Pacific Coast of Mexico (quinquefasciatus) is identical
with the Brazilian species (itaiara C. & V.). The original
Serranus itaiara of Lichtenstein is, however, apparently a very
different species, having the anal rays III, 11. Assuming the
identity of the Atlantic and Pacific species, which I have, at
present, no reason to doubt, the oldest tenable specific name for
this species seems to be galeus.

12. Lutjanus argentiventris (Ptters) Jordan & (x.lbert.

(Mesoprion arcieiititentris Peters, Berliaer Monatsber., 18G9, 707.)
Type, No. 1070, Berl. Mus., from Mazatlan. This specimen
belongs to the species diagnosed by us under the name of
^^ Lutjanus argentivittatus ^^ (Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1881), the
Pacific representative of Lutjanus ca.xis. The name '■' argen-
tivittatus'''' is a slip of the pen on our part for '■'• argentiventris^

13. Lutjanus inermis (Piter ) Jordan k Gilbert.

(Mesoprion inermis¥*tie\?,, Berliner Monatsber., 18o9.)

Type, T069, Berlin Mus., said to have been brought from Ma-
zatlan ; 8^ inches in length, in good condition.

This specimen belongs to a species allied to L. chrysurus, and
distinct from all those yet known from the Pacific Coast of
Tropical America. The following is a detailed description : —

Head 3 in length; depth 3J. Lateral line with 50 tubes;
scates 53. Dorsal X-13; A. III-ll.

Body slender and fusiform, not strongly compressed, the back
not elevated. Snout very pointed ; mouth unusually small,
the maxillary 2j in head, reaching to front of pupil. E^^e very
large, about 4 in head. Band of vomerine teeth slightly pro-
duced backward on the median line. Teeth on tongue Avell
developed ; canine teeth unusually small and slender, 2 in upper
jaw and 3 or 4 on each side of lower. Nostrils well separated,

286 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

subequal, the posterior oblong, the anterior round. Preorbital
3 depth of eye. Preopercle not serrate, scarcely notched behind.
Temporal region with a band of large scales, on each side of
which are small scales. Scales above lateral line arranged in
very oblique series which are not parallel with the lateral line.

Pectoral fins verj^ short, reaching little past tips of ventrals,
1| in head. Dorsal spines very slender. Second anal spine
longer than third, very small, Y in head. Soft dorsal and anal
low, scaly. Caudal fin rather deeply forked, the middle rays not
half the length of the outer, which are 1^ in head.

Color in spirits, dusky above, pale below, with distinct dark
stripes, those below parallel with the lateral line, those above
ver}^ oblique ; these stripes extend along the edges of the rows
of scales, the middle of each scale being whitish, its base duskj'.

According to Peters, the color was " violet-brown ; middle of
each scale with a silvery shining spot; belly silverj-."

14. Lutjanus vivanus (CuvierA Valenciennes) Jordan & Gilbert.
{Mesoprion vivanus Cuv. & Val., 11, 454 )

T3^pes, young specimens in good condition, collected by Plee
at Martinique.

This species is briefly and unrecognizably described by Cuvier
& Valenciennes. The following is an outline of its characters,
from which its close resemblance to the 3'oung of the common
"Red Snapper" of Florida {Lutjanus hlackfordi Goode &
Bean = L. campechianus Poey) is evident.

Head 2f in length; depths^. D.X-14; A. III-8. Lateral
line with 50 pores.

Maxillarj' 2| in head ; teeth rather strong ; vomerine teeth in
an arrow-shaped patch, being prolonged considerablj' backward
on the median line. Posterior nostrils oval; eye 4 in head;
Nuchal scales in a band, scared}^ separated from the scales of the
body ; scales above lateral line arranged in oblique series ; second
anal spine long, 2^ in head ; caudal concave, the inner lobe If in
the outer.

Color reddish, faintly streaked with olive ; traces of a blackish
blotch under soft dorsal ; tips of middle rays of caudal dusk}'.

If. Pomadasys modestris (TsclnuH) Jordan.

(Hmnidon modestum Tschudi, Fauna Peruana, Ichthyol., 11.)
(Priftiipoma notatum Peters, Berliner Monatsber., 1869.)
The type of Pristipoma notatum Peters (No. 7061, Berl. Mus.:

" gekauft, angeblich von Mazatlan ") is identical with specimens

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 287

in the same museum, which have been identified, apparently
correctly, as Heemulon modestum Tschudi. This identity has
been already noticed by Dr. Hilgendorf (MSS.). Tschudi's
original type is said to be in tlie museum at Neufchatel.

It is doubtful whether the specimen examined by Prof. Peters
really came from Maz'i^tlan.

The following is a redescriptiou of the type of Pristipoma
notatum :

Head 3^ in length to base of caudal; depth 2|. D. XII-15 (not
XVIII, as stated by Peters ; A. III-12 ; 51 or .52 scales in a longi-
tudinal series ; 10 rows between front of dorsal and lateral line.

An ally of Pomadasi/s caesius. Body ovate ; anterior profile
regularly convex ; mouth small ; outer teeth in both jaws enlarged ;
maxillary 3f in head ; lips thick ; eye 3f in head ; preorbital 1§
in eye ; preopercle coarsely serrate ; scales above lateral line unu-
suall}' small, arranged in oblique series, not parallel with the
lateral line.

Pectoral fin as long as head ; second anal spine much stronger
than third, and somewhat longer, both much shorter than the
soft rays; second anal spine If in head ; dorsal spines low and not
strong, the fin deeply notched ; fourth dorsal spine 2^ in head ;
soft dorsal scaly at base ; upper lobe of caudal longest.

Color bluish gray, silvery below ; edge of opercle black ; a con-
spicuous jet-black spot at base of last rays of anal and dorsal;
entire axil of pectoral, and a large roundish blotch before it, jet-
black ; ventrals blackish.

16. Diabasis sexfasciatus (Gill) Jor. & Gilb.

As already supposed by us, the type of Haemiilon macalosum
Peters is identical with Hf^mulon sexfasciatum Gill.

17. Paralonchuras petersi Boeoiirt.

Type, La Union, San Salvador.

Onl}^ the original type of this species is yet known. It is
apparently closely related to the genus Lonchurus^ diflfering exter-
nally in the presence of several barbels instead of two.

Body long and low, formed as in Menticii-ruii. Head slender,
low, with protuberant snout, flattish and somewhat spongy to
the touch above. Preopercle with dermal serrations ; mouth
horizontal, overlapped by the snout ; teeth in villiform bands ;
upjDer jaw with a conspicuous outer row of larger teeth ; gill-rakers

288 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

very small, short and slender, not numerous ; chin with five pores ;
rami of mandible each with a row of slender, inconspicuous
barbels along the inner edge ; nostrils round.

Scales rather large, smooth to the touch, apparently ti'uly
cycloid.

Head 3| in length ; depth 4 ; eye very small, 8^ in head ; inter-
orbital space 3^ ; maxillary 2§ ; dorsal rays XI-30 ; dorsal fin
low, the soft dorsal highest posteriorly and scaled at base only ;
anal small, ending under middle of soft dorsal, its second spine
as long as snout, 3f in head; pectoral very long, 2| in body;
caudal lanceolate, unequal, its length 3^ in body.

Color in spirits, light olive, with faint streaks along the rows
of scales ; no cross-bands ; pectorals dusky ; other fins plain.

18. Polycirrhns dumerili Bocourt.

T3^pe, La Union.

This species seems to be identical with Genyanemus fasciatus
Steindachner (Ichth. Beitr., ii, 31, 1875). The name given by
Bocourt has precedence. The genus Polycirr-hus is perhaps
worthy of distinction from Genyanemus, having the dorsal spines
in normal number (10 instead of 14), the mouth subinferior instead
of terminal, the caudal double truncate instead of emarginate, and
the gill-rakers very small. Genyanemus peruanus Steind. (1. c, 29)
and G. brasilianus Steind. (1. c, Bi ^ Micropoyon ornatiis Gthr.)
apparently belong to Polycirrhus.

19. Menticirrus saxatilis (Bloeh & Schneider) Jordan

(Johnius saxatilis Bloch & Selineider, Syst. Ichth , 1801, p. 75.)
{Scicena nebulosa Mitch., Trans. Lit. and Phil. Soc, 1815, 408.)

The type of Johnius saxatilis Bloch & Schneider, from New
Yoi'k, is still preserved in the museum at Berlin. It is appar-
ently identical with the common king-fish, Menticirrus nebulosus
(Mitchill) Gill, which species should therefore stand as Menti-
cirrus saxatilis. The common names of this species, of the
weak fish and the striped bass, have evidently been confused by
Schneider.

Jokni\is carutta, the species taken by Professor Gill as the t3'pe
of the genus Johnius, has the preopercle entire, and the mouth
inferior. Johnius is apparently not distinguishable from the sub-
genus Gorvina, as defined by Jordan & Gilbert (Synopsis Fish.
N. A., 1883, p. 932).

1883,] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 289

20. Meaticirrus nasus (Giiother) Jor. & Gfill.

( Umbrina nasus Giinther, Fishes Centr. Amer., 1869, 426.)

Type, about a foot in length, adult.

D. X-I, 22 ; eye proportionately very large, 4^ in head ; max-
illary reaching to below posterior edge of pupil ; snout 3| in
head; longest dorsal spine 1| in head, reaching to third ray of
second dorsal ; pectoral 1^ in head; ventrals short.

Gill-rakers very short, almost obsolete ; posterior nostril large,
oval; anterior round; interorbital width 41 in head; scales of
breast large.

Color pale, the pectoral dusky.

21. Isopisthus brevipinnis (Cuv. & Val.) Gill.

(Ancylodon brevipinnis C. & V., v, 84.)
The t3'pe of this species (Cayenne, Poiteau ; in bad condition)
has the pectoral fin If in head, as in /. affi.aU Steindaehner (Neue
und seltene Fische aus den K. K. Zool. Museum zu Wien, etc.,
43), differing in that respect from the Panama species, Isopisthus
remifer. There is not much doubt of the identity of /. affinis
with /. brevipinnis.

22. Gerres peruviauas Cuvier & Valenciennes.

(Cuvier & Valenciennes, vi, 467.)
The type of this species is apparently identical with the
common West Coast species called by this name by Jordan &
Gilbert (Bull, IJ. S. Fish Com., 1881, 330), and later by Evermann
& Meek (Proc. Ac, Nat. Sci. Phila., 1883, 123). The types of
Gerres gula C. & Y. also correspond with the species so named
by the above writers. One of them (Brazil, Delalande) has the
head 3 in length, the depth 2§ ; longest dorsal spine 1| in head ;
second- anal spine 3^ ; eye 2| ; tip of spinous dorsal dusky. The
types of Gerres aprion C. & V. seem to correspond with the
species called by us Gerres cinereus (Walbaum) (^^ Gerres zebra
and Gerres squamipinnis Gthr.). They are, however, in bad
condition, the color faded and the scales mostl}^ rubbed off.

23. Gerres brasilianus Cuvier & Valenciennes.

(Cuvier & Valenciennes, vi, 458.)

The tj^pe of this species is in very bad condition, unfit for

detailed description. Sides appai'cntly with dark stripes along

the rows of scales. Preorbital and preopercle serrate. Frontal

groove broad, naked. Longest dorsal spine 5 in body. Second

290 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

anal spine Q^. Anal spines 3 in nnmber. Caudal fin long.
This s[)ecies is allied to G. planiieri. but the back is less elevated
and the spines smaller than in the latter. Gerres rhombeus
C. & V. is a very diflTerent species, closely allied to Gerres
peruvianua, but with two anal spines onl3\ It occurs on both
sides of the Isthmus of Panama.

24. Gerres brevimanus Giinther.

(Giinther, Proc. Zool. Soc. Lond., 1b64, 152.)

This species is distinct from G. Hneatus (Humboldt), although
closely allied to it. Only the original t^^pe is yet known. On
this I have the following notes : —

Head 3;^ in length ; depth 2^ ; eye 3^ in head. Coloration of
Gerres Hneatus. Back much lower than in the latter, and pectoral
fins very much shorter; their length li in head ; their tips not
reaching nearly to tips of ventrals, which are 1;^ in head ; caudal
3 in body. Preorbital very little serrate, almost entire. Preo-
percle weakly serrate. Second dorsal spine If in head; second
anal spine 1|. Teeth small and short. No black on base of
pectoral, or on lower fins. Spinous dorsal dusky above. Frontal
groove broad and naked, as in G. Hneatus.

25. Opistliojnathus punctata Peters.

(Peters, Berl. Monatsber., 1869.)

Type, 70G4, Berl. Mus. ; about one foot long, from Mazatlan.

Head everywhere finely speckled with black, the body more
coarsely and irregularly spotted. Pectoral finely and closely
speckled, its edge plain. Ventral fin dusky, similarly marked.
Dorsal without large black blotch, finely spotted, the spots
Lehind gradually forming the boundaries of white ocelli, the base
of the fins having rings of white around black spots, the upper
l^art with dark rings around pale spots. Caudal with pale spots,
its edge, like that of the dorsal, somewhat dusky, not black.
Anal with a bro^d, blackish edge, and with dark spots, those near
the base of the fin largest. Lining membrane of maxillary with
the usual bands of white and inky black.

Scales very small, about 125 in lateral line. Dorsal spines
continuous with the soft ra3's. D. 28; A. 18. No vomerine
teeth. Maxillar^'^ very long, extending slightly beyond head.

Only the type of this species is yet known.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 291

26. Porichthys porosissimus (Cuv. <t Val.) Gthr.

{? Batrac7ius porosissimus Cuv. & Val., xii, 501.)

{Porichthys plectrodon Jor. & Gilb., Proc. TJ. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,
291.)
The two specimens from South America referred, b}' Dr.
Giinther .(Cat. Fishes, iii, 116) to Porichthys poy^osissimus, have
the enlarged palatine teeth characteristic of F. plectrodon Jor. &
Gilb. The specimen from Vancouver Island mentioned b^^ Dr.
Giinther, has small palatine teeth as have all Pacific specimens
examined by us. A young specimen from Panama also belongs
to P. margaritafus. It is probable that the types of Batrachus
jwrosissimus C. & Y., from Guiana and Brazil, really have the
palatine . teeth enlarged, although Cuvier & Valenciennes say
that " chaque palatin en a une rangie de petites, pointues et
inegales." In that case, the Atlantic species would stand as
Porichthys porosissimus (C. & V.) Gthr., and the Pacific species,
unquestionably distinct, although closely related, as P. ma/rgari-
^a^u*' (Rich.) Jor. & Gilb.

27. Sebastodes matzubarse (Hilgendorf) Jordan.

The types of Perca variabilis Pallas (Zoogr. Rosso-Asiat., iii,
241= E'pinephehis ciliatus Tilesius), two in number, obtained in
the Aleutian Islands, are preserved in the Berlin Museum.

The smaller of these specimens (6494) belongs to the species
for which we have retained the name of Sebastodes ciluitus
(Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 658). For this species
the name Sebastes variabilis has been retained in MSS. by Dr.
Hilgendorf.

The larger specimen (8145) is a flat skin of large red species,
apparently identical with the Japanese species described by
Hilgendorf under the nana^ of Sebastes matzubarae. This view
is also held by Hilgendorf.

As Sebastodes matzubarae has not been hitherto recognized as
a North American species, we give the following outline of its
characters : —

Allied to Sebastodes miniatiis. Spines of head low, developed
about as in S. miniatus and S. pinniger. Preocular, supraocular,
postocular, tympanic, occipital and nuchal spines distinct ; a pair
of small coronal spines present, as also a small spine before and
one just below eye. Maxillary reaching to posterior border of
ej-e. If in head. Both jaws covered with rough, ctenoid scales.

292 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Interorbital space flattish, scaled, its breadth a little less than
that of e3^e. Preopercular spines short, simple. Preorbital
spines simple. Lower jaw scarcely projecting. Second anal
spine scarcely longer than third. Longest dorsal spine 2| in
head, a little less than the longest short rays. Pectoral 41 in
body.

Color dusky brown, apparently dark red in life ; three dark
shades across cheeks.

28. Scorpsena histrio Jenyns.

(Chinchas Islands; Schmaltz; Brit. Mus.)

This species is very closely allied to Scorpsena brasiliensii< C.
& y. It lacks the black spots which are usually distinct in the
latter. In S. brasiliensis the suborbital stay is more broken, and
the dorsal spines are perhaps a little lower.

The following is a diagnosis of Sc. histrio : —

Head 2j\, depth 3^. D. XII-10. Pectoral 3yV in body. Max-
illary 2 in head. Eye 4J in head. Longest dorsal spine 3 in
head. Second anal spine 3. Lateral line with 30 scales.

Head rough above. Nuchal pit quadrate, much broader than
long. Scales present on posterior part of cheek and on front and
flap of opercle. Scales on body large, not ctenoid, edged with
dermal flaps. Eye large. Mouth large, the lower jaw included.
Suborbital stay conspicuous, not armed with spines. Second
anal spine stronger and rather longer than third.

Color gray or red, with broad darker shades, four in number,
irregular and variable ; fins similarly colored ; pectorals barred ;
dermal flaps white.

29. Prionotus horrens Richardson.

(Voyage Sulphur, Ichtbyol., 79.)

Types, Gulf of Fonseca; young. Allied to Prionotna tribu-
lus C. Si, v., but the spines on the head still longer and more
knife-shaped. First spine on edge of snout broad and serrate ;
behind this three similar ones progressivel}' larger. Then two
large spines on preopercle, the posterior larger. Two smaller
spines on opercle, and one very large on the scapula. Two sharp
spines over each eye, one behind ; two on top of head and two
on occiput. No groove behind eye. Belt of palatine teeth nar-
row. Mouth large ; maxillary reaching to below front of eye,
2\ in head. Gill-rakers long and slender, 5 in number. Scales

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 293

small. Pectorals short, 3 in body, reaching somewhat past front
of second dorsal.

Pectorals and tip of caudal diisk3\

30. Agonus decagonus B och.

This species has the gill membranes attached to the isthmus,
forming a narrow fold across it, much as in ^4. cataphractus^ but
narrower. It is therefore erroneously referred by us to the genus
Brachyopsis (Syn. Fish. N. A., 955 \ and the generic name Lepta-
gonus Gill, based on A. decagonus, cannot be used instead of
Brachyopsis. A. decagonus is intermediate between Agonus
proper and Podothecus, being referable to the latter, if the two
genera are kept separate. According to Dr. Liitken, neither
Agonus cataphractus nor Coitus biibalis have yet been actually
found in Greenland. Thej- should, therefore, be omitted from
American faunal lists.

.31. Ophidium omostigma .lordan & (Jilhert.

{Genyptenis omostigma Jor. & Gilb., Pvoc. U. S. Nat. Mus , 1883,
301.)

An Ophidioid fish has been referred by us to the genus Genyp-
terus, which genus we have regarded as distinguished from
Ophidium chiefl}' by the presence of a sharp spine on the opercle.
In the t3'pe of the genus Genypternis (G. cMlensis Guichenot),
this spine is obsolete. G. omistigma is therefore not a Genypterus,
and it may probabl}' be referred to Ophidium, from which Gcnyp-
terus is separated by Dr. Giinther on the variable and perhaps
unimportant character of the enlarged palatine teeth.

294 PROCEEDINGS -OF THE ACADEMY OF "1883.

THE OCCIDENT ANT IN DAKOTA.
By Rev. II. C. McCook, D. D.

I have recently received from Prof. J. E. Todd (Professor of
Natural Sciences at Tabor College, Iowa, and an Assistant on the
U. S. Geological Survey), some A-aluable facts concerning the
distribution of Pogonomyrmex occidentalis. While on a visit to
Dakota (1882), Prof. Todd had observed a number of ant-hills
which awakened his interest, and upon which he made various
observations. The facts noted, together with specimens of the
insects and scrapings from the mounds, were sent to me, and
justify the following record : —

1. Distribution and Site. — The ants were seen (A. D. 1882 and
1883) on the Missouri River, south of Bismarck, opposite the
mouili of the Cannon Ball River, and at a point sevent3--five
miles southward. Upon the extensive plain forming the bottom
of theBois Cache Cieek va]le3',and near the sand hills and grove
which give the name to the valley, tlie mounds are numerous.
Prof. Todd thinks with some confidence that they are not located
in the valley of the James River, nor in Dakota, an}' considerable
distance east from the Missouri River. He has traveled with a
team over 2500 miles in Dakota, east of the Missouri River and
south of the Northern Pacific Railroad, and has not noticed
the ant-hills elsewhere than the localities mentioned. In my
book on "The Honey and Occident Ants,"' I have located this
ant in southern Dakota, upon conjecture, but the above, with
specimens, now give scientific confirmation.

I wish to call attention to the additional facts thus con-
tributed in the precise line of the striking feature formerly
pointed out by me in the geographical distribution of Occi-
dentalis. According to Prof. Todd, the r.nt is confined to the
bottom lands along the Missouri, and has not j^nshed eastward
through the Territor3% This corresponds remarkably' with my
conclusion, both from ni}* own observations and those made under
m}'^ direction by Dr. Horace Griffith, of Marengo, Iowa. This
conclusion is that Occidentalis does not dwell east of the Missouri

^ The Honey Ants and the Occident Ants, p. 124 5. J. B. Lippincott &
Co., Phila.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 295

River, in Missouri, Iowa and Minnesota ; tliat it avoids eastern,
wliile abounding in western Nebraslva, and is not found in Kansas
further east than Brookville, longitude 22° W. from Washington,
about 97° W. Greenwich, which is nearly' that of tlie sites reported
b}' Prof Todd. As Prof. Packard has reported the insect in
southern Montana, we ma,y now conclude that the entire western
part of the great valley of the Missouri (west of the river and
the above meridian) is inhabited b}' this ant and its closel}" allied
congener, P. barbatus, the Agricultural Ant.

It is worthy of note that all the authentic reports which we
have of the latter insect also limit its eastern distribution to about
the same meridian. We have no account of it as inhabiting
southern Missouri, Arkansas and Louisiana, except a -note of
Nuttall'S in 1819, which appears to refer to one of these species.
Entomologists and naturalists generally in these States might do
good service b}' some attention to this point. It is a question of
profound interest, what natural cause has operated to establish this
eastern limit of distribution? The writer confesses his inability
to discover an}^ relation between the structure and econom}' of the
ant, and the physical condition of the country, that could throw
any light upon the question.

The two species ver^- closelj' resemble each other, the worker
forms scarcely differing except in body-size; the worker-major of
Occidentalis corresponds almost exactly with the minor of bar-
batus. The chief differences in the sexual forms are of size and
color, but also a slight difference in venation. There are, however,
some marked differences in nidification and habit. The Agricul-
tural Ant occupies the southern section of the above marked
geographical district, and it seems scarcely possible to resist the
inference that it is a modified form of Occidentalis (or vice versa)
who inhabits the northern section. The local site of the nests in
Dakota is generally a sandy flat or bottom.

2. Nidification. — From the observations of Prof Todd, it
further appears that the Dakota ants agree with those of Colorado
in the position of the gate, at one-half to one-third the distance
from the base ; in the general appearance of the mounds, which
are uniformly in the centre of a circular cleared area three or four
feet in diameter. In size they are smaller, being about six inches
high and about two feet in diameter. They are roofed in some
sites with small gravel stones of quartz, but in others, as at the

296 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

mouth of the Cannon Ball River, have no such covering. Prof.
Todd is inclined to think that the gravel roofing is selected from
the nest vicinage and placed iipon the mound ; but I believe the
stones to have been excavated from the underground galleries,
granaries and rooms, and brought up therefrom. However, I
think the construction of a roof by selection to be quite within
the ability of the Occidents, as I have observed them carrying
pebbles up, down and around the mound in all directions after
issuing from the gate.

3. Harvesting habit. — Among the pebbles sent to me are a
number of husks, etc., of various seeds which appear to have been
taken from the kitchen-middens or refuse-heaps of the formicary.
These indicate that the Dakota emmets, like the more southern
examples, are harvesting ants. Mr. Thomas Meehan, to whom
was referred a small quantity of the deBi'is collected from
the margin of a nest by Prof. Todd, reports that there are no
seeds among the pebbles, but that there are a number of calices
and undeveloped capsules of a leguminous plant. Dalea alopecur-
oides, which is common on the American plains. I was puzzled
to explain why such intelligent creatures should be detected in
harvesting immature seeds, until, upon inquiry, I found that
leguminous plants have a succession of flowers, so that there may
be mature seeds and flowei'S on a plant at the same time. Mr.
Meehan actually found upon a specimen of the above plant in the
Academy's Herbarium, both the flower and the fully developed
seed; indeed, the two appear to occur upon the same spike. It
is thus evident that the ants were not harvesting out of season,
but were occasionally deceived, and cast out to the refuse-heaps
the calices that contamed no edible seed.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 297

STAINING WITH H^MATOXYLON.
BY CHARLES L. MITCHELL, PH. D., M. D.

Hffimatoxylon or logwood was first recommended b}'^ Boehmer
for the staining of tissues and sections, for microscopic examina-
tions. Its rapid action, clearness of differentiation and beautiful
tint soon made it a favorite staining agent with microscopists.
Possessing even a greater selective power than carmine in sepa-
rating and staining the bioplasm of animal and vegetable tissues,
it was also superior to this coloring agent in the fact that the
violet tint of the logwood was not nearly so fatiguing to the eye
in prolonged examinations with the microscope. The deeper Jiue
of the logwood-coloring was also an advantage in the fact that the
contrasts of colored and uncolored tissue afforded b}^ its use pro-
duced a much more perfect definition and clearness of outline
than could be produced by a brighter color. Nucleus, nucleolus
and cell-wall, when stained b^' this agent, all stand out clearly
and with perfect distinctness and sharpness of outline — a result
not to be attained by the use of any other coloring material.

The use of logwood as a staining agent, however, was soon
found to be attended with strong and serious disadvantages. The
staining fluid soon became thick, cloudy and filled with a grumons
sediment, at the same time changing its color ; sections and
tissues, stained with it, were of a dirty brown color and soon
faded, and, unless the solution was freshly prepared, the results
obtained from it could not be depended upon. The numerous
formulae, published b}^ Kleinenberg, Boehmer, Miller, Klein and
many others, some of which formulre are exceedingly complicated,
are sufficient proof that the task they undertook was not an easy
one; and, judging by the results, a simple, satisfactory formula
for preparing this desirable coloring agent has ^et to be published.
It is my purpose this evening to call the attention of the members
of the Section to a new and simple method of preparing a log-
wood staining fluid, by which a permanent, reliable and satisfactory
preparation can be easil}'^ made. This method, I think, will place
within tiie reach of ever}- microscopist a staining fluid which is
stable in composition, comparativelj' easy of preparation and
unequaled in the delicacy and clearness of differentiation of its
20

298 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

coloring. I have previoiisl}-, at several different meetings of the
Section, alluded to my experiments with this agent, and have also
shown at different times some specimens of tissues stained with
it ; but I did not feel willing to place my results definitely before
3'ou, until sufficient time had elapsed to fully test the permanence
of the preparation and of the stainings produced by its use. I
have placed before you this evening, however, under the different
microscopes on the table, a series of preparations, single and
double stainings, which will, I think, speak for themselves, and
also a sample of the staining fliiid. Both fluid and specimens
were prepared nearly a year ago.

In considering the method of prepai'ation of this fluid, it will
be well to review briefly the chemistry of logwood. Logwood is
the heart-wood of Haematoxylon Campeachiannvi^ a large tree
found in Campeachy, Honduras and other parts of tropical
America, and is used extensively in the textile arts for dyeing
fabrics of a purple, blue or black color. Among its cliemical
constituents are resinous matter, a peculiar tannin, free acetic
acid, various salts and nitrogenous principles, and a peculiar
principle called heraatin, or hiematoxylon, on which the coloring
properties of the wood depend. This hematin is, when pure,
perfectly colorless, but affords beautiful red, blue and puri)le colors
when in union with an alkaline base and the oxygen of the air.
It also combines with the alums to form lakes, that peculiar class
of coloring substances of which carmine is so remarkable an
example. Now, this lake of logwood is the principle which acts
as the dye ; and, in order to obtain the color in all its delicacy
and purity, all other contaminating impurities must be removed.
The various formulae for the preparation of a logwood staining fluid
have nearly all directed the use of the commercial extract of
logwood, which, aside from the numerous impurities necessarily
found in so crude an article, is totally unfit for tlie purpose, for
reasons which I will presently point out.

As alread}^ mentioned, logwood contains, besides its coloring
principle, considerable quantities of tannin — so much, in fact, as
to give it a position in the U. S. Pharmacopoeia as an astringent.
It is well known that vegetable infusions containing tannin are
quickly influenced by the action of both light and air, and when
these arc assisted by heat, changes take place very rapidl}'.
Under these circumstances, the infusions chanoe color, become

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 299

cloudy and deposit large quantities of an insoluble sediment. It
therefore can be readily understood that an extract of logwood,
prepared by the evaporation of an infusion of the drug, must be to
some extert changed by the process of manufacture, and that any
preparation made from it would (the process of decomposition
having alreadj' been started) become much more liable to change.
And just such a result takes place in staining fluids prepared from
extract of logwood. The partially oxidized tannin in the liquid
graduall}^ absorbs more oxygen from the air, and changes to other
complex organic compounds ; the coloring matter is also affected
by the decomposition, and gradually becomes converted into
other substances, and the liquid finally becomes of a dirty, muddy
color, and is half filled with a lump}' sediment. This change will
be found to take place in all ordinary' logwood staining fluids,
whether prepared from the extract or from the drug itself, although
from the nature of the case those made from the extract would lie
the most quickly affected. The idea, therefore, occurred to my
mind, that if the tannin could be removed, and the lake of log-
wood isolated in a state of comparative purity, a staining fluid
could be prepared whicii might possibly be both permanent and
satisfactor}-. After numerous and lengthy experiments, the
desired ol'ject was obtained, and the formula which I now present
to your notice is the result of my investigation on the sul)ject.
As a means of distinguishing this preparation from the other and
generally worthless logwood fluids, I have thought it best to call if

'' Mitchell's Hematin Staining Fluid."
R

Finely ground logwood, . . , . , . 3 ij.

Sulph. aluminum and potash (potash alum), . . . 3 ix.

Glycerine, . . . . . . . . /. S iv.

'Distilled water, .... a sufiicient quantity.

Moisten the ground logwood with suflflcient cold water to slightly
dampen it, place it in a funnel or percolator, packing it loosely,
and" then percolate sufficient water through the drug until the
liquid coming from the percolator is but slightly colored. Allow
the drug to drain thoroughly', and then remove it from the perco-
lator, and spread out on a paper or board to dr}'. Dissolve the alum
in eight fluid-ounces of water, moisten the dr}' drug with a suffi-
cient quantity of the fluid, and again pack in the percolator, this
time rather tightly, and pour on the remainder of tlie alum solu-

300 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

tion. As soon as the liquid percolates through and commences to
drop from the end of the percolator, close the apeilure with a
tightly fitting cork, and allow the drug to macerate for forty-eight
hours. Remove the cork at the expiration of that time, allow the
liquid to drain off, and then pour sufficient water upon the drug
to percolate through twelve fluid-ounces altogether. Mix this with
the glycerine, filter and place in a close-stopped bottle.

In this process nearly all the tannin is removed by percolating
the drug with cold water, a menstruum in which the coloring
principle is not very soluble, and the subsequent maceration and
percolation witli the alum solution removes the logwood lake in a
state of comparative purit3% The glycerine is added simpl}' for
its preservative qualities, and this ma}' be still increased by the
addition of a few drachms of alcohol to the solution.

The heraatin staining fluid thus prepared is a clear, heavy fluid
of a deep purplish red color. It will keep its color for a length of
time, and deposits no sediment. The sample exhibited to the
meeting this evening has been on my working table for nearly a
year, frequently' exposed to a strong light and open to the air,
and, as you may see, it is as 3'et unchanged. As a staining fluid,
used either strong or diluted, I consider it far superior to an}^
other stain I know of. Permanent and beautiful in its color,
which is of a delicate violet hue, clear and sharp in its definition
of the different tissues under examination, it will bear use with
the very highest powers of the microscope, and, I hope, enable
observers to distinguish minute differences of tissue which have
hitherto escaped notice.

A few words in conclusion as regards the method of using this
fluid. It yields good results, when used undiluted, as a quick
stain ; but the most excellent results, to my mind, are obtained by
placing the tissues in a weak solution (ten drops to two fluid-
drachms), with warm distilled water, for about twelve hours. This
method leaves nothing to l)e desired, and produces results of
surpassing delicacy and beauty. I had intended, in conclusion,
to refer to the beautiful double-staining produced by this agent
in connection with a new preparation of indigo-sulphuric acid,
and have several specimens on exhibition this evening ; but I
thiuk it will be best to devote a separate paper to the consid-
eration of this suV)jeet, which I trust to be able to present at a
future meetino- of this Section.

1883.] natural sciences of philadelphia. 301

December 4.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.

Thirty-six persons present.

A paper encitled "A Study of the Distribution of Gluten
within the Starch Grain," by N. A. Randolph, M. D., was pre-
sented.

Gold from North Carolina. — Prof. H. Carvill Lewis exhibited
some remarkable gold nuggets, found in Montgomery county, North
Carolina, forty miles east of Charlotte and two miles from Yadkin
River. Some of the nuggets were of great size. One of them
weighed over four pounds, and contained nearly $1000 worth of
gold, neing finer than any specimens in the collection at the Mint.
it was probably one of the largest nuggets over found in eastern
America. Many of the nuggets exhibited were nearly inire gold.
The gold had a crystalline structure, and was of fine yellow color.
It was stated that in the district of North Carolina whence
these nuggets were taken, gold was very abundant. The larger
specimens were found in the gulleys, where they had been washed
out of the decomposed rock, and it had been stated that a shovelful
of dirt dug out of the hillsides anywhere in this vicinity wonld
pan out traces of gold. Some years ago one man took out of a
hole sixteen feet square $30,000 worth of gold. The quartzite
containing the gold occurs in a white clay or decomposed schist.

December 11.

The President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Thirty-three persons present.

On Extinct Rh.inoceri from the Southwest. — Professor Cope
exhibited the skull of a young rhinoceros, probably of the species
Aphelops fossiger Cope, from the Loup Fork Bed of the valley
of the San Francisc j River, New Mexico. He also exhibited
photographs of a mandibular ramus of a young rhinoceros, sent
him by Dr. Mariano Barcena, of the Citj^ of Mexico. The ramus
had been exhumed in the State of Mexico, and apparently belonged
to a young individual of the Aphe^ops fossiger, but is of relatively
small dimensions. Prof. Cope regarded the discovery as proving
the existence of the Loup Fork formation at that locality.

302 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

A Fungus infecting Flies. — Prof. Leidy directed attention to
a vial filled with flies adherent to fragments of leaves. He stated
that on the first of August, the last summer, he had noticed that
from the swarm of flies that were attracted by the ripe fruit of a
black mulberrry, Moms nigra, many settled on the under side of
the leaves, and there became fixed and died from the invasion of
a fungus, in the same manner as the house-fly often becomes
attached to walls and window-panes, in the autumn, through the
agenc}' of the fungus known as the Sporendonema. The infested
flies on the mulberr3'-tree were so numerous, that perhaps a fourth
of the foliage ot ihe lower boughs had from one to half a dozen of
the flies adherent to each leaf. The fly, though a familiar one, is
unknown by name to him. It resembles the house-fly, but is larger
and has a black abdomen with lateral whitish spots. The fungus,
of a fuscous hue, is especially evident in the extended intervals of
tlie segments of the abdomen, along the sides of the tliorax and
at the neck. Though extending to and attaching the flies to the
leaves, the specimens do not exhibit the zone of spores on the
leaf as commonly seen in those of infested house-flies. Micro-
scopic examination exhibited a similar structure of the fungus to
that of the Uporendonema or Empusa muscse. It mainly consists
of translucent cylindrical, straight or somewhat toi'tuous rods or
tubes of variable length with rounded ends, and containing homo-
geneous liquid with rows of oil-like globules. Mingled with the
tubes are numerous oval, ovoid, and pjriform spore-like bodies,
usually each with two oil like globules. The spore-like bodies
measure 0-028 to 0-036 mm. long, by 0-016 mm. thick. The
longer tubes measure usually' up to 0-16 mm. long, b^- 0-012 mm.
thick.

On Manaxjunkia. — Prof. Letdy made some remarks on a speci-
men of llanayunkia, of which he exhibited a drawing, and which
had been recently obtained by Mr. Edward Potts, from the mill-
])ond of Absecom Creek, at Absecom, N. J. It was of especial
interest as apparently confirming the fresh-water habit of a cepha-
lobranch annelide. The worm was contained in a tube attached
to the midrib of a decayed leaf, to which there were attached
several similar but empty tubes about one line long. The worm,
1-5 mm. long, appears to be an immature form of 3Ianayunkia
speciosa. The body consists of ten setigerous segments succeeding
the head. The latter supports two lophophores, each with ten
tentacles, of which none are conspicuously larger than the others.
A pair of eyes occupy the head, but no pigment spots exist along
the base of the tentacles. Tlie podal sette are from two to four,
but mostly three, on each side of the segments. The podal hooks,
but one on each side of the setigerous segments, except the first
of the latter, which has none; and the last two, which liave rows of
six comb-like hooks on each side. The worm is translucent white,
and the blood very pale green.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 303

Ordinaril}^ Absecom pond is purely fresh water, and contains
in abundance tlie usual ])lants and animals characteristic of fresh
waters. Mr. Stuart Wood stated that in occasional extreme high
tide of Absecom Creek, the pond had been subjected to the over-
flow of salt water.

How a Carpenter Ant Queen founds a Formicary. — Rev. Dr.
McCooK presented three specimens of fertile queens of the Penn-
sylvania carpenter ant, CamjyonotHS pennsylvanicus. These had
been given him by Dr. Joseph Leidy, wlio had taken them during
the last summer at Wallingford, Delaware Co., Pa. The circum-
stances under which they were captured afforded a good demon-
stration of the manner in which a new colony of this and other
species is begun, confirming the speaker's own observations and
published statements. One specimen was taken, August 9, in a
chestnut log; the others, August 14, in the stump of a chestnut-
tree. They were enclosed within small cavities about an inch in
diameter, and, curiously, the queens had sealed themselves within
their nests bj- closing up the original opening by which they had
entered, and from which, as a nucleus, they must have cut out
their resident-room and nursery. If, therefore, they sallied forth
to obtain food, as they may have done (for Dr. McCook had at
various times observed queens wandering solitary), they must
have removed the plug or "door," and restored it to place again
upon re-entrance. However, he believed it to be quite within the
bounds of probability that a well-fed queen could live without
additional food for several weeks — a period long enough to rear
a small brood, and also feed the larvse from the contents of her
crop, which might serve as a storehouse of food, as was explained
b}' illustrations of the anatomy of the alimentary canal.

In the same receptacle with the queens were found (I) the
white, oval or cylindrical eggs of the species ; ( 2) larvae of various
sizes, from those just escaped out of the egg (2-3 mm. long) to
full-grown (about 10 ram.) ; (3) the cocoons, or enclosed pupte;
and in one case (4) a callow antling, which had evidently just
escaped from its case. This antling was, as indeed all the larvae
and cocoons appeared to be, of the dwarf caste. There are three
castes in a formicary of Ga7nponotufi : the worker-major, the
worker-minor and the minim, or dwarf. We may infer that the
latter caste is the one which is first produced in rearing a family.

In response to a remark and suggestion made that the imperfect
nurture given to the larvte, under the peculiar circumstances, might
account for the appearance of small workers first in order, Dr.
McCook stated that, whatever one might conjecture to have been
the fact in the remote origin of these castes among ants, it is certain
that when the formicary has been fully peopled with workers, and the
food-supply is unlimited, the several castes still continue to appear.
Minims, minors and majors not only abound among the mature
insects, but are found among the larvaj and cocoons. These

304 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

distinctions are a permanent feature of the ant economy ; and
while it is perhaps not permitted one to say that they are not caused
by differences in amount or character of the nurture given in the
larval state, 3'et this did not seem at all probable to the speaker.
The fiict that, in some genera, the workers have also remark-
able differences in structure (as of the head, for example, in
Pheidole and Pogonomyrmex crudelis) goes to show that differen-
tiation into castes is regulated by something other than the food-
supply.

The above observations are valuable as proving that the
females of Camponotus, when fertilized, go solitary, and after
dispossessing themselves of their wings, begin the work of
founding a new famih'. This work they carry on until enough
workers are reared to attend to the active duties of the formicary,
as tending and feeding the young, enlarging the domicile, etc.
After that, the queens generally limit their duty to the laj'ing of
eggs, and, as the speaker had elsewhere fully described,^ are
continually guarded and restricted in their movements by a
circle of attendant workers, or "court."

The above facts are further illustrated and enlarged by a series
of observations made by Mr. Edward Fotts, in accordance with
the speaker's suggestions and directions. On or about June 16,
Mr. Potts captured a queen of C. pennsylvanicus running acro.-s his
parlor floor, late at night. He placed it in a bottle, but forgot to
examine it until five days later (21st and 22d June), when he was
surprised to find that the ant was alive, and had laid six or eight
eggs in the otherwise empty bottle ; which eggs, in their various
stages of development, she continued to attend for about fifty
daj^s. He fed the ant by dropping into her bottle a pinch of
white sugar, which he moistened every evening with a drop or two
of water ; at which times she quit her otherwise unremitting-
watch over the eggs and the larvas, to press her labium for a
moment into the sweet fluid, her labial and maxillary palps
meanwhile rapidly vibrating with pleasure. The egg-laying was,
from the first, very deliberate ; one or two eggs were added to the
original stock from time to time, until about the 15th August,
making the highest number counted, of all ages, nineteen.

He did not observe the date of the first hatching, but these
larvjie, at first no larger than the eggs, and only distinguishable
upon close observation \>y the slight grooves between the body
segments and the ill-defined head, gradually at first, and after-
wai'ds more rapidly, reached finally a length of about one-quarter
inch and began to spin their cocoons. On the morning of July
20, the first was surrounded by a single layer of web, but could
still be seen working inside it. By evening the cocoon was too
opaque to be seen through. On the morning of the 21st the

' Proceed. Acad. Nat. Sci., 1879, p. 140; "Agricultural Ants of Texas,"
p. 144 ; "Ilouey and Occident Ants," p. 41.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 305

second larva was covered in like manner, and the third by the
evening of the 22d. For some days he was able to detect the dark
form of the young ant in one of these cocoons, and on the evening
of Aug. II a worker was running about the bottle and already
essaying its ministrations upon the undeveloped eggs and the
next series of larvae, quite as big and much heavier than itself.
We have, then, the period from, say June 20 to July 20 (thirty
days), occupied in the development of the first eggs and the ful-
filment of the larval stage; from July 20 to August 11, say
twenty-two days, were spent in the pupa state.

The manner of the young worker was very nervous and far from
soothing, especially to the well grown larvje, who evidently much
prefer a mother's care to that of an elder sister. He did not
observe this antling feeding from the sugar, but upon one or two
occasions saw osculatory advances towards its mother which
seemed to indicate that it was not above receiving its nutriment
from the maternal fount to which it became accustomed during its
wriggling youth. It constantly climbed over the eggs and larvae,
apparently nipping them with its mandibles, but not moving them
to any purpose. He saw no well-defined attempt at feeding them
on its part ; though, after patient observation, upon several occa-
sions, he observed this act performed by the parent ant. She Avould
caress the larva by sundry pats with her antennae upon each side
of the face, when, if hungry, it would lift up its head under her
mandibles, placing its labium against hers, at which time a flow of
liquid down the larval throat was seen.

As the queen's labors increased, she was less given to moving
her charges from place to place, though thej^ were not allowed to
remain long quiescent. While nervously anxious about them, Mr.
Potts thought that she showed little evidence of tenderness in
her treatment, trampling on them with her feet or di-agging them
around under her heavy abdomen, as if they were really the putty
they looked like.

The moisture necessary for the cleansing and growth of the
larvae was apparently supplied from the tongue of the caretaker,
yvho exjimined them one after another, moistening the dry places
and keeping the egg and larval skins flexible. The queen was
very careful of the eggs, standing nearly all the time with her
head over the little heap, occasionally picking them up to move
them a quarter of an inch or more to one side. She was thrown
into a great excitement of solicitude when a fly, attracted by the
crumbs, intruded within her domicile. She sprang fiercely at the
fly and raged around her narrow compartment, seizing a group
of eggs as if to escape with them from a threatened danger, then
replacing them as though recognizing the impossibility of getting
away. Her demeanor on this occasion indicated strong maternal
solicitude.

Mr. Potts made some attempt to follow the embrj'onic changes,
and made a few drawings of the different phases.' When first

306 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

seen the egg is full of fluid, imiform in appearance throughout.
When next observed segmentation had taken place and advanced
to the morula stage, showing everywhere small granular cells of
uniform size. Afterward a hyaline spot appears at one end of the
egg, which there seems empty or tilled with a homogeneous fluid ;
next to which are large cells, containing smaller ones of various
sizes. Later both ends become transparent, the large cells
bounding the small-celled body-cavity and forming the well-known
i astrula condition. He was not able to trace the formation of
the various internal or external organs. The cyclosis or pulsa-
tion of the larval heart was counted in two instances at 45 and 50
per minute.

The manner of ovipositing (August 13) the nineteenth egg
is thus described : When first observed the queen stood up high
upon all three pairs of legs, the abdomen thrown forward between
them and the head bent back almost to meet it. The egg was
then about half protruded. Considerable muscular action was
visilile throughout the abdomen, and when presently the egg was
posited she straightened herself out with a visible air of relief, but
forgot all about the egg, which was lelt lying under her for several
minutes while she attended to other matters, until at last, acci-
dentally touching it with one antenna, she picked it up and carried
it to the family apartments, where, presently, the worker found it
and placed it in the group of the older eggs. An evident intent
at classifying tlie eggs and larvae was remarked, these (within«the
narrow limitations of the chosen space) having been kept to a
good degree separate.

August 13, another worker was released from its cocoon, Mr.
Potts did not see the act, but believed that the female assisted, as
she was seen standing over the neophyte who seemed to be weak,
its femora bent forward, the tarsi and tibiffi still nearly reaching
the end of the abdomen, indicating the manner in which the legs
were folded in the cocoon. Immediately after release the mother
gave the young imago nourishment in the manner above described.

At this date there were in the formicary, beside the mature ants,
two full-grown larvae, very fat, two about half-grown, and several
smaller ones, with the eggs in different stages of development.
The two oldest were then evidently about read\^ to spin, but what
chance they could have, with the mature ants continually tramping
over them, standing them np on end or hauling them off to a
distance, Mr. Potts was at a loss to imagine. From the mouth of
one he observed a strand of silk protruding, but the workers
came, apparently trying to grasp it, and left him in doubt w^hether
their object was to help or hinder the weaving process.

August 14, one of the two full-grown larvje was found wrapped
in its winding sheet. The web was very thin and the motion of
the larvjxi readily seen through it. The other larva seemed almost
totally quiescent, but careful examination with a Coddington
lens showed some muscular action in the posterior segments of

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 301

the body. Their state of comparative torpor was thought to imme-
diatel}' precede the act of spinning. At this date the workers
had become less nervous in their motions, and the female seemed
to have resigned most of her labors to them, resting much of the
time quietly in one place.

August 16, the third worker had emerged and was found quite
at home in attending to its duties. The second grown larva was
then still uncovered and quiescent. Very close observation was
required to show that it still breathed, and it made no other
visible motion.

These observations of Mr. Potts establish or confirm the fol-
lowing points : (1) The manner of depositing the eggs, which, as
well as the larvae, are cared for by the queen until workers are
matured ; (2) the stages in the development of the egg and larvai
are partiall}^ noted ; (3) the time requiied for the change from
larval to pupal state is about thirty days ; (4) about the same
period is spent in the pupa state, the entire period of transforma-
tion being about sixty days; (5) the work of rearing the first
broods of Camponotus begins the latter part of June or earl}' in
July; (6) about twenty-four hours are spent by larva? in spinning
up into cocoon; (7) the ant queen probably assists the callow
antling to emerge from its case ; (8) not onl}- the larvae, but
occasionally also the antlings, are fed by the queen ; (9) the
young workers, shortly after emerging, begin the duty of nurses,
cari^ig for the eggs and tending the larvae. Some of these points
thus abstracted and formulated by him Dr. MeCook was subse-
quently able to confirm from observations upon the same queen.
His thanks were due Mr. Potts for the intelligent and successful
manner in which his suggestions had been carried out.

The following was ordered to be printed ; —

508 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

A STUDY OF THE DISTEIBTITION OF GLUTEN WITHIN THE WHEAT

GRAIN.

BY N. A. RANDOLPH, M. D.

The object of the present paper is to briefl}^ describe several
methods for the demonstration of gluten in the central portion of
the wheat grain, and the results of their application.

For many years the great majority of observers and of writers
upon gluten have stated that this highly important nitrogenous
element of food is found almost, if not quite exclusively, in tlie
fourth layer (Parkes) of the grain, immediately below and adhe-
rent to the third or inner coat of the true bran ; this fourth layer
is composed of closely packed yellowish granular cells of ovate or
cuboid form, each of which is provided with a dense, laminated
cellulose wall and contains a large proportion of free fat. Imme-
diately within this layer of so-called " gluten-cells," and constituting
the greater portion of the grain, is an aggregation of much larger,
usually elongated, C3dindrical cells, whose contents are ajjparently
made up exclusively of starch granules which exliibit great
diversity in size.

So fixed and widespread has the belief become that the gluten
of the wheat resides in specific cortical cells of tlie grain, that not
onl}^ do mau}'^ most intelligent persons habitually rasp their
digestive surfaces with branny foods, but attempts to determine,
bv microscopical examination, the nutritive values of various pre-
pared foods have been made, in which the proportion of " gluten-
cells " found in a given food formed the criterion of its value.^
These assumptions have called forth merited criticism from
Prof. Richardson, of this city, and from Prof Leeds, of Hoboken,
both of whom emphasized the fact, singularly ignored by Cutter,
Jacobi and their followers, that ordinary white wheat-flour contains
a varying but always notable quantity of gluten.

So far as the writer is informed, however, there has not been
recorded any ocular demonstration of the gluten of the wheat
grain, in nitu and entirely independent of the " gluten-cells."
Such a demonstration may be conclusively made by either of the
following methods :

1. If whole wheat grains be macerated in water to which a few

1 E. Cutter, M. D., Galliard's Med. Jour., Jan., 1883.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 309

drops of ether have been added to prevent germination, they will,
in a few days, become thoroughly softened, and the contents of
such a grain may then be squeezed out as a white tenacious mass.
Examination of the remaining bran shows the "gluten-cells"
undisturbed, closely adhering to the cortical protective layers.
By now carefully washing the white extruded mass, the major
part of its starch may be removed ; and upon the addition of a
drop of iodine solution, microscopic examination shows numer-
ous networks of fine yellow fibrils, still holding entangled in their
meshes many starch granules colored blue by the iodine. In
carefully washed specimens, these sponge-like networks are seen
to retain the outline of the central starch-filled cells, and evidentl}'
constitute the protoplasmic matrix in which the starch granules
lay. Upon gently teasing such a specimen under a moderate
amplification the fibrils will be seen to become longer and thinner
in a manner possible only to viscid and tenacious substances — a
class represented in wheat b}' gluten alone.

An eminently satisfactory proof of the proteid nature of these
central networks ma}- be obtained by heating the specimen in the
solution of acid nitrate of mercury (Millon's reagent), when the
fibrils will assume the bright pink tint characteristic of albumen-
oids under this treatment. The results of the application of the
xanthoproteic and biuret reactions are equally conclusive, but more
care is required in the use of these proteid tests, and the resultant
differentiation is not so clear. Reticuli similar to those above
described, but much broken and smaller, ma}" be seen, upon close
examination, scattered throughout fine white flour, without the
addition of any reagent.

By general consent, the albumenoids of the wheat grain are
grouped together as gluten, which is, however, further separable
into gluten-fibrin, gliadin and mucedin, proteid bodies practically
equal in nutritive value, but differing in certain physical proper-
ties, notably that of solubility. It must, therefore, be borne in
mind that in this, as in all other methods of separating gluten
from the other constituents of the gi ain, its relatively small soluble
portion is removed with the starch, and that any estimate of the
quantity of gluten based upon such methods will probably be
rather under than over the actual amount.

2. In even the thinnest sections of the wheat grain, the gluten
of the central portion is always masked by large numbers of starch

310 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

granules. These may, to a large extent, be removed by immersing
the section for a short time in liquor potassfe, with subsequent
careful washing. The alkali affects the hydration and partial
solution of the starch; but if its application be too long continued,
the gluten will also be dissolved. This treatment is well adapted
to show the rather dense gluten networks usually found in bran,
immeiliately below the fourth layer.

3. The most satisfactory^ method of studying the distribution of
gluten in sections of wheat is that of artificial salivary digestion.
If the section be gently boiled for a moment to hydrate the starch,
then transferred when cool to filtered saliva, and maintained for
from half an hour to an hour at a temperature of about 98° Fahr.,
all the starch will be digested away, while the insoluble proteid
and other constituents will remain entirely unaltered. A section
of wheat grain thus treated will exhibit, throughout its entire
central portion, close-meshed gluten networks, which become
slightly denser toward the cortex of the grain. The proteid
character of these reticuli is here, as in the first method, sus-
ceptible of micro-chemical demonstration by Millon's reagent or
the biuret reaction. A relatively very faint coloration, indicating
the presence of albumenoids, is noticeable in the " gluten-cells,"
while the gradual condensation of the gluten of tl;e endosperm as
the cortex is approached, is evidenced by a quite vivid coloration
of the fibrils.

Schenji ' has applied Millon's reagent to sections of wheat with
a resultant assumption by the endosperm of a pink tint and " no
coloration of the cortical gluten-cells.'' The starch was not removed
and the method of distribution of gluten was not determined. By
artificial gastric digestion of wheat sections, the same observer
noted that the starch of the section became readily detached, and
deduced from this the just proposition that the gluten la}- between
the starch granules.

Objections are not infrequently offered by the chemist to the
microscopical determination of organic compounds, especially
where any attempt at a quantitative estimation is made. All that
is claimed for the methods above described is the demonstration
of gluten in very considerable quantity in the inner layers of tlie
wheat grain. It is but just to state, however, that by these
methods a conception may be obtained of the quantity of protcids

1 Anat.-Physiol.-Unters., p. 33. Wien,, 187i

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 311

within the grain fully as accurate as that given by the usual
chemical method of estimating the albumenoicls of a given body,
namely, from the entire amount of nitrogen contained in it.
Especially is this true in the case of vegetable tissues. In a close
analysis of the potato, Schultze and Barbieri found that only 562
per cent, of all its nitrogen existed in albnraenoid combination,
while in the fodder-beet only 20 per cent, of the nitrogen went to
the formation of albumenous compounds; the remainder in each
case entering into the composition of non-nutritious bodies, as
amides, nitrates, ammonia and sxs\ aragin.

The fact that the gluten networks become denser toward the
peripher}' of the endosperm, together with the presence of non-
albumenoid nitrogenous compounds in the perisperni, explains
the notable percentage of nitrogen found in bran as ordinarily
roughly removed.

The color tests mentioned above indicate that the amount of
proteids contained in the cells of the fourth layer is relatively
very slight; but admitting for the moment that these cells contain
gluten, the question naturally arises whether, in view of their
dense cellulose walls, they are capable of serving as a food-stuff
for man. In artificial digestions the writer has found these
elements, even when thoroughly cooked, to be unaffected by the
digestive juices ; that is, well-boiled bran with its adherent "gluten-
cells,'' will sustain prolonged maceration at the temperature of
the human digestive tract in artificial gastric and pancreatic juice
(in which, under the same conditions, fibrin is readily digested)
without exhibiting any change. These cells were further found
to be unaffected bj' maceration for thirty days in liquor potassai,
except for a slight swelling of the cell and the occasional coales-
cence ,of some of its contained oil-globules. They were also
practicall}' unchanged b}^ a few daj's' immersion in strong nitric
acid. In order to obtain conclusive and unassailable results as to
the nutritive value of the " gluten-cells " as far as man is con-
cerned, the writer has at present under observation a number of
healthy adults, who daily receive, in addition to their regular diet,
a small fixed amount of boiled bran. Their alvine dejections
(containing all the undigested elements of food after the normal
act'on of all the digestive juices) will be submitted to close micro-
scopical examination, with a view to ascertaining the extent to
which the "gluten-cells" have been digested, and a report will
be made upon the results in the near future.

312 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

December 18.
Tlie President, Dr. Leidy, in the chair.
Sixty-two persons present.

A paper entitled "Reproduction in Aniphileptns fasciola,'' by
Andrew J. Parker, M. D., was presented for publication.

Miss Adele M. Fielde made a communication on the language,
literature and folk-lore of China.

December 25.
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D., Vice-President, in the chair.
Fift}^ persons present.
The following was ordered to be printed : —

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 313

BEPRODUCTION IN AMPHILEPTUS FASCIOLA.
BY ANDREW S. PARKER, M. D., PH. D.

Several years ago, while examining some Infusoria, I noticed a
specimen of AvvpMleptus fasciola undergoing some curious
changes, the nature of which, at that time, I did not fully appre-
ciate, supposing them to be due to the dissolution of the animal.
Recently I observed the same series of phenomena occurring in
another individual, and on tracing them out more fully I found
that they were due, not to the death of the infusorian, but to what
I believe is a method of reproduction not hitherto obserA-ed, or at
least not described, in this group. My attention, in both instances,
was attracted by a peculiar oscillating movement, the Amphileptiis
rocking from side to side, the animal remaining stationary,
although its cilia were in active motion. In other respects the
animal appeared normal, no changes being observed in its nucleus,
protoplasmic contents or contractile vesicle. Shortly after I had
noticed this peculiar rocking movement I found that the elongated
extremity was breaking up into small masses of protoplasm ;
these graduallj^ separated from the parent body, and each of them
exhibited distinct amo?boid movements. Although the cilia
seemed to break off with the small masses, I could not detect
any signs of their presence after separation. For about five
minutes small protoplasmic masses, exhibiting distinct and inde-
pendent amoeboid movements, continued to be shed.

The rocking movement still continued, but now commenced to
show signs of being converted into a movement of rotation.
Finally a rotary motion was established, and the animal com-
menced? to change its position. At the same time I noticed a
distinct elongation occurring at the end where the changes
described above had taken place, a rounded projection appearing,
which gradually elongated, until finally, in the course of about
two hours, the individual had assumed its original shape and
activity, although apparently somewhat diminished in bulk.
Cilia covered the new growth, but they did not seem to be a new
formation, but were produced by a simple elongation of the
ectosarc, this being carried forward by the growing endosarc. As
regards the protoplasmic masses that were shed or discharged, I
observed them for about four hours,' at which time they were still
21

314 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

active, and the parent mass still in active motion. On the fol-
lowing day I was unable to detect them, and as to their subsequent
history I know nothing.

To characterize the phenomena as described above, I propose
the term " Reproduction by Partial Dissociation." Reproduction
by fission, gemmation, conji^ation and en cy station have all been
observed in the ciliated infusoria ; and some of the older writers,
such as Ehrenberg and others, have described a mode of increase,
in which the substance of the body breaks up into a number of
fragments, each of w^iich is capable of becoming a distinct indi-
vidual. This process they called difBuence, but Stein and other
more recent observers have denied the existence of this process,
claiming that it was merely a form of increase from enc3'sted
forms. The phenomena as exhibited by Amphileptus fasciola
seem to be quite different from those described as occurring in
diffluence, and it certainly was not a case of encystation. I have
been unable to find any account of reproduction in the infusoria
resembling that described above, and I therefore place the facts
on record, in order that the attention of other observers may be
directed towards the verification of the phenomena and views
expressed above.

1883.] NATURAL SCIEXCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 315

The following annual reports were read and referred to the
Publication Committee : —

REPORT OF THE RECORDING SECRETARY.

The Recording Secretary respectfull3' reports that during the
year ending November 30, 1883, twenty -four members and seven
correspondents have been elected.

Resignations of membership have been received from the fol-
lowing, and accepted on the usual conditions: — Wm. John Potts,
G. B. Cresson, Isaac S. Williams, Howard A. Kelly, M. D., John
Wagner, W. G. Audenried, Charles W. Pickering, Wilson Mitchell,
H. W. Workman and R. S. Peabod3^

The deaths of fourteen members and seven correspondents have
been announced and duly recorded in the printed Proceedings.

Thirtj^-five papers have been presented for publication, as fol-
lows : Edw. D. Cope, 7 ; Jos. Leidy, 8 ; Angelo Heilprin, 3 ; S. B.
Buckley, 1 ; H. T. Cresson, 1 ; B. W. Everman and S. E. Meek, 1 ;
S. G. Foulke, 1 ; Andrew Garrett, 1 ; Josiah Hoopes, 1 ; David S.
Jordan, 1 ; Alexis A. Julien, 1 ; IT. Carvill Lewis, 1 ; Graceanna
Lewis, 1 ; Isaac C. Martindale, 1 ; Rev. H. C. McCook, 1; Charles
L. Mitchell, 1 ; Henry F. Osborn, 1 ; Benjamin Sharp, 1 ; Theo.
D. Rand, 1 ; Jos. Swain, 1 ; Jos. Swain and Geo. B. Kalb, 1 ; R. E.
C. Stearns, 1 ; Chas. H. Townsend, 1 ; Jos. Willcox, 1 ; Berlin H.
Wright, 1. One of these was withdrawn by the author; two of
those by Dr. Leidy and the one by Mr. Garrett were accepted for
publication in the Journal, and the others have been or are about
to be issued in the Proceedings.

One hundred and fift3'-nine pages of the Proceedings for 1882
and two hundred and thirty-two pages of the volume for 1883 have
been published. The latter is illustrated by eleven plates. Sixty-
eight* pages of the Journal, Vol. IX, Part I, have also been
printed. These include Dr. Leidj-'s paper on Urnatella gracilis,
advance copies of which were issued by the author early in
December of the present year, and about half of Mr. Garrett's
paper on Society Islands Shells. The former is illustrated by one
fine chromolithographic plate, and the latter by two plnin litho-
graphs, containing one hundred and fiftj'-two figures.

One hundred and twent^'-one copies of the Proceedings have
been distributed to subscribers. Fifty-nine copies have been sent
to domestic, and three hundred and thirteen to foi'eign journals
and societies. The exchange list has been carefully revised,

316 TROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

several societies from which we have not received anything for
more than five j'ears having been dropped, while a nnmber hereto-
fore omitted have been added. It has alwa3's been the practice of
the society to send its publications to a number of important
foreign Universities and town libraries, situated in places not
otherwise in receipt of the Proceedings and Journal, so that
students everywhere ma}'^ be able to inform themselves of the
Academy's contributions to science. These intellectual centres
have been supplied with the curient numbers of the Proceedings
as usual.

A circular distributed to corresponding societi( s in July, asking
them to send their publications to the Academy by post, in
exchange for a lilce prompt transmission on our part, has not
been productive of as much result as was hoped for. An early
distribution of the Proceedings is, however, of so much import-
ance, both to the contributors and to the society at large, that
each number will be mailed, hereafter, to exchanges as well as to
subscribers, as soon as possible after its issue from the press.

The average attendance at the meetings during the year has
been thirtj-one. Verbal communications have been made by
twenty-six members and two guests. Much the greater number
of these have been prepared by the authors for publication in the
Proceedings, and form not the least important part of the annual
volume, while abstracts were made for the public press of those
which could at all be regarded as of popular interest.

Art. 6, Chap. X, of tlie By-Laws was amended on November 2T
by striking out from the first line the word " onlj'," and from the
second and third lines the words " obtain permission to." Art.
6, Chap. XI, was amended at the same meeting by striking out ail
after the word '' public " in the second line, and inserting in lieu
thereof "daily, except Sunday, and at least one day in the week
without charge on such conditions and under such regulations as
the Council shall establish from time to time."

Dr. Ruschenberger having been elected a Curator at the annual
election in 1882, there b}" became ex-officio a member of the
Council ; Mr. Charles Morris was elected to fill the vacancy thus
created in tlie latter bod3\ At the meeting of the Council held
Pebruary 17, the Curator-in-charge, Mr. Chas. F. Parker, was
granted a month's leave of absence in consequence of an indispo-
sition, which it was then lioped was but temporar}'. It was found

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OE PHILADELrHIA. 317

necessary, ho-wever, to renew the leave of absence from time to
time until bis death on the 7th of September, Earnest testimony
to his worth as a man and to the value of his services to the
Academy has been already borne by his associates, and the general
feeling of the society has been well expressed in the able bio-
graphical notice by his friend and fellow-member, Isaac C. Martin-
dale, published in the Proceedings of November 13.

At the meeting of the Academy held October 2, Prof. Angelo
Heilprin was elected Curator, to fill the vacancy caused by the
death of Mr. Parker ; and at the meeting of the Council held on the
5tli of October he was appointed Curator-in-charge, or Actuary
to the Curators.

An inquiry from the New Century Club, as to the desirability
of endowing a professorship in the Academj', to be held exclu-
sively by women, having been referred for considei'ation to the
Council, it was resolved that, inasmuch as the professorships are
open to women, as well as men, it is inexpedient to restrict any
professorship to either sex. This action of the Council was
endorsed bj' the Academy and transmitted to'the New Century
Club, with the suggestion that if a proposition were made to endow
a scholarship for women instead of a professorship, the subject
might receive further consideration.

A committee, consisting of Messrs. Valentine, Corlies, Ruschen-
berger, Frazer and Whelen, was appointed January 2, to petition
the Legislature of Pennsylvania to aid the Academy in the exten-
sion and furnishing of its building. The efforts of this committee
have been so far unproductive of result, although bj* action of
the Legislature the collections of the Second Geological Survey
of Penns3'lvania are now stored in boxes in the cellar of the
Academy. Their value to the student would be, of course, greatly
enhanced if they were properly displayed. The Academy- is,
liowever, entirely unable at present to furnish the space necessary
fo^r such exhibition, and the request to the Legislature for aid in
the construction of an addition to the Academ3^, in which these
collections would be properly placed, cannot be deemed unreason-
able.

The most important additions to the Academy's possessions
made during the j'ear have been the Wm. S. Yaux collections of
minerals and antiquities. After mature consideration by the
Council and the Academy, the conditions proposed by the executor

318 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

I'or the government of the bequest were finally adopted at the
meeting held February 20. A special appropriation was made
for the alteration of the entresol rooms at the east end of the
hall, for the accommodation of these collections, and therein the}^
have been arranged by Mr. Jacob Binder, the special curator
appointed by the Council in conformity with the articles of
agreement. Mr. Binder's report, which follows that of the
Professor of Mineralogy, indicates the character and extent, as
well as the mode of arrangement, of the collections under his
charge.

At the meeting held April 24, the following was adopted : —
Retiolved, That the title to certain lands in Western Virginia,
belonging to the Academy, and heretofore held in trust therefor
by the late Wm. S. Vaux, be vested in Messrs. T. D. Rand, Jacob
Binder and S. Fisher Corlies, as trustees for the Academy, and
that the title to a burial lot, owned by the Academy in the ceme-
tery adjoining the Academy's premises on Race Street, be trans-
ferred to the Trustees of the Building Fund, in accordance with
the recommendation of the Council, March 26, 1883.

The American Association for the Advancement of Science has
accepted the invitation tendered by the Academy, in conjunction
with other educational establishments, the officers of the municipal
government and prominent citizens, to meet in Philadelphia in
1884. It is hoped that the meeting may be attended by the
British Association which meets in Montreal next August, or at
least by an important representation thereof. The International
Electrical Exhibition, which it is proposed to hold at the same
time under the patronage of the Franklin Institute, cannot fail to
add largely to the interest of the occasion and to the number of
those in attendance. The result will probably be one of the
largest scientific meetings ever held, and one which cannot fail to
exert a beneficial influence on the Academy in common with the
other scientific institutions of the cit}'. We have, therefore,
abundant reason to hope that tlie prosperity of the societ_y at
the end of next year will be at least as great as that so clearly
set forth in the accompanying annual reports of officers and
sections.

All of which is respectfully submitted,

Edw. J. Nolan,

Recording Secretary.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 319

REPORT OF THE CORRESPONDING SECRETARY.

The Corresponding Secretary reports that the business of his
office presents but little variation from that of preceding years.

There have been many favorable replies received from corre-
sponding societies to our request for an interchange of publications
by mail, the result of which will be an earlier acquaintance with
the doings of other societies, greatly to the advantage of working
naturalists.

The Museum has received many additions during the year, a
detailed account of which will appear in the Curator's report.
These have been promptly- acknowledged, to the number of 119.

There have been seven Correspondents elected during the year,
and acknowledgment has been received from but one who was
elected during the present ^ear.

Our corresponding societies generall}' acknowledge the recep-
tion of our publications by letter, and accompany their own
publications with letters of transmission.

Letters of acknowledgment have been received num-
bering, 67

Letters transmitting publications have been received
numbering, ........ 42

Letters concerning postal interchange numbering, . 19
Ackowledgments from Corresponding Members, . 1
Miscellaneous coi'respondence, . . . .21

In the latter number are many asking for deficiencies in their
series of our publications. These have been favorably responded
to whenever possible. There has been a considerable accession
to our_ exchange list during the current 3'ear.
Respectfully submitted,

George H. Horn, M. D.,

Corresponding Secretary.

REPORT OP THE LIBRARIAN.

During the twelve months ending November 30, 1883, 3003
additions have been made to the library, an» increase of 208 over
the growth of 1882. These additions have consisted of 360
volumes, 2615 pamphlets and separate parts of periodicals, and
28 maps, sheets, photographs, etc.

320

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1883.

The above increase has been derived from the following
sources : —

Societies, ... . . .

Editors,

I. V. Williamson Fund,

Authors,

Joseph Jeanes, . . .
Thomas B. Wilson Fvmd,
University of Wiirzburg,
Department of the Interior,
Geological Survey of Sweden
Smithsonian Institution, .
Department of Agriculture,
Dr. Frances W. Wetmore,
Geological Survey of Portvigal,
F. V. Hayden, ....
Geological Survey of India,
War Department, ...
Geol. Survey of Pennsylvania,
Regents of the University of

New York,

J. H. Redfield,

Minister of Public Works,

France,

Treasury Department, ...
Engineer Depart., U. S. A., .
Norwegian Government, . .

British Museum,

Geological Survey of New

Zealand,

1113

816

437

255

83

49

27

23

23

20

19

16

13

11

10

9

Geol. Suivey of Wisconsin,

Stephen G. Worth, ....

Navy Department, ....

Geological Survey of Belgium,

J. S. Newberry,

Department of Mines, Nova
Scotia,

Geological Survey of New-
foundland,

East Indian Government, . .

S. F. Codies,

Thomas Meehan,

Trustees of the Indian Mus., .

Trastees of the S.African Mus.,

Rev. H. C. McCook, ....

David L. .lames,

Cobden Club,

Geological Survey of Illinois, .

O. A. Derby,

Trustees of the Boston City
Hospital,

F. V. Mueller,

U. S. Coast Survey, ....

Surgeon General's Ofl&ce, . .

U. S. Commission of Fish and
Fisheries,

Executor of the late Wm. S.
Vavix,

The several lots have been presented on the Tuesdav evening
following their reception, and distributed to the departments of
the library as follows, each title being immediately added to the

card catalogue : —

Journals, 2225

Geology, 202

Conchology, 85

General Natural History, . . 82

Botany, 60

Entomology, 46

Bibliography, 33

Voyages and Travels, ... 25

Mammalogy, 25

Agriculture, 20

Anatomy and Physiology, . 18

Helminthology, 18

Mineralogy, 17

Ornithology, 17

Anthropology, 12

Ichthyology, 10

Encyclopaedias, 10

Chemistry, 10

Physical Science, 9

Education, 9

Herpetology, 2

Medicine^ 2

Miscellaneous, 66

154 volumes have been bound, and an additional 135 are still
in the hands of the binder.

Assistance furnished me during the summer months has enabled
me to have the books and pamphlets on Concholog}^, Pliysical

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321

Science, Cliemistiy, Geography and Medicine, together with the
Italian journals, added to the card catalogue. The Department
of Conchology had not been before included in the card entries,
because a complete hand catalogue had been prepared just before
the card system was adopted, and a similar arrangement of the
other departments mentioned has not heretofore been possible for
lack of time. I regret to say that, for the same reason, tlie
American and Italian journals only have as yet been completely
catalogued, although the hand index to the shelf arrangement, in
use for several years back, has been kept roughly up to date, and
serves its purpose reasonably well. Eveiy effort will be made
during the coming year to complete the catalogue of this
department.

A circular which was sent to all our corresponding societies,
proposing an exchange of publications by mail, has been answered
favorably by a few societies, but the greater number seem to
prefer sending but once a } ear, as heretofore, through the Inter-
national Exchange Bureau. This is to be regretted, as early
access to the current scientific literature is of the utmost impor-
tance to the student. Of course, the many journals for which the
Academy subscribes, and which are all credited in the accom-
panj'ing list to the I. Y. Williamson Fund, are received promptly
by mail as issued.

It will be observed that we are indebted to the liberality of
Mr. Joseph Jeanes for 83 of the current additions, and to the
fund which the Academy has received from Mr. Isaiah Y.
Williamson for 437 volumes and continuations of periodicals.
These additions are of special value and importance, as they have
been ordered at the request of the working members, and supply
for the most part the material required for actual investigation.

A fine portrait in oil of Dr. Joseph Leid}^, b}^ Uhle, has been
placed on permanent deposit by the Biological Club of Phila-
delphia. The amount required for the portrait of Dr. Robert
Bridges having been secured, the order was given to Mr. Uhle
early in the year. 1 regret to sa^' the artist's engagements have
not enabled him to complete the work, which will, however, be
placed in the library at an earl^' date.

All of which is respectfully submitted,

Edward J. Nolan,

Librarian.

322 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

REPORT OF THE CURATORS.

The Curators present the following statement of the Curator-in-
charge, Prof. Angelo Heilprin, as their report for the year ending
November 30 : —

The condition of the Academy's collections, although it cannot
be stated to be absolutel}^ satisfactory^, is j^et fairly good when
compared to the condition of similar collections in this countr3-j
or even of those pertaining to foreign institutions. Much, how-
ever, remains to be done before either the interests of science or
of general education will have been thoroughl}^ satisfied, and until
more efficient aid is added to the working power of the Academ^^,
progress towards the obtaining of this satisfied condition must be
necessaril}' slow. The great obstacle in the way of the systematic
arrangement of the collections has thus far been, and still remains,
want of space, a weighty obstacle which must ever remain as such
until greater expansion will have been aflforded in the construction
of an extension to the present building.

The removal, at a very moderate expense, of the large central
platform on the floor of the museum has permitted of a much
more satisfactory arrangement of the extensive series of geolog-
ical and palseontological specimens than has heretofore been pos-
sible, and has at the same time aflTorded room for the gathering
together and proper exhibition of a special collection — namely, a
collection illustrative of the natural products of Pennsylvania and
New Jerse3^ In this " local museum," as it may be termed, it is
intended to illustrate by actual specimens (as far as is practicable)
the entire domains of zoology, palaeontology, geology and min-
eralogy, in so far as these departments are directly connected with
the States above mentioned, and thereby very materially facilitate
the means for self-instruction in natural history, and for making
such immediate examinations and comparisons as ma}^ be variously
demanded. Work in the arrangement of this collection has been
progressing favorably, and it is hoped that the entire exhibition
will be satisfactorily displayed in the early part of the coming
year.

The most important addition made during the past year to the
Academy's museum is the Vaux collection of minerals and archae-
ological implements, to which reference is made in the report of

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 323

the special Curator appointed for those collections, Mr. J. Binder,
by whom the specimens have been carefully arranged and clas-
sified. The other additions to the museum are recorded in the
list of donations herewith appended, or are incorporated in the
reports of the different sections.

The Academy has during the year benefited through the
services of three Jessup Fund beneficiaries, Messrs. J. Wortmau,
A. F. Gentry, and S. F. Aaron, respectively in the departments of
vertebrate palteontology, ornithology, and entomology, the first
of whom has latterly resigned on receiving the appointment of
assistant to the Curat or-in-charge. An application for the filling
of the present existing vacancy in the Jessup Fund is now in the

hands of the Curators.

Joseph Leidy,

Chairman of the Board of Curators.

SUMMARY OF THE REPORT OF THE TREASURER,

For the Year ending Nov. 30, 1883.

Dr.

To Balance frcm last account | 991 1

" Initiation fees 170 00

" Contributions (semi-annual contributions) 2000 58

" Life Memberships 500 00

" Admissions to Museum 457 17

" Sale of Guide to Museum 40 00

" hale of duplicate books 'i 53

" Sale of Proceedings, .Journals, etc 430 91

" Fees, Lectures on Palasontology 136 CO

" Fees, Lectures on Mineralogy 189 00

'< Wilson Fund. Toward Salary of Librarian 800 00

" Interest on Money awaiting investment 72i 17

" Interest un Deposits in Trust Companies 8 94

" Interest from Mortgage Investment, Joshua T. Jeanes'

Legacy 1000 CO

'• Publication Fund. Interest on Investments 265 39

" Barton Fund. " " " 240 00

" Life Memberthip Fund. '« " " 132 .50

'» Maintenance Fund. " " " .' 102-50

«' Eckleldt Fund. . " " " 66 86

" Museum Fund. " " " 25 00

•> Stott Legacy Fund. " " " 67 50

$7849 36

324 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Ck.

Salaries, Janitors, etc $3358 21

Printing Proceedings §601 1*3') _.-^. .,

Binding " 123 25/ '^**^

Repairs 698 17

Printing and Stationery 85 61

Binding 58 75

Freight 81 13

Plates and Engravings 109 50

Water Rents for 1883 26 15

Postage 127 55

Coal 616 70

Gas 120 67

Miscellaneous 457 06

Newspaper Reports 86 00

Insurance — 30 00

Ice 7 44

Trays 18 10

Alcohol 23 50

Cases 23 CO

A. Heilprin, Lectures on Palgeontology 136 fO

H.C.Lewis " "Mineralogy 189 00

Guides to Museum 23 00

Books 164 57

Vials 8 25

Life Memberships translerred to Life Membership Fund.. 500 00

$7622 77

Balance, General Account $226 59

LIFE MEMBERSHIP FUND. (For Ma^intenance )

Balance per last Statement $1300 00

Life Memberships transferred to this account 500 00

Interest on Investments 132 50

^1932 50

Transferred to General Account $ 132 50

Investment in Bond and Mortgage at 5 per cent. Interest.. 1300 00

$1432 50

To Balance for Investment §500 00

BARTON FUND. (For Printing and Illustrating Publications.)

Interest on Investment $240 00

Transferred to General Account 240 00

JESSUP FUND. (For Support of Students.)

Balance, last Statement $711 67

Interest on Investments 560 CO

$1271 67
Disbursed •. 676 66

Balance $595 01

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 325

MAINTENANCE FUND.

Balance per last Statement §2108 14

Interest on Investments 102 50

$2210 64

Transferred to General Account $ 102 50

Investment in Bond and Mortgage at 5 per cent. Interest.. :il00 00

2202 50

To Balance for Investment $8 14

PUBLICATION FUND.

Balance, last Statement $1214 70

Income from Investments 350 69

$1565 39

Transferred to General Account $265 39

Investment in Bond and Mortgage at 5 per cent. Ibterest... 1300 00

$1565 39

MRS. STOTT lUND. (For Publications.)

Balance, last Statement $13(0 00

Interest from Investments 67 50

$1367 50

Transferred to General Account $ 67 50

Investment in Bond and Mortgage at 5 per cent. Interest.. 1300 00

$1367 50

I. V. WILLIAMSON LIBRARY FUND.

Balance, last Statement $433 48

Rents collected 835 27

Ground-rents collected 1026 28

$2295 03

For Books $814 60

Binding 76 25

Repairs to Properties 229 68

Taxes and Water Rents 241 97

Transfer of Property to Academy 69 05

Collecting; "J3 07

$1524 62

Balance $770 41

THOMAS B. WILSON LIBRARY FUND.

Balance overdrawn per last Statement $2o2 89

Dulau & Co., London 51 88

B. Westermann & Co., Books 162 78

Transferred to General Account 300 00

$747 55
Income from Investments 525 00

Balance overdrawn 222 55

326 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

ECKFELDT FUND.

Balance, last Statement $966 86

Interest from Investments 100 00

$1066 86

Transferred to General AccouF.t $ 66 86

Investment in Bond pnd Mortgage ai 5 per cent. Interest... 1000 00

^1066 86

BOOK ACCOUNT. (Donations from Jos Jeanes, Esq.)

Balance, last Statement $539 83

Li'ss cash paid for Books 3(J2 70

Balance $37 13

BINDING ACCOUNT. (Donations from Jos. Jeanes, Esq.)

Balance, last Statement $277 85

Less Ciish paid for Binding '217 85

IxNSTRUCTION FUND.

Balance, last Statement $60 00

Less cash paid lorCards 4 On

Balance $50 00

MUSEU.VI FUND.

Balance, last Statement $1000 00

Interest from Investments 25 00

$1025 00

Transferred to General Account $ 25 00

Investment in Boad and Mortgage at b per cent. Inierest.. 1000 00

$1025 00

WILLIAM S. VAUX COLLECTION FUND.

Cash received from Estate of Wm. S Vaux, deceased $1000 CO

Interest from Investments 1000 0(J

George Vaux, for Mineral Case 50 00

Cash received from Sale of Five Cases 250 00

$2300 01)

Cash paid for Cases $1469 60

Cash paid for Miscellaneous Expenses 401 66

1871 16

Balance $428 84

Also received the legacy of William S. Vaux, deceased, which was paid in
ten bonds for one thousand dollars each (total, ten thousand dollars), of the
seven per cent. Registered Mortgage Bonds of " The Philadelphia and Heading
Coal and Iron Company." The interest of these Bonds- to be applied to the
use of the " William S. Vaux Collection Fund."

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 321

REPORT OF THE BIOLOGICAL AND MICROSCOPICAL

SECTION.

During the year eighteen meetings were held, with an average
attendance of about fifteen persons.

The annual exhibition was held April 5, and was a success as
to the number of visitors and in regard to the improvement noticed
in general microscopical manipulation.

The following gentlemen became contributors to the Section
during the 3-ear : — Dr. L. Brewer Hall, Dr. Henr3' Beates,Di-. Max
Bochroch, Dr. Charles L.Mitchell, Dr. M. B. Hartzell, Dr. Arthur
Wilson, Dr. William R. Hoch, Mr. John F. Lewis.

The following resignations were accepted : — Dr. Charles Turn-
bull, Dr. S. H. Guilford.

The meetings have been well supplied with material for discus-
sion, and an increased interest has been manifested during the
year.

The following are some of the more important subjects brought
to the notice of the Section : —

Dr. J. G. Hunt. — Communication upon Diatomes, Desmids,
Sponges, Carnivorous Plants, Mosses and on the Preparation
of Animal and Yegetable Tissues.

Dr. Charles Mitchell. — A New Freezing Microtome. Also a
paper upon Hsematoxylon Staining.

Dr. L. B. Hall. — Communication upon Spirogyra.

Dr. G. A. Rex. — Upon the Trichias, with two rare forms not
found before in North America.

Respectfully submitted,

Robert J. Hess, M. D.,

Recorder.

, REPORT OF THE CONCHOLOGICAL SECTION.

The Recorder of the Conchological Section respectfully reports
that of the various papers upon the subject of the Mollusca, accepted
for publication by the Academy during the past year, the most
important was one by Mr. Andrew J. Garrett, of Tahiti, upon
" The Land Shells of the Society Islands," which is now in press
and will soon appear as a part of the Journal.

328 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

It is with sincere regret tliat we record the death of our valued
member, Mr. Charles F. Parker, which occun-ed September Y,
1883. Mr. Parker was one of the founders of the Section, and a
very large portion of the leisure time at his command was devoted
to its interests. In his death the Academy and Section have lost
a faithful and efficient officer, and the members a worthy associate.

Our Conservator, Mr. Geo. W. Try on, Jr., repoits forty-seven
donations of shells from twenty -nine diffei-ent sources, all of which
have been labeled and arranged in the museum. " These aggre-
gate 1097 trays and labels, containing 4150 specimens, being a
larger accession than for several previous years." Including them,
the Conchological collection embraces 41,822 trays and tablets,
with 145,791 specimens.

It ma}^ be stated as an illustration of the rapid growth of our
museum that about one-third of these specimens have been received
since the removal of the Academy to its pi-esent building in 1876.
Among the donations may be particularized as important, the large
collections of New Caledonian, French and Eastern European
shells, generously given by Messrs. E. Marie, A. Locard, A. Mon-
tandon,and S. Clessin ; also the fine collection from Mauritius and
Madagascar, purchased from Mr. V. Robillard. Several other
purchases of good shells were made, partly with the income of the
Museum Fund, partly' b}^ money received from the sale of our publi-
cations. To obtain all purchasable novelties and desiderata would
require a fund yielding an income of not less than five hundred
dollars per annum ; some rare opportunities were declined during
the past year for want of means.

Inadequate as our resources are, our progress has been such as
to receive recentl}^ the commendation of the distinguished editor
of the "Journal de Conchyliologie," who writes of tlie " immense
bibliographical and conchological collections of the Academy of
Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, scientific treasures to which
each 3^ear adds considerably, and which constitute working
facilities of the first order." The re-arrangement of tbe museum,
in connection with the publication of the monographs of the
genera in the " Manual of Conchology," steadily progresses. The
Columhellidse and Gonidee have been carefully studied and largely
re-labeled during the year; the Pleui'otomidee are now undergoing
revision.

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PniLADELPHIA.

329

The officers of the Sect

Director, .
Vice-Director,
Secretary, .
Recorder, .
Conservator,
Librarian, .
Treasurer , .

on are : —

W. S. W. Ruschenberger.

John Ford.

John H. Redfield.

S. Raymond Roberts.

Geo. W. Try on, Jr.

Edw. J. Nolan.

Wm. L. Mactier.

On behalf of the Section,

S. Raymond Roberts,

Recorder.

REPORT OF THE ENTOMOLOGICAL SECTION.

During the year past the Entomological Section has held ten
meetings, at which the attendance has averaged six members,
exclusive of visitors.

During the j-ear one member has resigned, and one died. No
new members have been elected, and the Section at present
numbers twenty-one members.

The Section has experienced an irreparable loss in the decease
of its late Director, Dr. John L. LeConte. His long services in
the advancement of entomologj'' in this conntr}' are too well
known to require any rehearsal here. At the annual meeting of
the American Entomological Societ}^, it was ordered that a memo-
rial of Dr. LeConte be prepared, and published in the Society's
Transactions.

The -Transactions of the American Entomological Society, vol.
X, containing 344 pages and 9 plates, has been published. The
Proceedings of the Entomological Section continue to be pub-
lished and issued in connection with the Transactions, and
contain the communications made at the monthly meetings.
Members and others are thus enabled to place upon record such
advanced descriptions as they may desire.

Eleven written communications have been presented for publi-
cation, and, having been favorably acted upon, will be duly
published.

23

330

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP

[1883.

11

u

10

24

u

10

36

a

22

55

u

30

32

u

20

663

(C

95

40

((

12

79

u

20

81

u

28

9

u

7

84

u

63

The Curator reports the following additions to the cabinets : —

From Dr. W. L. Abbott.

Diurnal Lepidoptera, . . 237 specimens, 40 species.

Nocturnal Lepidoptera,

Odonata,

S. r. Aaron.

Orthoptera, .
Diptera,
Hemiptera, .
Pseudoneuroptera,
Neuroptera,

E. M. Aaron.
Neuroptera,
Pseudoneuroptera,
Odonata,
Diurnal Lepidoptera,

G. B. Cresson.

Diptera,
E. T. Cresson.

Hymenoptera,

species not determined.

Additions were also made at various times by Dr. H. Skinner,
who has given no list of the same.

Through the attention bestowed upon it by Mr. E. T. Cresson,
the collection of Hymenoptera is in a specially good condition,
and is beyond doubt the best in America.

The cabinets have been examined and disinfected, so that they
now present a thoroughly good appearance. This is a part of the
Conservator's labors in connection with entomological collections
that always requires much care and time. Great assistance has
been rendered to the Conservator by Mr. S. F. Aaron, who has
devoted much care to the specimens. The same gentleman has
also helped greatly in the arrangement of the Entomological
library.

By resolution passed November 9, the Section expressed its
hearty accord with the Curator of the Academy in the formation

200

11,677

75

number of

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 331

of a local museum, and directed the Conservator to render such
assistance as laid in his power.

At the meeting held December 10, the following officers were
elected for the ensuing year : —

Director^ .... George H. Horn, M. D.
Vice-Director, . . . Rev. H. C. McCook, D. D.
Recorder, .... James H. Ridings.
Conservator, . . . Eugene M. Aaron.
Publication Committee, . J. Frank Knight,

H. Skinner.
Respectfully submitted,

James H. Ridings,

Recorder.

REPORT OF THE BOTANICAL SECTION.

The Yice-Director of the Botanical Section has pleasure in
reporting to the Academy that the activity and prosperity of the
Section heretofore noted, still continue. The growth of the
Herbarium is fully detailed in the report of the Conservator sub-
mitted herewith. Meetings have been held regularly every month,
except during the summer recess, and much interesting matter
communicated and papers presented, some of the more important
of which have appeared in the general Proceedings of the Academy.
The Section is wholl}^ free of debt, and has a surplus in its treasury,
and has at present thirty two members on the roll.

The officers elected to serve during 1884 are: —

Director, . . . Dr. W. S. W. Ruschenberger.
Vice-Director, . . Thomas Meehan.
Recording Secretary, . F. Lamson Scribner.

Isaac C. Martindale.

Cor. Secretary, \
Treasurer, j
Conservator, . . John H. Redfield.

Respectfully submitted,

Thomas Meehan,

Vice-Director.

Conservator's Report. — The Conservator reports that during the
year 1883, now closing, the donations of plants to the Academy's
Herbarium have been 2868 species. It is estimated that over 900

332 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

of these are new to the collection, adding 12 genera not before
represented. The North American and Mexican species received
were 1438 ; from the West Indies and South America were received
233 ; and from the Old World 1191. Referring to the appended
list of donations for details, we may here call attention to the
large and valuable additions contributed by Dr. Gray, of the
Cambridge Herbarium, representing the floras of ever^- quarter of
the globe ; a small collection from Australia, presented by Baron
von Miiller, through Mr. Meehan — nearly all of its species new to
us; a collection of about 70 species of interesting Patagonian
plants, made b}' Mr. William Bell, of the Transit of Venus expe-
dition, and presented b^^ him through Mr. Charles E. Smith;
upwards of 400 species of plants from various regions, presented
by Mr. Canby; and 51 species of Scandinavian Lichens, mostly
new to the collection, presented by Dr. J. If. Eckfeldt.

These have all been poisoned, catalogued, placed in papers and
distributed in their proper places in the Herbarium. This neces-
sary work has left little time to devote to the improvement of the
condition of the Herbarium generally, 3' et some progress has been
made in that respect. Provisional lists of species have been con-
tinued as far as the order Borraginaceae in the general Herbarium.
The Endogens have been re-arranged to conform to the order
adopted by Bentham and Hooker in the concluding part of their
" Genera Plantarum," that vast monument of careful, patient,
-analytic work. And some small progress has been made in the
much needed task of mounting the specimens of the North
American Herbarium.

Heretofore the Academy's collection of plants has received the
benefit of a large amount of faithful and intelligent labor from its
late Curator-in-charge, Mr. Charles F. Parker, but his disability
during the earl}- part of the 3'ear, folloAved by his death on the
1th September, 1883, has deprived ns of his services ; and now the
Conservator realizes, more than ever before, how much we have
owed to Mr. Parker's diligent zeal and skilful hands. In his
absence we have been indebted to the aid of Messrs. Burk, Meehan,
Scribner and Brinton, who have each rendered efficient service.
Mr. Scribner, though absent several months on exjilorations in
Montana for the Northern Transcontinental Survey, has continued
liis critical work upon the grasses of our collection, and has made
:some progress in the work of mounting them.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 333

It is very desirable that the Herbarium of the Academy should

be in such condition as will make it most accessible and useful to

botanists who may visit it during the meeting in this city next year

of the American Association for the Advancement of Science and

of the British Association ; and though it will be impossible to do

all that should be done in the brief intervening period, it is hoped

that much may be accomplished towards this end, and that good

progress may be made in the mounting of at least the North

American plants.

John H. Redfield,

December 10, 1883. Conservator.

REPORT OF THE MINERALOGICAL AND GEO-
LOGICAL SECTION.

Meetings of the Section have been held regularly during the
year, the attendance averaging from eight to ten. The discus-
sions have been more upon geological questions than upon
mineralogical, owing to the interest excited by the Geological
Survey of the State. The most important event to the Academy
in connection with mineralogy has been the accession of the Vaux
collection, and its arrangement b}^ Mr. Jacob Binder, whose ser-
vices in that matter have been of exceeding value.

The officers of the Section are : —

Director^ .... Theodore D. Rand.

Vice-Director^ . . . W. W. Jefferis, Esq.

Recorder and Secretary^ . Dr. A. E. Foote.

Conservator, .... Prof. H. Carvill Lewis.

Treasurer, .... John Ford.

Respectfully submitted,

Theodore D. Rand,

Director.

334 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF INVERTEBRATE
PALAEONTOLOGY.

The Professor of Invertebrate Palaeontology respectfully begs
to report that during the past year he has delivered a course
of twenty-six lectures on ph3^siographic geology and palseon-
tologj', which course, extending through the months of January,
February and March, as in previous years, was attended in prin-
cipal part by teachers belonging to the various institutions of
learning of the city.

He further reports that the collections under his immediate
supervision have been materiall}' improved through identifications
iind re-determinations incident to study, and this more particularly
in the special fields of Tertiary and Cretaceous palaeontology ;
in the latter department the institution is largel}- indebted to
Prof R. P. Whitfield, of New York city, for numerous determi-
nations of the fossils belonging to the State of New Jersey.
The additions to the palaaontological department of the Academ3''s
museum, which are recorded elsewhere, have been inconsiderable,
but it is hoped that local exchanges will shortl}- be instituted,
whereby valuable accessions to an already very extensive collec-
tion will be insured.

A course of lectures, beginning with about the middle week of
January, and embracing a discussion of the physical history and
palaeontology of the States of Pennsylvania and New Jerse}', has
been arranged for the coming year,

Yery respectfully,

Angelo Heilprin,
Professor of Invertebrate Palaeontology.

REPORT OF THE PROFESSOR OF MINERALOGY.

The Professor of Mineralogy respectfull};- reports that during
the past year a course of lectures, upon the mineralogy, litholog}'-
and geology of Philadelphia and vicinity, has been delivered,
alternately in the lecture room of the Academy and in the field,
The course treated of mineralogy in its relation to lithology and
geolog}', and of geology , both structural and historical, with special
reference to the formations in the vicinity of the city. The

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 335

field lectures were given at various points, where the strata, with
their enclosed minerals or fossils, could be studied in place.
Owing to the exceptional geological position of the cit_y, excur-
sions could be made to all the principal geological formations,
from the Laurentian to the Quaternary, inclusive. Among the
places visited were the mineral localities of Philadelphia, Bucks
and Delaware counties, the iron-mines and marble-quarries of Mont-
gomery county, the metalliferous veins and the Triassic rocks of the
Perkiomen Creek and elsewhere, the marl-pits of New Jersey, the
Palaeozoic strata along the Lehigh, and the coal regions of Mauch
Chunk. The attendance averaged about forty, about half of whom
were ladies. Eeports of these lectures, as published in a city
newspaper, are herewith deposited in the library of the Academy.

The mineralogical collection has increased steadily, as shown
by the annexed list of donations. The magnificent collection of
the late William S. Vaux, Esq., referred to in last year's report,
and more particularly described in the report of its Curator,
has been deposited as a special collection, under certain conditions,
in a room fitted up for the purpose, and is a most valuable and
noteworthy addition to the collections of the Academ}-.

A local collection of Pennsylvania minerals is now being
formed on the lower floor of the museum, in connection with a
systematic display of the natural history of the State, and the
aid of collectors is hereby asked to make this collection as com-
plete as possible. The arrangement adopted for it is that of M.
Adam, of Paris (as followed by Descloiseaux, Pisani, etc.), since
it serves better the purpose of public instruction than the classi-
fication of Prof. Dana, according to which the general collection
is arranged.

In fhe hope that the generous friends of the Academy will
assist in siipph-ing a much-felt want, attention is again drawn to
the urgent need of scientific in=5truments (goniometer, litholoo-ical
apparatus, etc.), both for instruction and for original investigation
in this department.

Respectfully submitted,

H. Carvill Lewis,

Professor of Mineralogy.

336 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

REPORT OF THE CURATOR OF THE WM. S. VAUX
COLLECTIONS.

The Curator of the Wm. S. Yaux Collections respectfully reports
to the Council of the Academy of Natural Sciences that the sys-
tematic arrangement of the collections has been completed. A
catalogue has yet to be made and a portion of the labeling finished.
The entire collection is now in a condition to be opened for inspec-
tion and study.

It may be hereafter found desirable to rearrange some of the
specimens, so that those from the same locality be brought into
closer proximity ; but this can be attended to hereafter.

On the 15th of August the arrangement and classification were
commenced. The Council of the Academy having made an
appropriation to defray necessary expenses, Mr. G. Howard Parker,
to whom acknowledgment is due for valuable services, was engaged
as an assistant, and acted in that capacity until the 15th of Sep-
tember.

For the expenses of arrangement, reference is made to the report
of the Treasurer of the Academy.

The collection has been arranged in seven upright cases, marked
from A to G, and thirty-nine horizontal cases, numbered from 1
to 39. They are made of Honduras mahogany, each having four
drawers, securely fastened with Yale locks. They are as nearl}'
dust-proof as possible, and the workmanship is entirel}^ satisfactory.

The archaeological part of the collection occupies five of the
upright cases, marked from A to E, and five of the horizontal,
marked from 1 to 5. The specimens number (counting arrow-
heads and small implements bj'' trays as one piece) two thousand
four hundred and forty -five (2445), arranged in groups according
to locality. They consist of stone axes, hatchets, celts, hammers,
pestles, balls, shovels, hoes, arrow-, spear- and lance-heads, dis-
coidal or Chunkee stones, ceremonial implements, copper and
bronze axes, mound pottery; Indian, Mexican, Peruvian, Costa
Rican, Roman and Carthagenian antiquities.

The localities represented are : Italy, Switzerland, German}',
France, Sweden, Denmark and Ireland, and America, from Maine
to Florida and from the Atlantic to the Pacific coast, with Mexico,
Peru and Costa Rica; with a few implements of the Esquimaux and
the South Sea Islanders, They include specimens of the pala^o-

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

33T

lithic and neolithic periods, of the work of the cave and lake
dwellers, the mound builders, ancient Mexicans, Peruvians and
Indians of America, and from the kitchen-middens of Denmark.
The mineralogical part of the collection has been arranged and
classified under the system of J. D. Dana, 5th edition, 1869. It
embraces 5302 specimens, representing 466 species or groups, all
mounted in trays and labeled.

All of which is respectfully submitted,

Jacob Binder,

Curator.

The election of Officers for 1884 was held, with the following
results : —

President,
Vice-Presidents,

Recording Secretary ,

Corresponding Secretary,

Treasurer,

Librarian,

Curators,

Councillors to serve three
years, ....

Finance Committee,

Joseph Leidy, M. D.
Thomas Meehan,
Rev. Henry C. McCook, D. D.
Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
George H. Horn, M. D.
William C. Henszey.
Edward J. Nolan, M. D.
Joseph Leidy, M. D.,
Jacob Binder,

W. S. W. Ruschenberger, M. D.
Angelo Heilprin.
George Y. Shoemaker,
Aubrey H. Smith,
William L. Mactier,
George A. Koenig, Ph. D.
Isaac C. Martindale,
Clarence S. Bement,
Aubre}' H. Smith,
S. Fisher Corlies,
George Y. Shoemaker.

338 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

ELECTIONS DURING 1883.

MEMBERS.

January 30. — John B. Deaver, M. D., G. Howard Parker,
Clarence R. Claghorn, F. A. Genth, Jr., Jacob Wortman, H. T.
Cresson, William L. Springs, Emily G. Hunt.

February 27. — Walter Rogers Furness.

April 24. — Daniel E. Hughes, M. D., Edwin S. Raich.

May 29. — N. Archer Randolph, M. D., J. Reed Conrad, M. D.,
Spencer Trotter, M. D.

August 28. — Charles Peabody.

September 25. — Henry F. Claghorn, Emanuele Fronani.

October 30. — S Mason McCollin, Francis A. Cunningham.

November 27. — Mrs. William M. Ellicott, George L. Knowles,
Ferdinand McCann, Lewis E. Levy, J. Alexander Savage.

CORRESPONDENTS.

May 29. — Arnould Locard, of Lyons ; Frederick W. Hutton, of
Christchurch, N. Z. ; C. E. Beddome, of Hobart Town, Tasmania.

October 30. — Eugene A. Rau, of Bethlehem, Pa.

November 27. — Marchese di Monterosato, of Palermo ; E. Marie,
of Paris; H. J. Carter, of Burleigh-Salterton, England.

1S83.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 339

ADDITIONS TO THE MUSEUM.

December 1, 1S82, to December i, 1883.

Archeology, Antiqifities, Implements, etc. — H. Skinner. Fragment of

terra-cotta head from Mexico.
H. C. Lewis. PaliBolitliic implements from the glacial gravels at Trenton,

N. J., collected by C. C. Abbott.
W. S. Jones. Two Indian carved images from Alaska.
T. D. Rand. Spanish water-jar from Barcelona; 2 Peruvian water-jugs;

Catawba Indian pottery (1 piece); fragments of pottery from Lancaster

County, Pa
T. R. Peale. Breech-clout, Oahu, Sandwich Islands.
J. M. Willcox. Two Indian implements from Brevard County, Florida.
Specimen of Wedgewood ware, designed by J. Flaxman, of London.
Mammalia (recent and fossil.)— J. Leidy. Molar tooth of Equus major (?),

found near Keenville, N. Y.
J. Swartzle Jaw fragments of Platygonus vetiis Leidy, type of species from

Mifflin County, Pa.
Mr. Magee. Felis concolor, from Colorado.
J. Jeanes. Two skulls, and the greater portion of the skeleton of Platygonus

compressus, from northern New York.
J. Wortman. Mtis decumanus (disarticulated skeleton).
J. C. Willson. Mus musculns (skeleton).
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Copra hirciis (incomplete skeleton) ; Vulpes

littoralis ; Felis pardalis (skull); Eumatopiits Stelleri [skuW).
Birds.— T.C. Craig. Cape pigeon {Daption Capensi.s), from Cape Horn, S. A.
A. F. Gentry. Skeleton of parrot [Chrysotis albifrons), from Cuba, W. I.
Zoological Society of Philadelphia. Vulturine Guinea fowl iNinnida vjilturina),

Africa; Buteo lorealis (skeleton).

Reptiles and Amphibians (recent and fossil). — 0. C. Marsh. Cast of Ptero-
dactyl { Ramphorhynchus phyllurus), from Eichstlidt, Bavaria.

M. Smiley. Tooth of Crocodilus fastiyiatus, from the Eocene of Virginia.

.1. L. Wortman. Ilyla versicolor, Tropidonotus leberis.

H. C. McCook. Horned frog [Phrynosoma coronata), from California.

Fishes (recent and fossil). — E. Zeitler. Box iish [Diodon sp).

S. Trotter. Skull of Prionotus.

A. Wenrich. Fossil fish (Diplomysfus analis), from Wyoming Territory.

AI. S Qnay. Tarpum (Megalops thrissoides). from Florida.

N. Spang. Pharyngeal bone and teeth of 3Iylocyprinus robustus, from the Post-
pliocene of Idaho. ,

Articulates (Crustaceans, insects, arachnids, and myriapods, recent and
fossil). — J. Jeanes. Cambarus primievus, from the Eocene of Wyoming
Territory; shrimp {/Fyer spinipes) \ b Libellulx and 2 Hemiptera, from the
lithographic slate of Solenhofen, Bavaria.

J. Harley. Belostoma grandis, hemipterous insect.

J. Ford. Crab (Gelasimus pi/gilator), 3 specimens, from Atlantic City, N. J.

T. Meehan. Goose barnacle {Lepas analifa), on sea-weed, from Killinos
Island, Alaska.

T. L. Casey. 187 specimens of unidentified Coleoptera, from Wellington and
Cape Town, S. Africa.

Mollusca (recent). — John Ford. Bulimvs Patasensis (Patas, Peru); Cyprsea
helvola (no locality) ; Turbinella scolymits (locality ?) ; two species of marine
shells ; Crepidula glauca (Cape May, N. J.).

340 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883,

Museum of Comparative Zoologj, Cambridge. Achatinella simularis (Waimea),

Pease collection.
S. Clessin. 20 species of land shells, from Eastern Europe.
A. E. Bush. 17 species of marine and fresh-water shells, from California.
W. D. Hartman. Helix Mozambicensis (near Lake Nyassa, Africa) ; 1 species

of land shell.
A. Montandon. 64 species of land and fresh-water shells, from the Carpathian

Mountains of Moldavia, and from Bucharest, Wallachia.
A. Locard. 225 species of land and fresh-water shells (1600 specimens), from

France.

F. G. Sanhorn. 2 species of marine shells, from Martinique.
W. W. Calkins. Conus testudinarius, from the West Indies.

C. R. Orcutt. 3 species of marine shells, from California, and Lower California ;

10 species of marine shells, from San Diego, ( al ; 4 species of marine shells.
W. Bell. Trophon liratus, T. crkpus, T. Geversianus, and Pecten, species, from

Santa Cruz River, Patigonia.

G, H. Parker. 10 species of marine shells, from near Galveston, Texas; 6
species of marine shells, from near Galveston, Texas ; 2 species of marine
shells.

Mrs. A. E. Bush. Helix, from San Pedro, Cal. ; 13 species of marine shells.
F. R. Latchford. 2 species of fresh-water shells, from Ottawa, Can.

F. AV. Hutton. 9 species of marine shells, from New Zealand
A. Garrett. 84 species of land shells, from the Society Islands.

A. A. Hinkley. Unio camptodon, Washington Co., 111.

R. E. C. Stevens. 3 speeies of marine shells, from the Gulf of California and

Japan ; 2 species of fresh-water shells.
M. L. Leach. 11 species of land and fresh-water shells.
T. Bland. 6 species of land and marine shells.
T. R. Peale. 1 species of marine shell.

G, W. Tryon, Jr. 8 species of marine shells.
J. Willcox. 6 species of fresh-water shells.

C. Headly. 6 species of land and fresh-water shells.

B. H. Wright. 1 species of fresh-water shell.
L. H. Streng. 1 species of fresh-water shell.

E. Marie. 81 species of marine, land, and fresh-water shells, from New Cale-
donia; 28 species of land, marine, and fresh- wattr shells, from New
Caledonia: 151 species of land, marine, and fresh-water shells, from New
Caledonia, and the Islands Mayotte, Anjouan, and Nossi-Be.

M. L. Leach. 5 species of land and fresh-water shells, from Michigan.

P. C. Tucker. 4 species of marine shells, from Texas.

B. Sharp. Semperian preparations of X/maa; c;>.ero«/^er and Cyclostoma elegans.

Conchological Section, A. N. S. 2 species of Triquetra (Santarem, Brazil) ; 63
species of land, marine, and fresh-water shells, new to the ooUection ; 33
species of land and fresh-water shells from the islands of Nossi-Be and
Mayotte, collected by E. Marie ; 102 species of land, marine, and fresh-
water shells; 215 species of land, marine, and fresh-water shells, from
Mauritius, collected by M. V. Robillard.

MoLLiiscA (fossil.) — W. Bell. Ostrea Patagonica, Turritella Patagonica, Cardita

Patagonica, TeUinoides oblonga, Venus meridional is, Dosinia sp., Liicina sp. —

Probably Eocene of Patagonia (Santa Cruz River).
J. Leidy. Orthoceras sp. From the Carboniferous of Fayetteville, Arkansas.
J. D. Conley. Nuciila RandaUi, from the Hamilton group of Madison Co., N. Y.
J. T. Rothrock. ISIiocene Coquina (with Pecten iVadlsonius, P. Jeffersonius,

Crepidula, Balamts, etc.), from Jamestown Island, James River, Va., and

from the James River, S. of Point of Shoals Lighthouse.
P. C Tucker. Two fpecies of probably Post-pliocene shells, from Galveston

Bay, Texas.

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PIIILADELPniA. 341

WoEMS, EcHiNODEEMs, CcELKNTEEATES AND Sponges (rcceiit and fossil). — C. R.

Orcutt. 3 species of Serpiilse.
J. Jeane:^. 4 sponges, from Florida.
J. Leidy. Spongilla lacustris, from the Schuylkill River, Philadelphia.

E. Potts. Spongilla lacvstroides, from AV. Branch of Chester Creek, Del. Co., Pa.
J. L. Curry. Leptogorgia virgulala (locality?).

J, T Rothrock. Columnaria sexradiala . from the Miocene of James River, Va.

C. Morris. Tubidar-ia indimsa, from Atlantic City, N. J.

Botany (recent). — Wm. M. Canby. 40.3 species plants from Europe, Syria,
Madeira, South A'rica, North Africa and Australia; 30 species collected by
himself in IMontana, in August, 1882, of which 9 were new to the Her-
barium ; flowers of Rhododindron Vasei/i, from plant brought from Jackson
Co.. N. C. ; roots and stem of Dryas Drumviondii Hk., from sand-bars of
Blackfoot R., Montana.

Dr. Asa Gray, Cambridge Herbarium. 43-5 species collected by Cosson and
others in Europe, Western Asia and N. Africa (Religum 3Iaillean^) ; 77 spe-
cies from the Province of Minas Geraes, Brazil ; 24 species of Cyperacete, col-
lected by Dr. Schweinfurth in tropical Africa; 40 species from China, Feejee
Islands. Ecuador, etc. (from Kew Herbarium) ; 234 species of plants collected
by Havard, Palmer, Schaftner and others, in the northern provinces of
Mexico and in western Texas ; 29 j-pecies of Rosa, from Herb, of J. G. Baker,
European or cultivated at Kew Garden ; 48 species of Arctic plants, collected
in Lapland, etc., by C Flahault and others, in 1878 and 187v- ; 102 species
plants from Morocco and Algeria; 60 species Cuban plants, mostly collected
by Rugel in 1849.

Dr. Sereno Watson, of Cambridge. 69 species collected by him in 1880 in
Montana, Idaho and Washington Territories.

Baron F. von Miiller, of Melbourne, Australia. 52 species of rare Australian
plants.

F. L. Scribner, of Philadelphia. Diplachne viscida Scribn. (new). Sporobolus
depanperaUis, Arizona, and Festuca rubra L., y»,r. grandijiora Hseckel, Sweden.

Geo. W. holstein, of Belvidere, N. J. 35 species plants from Mitchell Co.,
Texas.

Thomas Meehan. 7 species Cactacex, mostly from the western regions of the
U. S. ; specimens of Forst/thia si/spensa Wahl., and F. viridissima Lindl., from
seeds of same parent, showing them to be forms of one species ; Iletsperaloe
ynccspfoliu, cult, at Augusta, Ga. ; Bletia apliyUa Nutt, Austin, Tex^s; Proio-
coccus niralis (Red Snow), collected on summits of Sierra Nevada, California,
by Dr. Harkness, of San Francisco; Lewisia rediviva Pursh, Nevada; Froto-
myces vitico'a, Ellis, n. sp. of fungus on roots of grapevine, Chestnut Hill.

John H. Redfleld. 255 species planis collected in Western States and Territo-
ries by Pringle, Parish Bros, Brandegee, etc.; 551 species plants collected
in nprihern provinces of Mexico and on the Texan border, by Parry and
Palmer.

Wm. Bell, through Charles E. Smith. 80 species planis from Santa Cruz R.,
Patagonia, collected on Transit of Venus Expedition.

Wra. H. Dougherty. Fruit of Vanilla planifolia, Mexico.

J. J)onne)l Smith, of Baltimore. 21 species ferns collected in Jamaica, by J.
Hart, mostly new to the Herbarium.

Aubrey H. Smith. Three species of Californian plants new to the Herbarium,
collected by John Eaton Leconte.

Tlios. Bland, of N. V. Capsule and seeds of 5 species AVest Indian plants.

Isaac Burk. 22 species of introduced plants, mostly from ballast ground,
Phila., and Helianthits gigantevs L., var., from Cape May.

Chas. Millf>r. Rumex Berlandieri, Arizona; fruit of wild Vanilla, Mexico.

Dr. AV. S. W. Ruschenberger. Wood of the Tomalo, from S .raoa.

Isaac C. Martindale. Ell's's lOih Century of N. American Fungi; Dalea Ordim
Gray, a new species from Arizona ; part of the trunk of a white birch
branching into two limbs, afterwards reuniting into one.

342 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Amer. Phil. Society. Specimens of Selaginella Iqndophylla, from Mexico.
Prof. Jos. P. Lesley. Grains of wheat and barley, found germinating in a

block of ice.
J. A. McNiel, of Binghampton, N. Y. Capsule of Sand-box tree (^Hura crepitans),

from Panama, S. A.
Dr. John W. Eckfeldt. 51 species of Scandinavian Lichens, named — most of

them new to the Academy's collection,
Thos. Meehan and John H. Redfield. 148 species plants collected in Arizona

by H. H. Rusby, in 1883.
Prof. H. Carvill Lewis. Radical leaves of Argyroxiphium Sandvicense, etc.,

from Sandwich Islands.
J. G. Lemmon, Oakland, California. Tagetes Lemmoni Gr., a new species from

Arizona.
Col. Robert W. Furnas, Brownville, Neb. Wood of Madura aurantiaca, taken

from far below the surface of the ground, supposed to have been buried 200

years, and estimated from its annual rings to be from a tree 300 years old.

Also, wood of Salix cordata, var. vestita.

Botany (fossil). — J. Jeanes. Fopulus latior, var. rotundata, P. latior, var. cordi-
folia, Acer trilobatum, Cinnamomum Scheuchzeri, Salix tenera, Podogonium
Lyelhanum, P. Knorii, and Carpolitlius pruniformis, from the Molasse of
Oeningen.

W. BpU. Silicified wood, from the Eocene (?) of Patagonia (Los Missiones).

Minerals. — Joseph Leidy. Axinite, Bethlehem, Pa. ; Argentiferous Wavellite,
Leadville, Col. ; Limonite, pseudomorph after Gryphea, Mullica Hill, N. J.;
Lepidolite, Auburn. Me. ; Quartz with Pyrophyllite, Hot Springs, Ark. ;
Cookeite with Rubellite and Quartz, Mt. Mica, iMe. ; Muscovite, Chester Co.,
Pa.; Muscovite with Biotite crystals, Macon Co.,N. C. ; Tourmaline in
Muscovite, Mt. Mica, Me. ; Green-black Tourmaline in Mus«ovite, Mt.
Mica, Me. ; Serpentine with crystals of Chrysotile, Easton, Pa. ; Green
Tourmaline with nodule of Achroite, Paris, Me. ; Rose Tourmaline, Mt.
Mica, Me.; Rubellite, Mt. Mica, Me.; Heliotrope, India; Green Tourmaline
with Lepidolite, Auburn, Me. ; Rhodophyllite, Texas, Pa. ; Kaolinite, Summit
Hill, Pa. ; Muscovite, showing 30 rays, Canada; Muscovite with hexagonal
markings, Georgia ; Homogeneous anthracite, and anthracite presenting a
fused appearance, found in association with quartz crystals, in cavities of
the calciferous Sandstone, Herkimer Co., N. Y. ; Rubellite, and Rubellite
passing into Indicolite, Mt. Mica, Me. ; Green Tourmaline passing into
fibrous Rubellite, Hebron, Me. ; AUophane, Polk Co., Tenn.

W. H. Jones. Garnets, from Stikine River, Alaska.

Theodore D. Rand. Quartzite with (organic ?) markings, Radnor, Pa. ;
Asbestos and Serpentine, Radnor Station, Pa. ; Chrysotile, Radnor Station,
Pa.

H. T. Cresson. Feldspar crystal, Leiperville, Pa.

C. S. Bement. Cinnabar, New Almaden, Cal. ; Cinnabar and Metacinna-
barite. Lake Co., Cal. ; Pyrites, I. Elba and Freiberg, Saxony ; Hematite,
Elba and Mt. Vesuvius ; Bournonite, Przibram, Bohemia ; Spinel, Orange
Co., N. Y. ; Quartz, pseudomorph after Barite, Roxbury, Conn.; Green
Pyroxene, St. Lawrence Co., N. Y. ; Beryl, Quartz, Albite, and Orlhoclase,
Elba ; Garnets in gneissose granite, Avondale, Pa. ; Orthoclase, St. Lawrence
Co., N. Y. ; Orthoclase with Quartz, Ural Mts. ; Orthoclase with Quartz,
Lomnitz, Silesia; Tourmaline, McComb Co., N. Y. ; Sphene, St. Lawrence
Co., N. Y. ; Wavellite, Hot Springs, Ark. ; Apatite, Renfrew, Ontario ;
Plagionite, Wolfsberg, Harz Mts.; Crocidolite, Griqua Terr., S. Africa;
Cancrinite, Litchfield, Conn.; Barite, Felsobdnya, Hungary; Anglesite,
Sardinia ; Strontianite, Hamm, Westphalia.

A. E. Foote. Heulandite on Zoisite, Chabazite with Leidyite, Chabazite, from
Leiper's Quarry, Del. Co., Pa.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 343

H. Skinner. Native Tellurium, Boulder Co., Col. ; Massive Menaccanite. Fair-
mount Park, Phila. ; Water-worn rock simulating Indian implement, Athens,
Pa.; Native Tellurium, Boulder Co., Col ; Columbite, Greenland.

Joseph Jeanes. Pyrite (twin cry.>-tal), with Hematite, from Elba; Hematite
crystals, Caoradi, Tavetsch Thai, Switzerland; Stibnite, Japan; Celestine,
from Egypt, Girgecti, and Put-in-Bay, Lake Erie.

H. Burgin. Argentiferous Arsenopyrite, Continental Divide, Col. ; Schirmerite,
Summit Co., Col. ; Pyrargyrite, Argentiferous Tetrahedrite, Kelso Mt., Col. ;
Fluorite, iridescent Quartz, White Beryl, Garnet in Albite, Microlite in Albite,
Allanite in Albite, Microcline, Muscovite, Pink Muscovite in Albite, Albite,
Oithoclase, Kaolinite, Columbite in Albite, and Mona^zite in Albite, all from
Amelia Co , Va. ; Vanadiferous Wulfenite, Phoenixville, Pa. ; Ankerite,
Chester Co., Pa.

M. E. Newbold. Amber, from the greensand of Vincentown, N. J.

W. H. H. Bales. Hornblende, from South Windsor, Me.

S. R. Calhoun. Chalcedony geode, containing water, from the Rio Salto,
Uruguay.

J. M. Hartman. Octahedral crystal of Cuprite, France.

W. P. Miller. Wulfenite, from Arizona.

J. Binder. Chalcopyrite, Mt. Desert I., Me.

C. R. Gaul. Mesolite and Calcite, from Fritz's Island, near Reading, Pa,

F. V. Hayden. Viandite, Yellowstone National Park.

Purchased. Corundum, Iredell Co., N. C. ; Variolite, Tyrol; Variolite pebble.
Durance, France; Margerite and Emery, Chester, Mass.

In Exchange. Phosphorescent Limestone, Utah.

344 rROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883

ADDITIONS TO LIBRARY.

1883.

Abich, Hermann. Geologische Forschungen in den Kaukasischen Liindern. I
and II Th. and atlas. Jos. Jeanes.

Albrecht, Paul. Sur les 4 os interniaxillaires le Bec-de-Lievre.
Das OS intermedium tarsi der Silugethiere.
Sur le crane remarquable d'une idiot de 21 ans.

Sur la valeur morphologique de I'articulation mandibulaire du cartilage de
Meckel. The Author.

Ancey, F. C. Observations sur quelques Macularia.

Catalogue des mollusques marins du Cap Pitiede pres de Marseille.
Sur la fauue conchyliologique terrestre du pays des Somalis. The Author.
Anderson, John. Catalogue of Mammalia in the Indian Museum, Calcutta. ,
Pt. 1.
Catalogue and hand-book of the archfeological collections in the Indian
Museum. Part 1, 1883. The Trustees.

Archiv. der naturw. Landesdurchforschung von Bohmen. IV, 4, 6 ; V, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ashburner, Chas. A. The anthracite coal beds of Pennsylvania. H.C.Lewis.
Astor Library, 34th annual report, 1882. The Trustees.

Baillon, M. H. Dictionnaire botanique, 15e fasc. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Barrois, Ch. Recherches sur les terrains anciens des Asturies et de la Galice.
Text and plates. Dr. F. V. Hayden.

Bartram's Garden, three photographs of scenes in. J. II. Redfield.

Beales-Rissley Collection, W. Elliot Woodward's 60th sale. Ancient imple-
ments and ornaments, October 31, 1883.
Bellardi, L. Molluschi dei Terreni terziari del Piemonte e della Liguria. Pt.
2, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bentham G. et J. D. Hooker. Genera plantarum. Ill and III, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Berg, Carlos. Doce heteromeros nuevos de la fauna Argentina.
Miscellanea lepidopterologica. Buenos Aires, 1883.

Analecta lepidopterologica, 1882. The Author.

Berkeley, Rev. M. J. Description of new species of fungi, collected in the

vicinity of Cincinnati by Thos. G Lea. David L. James.

Blackwall, John. Researches in zoology. 2d Ed., 1878. Jos. Jeanes.

Bland, T. Description of two new species of zonites from Tennessee.

The Author.
Board of Agriculture, State of North Carolina. Report of the Session, 1883.

S. G. Worth.

Bocage, J. V. Barboza du. Ornithologie d' Angola. 2me Partie. Lisbonne,

1881 The Author.

Boissier, Ed. Flora Orientalis. V, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Borre, A. Preudhomme de. Sur un travail recent de M. S. H. Scudder con-

cernant les myriopodes du terrain houiller.

Analyse et resume d'un memoire de M. le Dr. G. H. Horn on the genera of

Carabidre with special reference to the fauna of boreal America.
Sur deux varictds de Carabiques observees en Belgique. The Author.

Boulenger, G. A. Catalogue of the batrachia gradientia, S. caudata and
batrachia apoda in the collection of the British Museum. 2d. Ed.

The Trustees.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 345

Bourguignot, J. R. Lettres malacologique a MM. Brusina d'Agram et Kobelt
de Francfort. The Author.

Description du nouveau genre Gallandia, 1880.
Recensement des Vivipara du syst^me Europeen, 1880.
Description de diverses espfeces de Coelestele et de Paladilhia decouvertes
en Espagne par le Dr. G. Servain, 1880. Jos. Jeanes.

Brauer, F. Offenes Schreiben als Antwort auf Herrn Baron Osten-Sacken's
" Critical Review " meiner Arbeit iiber die Notacanthen, 1883.

The Author.
Brefeld, 0. Botanische Untersuchungen iiber Hefenpilze. V H.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Brinton, Daniel G. Recent European contributions to the study of American
Archeology. The Author.

British Museum. Catalogue of the birds in the. Vols. 7 and 8, 1883.

The Trustees.

Bronn's Klassen und Ordnungen des Thier-Reichs. ler Bd., Protozoa, neue

Bearbeitet von Dr. 0. Biitschli, 1-19 Lief. ; 6er Bd., II Abth., 9-11 Lief.;

6er Bd., Ill Abth., 35-40 Lief. ; V Abth., 26 Lief. Wilson Fund.

Brongniart, Chas. Les Gregariniens.

Notices scientifiques. Conferences faites devant la " Soci^t^ scientifique de

lajeunesse" F. V. Hayden.

Brooklyn Library. 25th annual report of the Board of Directors, March 29,

1883, and Bulletin No. 17. The Directors.

Briihl, C. B. Zootomie aller Thierklassen. Atlas, Lief. 26, 27.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Buckton, Geo. B. Monograph of the British Aphides. Vol. IV.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Bucquoy, E., Ph. Dautzenberg and G. Dollfuss. Les mollusques marins du
Roussillon. Fasc. 3 and 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bureau of Education. Circulars of Information. No. 2, 1882—1883.
National pedagogic congress of Spain.
Natural science in secondary S3hools.

Instruction in moral and civil government. Department of the Interior.

Bureau of Ethnology. First annual report. 1881. Smithsonian Institution.

Bureau of Statistics. Treasury Department. Quarterly report. June 30,

and Sept. 30, .1883. The Department.

Cabral, F. A. de V. Pereira. Estudo de depositos superficaes da Bacia do

Douro.
Caligny, Anatole de. Recherches th6oriques et experimentales sur les oscil-
lations de I'eau. le et 2e partie. The Author.
Cardim, Fernao. Do principle e origem dos indios do Brazil e de sens costumes,
adoracao e ceremonias. 1881. 0. A. Derby.
Carr, Lucien. The mounds of the Mississippi Valley, historically considered.
Cams, J» V. Ueber die Leptocephaliden. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Caspari, H. Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Hautgewebes der Cacteen. 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Catalogue of the officers and students of Yale College. 1882-1883.

The Corporation.
Cheesman, L. M. Ueber den Einfluss der mechanischen Harte auf die mag-
netischen Eigenschaften des Stahles und des Eisens. 1882.

University of Wiirzburg.
Chief of Bureau of Statistics, Treasury Department. Quarterly report, Msrch
31, 1883. Treasury Department.

Chief of Engineers, U. S. A. Annual report. Parts I, II, III, 1882.

Engineer Department, U. S. A.
Chief of Ordnance. Report of. 1882. War Department.

Chief Signal Officer. Annual reports of the. For 1880-1881. War Department.

23

346 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Choflfat, Paul. Etude stratigraphique et paleontologique des terrains juras-
siques du Portugal. Ire Livr., 1880. Geological Survey of Portugal.
City Hospital, Boston. 19th report of the trustees of 1882-83. The Authors.
Clessin, S. Zwei neue siideurop'aische Species.
Die tertiilren Binnenconchylien von Undorf.
Was ist Art, was Varietiit?

Bemerkungen iiber die deutschen Arten des Genus Planorbis Guett.
Les Pisidiums de la faune profonde des lacs Suisse.
Studien iiber die Helix-Gruppe Fruticicola Hid.

Helix arbustorum und ihre Varietiiten. The Author.

Cole, A. C. Studies in microscopical science. Vol. I, 1883.

The Biological and Microscopical Section.
Colonial Museum and Geological Survey Department. Report of geological
explorations during 1881, Geological Survey of New Zealand.

Commissioner of Agriculture. Report for the year 1882.

Department of Agriculture.

Commission zur wissenschaftlichen Untersuchung der deutschen Meere.

VII— XI Jahrg., 1 Abth., 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Comstock, C. B. Professional papers of the Corps of Eugineers, U. S. A.

Mo. 24.

Report upon the primary triangulation of the U. S. Lake Survey.

Engineer Department, U. S. A.
Cooper, E. Forest culture and Eucalyptus trees. 1876. F. von Mueller.

Cope, E. D. The genus Phenacodus.
Paleontological Bulletin, No. 36.

On the mutual relation of the Bunotherian mammalia.
The structure and appearance of the Laramie Dinosaurian.
On the characters of the skull in Hadrosaurus and on some vertobrata from

the Permian of Illinois.
On the extinct dogs of North America. The Author.

Coppi, Francesco. Osservazioni malacologiche circa la Nassa semistriata e N.
costulata del Brocchi. The Author.

Costa, F. A. Pereira da. Monumentos prehistorisos. Descripcao de algunas
dolmins ou autras de Portugal 1868.
Commissao geologico de Portugal. MoUuscos fosseis Gasteropodes dos
depositos terciarios de Portugal, lo & 2o Caderno, 1867. The Author.
Do existencia do homem em epochas remotas no Valle do Tejo. Premeiro
opusculo. Geological Survey of Portugul.

Coues, E. Check list of North American birds. 1882. Jos. Jeanes.

Cox, J. C. On the edible oysters found on the Australian and neighboring
coasts. The Author.

Dames, W., and E. Kayser. Palaeontologische Abhandlungen. I, 1, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Davaine, C. Traits des enlozoaires et des maladies vermineuses. 1877.

Jos. Jeanes.

De CandoUe, A. Origine des plan tes cultiv^s. 1883. I. V Williamson Fun^^.

De CandoUe, A. and C. Monographic phanerogamarum. IV. Wilson Fund.

Delgado, J. F. Nery. Communica9oes da Seccao dos trabalhos geologicos. I.

Considera5oes dcerca dos estudos geologicos em Portugal.

Contributions a la flore fossile du Portugal. 1881.

Relatorio e outros documentos relatives d Commissao scientifica desem-

penhada em differentes cidades da Italia, Allemanha e Franca. 1882.
Terrenes paleozoicos de Portugal. Sobre a exittencia de terreno siluriano
no Baixo Alemtejo. Geological Survey of Portugal.

Department of Agriculture. Special report. Nos. 52-57, 59-65.
Chemical Division, Bulletin No 1. Div. of Statistics, 2.
Division of Entomology, Bulletin Nos. 1 and 2. 1883. '
Division of Statistics, n. s., report No. 1. 1883. The Department.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 347

Department of Mines, Nova Scotia. Report for the year 1882.

Department of Mines.
Deschanel, A. Privat. Elementary treatise on natural philosophy. 6th Ed.

1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Director of the Mint. Annual report of the. 1880, 1881, 1882.

Horatio C Burchard.
Dollo, M. L. Troisi^me note sur les Dinosauriensde Bernissart. The Author.
Domeyko, Ignacio. Mineralojia. 8a Ed., 1870. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Drasche, R. v. Fragmente zu einer Geologie der Insel Luzon. 1878.

Jos. Jeanes.
Drouet. H. Unionidaa de la Russie d'Europe. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Dumeril, Aug. Histoire naturelle des poissons. Two vols, in three and plates.

1 and 2 Livr. Jos. Jeanes.

Dupont, E. Terrain devonien de I'Entre-Sambre-et-Meuse. Les lies Coral-

liennes de Roly et de Philippeville. The Author.

E. Dupont and M. Mourlon. Musee royale d'histoire naturelle de Belgique.

Service de la carte geologique du Royaume explication de la feuille de

Ciney. Geological Survey of Belgium.

Dutton, Clarence. United States Geological Survey. Tertiary history of the

Grand Canon District, with Atlas. Department of the Interior.

Elliot, D. G. A monograph of the Bucerotidee or Family of the Hornbills.

Part 10. VVilson Fund.

Elsas, A. Ueber erzwungene Schwingungen weicher Fliden, 1881.

University of Wiirzburg.
Encyclopaedia Britannica. XV. 1. V. Williamson Fund.

Encyklopedie der Naturwissenschaften. ler Abth., 31, 32 and 34 Lief. ; 2e

Abth., 8-16 and 33 Lief.
Erichson. Naturgeschichte der Insekten Deutschlands. ler Abth. Coleoptera,

VI, 2e Lief., Bg., 13-23, 1882. Wilson Fund.

Ernst, A Resumen del curso de zoologica. I, 1882. The Author.

Etheridge, Kobert. A catalogue of Australian fossils, 1878. Jos. Jeanes.

Eudes-Deslongchamps. Le Jura Normand. 2d Livr. Monog. IV, fls. 6-8.

Pis. 3, 7, 15; Monog. VI, fls. 5-10. Pis. II, 5, 6, 7, 9, 11, 1878.

Jos. Jeanes.
Expedition zur physikalisch-chemischen und biologischen Untersuchungen der

Nordsee im Sommer 1872. Berlin, 1876. Jos. Jeanes.

Eyferth, B. Die einfachsten Lebenformen systematische Naturgeschichte der

mikroskopischen Siisbwasserbewohner, 1878. Jos. Jeanes.

Eyton, T. C. A history of the oyster and the oyster fisheries.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Fauna und Flora des Golfes von Neapel. V-VII, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Falb, R. Grundziige zu einer Theorie der Erdleben und Vulkanausbriiche. 2e

Ausg., 1880. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Felix, J. Sammlung palaeontologischer Abhandlungen. I, 1. Die fossilen

Holzer westindiens, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Fernandez, L. Coleccion de documentos para la historia de Costa Rica.

The Author.
Ficalho, Conde de. Flora dos Lusiados, 1880. Acadeniy of Science of Lisbon.
Fin'kncial reform almanack for 1883. i. obden Club.

Fischer, PauL Manuel de Conchyliologie. Fasc. 5 and atlas. The Author.
Forestry Bulletin, No. 23-25. Department of the Interior.

Fouque, F. et Michel Levy. Synthase des min^raux et des roches. 1882.

Jos. Jeanes.
Frazer, Persifor. Cleopatra's Needle ; mineraloglcal and chemical examina-
tion of the rock of the Obelisk.
The iron ores of the middle James River in Amherst and Nelson Counties,

Virginia. The Author.

348 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Free Public Library, Museum and Walker Art Gallery of the City of Liverpool.

13th annual report. The Trustees.

Friedlander, R. and Sohn. Bibliotheca historico-naturalis et mathematica.

Lager-catalog., 1883. The Publishers.

Friele, H. Den Norske Nordhav-Expedition, 1876-1878. VIII. Zoologie,

Mollusca. I. Buccinidse, 1882. The Author.

Gallo, A. N. Monografia suUe culture ortensi della Sicilia, 1880.

Agricultural Society of Sicily.
Geological Survey of Illinois A. H. Worthen, Director. Vol. 7, Geology and

Paleontology. Geology, by A. H. Worthen. Palaeontology, by A. H.

Worthen, Orestes St. John and S. A. Miller, with an addenda by Chas.

Wachsmuth and W. H. Barris. May, 1883. The Survey.

Geological Survey of India. Memoirs. Palaeontologia Indica. Ser. X, Vol.

2, Pts. 1, 2, 3 and 5 ; Ser. XIV, Vol. 1, Pt. 3. Memoirs, 8mo. XIX, 1 ;

XXII.
Records, XV, 1. 2 and 3. The Survey.

Geological Survey of Newfoundland. Report of Progress. 1881. The Survey.
Geological Survey of New Jersey. Annual Report, 1882. The Survey.

Geology of Wisconsin. Survey of 1873-1879. Vols. 1-4 and folio atlas.

The Survey.
German Hospital of the City of Philadelphia. 23d annual report. The Trustees.
Goppert, H. R. Ueber das gefrieren Erfrieren der Pflanzen und Schutzmittel

dagegen, 1883. 1. V. Williamson Fund.

Gomes, B. A. Vegetaes fosseis. Primeiro opuscolo. Flora fossil do terreno

carbonifero, 1865. Geological Survey of Portugal.

Qraaf, W. de. Sur la construction des organes genitaux des Phalangiens, 1882.

Jos. Jeanes.
Gray, Asa. Contributions to North American botany, 1883. The Author.

Greeley, A. W. Professional papers of the Signal Service, No. 2.

Isothermal Lines of the United States. War Department.

Gregorio, Ant. de. Moderne nomenclature des Coquilles. 1883. The Author.
Gross, V. Les Protohelvfetes, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Griiber, Wenzel. Beobachtungen aus der menschlichen und verglelchenden

Anatomic. 3 Hefte. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Giinther, A. C. L. G. An introduction to the study of fishes.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Guimaraes, A. R. P. Description d'un nouveau poisson de I'interieur d' Angola.

The Author.

Guthrie, Malcolm. On Mr. Spencer's unification of knowledge. The Author.

Guyot, Arnold. Physical geography. New York. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Biographical memoir of Louis Agassiz. The Author.

Guppy, K. J. L. The Trinidad official and commercial register and almanack

for 1882 and 1883. The Author.

Haeckel, Ernst. Anthropogenic. 3e Aufl., 1877. Jos. Jeanes.

Hale, P. M. The woods and timbers of North Carolina. S. G. Worth.

Hall, James. Geological Survey of New York. Palaeontology, VI, 1. Lamel-

libranchiata.
Bryozoans of the, Upper Helderberg and Hamilton Groups. The Author.
Hallock, Wm. Ueber galvanische Polarisation und das Smee'sche Element,

1882. University of Wurzburg.

Hand-book of the State of North Carolina. Raleigh, 1883. S.G.Worth.

Hartmann, R. Die menscheniihnlichen Atfen und ihre organisation im Vergleich

zur Menschlichen, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Harkness, H. W. Footprints found at the Carson State prison. The Author.
Hauer, Franz R. v. Die Geologic und ihre Anwendung auf die Kenntniss die

Bodenschaffenheit der Oesterr.-Ungar. Monarchic, ie Aufl., 1878.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 349

Hayden, F. V. 12th annual report of the United States Geological and
Geographical Survey of the Territories. Parts 1, 2 and maps, 1883.

Department of the Interior.
Hayden, F. V., and A. R. C. Selwyn. Stanford's compendium of geography
and travel. North America. 1883. F. V. Hayden.

Hawaii. Sixteen photographs of the recent flov? from Monna-Loa, a volcano
of the Island of. Dr. Francis W. Wetmore.

Hubert, M. Observations sur la position stratigraphique des couches a Tere-
bratula janitor, Am. transitorius, etc., d'aprls des travaux r^cents.
Sur le groupement des couches les plus anciennes de la s6rie strati-
graphique, a I'occasion du projet de carte geologique Internationale da
I'Europe.
Gisement des couches marines de Sinceny (Aisne).
Sur le position des sables de Sinceny.
Sur le groupe nummulitique du Midi de la France.

Le terrain cr^tac6 des Pyr<Sn^es. The Author.

Heckmann, J. Ueber die Einwirkung von Dinitrobenzol auf Natracetessi-

gester. 1882. University of Wiirzburg.

Heer, Oswald. Flora fossilis arctica. VI, 2, VII, 2. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Hermann, L. Handbuch der Physiologie. V, 2er Th., 2 L.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hertwig, Richard. Der Organismus der Radiolarien. 1879. Jos. Jeanes.

Hicks, Henry. On the metamorphic and overlying rocks in parts of Ross and
Inverness Shires. The Author.

Hidalgo, J. G. Moluscos marinos de Espana, Portugal y las Baleares. Ent.
17. Nov., 1882. The Author.

Higgins, Henry H. Notes by a field-naturalist in the western tropics. 1877.

Jos. Jeanes.

Hildebrandsson, H. Hildebrand. Samling af bemarkelsedager, tecken, m'arken,

ordsprak och skrock rorande vaderleken. The Author.

Hill, Franklin C. On the antenna of Melcie. The Author.

Hincks, Thos. A history of the British marine polyzoa. 2 vols. 1880.

Jos. Jeanes.
Hinde, G. J. On annelid remains from the silurian strata of the Isle of
Gotland. 1882. The Author.

Hoernes, R. Die Erdbeben-Theorie Rudolf Falb's. 1881. Jos. Jeanes.

Hoffer, Eduard. Die Hummeln Steiermarks. 1 & 2 H. Jos. Jeanes.

Hooker, J. D. The flora of British India. Parts IX and X.
Hooker, Wm. Jackson. Botanical miscellany. 3 vols, 1831. John H. Redfield.
Hopley, Catherine C. Snakes: Curiosities and wonders of serpent life. 1882.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Hovey, Horace C. Celebrated American caverns. 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Humboldt, A. v. Views of nature. London, 1878. I. V.Williamson Fund.
Hungarian Government. Fourteen statistical pamphlets.

Hungarian Academy of Sciences.
Hutton, P. W. Note on the structure of Struthiolaria papulosa. The Author.
Catalogues of the New Zealand diptera, orthoptera, hymenoptera. 1881.
s Geological Survey of New Zealand.

Ignatius, K. E. F. Exposition Universelle de 1878 a Paris.

Le Grand-Duch^ de Finlande. Notice Statistique, 1878. The Author.

Index-Catalogue of the library of the Surgeon-General's office, U. S. A.

Authors and subjects. Vol. IV. 1883. War Department.

Inspector der Fischereien, Finnland. An die Ackerbau-Expedition im k. Senat

fUr Finnland d. 20 Jan. 1883 abgegebene Gutachten, in wiefern es

geeignet ware in Finnland kiinstliche Fischzucht einzufUhren.

A. J. Malmgren.
Issel, Arturo. Istruzione pratiche per I'ostricultura e la mitilicultura.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
James, Jos. F. A revision of the genus Clematis of the United States. The Author.

350 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Jan, G. Iconographie generale des Ophidiens. Vol. 2, Index, etc.

Wilson Fund.
Jeffreys, J. Gwyn. On the moUusca procured during the cruise of H. M. S.
"Triton," between the Hebrides and Faroes in 1882.
On the mollusca procured during the "Lightning" and "Porcupine"

expeditions, 1868-70.
Black Sea mollusca. The Author.

Jolis, Aug. le. Note sur le Myosotis sparsiflora de la flore de la Normandie.

The Author.
Jones, Jos. Investigations, chemical and physiological, relative to certain
American vertebrata. The Author.

Judd, John W. Volcanoes : What they are and what they teach.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Just, L. Botanischer Jahresbericht. 6er Jahrg., 2te Abth., 4 und 5 H. ;

7er Jahrg., 2te Abth., 2 und 3 H. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kemeny, Gabor and Geza Howarth. Jelentes^az orszdgos Phylloxera-kiserleti

Allomds, 1881-ik 6vi Mukod^s^rol, 1 Evfolyam, 1881.

Hungarian Acad, of Sciences.
Kennel, J. Ueber Ctenodailus pardalis, 1882. The Author.

Kent, W. Saville. A manual of the Infusoria. 2 vols, text and one of atlas.
1881-82. Jos. Jeanes.

Kinahan, G. H. Manual of geology of Ireland. 1878. Jos. Jeanes.

Kleinenberg, N. Hydra. 1872. Jos. Jeanes.

Kobell, F. V. Geschichte der Mineralogie, von 1850-1860. Miinchen. 1864.

Jos. Jeanes.

Kobelt, W. Iconographie der schalentragenden europliischen Meerescon-

chylien. H. 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Catalog der im europ'aischen Faunengebiet lebenden Binnenconchylien.

2te Aufl. 1881. Jos. Jeanes.

Kolliker, A. Zur Entwicklung des Auges und Geruchsorganes menschlicher

Embryonen. 1883. The University of Zurich.

Koninck, L. G. De. Notice sur la famille des Bellerophontidae. The Author.

Krazer, A. Theorie der zweifach unendlichen Thetareihem auf grund der

Riemann'schen Thetaformel. 1. Th., 1881. University of Wlirzburg.

Kunz, Geo. F. American gems and precious stones. 1883. The Author.

Lacoe, R. D. List of palseozoio fossil insects of the U. States. The Author.

Lang, Heinr. Otto. Grundriss der Gesteinskunde. 1877. Jos. Jeanes.

Lanessan, J. L. , Dr. Manuel d'histoire naturelle m^dicale. 8 vols., 1882.

Jos. Jeanes.

Lapparent, A. de. Traite de Geologic, VII, VIII. Jos. Jeanes.

Lasaulx, A. v. Elemente der Petrographie. 1875. Jos. Jeanes.

Latchford, F. R. Notes on Ottawa Unionidse. The Author.

Lawes, Sir J. B. Memorandum of the origin, plan and results of the field and

other experiments conducted on the farm and in the laboratory of Sir

John Bennet Lawes. 1883. The Author.

Lawrence, Geo. N. Description of a new species of Swift of the genus

Chaetura.

Descriptions of two new species of birds from Yucatan of the families

Columbidae and Formicariidre.
Description of a new species of bird of the family Cypselidse.
Description of a new species of bird of the family Turdidse.
Description of a new species of Icterus from the West Indies.
Description of a new sub-species of Loxigilla from the island of St. Chris-
topher, West Indies. The Author.
Le Conte, John L., and Geo. H. Horn. Classification of the Coleoptera of
North America. 188x. The Author.
Lee, John G. Homicide and suicide in Philadelphia during 1871 to 1881
incl. The Author.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA. 351

Lewis, H. Carvill. Mineralogical notes, 1882.

A summary of progress in Mineralogy in 1882.
On some enclosures in Muscovite, 1882.
The great ice age in Pennsylvania.
The great terminal moraine across Pennsylvania.
Map of the terminal moraine.

The geology of Philadelphia. January 12, 1882. The Author.

Library Comijany of Philadelphia. Bulletin, January, 1883. The Trustees.
Librarian of Congress. Annual report, 1882. The Author.

Liversidge, Archibald. The minerals of New South Wales, 2d Ed.

Royal Society of New South Wales.

Locard, A. Contributions a lafaune malacologique Francaise, I-VI, 1881-1882.

Catalogue des mollusques vivants terrestres et aquatiqu^s du Department

del'Ain, 1881.
Prodrome de Malacologie Francaise. Catalogue g^n^ral des mollusques
, vivants tie France, 1882.
Etudes sur les variations malacologique d'aprfes la faune vivante et fossile

de la partie centrale du Bassin du Rhone. 2 vols., 1881.
Recherches paleontologiques sur les depots tertiaires a Milne-Edwardsia

et Vivipara du Pliocfene inf^rieur du Department de I'Ain, 188j.
Malacologie des Lacs de Tiberiade d'Antioche et d'Homs, 1883.
Description d'une espece nouvelle de mollusque appartenant au genre
Paulia. The Author.

Lowne, B. Thompson. Descriptive catalogue of the teratological series in the
museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England. Jos. Jeanes.
Lyman, Theo. Report of the scientific results of the voyage of H. M. S. Chal-
lenger. Zoology, V, 14. Report on the Ophiuroidea. The Author,
M' Alpine, D. The botanical atlas, 1883, 2 vols. Jos. Jeanes.
McCook, H. C. The mode of recognition among ants, 1878.
Toilet habits of ants, 1878.
The Basilica spider and her snare, 1878.
Mound-making ants of the Alleghenies, 1878.
Supplementary note on the aeronautic flight of spiders, 1878.
Cutting or Parasol ant, Atta fervens Say, 1879.

Note on the adoption of an ant-queen, 1879. Mode of depositing ant-
eggs.
Note on the marriage-flights of Lasius flavus and Myrmica lobricomis,

1879.
Pairing of spiders, Linyphia marginata, 1879. Note on mound-making

ants, 1879.
Combats and nidification of the Pavement ant, 1879.
On the mandibles of ants and nests of Tarantula, 1879.
Thre snare of ray-spider, 1881.
The honey ants of the Garden of the Gods, 1881.
Note on the intelligence of the American Turret spider.
Snare of orb-weaving spiders, 1882. The Author.

Marion, A. F. Observations sur le Dracsena goldieana, 1882.

"" Applications du sulphure de carbone au traitement des vignes phyllox^r^es,

Draguages au large de Marseille. B, 1879. The Author.

Marrat, F. P. The naturalization of the estuary of the Mersey. The Author.

Martens, E. v. Description of two species of land-shells from Porto Rico,

W. 1. T. Bland

Conchologische Mittheilungen. II, 3 and 4.

Die Weich-und-Schaltiere gemeinfasslich dargestellt, 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Martini und Chemnitz. Systematisches Conchylien Cabinet. 318e-324e Lief.

Wilson Fund.

352 PKOCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Masters, Maxwell T. On the Passiflorese collected by M. Edouard Andr^ in

Ecuador and New Granada, The Author.

Maye, Gustav. Die europaischen Arten der gallenbewohnenden Cynipiden,

1882. Jos. Jeanes.
Medical and Surgical History of the War of the Rebellion. Part 3, Vol. 2;

Surgical History, 2d issue. War Department.

Meehan, Thomas. Variations in Nature, 1883. The Author.

Mercantile Library Association of the City of New York. 62d annual i-eport,

1883. The Director.
Mercantile Library Company of Philadelphia. 60th annual report, January,

1883. The Directors.

Mercantile Library Association of San Francisco. 30th annual report.

The Association.
Metzges, G. Ueber die Einwirkung von Schwefelsaure auf Methyl- und ^Ethyl-
Alkohol, 1881. University of Wiirzburg.

Miller, A. S. The American palaeozoic fossils. 2d Ed., 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Milne, Edwards. Rapport sur les travaux de la Commission chargee par M.
le Ministre de I'lnstruction publique d'<5tudier la faune sous-marine dans
les grandes profondeurs de la Mediterranee et de I'oc^an Atlantique.

A. F. Marion.

Mission scientifique au Mexique et dans ^I'AmeriqueCentrale. Recherches

zoologiques. 3me partie, 2e section Etudes sur les batraciens par M.

Brocchi, Livr. 2 and 3. Etudes sur les reptiles et les batraciens, par

MM. Auguste Dumeril et Bocourt, Livr., 8.

Moebius, K., F. Richter und E. von Martens. Beitrage zur Meeresfauna der

Insel Mauritius und der Seychellen, 1880. Jos. Jeanes.

Moeller. Jos. Anatomic der Baumrinden, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Mohn, H. Den Norske Nordhavs-Expedition, 1875-1878. X. Meteorologi,

1883. Norwegian Government.

Molescott, Jac. Untersuchungen zur Naturlehre des Menschen und der Thiere.

XIII, 2 and 3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Morris, G. H. Beitrag zur Geschichte der Destillations-producte des Colopho-

niums, 1882. University of Wurzburg.

Mortillet, Gabriel de. Le prehistorique antiquite de I'homme, 1883.

Jos. Jeanes.
Mott, F. T. The fruits of all countries, 1883. Dr. F. V. Hayden.

MUUer, Ferd. v. Lecture on the flora of Australia, 1882.

Fragmenta phytographise Australige. XI and XII, pp. 1-26.
Eucalyptographia, 2d, 5th and 6th Decade, 1879-80.

Index perfectus ad Caroli Linnaei species Plantarum, nempe earum primam

editionem (Anno 1753), 1880. The Author.

MUUer, H. The fertilization of flowers, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Nares, Capt. G. S. Narrative of a voyage to the polar sea during 1875-6, in

H. M. Ships "Alert" and " Discovery." 2 Vols., 4th Ed., 1878.

Jos. Jeanes.
Natural Bridge, Virginia. Two photographs of the. Mr. S. F. Corlies.

Naturw. Landesdurchforschung von Btihmen. Archiv der. V, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naumann, Carl Fiedr. Elemente der Mineralogie. lie Aufl. von Dr. Ferd.
Zirkel. Jos. Jeanes.

Netto, L. Aper9u sur la th^orie de revolution, 1883. The Author.

Newberry, J. S. Geological Survey of Ohio. Report, Vols. 8 and 4. The Author.
New South Wales. Australian Museum. Report of Trustees for 1882.

The Director.
New South Wales, Department of mines. Annual report of. 1880.

Royal Society of N. S. W.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 353

Newton, Alf. A history of British birds. 4th Ed., Pt,. 15. I.V.Williamson Fund.
Newton, John. The fortifications of to-day. 1883. Engineer Dept., U. S. A
New York State Library. 62d, 63d and 64th annual reports.

Regents of the University.
New York State Museum of Natural History. 31st annual report. 1878.

Regents of the University.
New Zealand. Colonial Museum and Geological Survey of. 17th annual
report. 1882. The Directors.

Nordenskiold, A. E. Vega-Expeditionens Vetenskapliga lakttagelser bear-
betade af Deltagare i Resan och Andra Forskare utgifna af A. E.
Nordenskiold. Forsta Bd., 1882.
Vegas Fiird Kring Asien och Europa. I and II. Jos. Jeanes.

Ncirner, C. Die Kriitzmilbe der Hiihner.
Syringophilus bipectinatus.

Beitrag zur Behandlung mikroskopischer Priiparate.
Analges minor eine neue Milbe im Innern der Federspulen der Hiihner.
Beitrag zur Kenntniss der Milbenfamilie der Dermaleichiden. 1883.

The Author.
Norske Nordhavs-Expedition, 1876-78, VI— IX. 1882.

The Norwegian Government.
Norwegische Commission der europiiischen Gradmessung, Publication der.
Geodatische Asbeiten, H. 1-3. Vandstandsobservationer, H. 1.

The Commission.
Ochsenius, Karl. Die Region der Schott's in Nordafrika und das Sahara-
Meer. I— VII.
Die Bildung von Steinsalzflotzen. The Author.

Opening ceremonies of the New York and Brooklyn Bridge, May 24, 1883.
Packard A. S. On the classification of the Linnean Order of Orthoptera and
Neuroptera.
A revision of the Lysiopetalidse, a family of Chilognath Myriapoda, with

a notice of the genus Cambala,
Repugnatorial pores in the Lysiopetalidee.

A new species of Polydesmus with eyes. The Author.

Paetel, Fr. Catalogue der Conchylien-Sammlung. 1888. The Author.

Pagenstecher, H. Alex. Allgemeine Zoologie oder Grundgesetze des thierischen

Baus und Lebens. ler-4er Th. 1875-^81. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Paget, James. Descriptive catalogue of the pathological specimens contained

in the Museum of the Royal College of Surgeons of England. 2d Ed.,

by Sir James Paget, with the assistance of James Frederic Goodhart,

M. D., and Alban H. G. Doran. Vol. 2, 1883. The Councilof the College.

Pal^ontologie Fran9aise. Ire Ser. An. Invert. Terrain Jurassique. Livr. 32,

54-64. Terrain Cr4tace. L. 29. Wilson Fund.

Palseontograpica. 29er Bd., 2e-6e Lief. Suppl. II, 4te Abth., Text und Atlas.

Suppl III, L. 10-11. Wilson Fund.

Parrish, S. B., and W. F. Supplementary list of the plants of Southern

California. The Auihor.

Paulucci, M. Nuova stazione della Clausilia lucensis. 1877.

Elude critique sur quelques Hyalina de Sardaigne et description d'une

nouvelle espcice, 1879.
Molluschi fluviatili Italiani inviati come saggio alia Esposizione inter-

nazionale della Pesca in Berlino. 1880.
Osservazioni critiche sopra le specie del genere Struthiolaria Lamarck.

1877. Ancora del genere Struthiolaria Lam. 2" Articolo. 1877.
Description d'une Murex fossile du terrain tertiaire subapennin de la

Valine de I'Elsa.
Fauna Italiana. Communicazioni malacologiche. Art. 1-7, 1877-1880.
Materiaux pour servir a I'^tude de la faune malacologique terrestre et
fluviatile de V Italic et de ses lies. 1878. The Author.

354 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Peale, Chas. Wilson. Manuscript lectures on natural history. 1797. Probably

the first OE the subject delivered in the U. States. Titian R. Peale.

Penecke, K. Alphonse. BeitrUge zur Kenntniss der Fauna der slavonis^chen

Paludinenschichten. Dr. F. V. Hayden.

Pferes de la CorapagDie. M^moires concernant I'histoire naturelle de 1' Empire

Chinois. ler & 2er Cah. Jos. .Jeanes.

Perrier, Ed. Anatomie et physiologic animales. 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Peschel, Oscar. Physische Erdkunde, nach den hinterlassenen Manuscripten

Oscar Pescel's, selbststilndig bearbeitet und herausgegeben von Gustav

Leipoldt. ler und 2er Bd 1879-80. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Phillips, Henry, Jr. A brief account of the more important public collections

of American Archasology in the United States. The Author.

Plateau, Felix. Recherches experimentales sur les movements respiratoire

des insectes. The Author.

Poole, Wm. Fred'k An index to periodical literature. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Potoni^, H. Floristische Beobachtungen aus der Priegnitz.

(Jeber den Ersatz erfrohrener Friihlingstriebe durch accessorische und

andere Sprosse.
Das Skelet der Pflanzen. 1882.

Ueber die Zusammensetzung der Leitbiindel bei den Gefasskryptogamea.
Ueber die Beziehung zwischen dem Spaltoffnungssystem und dem Stereom

bei den Blattstielen der Filicineen. «

Ueber das Vcrhiiltniss der Morphologie zur Physiologic.
Der k. botanische Garten und das k. botanische Museum in Berlin.

The Author.
Pouchet, G. Des terminaisons vasculaires dans la rate des Selaciens.

Sur revolution des Peridindens et les particularites d'organisation que
les rapprochent des noctiluques. The Author.

Poulsen, C. M. Bornholms Land-og Ferskvands-Blciddyr. 1874. The Author.
Powell, J. W. Second annual report of the U. S. Geological Survey. 1882.

Department of the Interior.
First annual report of the Bureau of Ethnology to the Secretary of the
Smithsonian Institution, 1879-80. Smithsonian Institution.

Provancher, L. Petite faune entomologique du Canada. II, 1883.

The Author.
Purgold, A Die Meteoriten des k. mineralogischen Museum in Dresden.

The Author.
Purves, J. C. Sur les depots fluvio-marins d'Age S^nonier. The Author.

Putnam, F. W. Notes on copper implements from Mexico.

Iron from the Ohio mounds. The Author.

Quenstedt, F. A. Die Ammoniten des schwiibischen Jura.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Die Schopfung der Erde und ihre Bewohner. 1882. Jos. Jeanes.

Ramos, D. Jose. Historia del Uredo oocivoro. 1882. The Author.

Ramsay, A. C. The physical geology and geography of Great Britain. 5th

ed. 1878. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Regel, E. Descriptiones plantarum novarum et minus cognitarum. Fasc. 8

and Suppl. 1883. The Author.

Regents of the University of the State of New York. 92d, 9od and 94th

annual reports. The Authors.

Reichenbach, H. G. Xenia Orchidacea. 111,3. Wilson Fund.

Reinsch, P, F. Ueber parasitische Algen ahnliche Pflanzen in der Russischen

Blatterkohle und iiber die Natur der Pflanzen welcbe diese Kohle zusam-

mensetzen.

Notiz iiber die neuerdings in dem Polarkreise entdeckten Steinkohlenflotze.

Ein neuer algoider Typus in derStigmarienkohle von Kurakino (Russland).

The Author.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 355

Remel^, Adolf. Untersuchungen liber die versteinerungsfUbrenden Diluvial-
geschichfe des norddeutscher Flachlands mit besonderer Ueriicksich-
tigung der Mark Brandenburg. I Stiick, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Renault, M. B. Cours de botanique fossile. lre-3me An., 1881-83.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Considerations sur les rapports des lepidodendrons, des sigillaires et des
stigmaria, 1883. The Author.

Report upon the practice in Europe with the heavy Armstrong, Woolwich and
Krupp Rifled Guns. Submitted by the Board of Engineers for Fortifi-
cations, 1883. War Department.
Report upon the statistics of production of the precious metals in the United
States, 1881. Horatio C. Burckard.
Reusch, H. H. Die fosailen fiihrenden krystallinischen Schiefer von Bergen
in Norwegen, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Revoil, G. Fauna et flore des Pays Comalis, 1882. Jos. Jeanes.
Bhees, William J. Catalogue of publications of the Smithsonian Institution
(1846-1882), with an alphabetical index of articles, 1882.

The Institution.
Ribeiro, Carlos. Estudos geologicos. De8crip9ao de Solo quaternario das
Bacias hydrographicas de Tejo e Sado.
Noticia de algumas esta9oes e monumentos prehistoricos. 2 parts.
Descrip^ao de algunas silex a quart zites Lascados.

Relatorio acerca de sexta reuniao do Congresso de Anthropologia e de

archeologia prehistorico verificada na Cidade de Bruxelles no mez de

Agosto de 1872. The Author.

Richard^., Thos. New South Wales in 1881. Royal Society of N. S. W.

Reichtofen, F. Freiherrn v. China. 4er Bd. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Rivero, E. de and Juan Tschudi. Diego de Antiquedades Peruanas. Atlas,

1851. Executor of Wm. S. Vaux.

Royal Geological Society of Cornwall. Catalogue of the Library, 1882.

The Society.

Roca, Gen. D. Julio A. Informe official de la Comision Cientifica agregada al

tstado Mayor General de la Expedicion al Rio Negro (Patagonia)

realizada en los messes de April, Mayo y Junio de 1879. Eni. Ill,

Geologia, 1882. Dr. F. V. Hayden.

Roemer, Ferd. Lethgea geognostica. 1 Th. Lethsea palseozoica. Textband,

2e Lief,, 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Romanes, Geo. J. The scientific evidences of organic evolution. 1882.

Animal intelligence. 2d Ed., 1882. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Roscoe, Henry E. Lessons in elementary chemistry. Inorganic and organic,

1881. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Rossmiissler's Iconographie der europaischen land- und siisswasser-Mollusken.

N. f. I, 1 and 2. Wilson Fund.

Royal Society. Catalogue of the scientific books in the library of the. 1883.

The Society.
Runkel, F. Ueber Alpha-^Ethylidenvalerolacton, 1882.

University of Wiirzburg.
Rut«t, A. Les alluvions modernes dans la moyenne Belgique.

Les phenom^nes de la s(;dimentation marine. The Author.

Ryder, J. A. On the mode of fixation of the fry of the oyster.

Summary of recent progress in our knowledge of the culture, growth and

anatomy of the oyster. The Author.

Saccardo, P. A. Sylloge fungorum omnium hucusque cognitorum. I and II.

, I. V. Williamson Fund.

Salomon, C. Nomenclator der Qefasskryptogamen. 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Sampson, F. A. Notes on the distribution of shells. Art. III. The Author.

356 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

Schombiirgh, R. South Australia. Report on the progress and conditions of
the Botanic Garden and Government Plantation during the year 1882.

The Author.
Schibbye, Gustav. Zur Geschichte der Dehydracetsaure, 1882.

University of Wiirzburg.
Schiodte, J. C. Zoologia Danica, 3die Ilefte.

Schneider, Anton. Zoologische Beitrage. 1,1,1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Schoebel, C. L'ame humaine au point de vue de la science ethnographique.

2d Ed., 1879. The Author.

Schwartz, K. Ebbe und Fluth, 1881. Jos Jeanes.

Scott, D. H. Zur Entwickelungsgeschichte der gegliederten Milchrohren der

Pflanzen, 1881. University of Wiirzburg.

Scudder, Samuel H The tertiary lake-basin at Florissant,Colorado. The Author.

The pine moth of Nantucket, Retini frustrana. The Author.

Secard, H. Elements de zoologie, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Second Geological Survey of Pennsylvania, reports, A^ ; C* ; C^ ; D^, Vol. 1 ;

Atlas to D3, Vols. 1 and 2 ; D^ ; I* ; T^. The Commissioners.

Progress of the survey of the anthracite coal fields.

Memorandum for the information of the legislature.

Report of the Board of Commissioners to the Legislature, January 1, 1883.

H. C. Lewis.
Seebohm, H. A history of British birds. Parts 1 and 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Selenka, E. Studien iiber Entwickelungsgeschichte der Thiere. les H.,

1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Semper, C. Reisen im Archipel der Philippien, 2er Th., 3er Bd. ; 6 H., 4er

Bd. ; le Abth,, le Halfte. Wilson Fund.

Servain, George. Histoire malacologique du Lac Balaton en Hongrie, 1881.

L V. Williamson Fund.
Shaler, N. S., and W. M. Davis. Illustrations of the earth's surface. Glaciers.

1881. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Shepard, Charles Upham. On Aerolites. Catalogue of meteoric collection.

The Author.

Sheridan, P. H. Report of an exploration of parts of Wyoming, Idaho and

Montana, in August and September, 1882. The Author.

Shufeldt, R. W. Contributions to the anatomy of birds. The Author.

Smithsonian Institution. List of foreign correspondents, corrected to January,

1882. Additions and corrections to same to January, 1883.
Annual report of the Board of Regents for the year 1881.
Miscellaneous collections. Vols. 22-27. The Institution.

Soler, Sebastian Vidal y. Inspeccion general de Montes. Comission de la

Flora forestal. Reseua de la flora del Archipelago Filipino. The Author.

Soret, J. L., et E. Sarasin. Sur la polarisation rotatoire du quartz. 1882.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
South African Museum, report of the Trustees, 1882. The Curator.

Sowerby, G. B. Thesaurus conchyliorum, Pts. 39 and 40. Wilson Fund.

(State Librarian of Iowa, biennial report, July 1, 1883. The Author.

State School of Mines, Golden, Colorado, catalogue of the, 1882-83.

The Trustees.
Statistische Mittheilungen iiber den Civilstand der Stadt Frankfurt a. M. im

Jahre 1882.
Stearns, R. E. C. On the history and distribution of fresh-water mussels.

Verification of the habitat of Conrad's Mytilus bifurcatus. The Author.
Stearns, W. A., and E. Coues. New England bird life. Parts I and II.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Stewart, Balfour. Lesson in elementary physics, 1878. I. V. Williamson Fund,

Stevenson, W. C, Jr. Ellis North American Fungi. Alphabetical Index.

Centuries I-X. The Author.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 35 T

Suess, E. Das AntlUz der Erde. le. Abtli. 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Surgeon General of the Navy, sanitary and statistical report of the, for the

years 1880 and 1881. Navy Department.

Svenonius, F. V. Bidragtill Norrbottens Geologi. Geological Survey of Sweden.
Sveriges Geologiska Undersokning. Ser. Aa, No's 70, 80, 81, 8'2, 83, 85, 86 ;

Ser. Bb. 1, 2; Ser. C. 45-52 Sjunde Hliftet. Bladen 19, 20 and 21.

Ramnas, " Wargarda " och " Ulricehamn." 7 sheets.

Geological Survey of Sweden.
Thomson, C. 0. The modern polytechnic school, 1883. The Author.

Tischner, Aug. The sun changes its position in space, therefore it cannot be

regarded as being "in a condition of rest." The Author.

Tonks, Edmund. General index to Latin names and synonyms of the plants

depicted in the first hundred and seven volumes of Curtis's Botanical

Magazine, 1883. Thos. Meehan, through the Botanical Section.

Trouessart, E. L. Catalogue systematique, synonymique et geographique des

mammifferes vivants et fossils. 3 Nos. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Tschermak, G. Lehrbuch der Mineralogie. 1 and 2 Lief., 1881.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Tryon, Geo. W., Jr. Manual of conchology. Pts. 17-20.

(Structural and systematic conchology. I, II, 1883. The Author.

United States Coast and Geodetic Survey, report of the superintendent of the,

showing the progress of the work during the fiscal years ending vi^ith

June, 1880 and 1881. Treasury Department.

United States Fish Commission. Bulletin of the. Vol. II, 1882.

The Commission.
United States Geological and Geographical Survey of the Territories, 1878.

2 vols, and atlas, 1883. Department of the Interior.

University of Kiel. Fifteen theses, 1881-82. The University.

University of Louvain. Thirteen theses, 1881-82. The University.

University of Pennsylvania, annual reports of the Provost and Treasurer,

Oct. 1, 1883. The Trustees.

University of Wiirzburg. Fifteen theses. The University.

Veth, P. J. Midden-Sumatra, 1877-1879. Four vols, in seven, and atlas, folio.

Jos. Jeanes.
Vogt, C. Le9ons sur les animaux utiles, 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Vogt und Specht. Die Saugetiere in Wort und Bild. Lief. 1-20 Jos. Jeanes.
Vogt, C, und Emil Yong. Traite d'anatomie comparee pratique. Ire and 2e.

L. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Wachsmuth, Chas. On a new genus and species of Blastoids. Descriptions

of some new Blastoids from the Hamilton Group. The Author.

Wachsmuth, Chas., and F. Springer. Remarks on Glyptocrinus and Reteo-

crinus, two genera of Silurian Crinoids. The Authors.

Wainwright, Samuel. Scientific sophisms, 1883. Rev. H. C. McCook.

War Department Library, alphabetical catalogue, 1882. The Department.

Warren, Charles. Answer to inquiries about the United States Bureau of

Education, 1883. Department of the Interior.

Warren, Maj.-Gen. G. K. Findings of the Court of Inquiry in the case of.

The War Department.
Wafton, Rev. R. Boog Mollusca of H. M. S. "Challenger" Expedition.

Pts. 15 and 16. The Author.

Watson, Sereno. Contributions to American botany, XI, 1883. The Author.
Weismann, Aug. Die Entstellung der Sexualzellen bei den Hydromedusen.

Text and atlas. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Westerlund, Carl Agardh. Monographia Clausiliarum in regione palseoarctica

viventium. 1878. Jos. Jeanes.

Westwood and Satchell. Biblotheca piscatoria. 1883. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Wesleyan University. Eleventh annual report of the curator of the museum.

1882. The Author.

358 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OP [1883.

White, Chas. A. Review of the non-marine fossil moUusca of North America.

1883. The Author.

White, F. Buchanan. Some thoughts on the distribution of British Butterflies.

Observations sur I'armure g^nitale de plusieurs especes fran9aises de

ZygaenidsB.
List of Hemiptera collected in the Amazons by Prof. J. W. H. Trail, M. A.,

in the years 1873-1875, with descriptions of the new species.
Descriptions of New Hemiptera. I.

The mountain Lepidoplera of Britain, their distribution and its causes.
Zoology of the Voyage of H. M. S. Challenger. Part XIX. Report on

the Pelagic Hemiptera.

On the male genital armature of European Rhopalocera.

On the botany of the '• Jardin" of Mont Blanc. Notice of two mosses

new to science. The Authors.

White, Rev. W. F. Antsand their ways. London, n. d. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Whitehouse, F. Cope. Is Fingal's Cave artificial? The Author.

Williams, Alb., .Jr. Department of the Interior. U. S. Geological burvey.

mineral ilesources of the United States. Department of the Interior.

Windeyer, Justice. Commemorative address on the celebration of the 50th

anniversary of the Sidney Mechanics' School of Arts, March 22, 1883.

The Author.
WoUaston, T. Vernon. Testacea Atlantica. 1878. Jos. Jeanes.

Woman's Medical College of Pennsylvania. 34th annual announcement.

The College.

Yarrel, Wm. A history of British birds. 4th Ed., by Alfred Newton. Parts

16 and J 7. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Yellowstone National Park. 1883. F. V. Hayden.

Zincken, C.F. Die geologischen Horizonteder fossilen Kohlen. 1883.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zittel. Handbuch der Palseontologie. I, 2 Abth., 2 Lief.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoological Record. XVIII. 1881. Wilson Fund.

Journals and Periodicai,s.

Amsterdam. K. Akademie van Wettenschappen. Verslagen en Mededeelingen,
Afd. Letterkunde, 2e Reeks, 11 Deel, Naamen^en Zaakregister, I-Xll.
Afd Naturkunde, 2e Reeks, 17 Deel.
Jaarboek, 1881.

Processen-Verbal, Afd. Nat. Mei 1881— Apr. 1882.

Verhandlungen. Afd. Nat. Deel 22. Afd Letterk., Deel 15. The Society.

Angers. Soci6te d'etudes scientitiques. lime and 12aie Annies. The Society.

Auxerre. Soci^t^ des Science historiques et naturelles de I'Yonne. Bulletin,

Vol. 36me. Tables analytiques, 1867-78. The Society.

Baltimore. American Chemical Jourual, IV, 5 — V, 5. The Editor.

American Journal of Mathematics, pure and applied, V, 1 — VI, 2.

The Editor.

Johns Hopkins University. Report, 7th year. The President.

Peabody Institute. 16th annual report. The Trustees.

Basel. Schweizerische pal'aontologische Gesellschaft, IX. The Society.

Batavia. Natuurkundig Vereen in Nederlandsch Indie. Natuurkundig

Tijdschrift, 8e Ser. Deel 2. The Society.

Belfast. Naturalists' Field Club. Annual report, Ser, 2, Vol. II. Part 2.

The Society,
Natural History and Philosophical Society, Proceedings, 1881-82, 1882-83.

The Society.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 359

Berlin. Archiv fiir Naturgeschichte, 47er Jahr., 6; 48er Jahrg., 4 — 49er
Jahr., 4. The Editor.

Botanischer Jahresbericht (Just), 7er Jahr., le Abth., 2 H.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Deutsche botanische Gesellschaft, Statutes, und Reglement, 1883.

The Society.
Deutsche geologische Gesellschaft. Zeitachrift, XXXIV, 2— XXXV, 1.

The Society.
Entomologiache Verein. Deutscher entomologische Zeitschrift. 27er
Jahr., 1, 2. The Society.

Entomologischer Verein in Berlin. Berliner entomologische Zeitschi^t.
27er Bd., 1, 2. The Soci^.

Garten-Zeitung (Wittmack), 1882, 1-12. The Editor.

Gesellschaft Naturforscheude Freunde. Sitzungs^Berichte, 1882.

The Society.
Jahrbucher fiir wissenschaftliche Botanik (Pringsheim), XIV, 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
K. Preussischen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Abhandlungen, mathe-
matische, 1882 ; physikalische, 1882.

Monatsbericht, 1836, 1854, 1855, 1856 and December, 1877.
Sitzungsbcrichte, 1882, XXXIX-LIV— 1883, I-XXXVII. The Society.
Der Naturforscher, XV, 27-XVI, 39. The Editor.

Natu.a3 Novitates, 1882, No. 21— 1883, No. 19. The Publishers.

Zeitschrift fiir die gesammten Naturwissenschaften, LV, LVI, 1, 2.

The Editor.
Bern. Naturforscheude Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen, 1030-1063. The Society.
Besangon. Academic des Sciences, belles-letties et arts, 1882. The Society.
Beziers. Society d'4tude des sciences naturelles. Bulletin, 5e annee.

The Society.
Bistritz. Gewerbeschule. Jahresbericht, 8er. The Director.

Bonn. Archiv fiir mikroskopische Anatomic, XXII, 1-XXIII, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Naturhistorische Verein. Verhandlungen, Supplement, 39er Jahrg. 2es H.

The Society.

Bordeaux. Academie nationale des sciences, belles-lettres et arts. Actes, 3e

Ser., 42e An. The Society.

Society des sciences physique et naturelles. M^moires, 2e Ser. IV, 3 —

V, 2. The Society.

Boston. American Academy of arts and sciences. Proceedings, XVIII.

The Society.

American monthly microscopical journal. Ill, 12 — IV, 11. The Editor.

Scientific and literary gossip, I, 2. The Editor.

Science record, II, 1. The Editor.

Society of natural history. Proceedings, XXI, p. 433 — XXII, p. 224;

also, XXI, Part 4 and XXII, Part 1. The Society.

Zookgical Society. Quarterly journal, I, 8 — II, 4. The Society.

Braunschweig. Archiv fiir Anthropologic, XIV, 3, 4. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Bremen. Naturwissenschaftliche Verein. Abhandlungen, VIII, 1. The Society.

Brjinn. Naturforscheuden Verein. Verhandlungen, XX.

Bericht der Meteorologischen Commission, 1881. The Society.

Bruxelles. Academie royale des sciences, des lettres et des beaux-arts de
Belgique. Bulletin, annee, VI, 7 and 8. The Society.

Sociele Beige de microscopic. Bulletin. 25 Nov., 1883 — Vol. IX, II.

The Society.
Sociote entomologique de Belgique. Compte-Rendu, Ser. Ill, No. 29, 87.

The Society.

Soci6ie malacologique. Annales XIV, XVI. Proces-Verbaux, 5 Feb. —

2 Juil, 1882. The Society.

360 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Buda-Pest. Gazette de Hongrie, II, 34 — IV, 28. Hungarian National Museum.
M. T. Akademia, III. Usgf^lydnak Kiilon Kiadvanya, 1881, 1, 2; 1882, 3.
Ungarische Revue, 1882. H. 7-10. The Society.

Ungarischen National-Museum. Naturhistorische Heft. Bd. I-VI.

The iJirector.
Buenos Aires. Sociedad Cientifica Argentina. Anales XV, 1-6 — XVI, 1-t.

The Society.
Caen. Academic Nationale des sciences, arts et belles-lettres. Memoires, 1882.

The Society.
Soci6te Linn^enne de Normandie. Bulletin, 3e Ser., Vols. 5 and 6.

. The Society.

cAutta. Asiatic Society of Bengal. Proceedings, 1802, No. 1 ; 1883, No. rt.

Journal. Vol. 50, extra number to Part 1 ; Vol. 51, Pt. 2, Nos. 2-4;

Vol. 52, Pt. 1, Nos. 1, 2. The Society.

Another copy. Isaac Lea.

Stray Feathers, X, 4, 5. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Cambridge. Appalachian Mountain Club. Appalachia, III, 2. The Club.

Entomological Club, Annual reports, 1882. The Club.

Harvard University. Library Bulletin, Nos. 24-26. The Trustees.

Mupeum of Comparative Zoology. Memoirs, VIII, 2 ; IX, 1.

Report, 188i'-81; 1881-82.

Bulletin, VII, 9, 10 ; X, 2-6 ; XI. 1, 2. The Director.

Nuttall Ornithological Club. Bulletin, VIII, 1-4. The Club.

Peabody Museum of American Archteology and Ethnology. Annual

report, 15th. The Director.

Science, Nos. 1-42 I. V. Williamson Fund.

Cassel. Malakozoologische Blatter. VI, 1-5. L V. Williamson Fund.

Verein fiir Naturkunde. Bericht, 29er, 80er. The Society,

Catania. Accademia Gioenia di Scienze Naturali. Atti, 8a Ser., T. 16.

The Society.
Cherbourg. Soci6t6 nationale des sciences naturelles. Memoires, T. 23.

The Society.
Chicago. American Antiquarian, V, 1-3. The Editor.

American Chemical Review, III, 2. The Editor.

Lhristiania. Archiv for Mathematik og Naturvidenskab, VII, 2 — VIII, 2.

The Editor.
Cincinnati. Ohio Mechanics' Institute. Scientific Proceedings, I, 4 — II, 2.

The Institute.

The Paleontologist, No. 7. The Editor.

Society of Natural History. Journal VI, 1-3. The Society.

Zoological Society, 9th annual report. The Society.

Congres international des Orientalistes. Compte-rendu. T. 3me.

Smithsonian Inst.
Copenhagen. K. D. Videnskabernes Selskab. Oversigt, 1882, No. 2; 1883,
No. 1.

Skrifter, 6me Ser., I, 6 ; II, 3. The Society.

Naturhistoriske Forenine. Videnskabelige Meddelelser, 1882, I.

The Society.

Society Royale des Antiquaires du Nord. Memoires, n. s., 1882-83-84.

Tillaeg, 1881. The Society.

Crawfordville. Botanical Gazette, VII, 12— VIIT, 11. The Editor.

Danzig. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Schriften. n. f., V. 4. The Society.

Davenport. Academy of Sciences. Proceedings, III, 3. The Society.

Dijon. Acad^mie des Sciences, Arts et Belles-lettres. Memoires, An.

1881-82. The Society.

Dorpat. Naturforscher Gesellscliaft. Sitzungsberichte, VI, 2.

Archiv fiir die Naturkunde Liv.-Ehst-und Kurlands, le Ser., IX, 1, 2;
2e Ser., VIII, 4. The Society.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 361

Dresden. K. Leop. Carol.-Deutschen Academie der Naturforscher. Nova
Acta, Vols. 42 and 43.

Leopoldina. H. 17. The Society.

K. Mineralogisch-geologische und praehistorische Museum. Mitthie-
lungen. 5 H. The Director.

Naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft Isis, 1882, Juli ; 1883, Juni.

The Society.
Dublin. Royal Irish Academy. Proceedings, Science, III, 9, 10; Polite
Literature, II, 4.
Transactions, Science, XXVIII, 11-18 ; Polite Literature, XXVII, 5.

The Society.
Edinburgh. Botanical Society, Transactions and Proceedings, XIV, 3.

The Society.
Geological Society, Transactions, IV, 2. The Society.

Physical Society, Proceedings, 1881-82. The Society.

Scottish Naturalist, n. s. Nos. 1 and 2.
Florence. Nuovo Giornale Botanico Italiano. Caruel, XIV, 1 — XV, 4.

The Editor.
R. Acjademia Petrarca di Scienze, Lettere ed Arti in Arezzo. Adunanza
solenne in onore di Guido Monaco ; di Andrea Caesalpino ; Studi di
Guido Monaco ; a Guido Monaco Aretino; Musica e Civilta Tosi.

The Society.
Frankfurt a. M. Aerztliche Verein. Jahresbericht, XXVI.

Deutschen Malakozoologische Gesellschaft. Jahrbucher, X, 1-4

Nachrichtsblatt, 188i;, No. 11 ; 1883, Nos. 1, 2, 3, 4, 7, 8. The Society.
Senckenbergischen Naturforschenden Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XIII.
1 and 2.

Bericht, 1881-82' The Society.

Gand. Archives de Biologie. Van Beneden und Van Bambeke. Ill, 3 — IV,

I. I. V. Williamson Fund.
Genoa. Societa di Letture e Conversazioni Scientifiche, Giornale VI, 9 — VII,

II. The Society.
Giessen. Jahresbericht iiber die Fortschritte der Chemie. Fittica. 1881.

Nos. 1-4. The Editor.

Oberhessische Gesellschaft fiir Natur- und Heilkunde. 22er Bericht.

Glasgow. Geological Society. Transactions, VII, 1. The Society.

Natural History Society. Proceedings, V, 1. The Society.

Philosophical Society. Proceedings, XIII, 2. The Society.

Gottingen. K. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Nachrichten, 1882.

The Society.

Gotha. Dr. A. Petermann's Mittheilungen aus Justus Perthes' geographischer

Anstalt, 1869-1876; 1876,1-6; 1877,7-12; 1878-1882; 1883,1-10.

Erganzungsheft, 52-73. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Graz. Verein der Aerzte in Steiermark. Mittheilungen, 1882. The Society.

Naturwissenschaftliche Verein fiir Steiermark. Mittheilungen, 1882.

The Society.
Halifax. Nova Scotian Institute of Natural Sciences. Proceedings and Trans-
actions, IV, 4. The Society.
Halle. Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Abhandlungen, XVI, 1.

Bericht, 1882. The Society.

Hamburg. Naturwissenschaftliche Verein. Abhandlungen, VII, 2.

Verhandlungen, n. f.. VI. The Society.

Hannover. Naturhistorische Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht 31 & 32. The Society.
Harlem. Mue6e Teyler. Archives, 2e Ser., 3e Partie. The Director.

Soci^t^ Hollandaise des Sciences. Archives, XVII, 3 — XVIII, 1.

The Society.
Heidelberg. Naturhistorisch-medicinische Verein. Verhandlungen, n. f.,

III. 2. The Society.

24

362 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Helsingfors. Finska Vetenskaps-Societeten. Ofversigt, XXIV.
Bidrag, 37, 38.

Acta, XII. The Society.

Hermannstadt. Siebenburgische Verein fur Naturwissenschaften. Verhand-

lungen und Mittheilungen, XXXII. The Society.

Jena. jNIedicinisch-naturwissenschaftliche Gesellschaft. Zeitschrift XVI, n.

f., 1-3.

Sitzungsberichte, 1882. The Society.

Kansas City. Kansas City Review, VI, 8 — VII, 7. The Editor,

Kiel. Universitdt. Schriften, Bd 28er. The University.

Klagenfurt. Landesmuseum. Carinthia, 1883, 1-7. The Director.

Konigsberg. Physikalisch-okonomische Gesellschaft. Schriften, XXIII, 1,2.

The Society.
Lausanne. Soci6t6 Vaudoise des Sciences Naturelles. Bulletin, No. 88.

The Society.
Leeds. Philosophical and Literary Society. Annual Report, 1882-83.

The Society.

Leiden. Nederlandische Dierkundige Vereeniging. Tijdschrift, Deel VI, 1 ;

Supplement, Deel I, 1. The Society.

Leipzig. Archiv fiir Anatomic und Physiologie. Anatomische Abtheilungen,

1882, 4-6 H. ; 1883, 1-3 H. Physiologische Abtheilungen, 1882, 5 & 6

H. ; 1883, 1-3 H. 1. V. Williamson Fund.

Botanischer Jahrbiicher. Engler. Ill, 5 — IV, 5. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Fiirstlich Jablonowski'schen Gesellschaft. Jahresbericht, 1882.

The Society.
Jahresberichte liber die Fortschritte der Anatomie und Physiologic.
Hoffmann und Schwalbe. X, 2 Abth. ; XI, 1 & 2 Abth., 1 H.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Jahrbiicher fiir v issenschaftliche Botanik, XIII, 4; XIV, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Journal fiir Ornithologie, XXX, 4— XXXI, 3. I. V Williamson Fund.

K. Siichsischen Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Abhaudlungen, XII,

7 & 8.

Bericht iiber die Verhandlungen, 1881. The Society.

Morphologische Jahrbuch, VIII, 3 — IX, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Naturforschende Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, 1882. The Society.

Zeitschrift fur Krystallographie und Mineralogie. Groth. VII, 4 — VIII,

3. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Zeitschrift fiir wissenschaftliche Zoologie. XXXVII, 4— XXXIX, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Zoologischer Anzeiger. Nos 125-152. The Editor.

Zoologische Station zu Neaptl. Mittheilungen, IV, 1-3.

Zoologischer Jahresbericht, I — IV. The Director.

Lisbon. Academia Real das Sciencias. Journal de Sciencias mathematicas
phys. e nat V, 24-32
Sessao publica, 1880.

Memorias. Classe des Sciencias mathemat. phys. et nat. n. s. V, 2 ;

VI, 1. The Society.

Associacao dos Engenheiros Civis Portuguezas. Revista de Obras publicas

e minas, Nos. 154-164. The Society.

London. Annals and Magazine of Natural History. 1882, No. 61 — 1883,

No. 71. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Astronomical Register, Nos. 240-251. I. V. Williamson Fund.

British Association for the Advancement of Science. Report, 52d meeting.

The Association.
Chemical Society. Journal, Nos. 241-252. The Society.

Curtis's Botanical Magazine, Nos. 1149-1161. I. V. Williamson Fund.

The Electrician. X, 1— XIl, 1. The Editor.

Entomological Society. Transactions. 1883,1,11,111. The Society.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 363

The Gardener's Chronicle, Nos. 464-516. The Editor.

Geological Magazine, Nos. 222-233. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Geological Society. Quarterly Journal, Nos. 152-155 and Lists.

The Society.
Hardwicke's Science Gossip. Nos. 216-227. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Ibis. 5th ser., 1-4, and Supplement. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Journal of Anatomy and Physiology. XVII, 2 — XVIII, 1.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Botany, British and Foreign. Nos. 240-251.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Journal of Conchology. Ill, 10— IV, 8. The Editor.

Journal of Physiology. Michael Foster. IV, 1-3, and Supplement.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Journal of Scipnce. 3d Ser., No. 108-119. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Knowledge. Nos. 53-104. The Editor.

Linnean Society, Journal, Botany, Nos. 122-129 ; Zoology, Nos. 95-100.

Transactions, 2d ser. Zoology, II, 6-8 ; Botany, II, 2-5.

Lists, 1881 and 1882.

Proceedings, March, 1883. The Society.

London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosphical Magazine. 1882, No. 90 —
1883, No. 101. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Mineralogical Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Mineralogical
Magazine and Journal, Nos. 23 and 24. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Nature. Nos. 682-733. The Editor.

Notes and Queries. No. 39. The Editor.

Quarterly Journal Microscopical Science, n. s., No. 89 — 5th ser. No. 92.

I. V. Williamson Fund.

Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain and Ireland. Journal, XIV, 4 —

XV, 3. The Society.

Royal Geographical Society. Proceedings, IV, 10 — V, 10. The Society.

Royal Institution of Great Britain. Proceedings, IX, 4 — X, 1, and

Lists. The Society.

Royal Microscopical Society. Journal, 2d ser., II, 6 — III, 5. The Society.

Same, I, 3; II, 1. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Royal Society. Proceedings, Nos. 221-226.

Philosophical Transactions, Vol. 173, Nos. 2-4; Vol. 174, No. 1.
Catalogue of Library, II. The Society.

Scientific Roll, Nos. 10, 11. The Editor.

Society of Arts. Journal, Vol. 30. The Society.

Society for Physical Research. Proceedings, I, 2, 3. The Society.

Triibner's American and Oriental Literary Record, Nos. 177-190.

The Publishers.
Zoological Society. Proceedings, 1881, No. 4 ; 1882, Nos. 3,4; 1883,
Nos. 1 and 2.
Transactions, Vol. X, 2; XI, 7 and 8.

List of Fellows, 1883. The Society.

The Zoologist. Nos. 72-83. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Lon,don. Can. The Canadian Entomologist. XIV, 10— XV, 9. The Editor.

Louisville. Polytechnic Society of Kentucky. Reports and Proceedings,

April 16, 1883. The Society.

Louvain. University Catholique. Annuaire, 47e Annee.

Fourteen Theses. The University.

Lund. University. Acta, XV, XVI.

Accessions-katalog, 1879-1881. The University.

Lyon. Academic des Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts. Memoires, Classe des

Sciences. XXV. Classe des Lettres, XX. The Society.

Society d'Agriculture, Histoire Naturelle et Arts utiles. Annales, 5me

ser. Ill, IV. The Society.

Society Linneenne. Annales, n. s. XXVIII, XXIX. The Society.

364 PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

Madison. Wisconsin Academy of Sciences, Arts and Letters. Transactions,

V The Society.

Madrid. Memorial of Engineers. An. 37, No. 22— An. 38, No. 23.

Melbourne. Royal Society of Victoria. Transactions and Proceedings, II —

XVIII. The Society.

Metz. Academic. M^moires, 1879-80. The Society.

Social 6 d histoire naturelle. Bulletin, 5me Cahier, 2e Partie. The Society.

Mexico. Ministerio de Fomento. Anales, VI. The Ministry.

Museo nacional. Anales, III, 1-4. The Director.

Revista Cientifica Mexicana, Nos. 23-25. The Editor.

Sociedad Mexicana de Historia Natural. La Naturaleza, VI, 4-16.

The Society.
Milan. R. Istituto Lombardo di Scienze e Lettere. Rendiconti. Ser. II, Vols.
13 and 14.
Memorie, XIV, 3.

Programma. 1882. The Society.

Regio Istituto ttchnico superiore. Programma 1869-70, 1872-73, 1876-76,

1882-83, 1883-84. The Institute.

Montreal. The Canadian Naturalist, n. s., IV, 2 ; X, 7 and 8. The Editor.

Numismatic and Antiquarian Society, Canadian Antiquarian. XI, 2.

The Society.

Moscow. Soci^t^ Imp^riale des Naturalistes. Bulletin, 1881, No. 3 — 1883,

No. 1. Tables Generale 1829-1881.

Nouveaux M^moires, XIV, 2. The Society.

Miinchen. Gesellschaft fiir Anthropologic, Ethnologic und Urgeschichte.

Beitrage zur Anthropologic und Urgeschichte Bayerns. V, 1,2.

The Society.
K. B. Akademie der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, 1882, Nos. 2-5 •

The Society.

K. Sternwart. Beobachtungen, 1882. The Director.

Nancy. Soci^t^ des Sciences. Bulletin, ser. 2, III, 13, 14. The Society.

Naples. R. Accademia delle Scienze Fisische e Mathematiche, Atti, VII —

IX.

Rendiconti, Anni XV— XXI. The Society.

L'Esplorazione, I, 1 The Editor,

R. Istituto d' Incoraggiamento alle Scienze Naturali, economiche e techno-

logJche. Atti, 2a Ser., I, III, V— VIII ; 3e Ser., I.

Relazione, 1872, 1873, 1880. The Society.

Neubrandenburg. Verein der Freunde der Naturgesohichte in Mecklenburg.

Archiv, 35er und 36er Jahrg. The Society.

New Haven. The American Journal of Science. 1882, No. 144 — 1883, No.

155. The Editor.

New York. Academy of Sciences. Transactions, I, 5 — II, 2. The Society.

American Bookseller, XIV, 5. The Publisher.

American Geographical Society. Bulletin, 1882, No. 2—1883, No. 2.

The Society.
American Journal of Microscopy, VI, 10-12. The Editor.

American Monthly Microscopical .Journal, IV, 1-2. The Editor.

American Museum of Natural History. 14th Annual report. Bulletin
No. 4. The Director.

Forest and Stream. XIX, No. 18-XXI, No. 17. The Editor.

Journal of the Telegraph, XV, 353, 354. The Editor.

Library Journal, Vll, 11— VIII, 8. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Linnean Society. Transactions, I. ' The Society.

New York Medical Journal, XXXVI, No. 6. Weekly Issue, XXXVII,
1-21. The Editor.

Popular Science Monthly, Jan. — Dec, 1883. The Editor.

Torrey Botanical Club. Bulletin, IX, 12— X, 9. The Society.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA. 365

OfFenbach am Main. Verein fur Naturkunde. 22er und 23er Bericht.

The Society.

Orleans. Soci^td d' Agriculture, Sciences, Belles-Lettres et Arts. Memoires,

2e ser., XXIH, 3, 4. The Society.

Palermo. II Naturalista Siciliano, II, 12— III. 2. The Editor.

Society di Acclimazione ed Agricoltura in Sicilia. Giornale ed Atti XXII,

I— XXII, 8.

Memoria Scientifica premiata per concorso dal Congresso Agrario nel

1875. The Society.

Societfi, di Scienze Naturali et economiche. Giornale, XV. The Society.

Paris. Annales des Mines, Sme ser., I, 4 — III, 2. Table des Matiferes de la

Vile serie. Minister of Public Works.

Annales des Sciences G^ologiques, XIV, 1. The Editor.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles. Zoologie et Pal^ontologie, XIV, I —

XV, 4. Botanique, XIV, 4— XVI, 5. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Archives de Zoologie experimentale et generale, 1882, No. 4—1883, No. 2.

I. V. Williamson Fund.
Ecole polytechnique. Journal, 51e et 52e Cah. The Director.

Institution ethnographique. Annuaire, 1878.

Comptes-Rendu des Stances, 1876-77. • Smithsonian Institution.
Journal de Conchyliologie, XXII, 3— XXIII, 2. The Editor.

Journal de Micrographie, 7me An., Nos. 1, 2, 7-9. The Editor.

Museum d'Histoire Naturelle. Nouvelle Archives, 2e s^r , V, 1.

The Museum.
Le Naturaliste, Nos. 22-45. The Editor.

Revue d'Ethnographie, II, 1-4. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Revue Geographique internationale, Nos. 92-95. The Editor.

Revue Internationale des Sciences, 1882, No. 11—1883, No. 8. The Editor.
Revue Scientifique de la France et de I'Etraiiger, 3e ser., 2e An., No. 21 —
3e An., No. 20. The Editor.

Socidt6 d'Acclimatation. Bulletin, IX, 10— X, 9. The Society.

Society Americaine de France. Annuaire, lt82. The Society.

Soci6t6 des Antiquaires de Picardie. Memoires, VII.

Bulletins, XIV, 1880-82. The Society.

Soci6t6 Botanique de France. Bulletin, Revue Bibl. E. Session Extraor-
dinaire, Fontainbleu. The Society.
Society Eotomologique de France Annales, 6me Ser. I and II.

The Society.
Soci6t6 Ethnographique. Actes 1875, 1877.

Annuaire, 1876. Smithsonian Institution.

Soci^t6 Geologique de France. Bulletin, VIII, 7; X, 3-6 ; XT, 1-3, 5, 6.

The Society,
Soci^t^ Min^ralogique de France. Bulletin, V, 8 — VI, 6. The Society.
Socl6t6 nationale d' Agriculture de France. Bulletin, An., 1882, No. 10 —
1883, No. 7 The Society.

Soci6t6 Scientifique de la Jeunesse. T. II-IV. F. V. Hay den.

Soci6t6 Zoologique. Bulletin, T., Ill; 2e An., 6e Partie; 4e An., 5e and
6e; 5e An., 3e and 4e ; 7e An., 2e, 4e; 5e, 5e bis and 6e ; 8e An., le-3e.

The Society.
Philadelphia. Academy of Natural Sciences. Proceedings, 1882, III — 1883, I.
Amateur Naturalist, I, 5, 6. The Editor.

The American, I, 7. The Editor.

American Journal of Medical Sciences. Jan — '^ct , 1883. The Editor.

American Journal of Pharmacy. Dec, 1882 — Nov., 1883. The Editor.
American Naturalist, XVI, 12— XVII, 11. The Editor.

American Pharmaceutical Association. Proceedings, 30th annual meeting.

The Society.
American Philosophical Society. Proceedings, Nos. 112 and 113.

Transactions, XVI, 1, The Society.

366 PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF [1883.

College of Pharmacy. Alumni Association, 19tli annual report.

The Society,

The Dental Cosmos, XXIV, 12— XXV, 11. The Editor,

Engineers' Club. Proceedings, III, 3, 4; List of Members. The Club.

Franklin Institute. Journal, Nos. 685-696. The Society.

The Gardener's Monthly, Dec, 1882— Nov., 1883. The Editor.

Historical Society of Pennsylvania. Pennsylvania Magazine of History

and Biography, VI, 3— VII, 3. The Society.

Library Company of Philadelphia. Bulletin, July. The Directors.

Literary Era, I, 1-11. The Publishers.

Medicil News and Abstract, No. 468. The Editor.

Medical Register, I, 11 : II, 1. 3-5. the Editor.

Mercantile Library Bulletin, I, 2-4. The Directors.

Naturalists' Leisure Hour, Nov., 1882— July, 1883. The Publisher.

Wagner Free Institute of Science. Announcement, 1883. The Institute.

Zoological Society, 11th annual report. The Society,

Pisa Societil Malacologica Italiana. Bullettino, V-VIII. The Society.

Societa Toscana di Scienze Naturali. Atti, Adunanza del Nov. 2, 1882.

Memorie, V, 2. The Society,

Port of Spain, Scientific Association of Trinidad. Proceedings, Part 12.

The Society.
Poughkeepsie. Vassar Brothers' Institute. Transactions, I. The Institute,
Prag, K. 15. Gesellschaft der Wissenschaften. Sitzungsberichte, 1881.
Jahresbericht, 1881,1882.

Abhandlungen, 6e Folge, XI. The Society,

Princeton. E. M. Museum of Geology and Archaeology of the College of New
Jersey. Bulletin, No. 3.

First annual report, 1882. The Curator,

Quebec. Literary and Historical Society. Sessions of 1882 -83. The Society.
Regensburg. K. B. Botanische Gesellschaft, Flora, n, r,, 40er Jahrg.

The Society.
Zoologisch-mineralogische Verein, Correspondenz-Blatt, 36er Jahrg.

The Society.

Riga. Naturforscher-Verein. Correspondenzblatt, 25er Jahrg. The Society.

Rio de Janeiro, Museo Nacional. Archivos, IV and V. The Director,

Observatorie Imp6riale, Bulletin astronomique et m^teorologique, 1882,

No. 10—1883, No. 7.

Annales, I. The Observatory.

Rochester. Ward's Natural Science Bulletin, II, 1, The Publisher,

Rome, R. Accademia del Lincei. Atti, VII 1-14. The Society,

Societa degli Spettroscopisti Italiani. Memorie XII, 8—11. The Society.

Saint John. Natural History Society of New Brunswick. Bulletin, No. 2.

The Society.
St. Louis. Missouri Historical Society, No. 7. The Society.

St. Petersburg. K. Akademie der Wissenschaften. M^moires XXX, 2-11;
XXXI, 1 and 2.

Bulletin, XXVIII, 1, 3. The Society.

Horti Petropolitani. Acta VIII, 1. The Society.

Physikalische Central Observatorium. Annalen, 1881, No. 2. The Director.

Societas Entomologica. Horse XV, XVI. The Society.

Springfield. Illinois Industrial University, 11th report, 1882. The Trustees.

Staunton. The Virginias, III, 11— IV, 11. The Editor.

Stockholm. Acta Mathemaiica. I, 1 The Editor.

Entomologisk Tidskrift, III, 4. The Editor.

K. Vetenskaps Akademiens. Bihang VII, 1, 2. The Society.

Stuttgart. Humboldt, I, 1 — II, 12. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Kosmos, VI, 8— VII, 6. I. V. Williamson Fund.

Neues Jahrbuch fiir Mineralogie, Geologic und Palteontologie, 1882, II, 3,

Beilage Bd. 2; 1883, I, 1-3, Beilage Bd. 3; II, 1, 2. The Editor.

1883.] NATURAL SCIENCES Or PHILADELPHIA. 367

Switzerland. Naturforscheude Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, 1881-82.

The Society.
Sydney. Linnean Society of New South Wales. Proceedings, VII, 2 — VIII, 2.

The Society.
Royal Society of New South Wales. Journal and Proceedings, XV.

The Society.
Tasmania. Royal Society. Papers, Proceedings and Reports, 1881.

The Society.
Torino. Accademia Reale delle Scienze. Atti, XVIII, 1-3. The Society.

Toronto. Entomological Society. Annual Reports, 1878, 1882.

General Index, 1870-1882. The Society.

Toulouse. Academic des Scieuces, Inscriptions et Belles-Lettres. M^moires
IV, 1, 2,

Annuaire 1882-83. The Society.

Societe d'Histoire Naturelle. Bulletin, lome and 16me Ann^e. The Society.
United States. American Association f^r the Advancement of Science. Pro-
ceedings, XXXI, I, 2. The Society.
Society of Naturalists of the Eastern United States. Constitution and By-
Laws, 1883 The Society.
Upsal. Observatoire de I'Universite. Bulletin Meteorologique, XIV.

The Director.
Urbana. Illinois Industrial University. Catalogue and Circular. The Trustees.
Utrecht. K. Nederlandsch Meteorologisch Instituut. Jaarboek, 1882.

The Institute.

Venice. L'Ateneo Veneto. Ser. VII, Vol. I, 6 ; II, 1, 2. The Society,

R. Istituto Veneto di Scienze, Letlere ed Arti. Atti, Ser. VI, T. 1-10,

Append. VIII, 1-10. The Society.

Vienna. Anthropologischen Gesellschaft. Mittheilungen XII, 3 — XIII, 1.

The Society.
K. Akademie der Wissenschaffen. Sitzungsberichte, 85 Ed., ler Abth ,
I-V; 2e Abth., III-V ; 3e Abth., I-V; 86 Bd., 2e Abth., I; 3e Ablh.,
I, II. Register 81 bis 85 Bd.

Centralblatt fiir die gesammte Therapie, I, 11. The Editor.

K. K. geologische Reichsanstalt. Jahrbuch 1882, No. 4—1883, No. 3.

Verhandlungen, 1882, No. 1';^— 1883, No. 12. The Bureau.

Mineralogische und Petrographische Mittheilungen, Tschermak. n. f., I-

IV, V, 1-4. Jos. Jeanes.

Wiener Illustrirte Garteu-Zeitung, 1882, No. 10—1883, No. 7. The Editor.

K. K. zoologisch-botanische Gesellschaft. Verhandlungen, XXXII.

The Society.

Zoologlsche Institut. Arbeiten, IV, 3; V, 1. The Director.

Washington. Philosophical Society. Bulletin, Vols. 4 and 5 The Society.

United States Fish Commission. Bulletin, Vol. I, and 1882, p. 33— III,

p'. 17. The Commission.

United States National Museum. Proceedings, 1881, p. 449 — VI, p. 14.

Bulletin, Nos. 16 and 24, The Director.

Wellington. New Zealand Institute. Transactions, XV. The Institute.

Westeras. Redogorelse for Hogre Allmanna Laroverket, 1882-83.

The Gymnasium.
Wiesbaden. Nassauische Verein fiir Naturkunde. Jahrbucher, Jahrg. 35

The Society.
Winnepeg. Manitoba Historical and Scientific Society. Annual report,
1882-83.

Publications, Nos. 1-4. The Society.

Worcester. American Antiquarian Society. Proceedings, II, 2, 3. Pa tial

Index to Proceedings. List of Publications, 1883. The Society.

Wiiriburg. Physikalisch-medicinische Gesellschaft. Sitzungsberichte, 1882.

The Society.

INDEX TO GENERA.

1883.

Abies 187, 191, 201, 256

Acarus 45

Accentor 266

Accipiter 66

Acer 74

Achaenodon 77

A()rocephalus 266

Acroloxus 216

Actinosphaerium 125

Addox 269

Aegialites 67

Agathaumas 99

Ageloeus 63

Agonus 2^3

Agosia 141, 153

Aix 68

Akebia 190

Alburnops. 143

Alnus 190

Amblystoma 14, 16, 23, 24, 33

Amphiuma 177, 178

Amiurus 132, 133, 161

AmDicola 171

Ampelis 62

Amphitfeptus 313

Anacharia 107

Anas 67

Anchybopsis 144

Ancylodon 289

Ancylus 140, 214

Andrognathus 28

Anguilla 132, 133

Amelia 32

Anisonchus 56

Anodonta 44, 140

Anorthura 61

Antrostomus... 64

Aphelops 301

Aphododerus 132

Apocope 141, 142, 152, 153

Archibuteo 66

Ardea 67

Argiope 278

Argynnis 36

Arius 281

Artimisia 19

Astacus 165

Astragalinus 62

Atax 45, 46

Attus 276

Aviculopecten 213

Bascanium..ll, 12, 17, 18, 19, 21,

23, 29, 32, 33, 34, 36

Batrachoseps 28

Batrachus 291

Belone 283

Berberis 112

Bernicla 67

Bittium 172

Blarina 82

Boa 34

Bolosaurus 69

Bonasa 66

Bos 266, 268

Botaurus 67

Bothrops 34

Brachycybe 27

Brachyopsis 293

Breviceps 57

Bubo 65

Bufo..l4, 15, 17, 18, 19, 23, 25, 32, 83

Buteo 66

Butorides 67

Callisaurus 35

Camelus 269

Camponotus 303

Canis 83

Caprimulgus 266

(369)

370

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

Caranx • 284

Cardinalis 63

Cariacus 275

Ca.inifex... 137, 140

Carpodacus 62

Cathartes 66

Catostomus 134, 150, 152, 153, 159

Causus 6'

Ctntaurea 192

Centetes 81, 83

Centurus 65

Cerasus 201

Ceri hidea 173

Certhia «0

Cervus 166

Ceryle 65

Chagrura 64

Charina 21, 23

Chasmistes 148, 152

Chelydobatrachus 67

. hilonyx 69, 108

Chiromys 77

(;hloroseombrus 284

Chonetes 213

Chordedilea 64

Chriacus 8U, 83

Clirysochloris 78, 81, 83

CionodoQ 99, 104

Cirsium 193

Clangula 68

Clastes 107

Clepsydrops 1' 8

t liuostomus - 148

Cliola 132, 133, 142, 153

Cneoiidophorus 11, 12, 14, 15,

19, 32, 35

Coccygus 6o

Colaptes 65

Colymbus 68

Condylura 82

Coniophaned 34

Conoryctes 168

Contopus 64

Corvina 288

Corvus 64

Corylus 85

Cottus* ..162, 293

Coturnix 266

Crania 213

Cricetus 266, 268

Cricosaura 29, 30

Cricotus 108

Crotalus 11, 13, 19, 21, 33

Crotaphytus 10, 12, 14, 15, 18,

32, 33, 35

Cryptotopha 130

Ctenodus 109, 110

Cuculus 266

Cyanocitta 64

Cygnus

Cynodontomys

Cynops 23, 25, 28,

Cyrtophyllum

Dafila

Dalea

Deltatherium 81,

Deudroeca

Diabasis

Diadophis 12, 23, 27. 33,

Diapterus

Diastichus 154,

Diclonius 99,

Didy modus

Uidelphys 80, 81,

Diemyctylus

Diodipsas

Diodon

Dioplotherium 52, 53,

Dipus 266,

Dolichonyx

Drymobius

Dysganus

Echinocaciu8 74, 75,

Ectopistes

Ectosteoi-hachis

Elaps

Emberiza

Empedias

Empusa

Enneacanthus

Ephedra

Epinephelus 285,

Equus 166, 266,

Erimyzoii 132,

Erinaceus 81,

Eriogouum

Krismatura

Erythrolampus

Esox 132,

Esthonyx 77, 78,

Eucinostomus

Kumeces 23, 27, 29, 32,

Euteenia 11, 12, 17, 21, 23, 28,

29, 34,
Exocoetus

Fabricia 204,

Falco

Fenestella

Ficimia •.

Fissurella

Forsythia ,

Fringilla

Fulica

Fuligula

67
77
33
44

68

296
83
61

287
34

116

158

104

108
83
25
57

108
54

269
63
34
99

84

66

69

35

266

10'

302

132

276

291

268

133

83

277

68

34

133

83

116

34

35

283

212
66

213

35

249

111

266

67

68

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

3tl

Galeopithecus

Gallinago

Garrulus

Gazella 266, 268,

Genyanemus

Genypterus

Geothlypis

Gerres 116,

Gerrhonotus 23, 27, 28, 29, 32,

Goniobasis

Goniatites

Grammy sia

Gyalopium

Gymnura 81,

Gyrinophilus

Hadrosaurus 99, 103,

Haemulon 286,

Haliaetus

Halicore

Haliotis 234,

Halitherium

Haploaspis

Harelda

Harporhynchus

Helicops

Heliophyllum

Helix

Helminth ophaga

Heloderma 29,

Hemicaranx

Hemicaulodon

Hemisus

Herodias

Hirundo

Holbrookia 10, 12, 18,

Homalonotus

HysBDodon

Hydrachne

Hyliota

Hylotomus

Hypolaif

Hypsibema

Hypsiglena 32, 33,

Hyla 20, 23,

Hystrix 266,

Icterus

Icteps

Isopisthus.

Janassa

Jolinius....

Junco

Juniperus.

Lselaps...
Lagomys.
Lanius....

82

67
266
269
288
293

61
289

33
171
213
213

35

83

24

106

287
66
54

249
52
13
68
60
34

2i3

223
39
35

284
52
57
67
62
33

213
79
45

128
65

266

99

35

25

269

63
81

289

108

288

03

189

100

269

62

Larus 68

Laurocerasus 201

Laurus 201

Lepidophyma 29, 30

Leptagonus 293

Leptictis 81, 83

Leptognathus 34

Leucus 142, 144, 152, 153, 156

Libocedrus 194

Limnseus 217

Limnochares 45

Limoprera 2 3

Liocephalus 34

Lioplax 171

Liri'tdendron 191

Lonchurus 287

Lonicera 256

Lophophanes 60

Lutjanus 285

Lycosa 277

Lymnaea 140

Mabuia 34

Macbasrodus 169

Mahonia 190

Mamillaria 74

Manayunkia 204, 212, 302

Mastodon 166

Megalonyx 166

Melanerpes 65

Melania 171

Meleagris 6b

Meles 266, 268

Melospiza 62

Menopoma 178

Menticirrus 287, 288

Mergus 68

Meriones 266, 268

Mesogonistius 132, 133

Mesonyx 78, 88

Mesoprion 285

Miacis 83

Mimus 60

Miocleenus 78, 80, 83

Minotilta 61

AlolotUrus 63

Monoclonius 99

Morus 302

Moschus 269

^lotacilla 266

Mugil 283

Muraenopsis 177

Mus 266, 268

Muscicapa 128

Myiarchus 6i

Myiodioctes 61

Mylocyprinus 154

Myloleucus 142, 152, 153

Mylopharyngodon 154

372

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OF

[1883.

Myriophyllum 107

Myrophis 282

Mystomys 82

Mythomys 78

Myxus 283

Nautilus 213

Necturus 24

Nimravus 169

Nyctea 65

Ophibolus 14, 29, 34, 35

Ophidium 293

Opisthognathus 290

Opuntia 74, 84

Ornithotarsus , 99

Orthis 213

Orthoceras 213

Ortyx 66

Oryx 269

Ovis 269

Oxyeena , 83

Oxyopes 277

Oxyrrhopus 34

Paludomus 172

Pandion 66

Pautolamda 169

Pantosteus 153

Paracyclas 213

Paralonchurus 287

Parus. 60

Passer 62

Passerella 63

Passerina 63

Patella 234, 249

Pedicellina 204

Pediculus 46

Pelycodus 80

Pelycosauria 69

Peratherium 80

Peryptychus 56, 168

Perca 291

Perdix 266

Petrochelidon 62

Phacops 213

Phanerosaurus 108

Pheidole 304

Philohela 67

Phimothyra 14, 35

Phrynosoma 10, 12, 15, 18, 20,

23, 28, 32, 33, 69

Physa 140

Picus 65

Pinus 114, 194, 200

Pipilo 63

Pityophis 18, 21, 29, 34, 35

Planorbis 140

Platanus 201

Platycodon 191

Platystira 130

Plectrophanes 62

Plethodon , 23, 24, 28

Pliocercua 34

Podicipes 68

Podilymbus 68

Podothecus 293

Pooecetes 62

Pcecilichthys 132, 138

Poepbagus 2b9

Pogonomyrmex 294, 304

Polioptila 60

Polycirrhus 288

Pomadasys 286, 287

Polyoptbalmus 234

Pompholyx 140, 174

Porichthys 291

Portulaca 84

Porzana 67

Prionotus 292

Pristipoma 286

Progne 62

Prorastomus 52

Proteus 24

Psittacotherium 77

Psocus 278

Pucetia 276

Pyranga 61

Pyrgula 171, 173

Pyrus 190

Quercus 37, 201

Querimana 283

Querquedula 68

Quiscalus 64

Raia , 153

Rallus 67

Rana ...10, 16, 20, 25, 28, 33, 56

Raphidiophrys 95

Regulus 60

Rhabdofario 161

Rhadinsea 34

Rhineastes 162

Rhinichthys 153

Rhinochilus 32, 33

Rhizohydra 140

Rhynchocyon 78

Rhytina 54

Ruticilla 266

Saiga , 269

Salmo 138, 141, 152, 153, 161

Salvelinus 141, 152

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OP PHILADELPHIA.

373

Saxicola 266

Sayiornis 64

Scalops 82

Scaphiopus 10, 15, 18, 33

Scelidosaurus 97, 100

Sceloporus 10, 12, 15, 16, 18,

21, 23, 27, 28, 34, 35

Scolecophagus 64

Scops 65

Scorpsena 292

Sebastes ., 291

Sebastodes 291

Sedum 74

Sempervivum 74

Sequoia 193, 202

Serranus 285

Selophaga 61

Sialia 60

Sibon 84

Siphateles 146, 152

Siren 24, 56

Sitta , 60

Siurus 61

Solen 248

Solenodon 78, 82, 83

Spea 14, 15, 32, 33

Spelerpes 24

Sphyropicus 65

Spilotes 35

Spirifer 213

Spizella 63

Sporendonema 302

Squalius 147, 152, 153, 156

Stapelia 49

Stelgidopteryx 62

Stenostoma 11, 33, 34

Streptorhynchus 213

Strix 65

Stromateus 284

Sturnella 63

Stypolophus 83

Tamias 269

Tarantula 131, 196

Taxodium 201

Tegenaria 197

Telmatodytes 61

Thoracodus 108

Ihuja 187, 191

Thujopsis 187

Trachodon 99

Tricula 171

Trimorphodon 35

Tringoides 67

Trochilus 65

roglodytes 61

Tropidonotus 34, 35

Tryonia 171

Turdus 60

Tylosurus 283

Typha 138

Tyrannus 64

Uintatherium 169

Uma 35

Umbra 132

Unio 46, 58

Uranidea 150, 152

Urnatella 204

Urotrichus 82

Uta...lO, 12, 15, 18, 21. 28, 32, 33, 35

Vellitia 216

Verticaria 32, 33

Viburnum 201

Vireo 62

Wistaria 50

Xantusia 29, 30

Xenosaurus 29

Xiphosoma 34

Yucca 190, 191

Yunx 266

Zamelodia 63

Zenaidura 66

Zetodon 169

Zonotrichia 63

374

PROCEEDINGS OP THE ACADEMY OP

[1883.

GENERAL INDEX.

Additions to Library, 344.

Additions to Museum, o39.

Allen, Harrison. The Spinal Chord of
Batrachia aud Reptilia, 56 ; Cuta-
neous Nerves in Mammals, 127.

Barrande, Joachim. Announcement of
death of, 203.

Binder, Jacob. Report of the Curator
of the Wm. S. Vaux Collections, 336.

Biological and Microscopical Section,
report of 327.

Botanical Section, report of, 331.

By-Laws, amendment to, 279.

Conchological Section, report of, 327.

Cope, Alexis T. Announcement of
death of, 196.

Cope, Edw. D. Notes on the Geograph-
ical Distribution of Batrachia and
Reptilia of Western North America,
9, 10; A New Extinct Genus of Si-
renia, 39, 52; The Tritubercular
Type of Superior Molar Tooth, 56 ;
On Dinodipsas and Causus, 57 ; Per-
mian Fishes and Reptiles, 69 ; On
the Mutual Relations of the Buno-
therian Mammalia, 72, 77 ; On the
Structure of the Skull of the Hadro-
sauridae, 95, 97 ; On eome Vertebrate
Forms from the Permian of Illinois,
95, 108; On the Fishes of the Lakes
of the Western Part of the Great
Basin and of the Idaho Pliocene Lake,
• 111, 134; The Fishes of the Batsto
River, N. J., 132; On some Fossils
from the Puerco Formation, 168;
On extinct Rhinoceri from the South-
west, 301.

Corresponding Secretary, report of,
319.

Cresson, H. T. Note on a drilled Mall
in the Haldeman Collection of Anti-
quities, 43 ; Notes on Prehistoric
Copper Implements, 55 ; Aztec Music,
76, 86.

Curators, report of, 322.

Curator of the Wm. S. Vaux Collec-
tions, report of, 336.

Dawson, John C. Announcement of
death of, 190.

Draper, Edmund. Announcement of
death of, 9.

Elections during 1883, 338.

Entomologieal Section, report of, 329.

Evermann, B. W., and Seth E. Meek.
A Revision of the Species of Gerres
found in American Waters, 112, 116.

Fielde, Adele M. Communication on
China, 312.

Foulke, S. G. Observations on Actino-
sphserium eichornii, 125.

Garrett, Andrew. The Terrestrial
Mollusca inhabiting the Society Is-
lands, 39, 44.

Heer, Oswald. Announcement of
death of, 203.

Heilprin, Angelo. The Ice of the Gla-
cial Period, 46, 49 ; Phenomena of
Glaciation, 69 ; The Synchronism of
Geological Formations, 197 ; Election
as Curator and appointment as Cur-
ator-in-charge, 202 ; Note on a Col-
lection of Fossils from the Hamilton
(Devonian) Group of Pike Co., Pa.,
203, 213 ; On the Value of the Nearc-
tic as one of the Primary Zoological
Regions. Replies to Criticisms by
Mr. Alfred Russell Wallace and Prof.
Theodore Gill, 248,266; Report of
Professor of Invertebrate Palaeon-
tology, 334.
Hess, R. J. Report of Biological and
Microscopical Section, 327.

Hoopes, Josiah. Pinus Koraiensis,

111, 114.
Horn, Geo. H. Report of Correspond-
ing Secretary, 319.
Index to Genera, 369.

1883.]

NATURAL SCIENCES OF PHILADELPHIA.

3T5

Jordan, David 3. Notes on American
Fishes, preserved in the Museum at
Berlin, London, Paris and Copen-
hagen, 265, 281.

Koenig, Geo. A. Note on a new Gold-
purple, 75.

Kowalewsky, W. Announcement of
death of, 203.

Le Conte, John L. Announcement of
death of, 265.

Leidy, Jos. Urnatella gracilis, 39, 44 ;
On the Extinct Peccaries of North
America, 39, 44 ; On the Reproduc-
tion and Parasites of Anodopta flu-
viatilis, 44 ; On Pediculus vestimenti,
46 ; A flint nodule from the Green-
sand of New Jersey, 76 ; A Social
Heliozoon, 95 ; Minerological Notes,
202; Manayunkia speciosa, 20>!,
204 ; A Fungus infesting Flies, 302 ;
On Manayunkia, 302 ; Report of
Curators, o22.

Lewis, Graceanna. On the Genus Hy-
liota, 125 128.

Lewis, H. C. On a supposed Human
Implement ""rom the Gravel of Phila-
delphia, 40 ; Change of Color in a
Katydid, 44 ; The Ice of the Glacial
Period, 47; Chalcedony containing
Liquid, 49 ; The Phenomena of Gla-
ciation, 70; Crystallized Serpentine
from Delaware, 72 : Gold from North
Carolina, 301 ; Report of Professor of
Mineralogy, 334.

Librarian, report of, 315.

WcCook, Rev. H. C. Note on the In-
telligence of the American Turret
Spider, 131 : Restoration cf Limbs
in Tarantula, 196; The Occident Ant
of Dakota, 265, 294; Note on two
new California Spiders and their
nests, 276 ; A Web-spinning Neur-
opterous Insect, 278; How a Car-
penter Ant Queen founds a Formi-
cary, 303.

Magarge, Chnrles. Announcement of
death of, 197.

Martindale, Isaac C. Obituary Notice
of Charles P. Parker, 203, 260.

Meehan, Thos. On the Flowering of
the Stapelia, 49; Contraction of
Vegetable Tissue under Frost, 74 ;
Note on Echinocactus, 84; On the
Relations of Heat to the Sexes of
Flowers, 85 ; Observations on For-
eythia. 111 ; Influence of Circum-
stances on Heredity, 112; Some
Evidences of Great Modern Geolog-
ical Changes in Alaska, 187 ; Exu-

dation from Flowers in Relation to
Honey-Dew, 190; Irritability in the
Flowers of Centaureas and Thistles,
1^ 2 ; Notes on the Sequoia gigantea,
193 ; Longevity of Trees, 200 ; Notes
on Glaciers in Alaska, 249 ; Favor-
able Influence of Climate on Vegeta-
tion in Alaska, 255 ; Report of
Botanical Section, 33l.

Mineralogical and Geological Section
of the Academy, Proceedings from
January 23, 1882. to November 26,
1883, 203, 241 ; Report of, 333.

Mitchell, Charles L. Staining with
Hsematoxylon, 265, 297.

Mohr, Charles. On Quercus Durandii
Buckley, 9, 37.

Morris, Chas. Election to Council, 39.

Nolan, Edw. J. Report of Recording
Secretary, 315; Report of Librarian,
3)9.

Officers for 1884, .^37.

Osborn, Henry F. Preliminary Obser-
vations on the Brain of Amphiuma,
170, 177.

Parker, Andrew J. Reproduction in
Amphileptus fasciola, 312, 313.

Parker, Chas. Announcement of death
of, 1^2; Obituary Notice of, 260.

Professor of Invertebrate Palaeontol-
ogy, report of, 334.

Professor of Mineralogy, report of,334.

Rand, Theo. D. Report of the Min-
eralogi«al and Geological Section,
333.

Randolph, N. A. A Study of the Dis-
tribution of Gluten within the Starch
Grain, 301, 308.

Recording Secretary, report of, 315.

Redfield, J. H. Irritability in the
Flowers of Centaureas, 193; Report
of Botanical Section, 331.

Reinhardt, J. T. Announcement of
death of, 9.

Report of Recording Secretary, 315.

Report of Corresponding Secretary,
319.

Report of Librarian, 319.

Report of the Curators, 322.

Report of the Treasurer, 323.

Report of the Biological and Micros-
copical Section, 327.

Report of the Conchological Section,
327.

Report of the Entomological Section,
329.

Report of the Botanical Section, 331.

Report of the Mineralogical and Geo-
logical Section, 333.

3*76

PROCEEDINGS OF THE ACADEMY.

[1883.

Report of the Professor of Invertebrate

Palaeontology, 334.
Report of the Professor of Mineralogy,

334.
Report of the Curator of the Wm. S.

Vaux Collections, 336.
Ridings, James H. Report of Ento-
mological Section, 329.
Roberts, S. R. Report of the Concho-

logical Section, 327.
Seybert, Henry. Announcement of

death of, 71.
Sharp, Benjamin. On the Anatomy of

Ancylus lacustris and Ancylus fluvia-

tilis, 203, 214; On the Visual Organs

of Solen, 248.
Skinner, H. Ovipositing of Argynnis

cybele, 36.
Smith, J. Lawrence. Announcement

of death of, 203.
Stearns, R. E. C. Description of a

New Hydrobiinoid Gasteropod from
the Mountain Lakes of the Sierra
Nevada, with remarks on allied
species and the physiographical
features of said region, 168, 171.

Townsend, Chas. Hybrid Birds, 39;
Notes on the Birds of Westmoreland
Co., Penna., 44, 59.

Trautwine, .John C. Announcement of
death of, 193.

Treasurer, report of, 323.

Wells, W. Lehman. Announcement of
death of, 125.

Willcox, Jos. Canadian Notes, 96 ;
On the Evidences of Glacial Action
in Northern New York and Canada,
203, ^57.

Wister, John. Announcement of death
of, 89.

Wright, Berlin H. A new Unio from
Florida, 44, 68.

PROCEEDINGS

i

A t

.^Ctulemg of |iatural ^ficuces

PHILADELPHIA.

PART I,— JANUARY to MAY, 1883.

' PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redpield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

^-

PHILA.DELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

S. W. (.'or. of 19th and Race Streets.
1883.

&

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eiorhi volumes of the New Series of the Jouhnal (Quarto) have been issued — 1847 to
1881. The price per volume of four parts is $10, or $3 per part, to subscribers; and toothers,
$12.50 per volume, or $-J.76 per part. Vol. VII contains "The Extinct Mammalian Fauna
of Dakota and Nebraska, With a Synopsis of the Mammalian Remains of North America.
Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series op the Journal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48.

The First Series of the Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1856, of which eight volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series op the Proceedings, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dee. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.75 per volume.

The Third Series of the Proceedings, Illostrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which twelve volumes were completed Dec. 31 , 1 882), is published at $5 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers; single volumes, $6.25.

American Journal of Conchology, 1865-71. Seven vols., 8vo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred aud fifty plates, many of them colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices aflBxed:

Description of Shells op North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Say.

1830-34. $10.50.
Monograph of the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By (Jeo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20: colored edition, $13.50; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph of thk Fresh Water (^mvalve Mollusca of the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40; with colored

plates, $25-; with plain plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy of the Species of Strepomatid^e (Melanians) of the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List of American Writers on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2; paper, $1.75.
Complete Whitings on Recent and Fossil Conchology of C. S. Rapinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G W. Tryon, Jr. $2 50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred tine lithographic

plates $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis op Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition.' $3.
Contributions to (jkology. By Isaac Lea. $5.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

NoTicK TO Booksellers. — All the publications of the Society will be sup-
plied to Bookisellers at a discount of iO per cent, on the prices charged to the public.

Application to be made to Edward J. Nolan, M.D., at the Hall of the
Academy, corner of Nineteenth anc^ Kace Streets.

June, 1883.

'W^

CONTKNTS.

Cope, E. D. Notes on the Geographical Distribution of Batrachia and

Reptilia of Western North America, 9, 10

Skinner, H. Ovipositing of Argynnis cybele, 36

MoHR, C^HARLES. On Quercus Durandii Buckley, 37

TowNSEND, Chas. Hybrid Birds, 39

Lewis, H. Carvill. On a Supposed Human Implement from the Gravel

at Philadelphia 40

Cresson, H. T. Note on a drilled Mall in the Haldeman Collection of

Antiquities, ^ ............ 43

Lewis, H. Carvill. Change of Color in a Katydid, . . . .44

Leidy, Jos., M.D. On the Reproduction and Parasites of Anodonta

fluviatilis, . . . . . . • \ • • • • .44

Leidy, Jos., M.D. On Pediculus vestimenti, 46

Heii.prin, Angelo and H. Carvill Lewis. The Ice of the Glacial Period, 46

Lewis, H. Carvill. Chalcedony containing Liquid, .... 49
Meehan, Thos On the Flowering of the Stapelia, . . . . .49

Cope, E. D. On a new extinct Genus of Sirenia, from South Carolina, . 52

Cresson, H. T. Notes on Prehistoiic Copper Implements, ... 55

Cope, E. D. The Tritubercular Type of Superior Molar Tooth, '. . 56

Allen, Harrison, M.D. The Spinal Chord of Batrachia and Reptilia, 56

Cope, E. D. On Dinodipsas and Causus, 57

Wright, Berlin H. A new Unio from Florida ( Plate I), ... 58

Townsend, Chas H. Notes on ihe Birds of Westmoreland County, Penna. 59

Cope, E. D. Permian Fishes and Rei^tiles, ... ... 69

Heii.prin, Angelo and H. Carvill Lewis. Phenomena of Glaciation, 69

Lewis, H. Carvill. Crystallized Serpentine from Delawaie, ... 72

Meehan, Thomas. Com ractiim of Vegetable Tissues under Frost, . 74

Koenig, Geo. A. Note on a new Cold-Purple, 75

Leidy, Jos., M.D. A Flint Nodule from the Greensand of New Jersey, 76

Cope, E. D. On the Mutual Relations of the Bunotherian Mammalia, . 77

Meehan, Thomas. Notes on Echinocacius, 84

Meehan, Thomas On the Relations of Heat to the Sexes of Flowers, . 85

Cresson, H. T. Aztec Music ( Plates II and III), 86

Leidy, Jos., M.D. A Social Heliozoon, 95

WiLLCOx, Jos. Canadian Notes, 96

Cope, E. D. On the Characters of the Skull in Hadrosaurus (Plates I V-VH ), 97

Cope, E. D. On some Vertebrata from the Permian of Illinois, . . 108

Meehan, Thomas. Observations on Forsythia, Ill

Meehan, Thomas. Influence of Circumstances on Heredity, . . .112

UooPES, Josiah. Pinus Koraiensis Sieb. & Zucc. ..... 114

Evkrmann, B. W. and Seth E. Meek. A review of the Species of Gerres

found in American Waters, 116

794 4 786 SANSOM 91

•m

m

PROCEEDINGS

d

^^cdtmg of ^atural^cmtc^s

PHTLADELPHTA.

PART II.— JUNE— OCTOBER, 18S3,

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

.XosEPH Leidt, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redfield.

EDITOR. Edward J. Nolan, M. P.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIEXCES,

S. W. Cor. of 19th and Race Streets.
1883.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eio;ht volumes of the New Series of the Journal (Quarto) have been issued — 1847 to
1881. The price per volume of four |)arts is $10, or $3 per p.irt, to suijscribers ; and to others,
$12.50 per volume, or $j.75 per part. Vol. VII contains "The Extinct Mammalian Fauna
of Dakota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian Remains of North America.
Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The FiKST Series op the Journal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48,

The First Series of tbe Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1856, of which eight volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series op the Proceedings, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $.H
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.75 per volume.

The Third Series of the Proceedings, Illustrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which twelve volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1882), is published at $5 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers; single volumes, $6.25.

American Journal op Conchology, 1865-71. Seven vols., Svo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred aud fifty plates, many of them colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volume,?, $10 each.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices affixed:

Description of Shells of North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thomas Say.

1830-34. $10.60.
Monograph of the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20 ; colored edition, $13.50 ; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph of the Fresh Water Univalve Mollusca of the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40 ; with colored

plates, $25; with plaiu plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy of the Species of Strepomatid^e (Melanians) op the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List of American Writers on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2; paper, $1.75.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil Cbnchology op C. S. Rafinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G. W. Tryon, Jr. $2.50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographic

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis of Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $3.
Contributions to Obology. By Isaac Lea. $5.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

Notice to BooKSELiiERS. — All the publications of the Society will be sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 30 per cent, on the prices charged to the public.

Application to be made to Edward J. Noi,an, M.D., at the Hall of the
Academy, corner of Nineteenth aud Race Streets.

January, 1884.

CONTENTS.

EvERMANN, B. W., and Seth E. Meek. A Review of the Species of Gerres

Found in Amevican Waters (Conclusion), . ... . . .121

FouLKE, S. G. Observations on Actinospbaerium Eicbornii, . . .125
Allen, Harrison, M. D. Cutaneous Nerves in Mammals, . . .127

Lewis, Graceanna. On tbe Genus Hyliota, 128

McCooK, Rev. H. C. Note on tbe Intelligence of tbe American Turret

Spider, ^^^

Cope, E. D. Tbe Fisbes of tbe Batsto River, N. J., .... 132

Cope, E. D. On tbe Fishes of tbe Recent and Pliocene Lakes of tbe

Western Part of the Great Basin and of the Idaho Pliocene Lake, . 134
Cope, E. D. On Some Fossils of tbe Puerco Formation, . . . .168
Stearns, R. E. C. Description of a New Hydrobiinoid Gasteropod from

tbe Mountain Lakes of tbe Sierra Nevada, with Remarks on Allied

Species and the Physiograpbical Features of said Region, . . 171

OsBORN, Henry F. Preliminary Observation upon tbe Brain of Ampbi-

uma (Plate VIII), ^^^

Meehan, Thomas. Some Evidences of Great Modern Geological Changes

in Alaska, ^^"^

Meehan, Thomas. Exudation from Flowers in Relation to Honey-Dew, 190
Meehan, Thomas. Initability in tbe Flowers of Centaureas and Thistles, 192

Meehan, Thomas. Notes on the Sequoia gigautea, 193

McC'ooK, Rev. H. C. Restoration of Limbs in Tarantula, . . .196

Heii.prin, Angelo. The Synchronism of Geological Formations, . .197

Meehan, Thomas. Longevity of Trees, 200

Leidy, Jos., M. D. Mineralogical Notes, 202

Leidy, Jos., M. D. ManayunkiaSpeciosa (Plate IX !, . . . .204
Heilprin, Angelo. Note on a Collection of Fossils from the Hamilton

Group, of Pike Co., Pa., 213

Sharp, Benj., M. D. On tbe Anatomy of Ancylus fluviatilis O. F. Miiller

and Ancyluslacustris Geoflfroy (Plate X), 214

Rand, Theo. D. Notes on tbe Geology of Chester Valley and Vicinity, . 241
Sharp, Benj., M. D. (^n Visual Organs iu Solen 248

»M.O»llt'»MIMTlN'> >

S£ IS* I »8» »»NtOM »'.. '""

'm

PROCEEDINGS

i

PHILADELPHIA.

PART III.—NOVE3IBEB and nECE3IBEB, 1883.

PUBLICATION COMMITTEE.

Joseph Leidy, M. D., Geo. H. Horn, M. D.,

Edw. J. Nolan, M. D., Thomas Meehan,

J. H. Redfield.

EDITOR: Edward J. Nolan, M. D.

PHILADELPHIA:
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES,

S. W. Cor. of 19th and Race Streets.
188 4.

PUBLICATIONS OF THE
ACADEMY OF NATURAL SCIENCES

OF PHILADELPHIA.

Eight volumes of the New Series of the Jouhnal (Quarto) have been issued — 1847 to
1881. The price per volume of four parts is $10, or $3 per part, to subscribers; and toothers,
$12.50 per volume, or $3.75 per part. Vol. VII contains " The Extinct Mammalian Fauna
of Dakota and Nebraska, with a Synopsis of the Mammalian Remains of North America.
Illustrated with thirty plates. By Joseph Leidy, M.D., LL.D.

The First Series op the Journal, 1817 to 1842, in eight volumes, octavo, may be
obtained at $40 to members, and to the public, $48.

The First Series of tbe Proceedings of the Society, published in octavo, 1841 to
1856, of which eight volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1856, may be obtained at $24 to
members; and to the public, $30.

The Second Series op the Proceedings, commencing January 1, 1857 (of which
fourteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1870), may be obtained at $42 to members, or $3
per volume separately; and to the public, $3.75 per volume.

The Third Series of the Proceedings, Illustrated, commencing January 1, 1871,
(of which thirteen volumes were completed Dec. 31, 1883), is published at $5 per annum, payable
in advance, to subscribers; single volumes, $6.25.

American Journal op Conchologv, 1865-71. Seven vols., 8vo. Containing 2500
pages, illustrated by one hundred and fifty plates, many of them colored, besides about a
thousand wood engravings. Published at $70. Price reduced to $42 for the set. Separate
volumes, $10 each.

looses FOX*. S.A.XjSI.

The Academy has the following works for sale at the prices affixed:

Description op Shells of North America, with 68 colored plates. By Thohas Sat.

1830-34. $10.50.
Monograph op the Terrestrial Mollusca op the United States. With illustrations

of all the species. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Fine edition, plate paper, with duplicate

plates, colored and tinted, $20 ; colored edition, $13.50 ; plain edition, $8.50. Only

one hundred copies printed, which have been mostly sold.
Monograph of the Fresh Water Univalve Mollusca of the United States. By S. S.

Haldeman, 1840-44. With Continuation to 1871. By George W. Tryon, Jr. 2

vols., with many colored plates. Fine edition, duplicate plates, $40 ; with colored

plates, $25; with plain plates, $18.

Either the original work or the continuation furnished separately, if desired.
Synonymy of the Species op Strepomatid^ (Melanians) of the United States. By

Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
List op American Writers on Recent Conchology, with the Titles of their Memoirs

and Dates of Publication. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr. Cloth, $2; paper, $1.75.
Monograph of the Order Pholadacea and other Papers. By Geo. W. Tryon, Jr.

Cloth, $2 ; paper, $1.75.
Complete Writings on Recent and Fossil Conchology of C. S. Rafinesque. Edited

by Wm. G. Binney and G. W. Tryon, Jr. $2.50.
Observations on the Genus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. 4to, Vols. 1 to 13. With

Index, Nos. 1, 2 and 3, complete. Illustrated with several hundred fine lithographic

plates. $60.

Same, Vols. 2 to 13 inclusive, except Vols. 4 and 12. Each volume separately, $5.
Synopsis of Gknus Unio. By Isaac Lea, LL. D. Fourth edition. $3.
Contributions to Geology. By Isaac Lea. $5.
Fossil Foot-Marks. By Isaac Lea. Large folio, text and plate. $2.

Same, plate alone. 50 cents.

Notice to Booksellers. — All the publications of the Society will be sup-
plied to Booksellers at a discount of 20 per cent, on the prices charged to the public.

Application to be made to Edward J. Nolan, M. D., at the Hall of the
Academy, corner of Nineteenth and Race Streets.

March, 1884.

CO^NTTENTS.

Sharp, Benj., M. D. On Visual Organs in Solen (continued), .

Meehan, Thomas. Notes on Glaciers in Alaska,

Meehan, Thomas. Favorable Influence of Climate on Vegetation in
Alaska,

WiLi-cox, Joseph. Notes on Glacial Action in Northern New York and
Canada,

Martindale, Isaac C. Obituary Notice of Charles F. Parker,

Heilprin, Angelo. On the Value of the "Neaictic" as one of the Pri-
mary Zoological Regions. Replies to Criticisms by Mr. Alfred Rus-
sel Wallace and Prof. Theodoie Gill,

McCooK, Rev. H. C, D. D. Note on Two New California Spiders and
their Nests,

McCooK, Rev. II. C, D. D. A AVeb-Spinning Neuropterous Insect,

Jordan, David S. Notes on American Fishes preserved in the Museums
at Berlin, London, Paris and Copenhagen, .

McCooK, Rev. H. C, D. D. The Oicident Ant in Dakota,

Mitchell, Chas. L. Staining with Haematoxylon, .

Lewis, H. Carvill, Gold I'rom North Carolina,

Cope, Edw. D. On Extinct Rhinoceri from the Southwest,

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. A Fungus infesting Flies,

Leidy, Joseph, M. D. On Manayunkia, ....

McCook, Rev. H. C, D. D. How a Carpenter Ant founds a Formicary,

Randolph, N. A., M. D. A Study of the Distribution of Gluten within
the Wheat Grain,

Parker, Andrew J. , M. D. Reproduction of Amphileptus fasciola,

Report of the Recording Secretary, ....

Report of the Corresponding Secretary,

Repoi"t of the Librarian, ......

Report of the Curators,

Summary of the Report of the Treasurer,

Report of the Biological and Micro:- copical Section, .

Report of the Conchological Section, ....

Report of the Entomological Section, . . . .

Report of the Botanical Section,

Report of the Mineralogical and Geological Section, .

Report of the Professor of Invertebrate Palaeontology,

Report of the Profes-or of Mineralogy,

Reportof the Curator of the Win. 8. Vaux Collections,

OflBcers for 1884,

Elections during 1883, ....

Additions to the Museum,

Additions to the Library,

Index to Genera,

General Index,

249
249

255

257
260

266

276

278

281
294
297
301
301
302
302
303

308
313
315
319
319
322
323
327
327
329
331
333
334
384
336
337
B'dS
339
344
369
374

1 i. T36 SANSOV

MBL WHOI LIBRARY

u

H Ifl

RH G